WO2022170887A1 - Tissue element measurement method and apparatus, and wearable device - Google Patents

Tissue element measurement method and apparatus, and wearable device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022170887A1
WO2022170887A1 PCT/CN2021/143795 CN2021143795W WO2022170887A1 WO 2022170887 A1 WO2022170887 A1 WO 2022170887A1 CN 2021143795 W CN2021143795 W CN 2021143795W WO 2022170887 A1 WO2022170887 A1 WO 2022170887A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
measurement
photosensitive surface
photosensitive
posture
light intensity
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/143795
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
徐可欣
韩同帅
姚明飞
刘雪玉
Original Assignee
先阳科技有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 先阳科技有限公司 filed Critical 先阳科技有限公司
Priority to US18/264,990 priority Critical patent/US20240225450A9/en
Priority to JP2023548655A priority patent/JP2024513638A/en
Priority to KR1020237030778A priority patent/KR20230147119A/en
Priority to EP21925532.0A priority patent/EP4292532A1/en
Publication of WO2022170887A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022170887A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/145Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue
    • A61B5/1455Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue using optical sensors, e.g. spectral photometrical oximeters
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/0059Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons using light, e.g. diagnosis by transillumination, diascopy, fluorescence
    • A61B5/0062Arrangements for scanning
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/0059Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons using light, e.g. diagnosis by transillumination, diascopy, fluorescence
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/0059Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons using light, e.g. diagnosis by transillumination, diascopy, fluorescence
    • A61B5/0075Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons using light, e.g. diagnosis by transillumination, diascopy, fluorescence by spectroscopy, i.e. measuring spectra, e.g. Raman spectroscopy, infrared absorption spectroscopy
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/145Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue
    • A61B5/14532Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue for measuring glucose, e.g. by tissue impedance measurement
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/145Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue
    • A61B5/14546Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue for measuring analytes not otherwise provided for, e.g. ions, cytochromes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/48Other medical applications
    • A61B5/4869Determining body composition
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/68Arrangements of detecting, measuring or recording means, e.g. sensors, in relation to patient
    • A61B5/6801Arrangements of detecting, measuring or recording means, e.g. sensors, in relation to patient specially adapted to be attached to or worn on the body surface
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/72Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/7203Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes for noise prevention, reduction or removal
    • A61B5/7207Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes for noise prevention, reduction or removal of noise induced by motion artifacts
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/72Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/7235Details of waveform analysis
    • A61B5/7264Classification of physiological signals or data, e.g. using neural networks, statistical classifiers, expert systems or fuzzy systems
    • A61B5/7267Classification of physiological signals or data, e.g. using neural networks, statistical classifiers, expert systems or fuzzy systems involving training the classification device
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/72Signal processing specially adapted for physiological signals or for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/7271Specific aspects of physiological measurement analysis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B2560/00Constructional details of operational features of apparatus; Accessories for medical measuring apparatus
    • A61B2560/04Constructional details of apparatus
    • A61B2560/0462Apparatus with built-in sensors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B2562/00Details of sensors; Constructional details of sensor housings or probes; Accessories for sensors
    • A61B2562/02Details of sensors specially adapted for in-vivo measurements
    • A61B2562/0233Special features of optical sensors or probes classified in A61B5/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B2562/00Details of sensors; Constructional details of sensor housings or probes; Accessories for sensors
    • A61B2562/14Coupling media or elements to improve sensor contact with skin or tissue
    • A61B2562/146Coupling media or elements to improve sensor contact with skin or tissue for optical coupling

Definitions

  • Embodiments of the present disclosure relate to the technical field of spectral measurement, and more particularly, to a tissue composition measurement method, device, and wearable device.
  • the body fluids of the human body contain a variety of tissue components, such as blood sugar, fat, and white blood cells.
  • tissue components such as blood sugar, fat, and white blood cells.
  • the concentration of each tissue component must be within its corresponding concentration range to ensure the healthy operation of the human body.
  • the concentration of tissue components is not within the value range, which will lead to diseases, endanger health and even life. Therefore, for such objects, it is necessary to analyze the tissue components. Take real-time measurements.
  • optical methods mainly include Raman spectroscopy, polarization method, optical coherence tomography, photoacoustic spectroscopy, mid-infrared spectroscopy and near-infrared spectroscopy.
  • the related art has at least the following problem: it is difficult to obtain reliable measurement results by using the related art.
  • embodiments of the present disclosure provide a tissue composition measurement method, device, and wearable device.
  • One aspect of the embodiments of the present disclosure provides a method for measuring tissue components, the method comprising: irradiating a measurement area with incident light of a single preset wavelength, wherein each beam of the incident light exits from at least one exit position after passing through the measurement area At least one beam of outgoing light is formed, and the incident position of the above-mentioned incident light includes at least one; the light intensity values corresponding to each beam of the above-mentioned outgoing light collected by the M photosensitive surfaces are obtained, and T output light intensities are obtained, wherein each of the above-mentioned outputs
  • the light intensity is obtained by processing according to the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by one or more of the above-mentioned photosensitive surfaces.
  • the light intensity value of the outgoing outgoing light is 1 ⁇ T ⁇ M; and, according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined.
  • tissue composition measurement device the device includes: a light source module for irradiating a measurement area with incident light of a single preset wavelength, wherein after each beam of the incident light passes through the measurement area At least one beam of outgoing light is emitted from at least one outgoing position, and the incident position of the incident light includes at least one; a collection module, the collection module includes M photosensitive surfaces, and each of the photosensitive surfaces can collect a corresponding photosensitive surface.
  • the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range is used to obtain the light intensity value corresponding to each beam of the above-mentioned outgoing light collected by the above-mentioned M photosensitive surfaces, and obtain T outputs Light intensity, wherein each of the above-mentioned output light intensity is obtained by processing according to the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by one or more of the above-mentioned photosensitive surfaces, 1 ⁇ T ⁇ M; At least one output light intensity corresponding to the wavelength is set to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component.
  • Another aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a wearable device including the tissue composition measurement device as described above.
  • FIG. 1 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a small area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 2 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a larger area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 3 schematically shows a flow chart of a tissue composition measurement method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 4 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a measurement result obtained by a Monte Carlo simulation method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 5 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 6 schematically shows another schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 7 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on an image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 8 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on another image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 9 schematically shows a schematic diagram of positioning the measurement area implemented by an imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 schematically shows a schematic diagram of implementing positioning of a measurement area based on another imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 11 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 12 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture by an image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Fig. 13 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture based on an imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 14 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a differential measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 16 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a fan ring photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 17 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a circular photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 18 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a square photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 19 schematically shows a schematic diagram of setting a mask plate on an initial photosensitive surface to obtain a photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 20 schematically shows a block diagram of a tissue composition measurement device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 21 schematically shows a block diagram of another tissue composition measurement device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 22 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the positional relationship between a fixing part and a measuring probe according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 23 schematically shows a schematic structural diagram of a fixing part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Fig. 24 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first fitting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 25 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another first fitting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 26 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a region positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 27 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another area positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 28 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first image acquisition part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 29 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first posture positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 30 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another first posture positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 31 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a third image acquisition part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 32 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a measurement posture and measurement area positioning according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 33 schematically shows another schematic diagram of measurement posture and measurement area positioning according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 34 schematically shows a schematic diagram of anode electrical connection of different photosensitive surfaces according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 35 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of a glove according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 36 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of another glove according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 37 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of a wristband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 38 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of another wristband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 39 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a stereoscopic photosensitive surface for arm measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 40 schematically shows a schematic diagram of setting a first sleeve on a measuring probe according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 42 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light without an index matching material being filled according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 43 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light under the condition of filling with an index matching material according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 44 schematically shows another schematic diagram of the photosensitive surface receiving the outgoing light under the condition of filling the index matching material according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Figure 45 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a diffusion measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 46 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a wearable device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 47 schematically shows a schematic diagram of an assembling process of a wearable device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 48 schematically shows a method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, under the condition that the wearable device is consistent with the skin shaking law, the average optical length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe is kept at a preset optical length during the skin shaking process
  • FIG. 49 schematically shows the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe under the condition that the movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area is less than or equal to the movement amplitude threshold value in the case where the wearable device according to the embodiment of the present disclosure is jittered on the skin Schematic diagram of keeping within the preset optical path range during the process;
  • Fig. 50 schematically shows a schematic diagram of synchronously realizing the positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 51 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the variation of the differential signal obtained by measuring a standard reflective plate according to an embodiment of the present disclosure as a function of the measurement duration;
  • Figure 52 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the variation of the differential signal obtained by measuring the extension side of the forearm of the subject under a steady state of blood glucose concentration with the measurement duration according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Figure 53 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the results of a single sugar loading experiment using the OGTT method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Figure 54 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the variation of the differential signal and the true value of blood glucose according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Figure 55 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the results of a double sugar loading experiment using the MTT method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 56 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a relationship between a predicted blood glucose value and a true blood glucose value according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • At least one of the “systems” shall include, but not be limited to, systems with A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B, A and C, B and C, and/or A, B, C, etc. ).
  • the tissue components can include blood sugar, fat and white blood cells.
  • the measured tissue component signal represents the output light intensity change caused by the concentration change of the measured tissue component.
  • the measurement conditions can be understood as conditions affecting the transmission path of light.
  • the measurement conditions may include controllable measurement conditions and uncontrollable measurement conditions.
  • the controllable measurement conditions refer to the measurement conditions that can be controlled to remain within a preset variation range (ie, remain unchanged or substantially unchanged) by using an effective control method during each tissue component measurement process.
  • Uncontrollable measurement conditions are measurement conditions with unpredictable and uncontrollable characteristics. Controllable measurement conditions may include temperature, pressure, measurement area, measurement posture, and the like. Uncontrollable measurement conditions may include physiological background changes and measurement device drift, among others.
  • the inventors found that if only the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area is changed under the condition that other conditions remain unchanged, the obtained measurement results are different. If the measurement results obtained by setting the photosensitive surface close to the blood vessel are compared with the measurement results obtained by setting the same photosensitive surface far away from the blood vessel under the condition that other conditions remain unchanged, the measurement results obtained by setting the photosensitive surface away from the blood vessel are better than those obtained by setting the photosensitive surface away from the blood vessel. Set the resulting measurement. Wherein, the measurement result can be characterized by the relative variation of the light intensity value of the light received by the photosensitive surface and the standard deviation of the light intensity value.
  • the source that causes jitter can be divided into internal sources and external sources.
  • the internal source can include not only the pulse beat, but also the physiological background variation.
  • the external source can also include the uncertainty of the transmission of the incident light itself. The randomness of the light source illumination can be reflected by the intensity distribution of the light spot illuminated by the incident light to the measurement area. It was found that both the jitter caused by internal sources and the jitter caused by external sources will affect the transmission path of light in the tissue, thereby affecting the intensity distribution of the outgoing light on the measurement area.
  • a photosensitive surface with a large area ie, a large-area photosensitive surface
  • the large-area photosensitive surface can effectively suppress the adverse effects caused by jitter.
  • the so-called "large-area photosensitive surface” can be understood as the area of the photosensitive surface that enables the photosensitive surface to collect the outgoing light from the exit position within the preset anti-shake range. light intensity value.
  • the area of the large-area photosensitive surface is continuous, and the large-area photosensitive surface is made of photosensitive materials, which is different from single-point fiber receiving and multiple single-fiber joint receiving. The following will specifically explain why the scheme of collecting the output light intensity of the outgoing light with a large-area photosensitive surface can effectively suppress the adverse effect of jitter on the measurement results.
  • the stability can be characterized by the relative change of the light intensity value of the light received by the photosensitive surface or the standard deviation of the light intensity value. The smaller the relative change of the light intensity value, the higher the stability, and the higher the standard deviation of the light intensity value. Smaller, the higher the stability.
  • FIG. 1 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a small area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 2 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a larger area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the same jitter occurs in Figures 1 and 2.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface A in FIG. 1 is smaller than the area of the photosensitive surface B in FIG. 2 .
  • Both the photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B are square photosensitive surfaces.
  • FIGS. 1 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a small area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 2 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a larger area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the same jitter occurs in Figures 1 and 2.
  • the vascular state 1 represents the vasoconstriction state
  • the vascular state 2 represents the vasodilation state
  • the skin state 1 represents the skin state corresponding to the vascular state 1
  • the skin state 2 represents the skin state corresponding to the vascular state 2 .
  • Skin state 1 to skin state 2 embody jitter.
  • the measurement result is characterized by the relative variation of the light intensity value or the standard deviation of the light intensity value when the photosensitive surface receives the outgoing light within a preset time period.
  • the relative change of the light intensity value can be determined by the following methods: calculating the difference between the maximum light intensity value and the minimum light intensity value within the preset time period, calculating the average value of the outgoing values within the preset time period, and calculating the difference The ratio of the value to the average value, and the ratio is used as the relative change of the light intensity value.
  • the preset time period may be a pulse period.
  • the measurement results also show that no matter whether the relative variation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, or the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, the measurement results obtained by the photosensitive surface B are all the same. Better than measurements obtained with photosensitive surface A.
  • the large-area photosensitive surface can improve the stability of receiving the outgoing light, thereby reducing the adverse effects of changes in the intensity distribution of the outgoing light caused by jitter, thereby improving the measurement accuracy.
  • the output light intensity of the outgoing light is relatively weak, the change in the output light intensity caused by the concentration change of the measured tissue component is also relatively weak, and the method of receiving the outgoing light adopted in the related art has a low efficiency of the outgoing light received. , therefore, the signal-to-noise ratio of the received output light intensity is relatively low, resulting in low reliability of the measurement results.
  • the large-area photosensitive surface of the embodiment of the present disclosure can improve the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity, thereby improving the reliability of the measurement result. This is because the large-area photosensitive surface can receive a wide range of outgoing light and improve the efficiency of receiving outgoing light, thereby improving the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity and improving the reliability of the measurement results.
  • the large-area photosensitive surface described in the embodiments of the present disclosure can achieve higher received and outgoing light when the distance from the surface of the measurement area is small, that is, when it is close to the surface of the measurement area stability and efficiency.
  • the state of the optical fiber is easily affected by the environment, and its change has a great influence on the stability of receiving outgoing light.
  • a large-area photosensitive surface in order to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity, a large-area photosensitive surface can be used.
  • the large-area photosensitive surface usually plays a role in improving the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity, which is different from the main role played by the large-area photosensitive surface in the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the role of the large-area photosensitive surface is to effectively suppress jitter.
  • multivariate analysis method is usually used to process multi-wavelength spectral data, that is, the multivariate analysis method is used to establish the relationship between the optical signal and the true value of the measured tissue component concentration
  • the established mathematical model is used to predict the concentration of the measured tissue component, so that the measured tissue component signal can be obtained indirectly.
  • the measurement of living tissue components can only be achieved by using multivariate analysis methods. This is because tissue components and physical states (such as temperature and pressure, etc.) have characteristic absorption in preset frequency bands. Potential tool for interference correction in measurements.
  • the preset wavelength band may include visible-near infrared wavelength band.
  • the signal changes caused by changes in measurement conditions are usually much larger than those caused by changes in the concentration of the measured tissue components. Therefore, the measurement results obtained by the multivariate analysis method are likely to be different from the measured tissue components. There is an accidental correlation between signal changes caused by external interference (such as physiological background interference), which in turn leads to the result of this indirect extraction of the measured tissue component signal may be a false correlation result.
  • the measurement results obtained by the above methods may be pseudo-correlation results, they cannot directly prove that the obtained measured tissue component signal is the real measured tissue component signal, and therefore, cannot directly prove that the measurement of living tissue component is feasible. Therefore, the reliability of the measurement results is not high.
  • the direct acquisition of the real measured tissue composition signal is a prerequisite for the realization of living tissue composition measurement.
  • the embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a solution of using a single preset wavelength combined with a large-area photosensitive surface to measure the tissue composition of the living body.
  • the volume of the device and the device as small as possible, and the power consumption is as small as possible, which is convenient for practical use.
  • the volume and structural complexity of the light source module can be reduced, thereby reducing the volume and structural complexity of devices and equipment, facilitating portable measurement, and reducing the capacity requirement for the power module, thereby reducing the cost of production.
  • the amount of data processing can also be reduced.
  • FIG. 3 schematically shows a flow chart of a tissue composition measurement method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the method includes operations S310-S330.
  • the measurement area is irradiated with a single preset wavelength of incident light, wherein each incident light passes through the measurement area and is emitted from at least one exit position to form at least one exit light, and the incident light incident position includes at least one.
  • the measurement site since different measurement sites have different skin characteristics, which may include smoothness, presence or absence of hair, flatness, skin thickness and softness, etc., it is necessary to select the measurement according to the actual situation, such as the structure of the measurement probe.
  • suitable measurement site The measurement site may include at least one of fingers, palms, arms, foreheads, and earlobes.
  • the measurement area may be an area on the measurement site.
  • the single preset wavelength may be a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue composition.
  • the band to which a single preset wavelength belongs may include an ultraviolet band, a visible light band, a near-infrared band, a mid-infrared band, or a far-infrared band.
  • the single preset wavelength can be a wavelength sensitive to blood sugar, and specifically can be 1550 nm or 1609 nm.
  • Incident light can be collimated or non-collimated.
  • the incident position of the incident light may be one or more.
  • each output light intensity is an outgoing light collected according to one or more photosensitive surfaces
  • Each photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range corresponding to the photosensitive surface, 1 ⁇ T ⁇ M.
  • each photosensitive surface in order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, it is necessary to try to ensure that each photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range corresponding to the photosensitive surface , which requires the area of the photosensitive surface to be as large as possible.
  • Each photosensitive surface has a corresponding preset anti-shake range, and the preset anti-shake ranges of different photosensitive surfaces are the same or different. In the following, it will be explained from three aspects that the larger the area of the photosensitive surface, the better the effect of suppressing jitter. It is preset that the area of the photosensitive surface A is smaller than the area of the photosensitive surface B. Both the photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B are square photosensitive surfaces.
  • the photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B are respectively set at the same position on the measurement area, which is a position close to the blood vessel. Under other conditions being the same, compare the measurement results obtained with the photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B, wherein the measurement results use the relative change or the light intensity value of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface during one pulsation period. standard deviation representation. The calculation method of the relative change of the light intensity value is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the relative variation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface B is smaller than the relative change of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface A, and the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface B is smaller than that received by the photosensitive surface A.
  • the standard deviation of the light intensity values of the incident light From this, it can be concluded that whether the measurement result is characterized by the relative change of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface, or the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, the measurement obtained by the photosensitive surface B is used to characterize the measurement result. The results are all better than those obtained with the photosensitive surface A.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface B is larger than the area of the photosensitive surface A, it can be said that the larger the area of the photosensitive surface, the more effective it is to suppress the pulse beat. The better the dithering effect.
  • the jitter caused by the change in the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated to the measurement area by the incident light is suppressed. Under the condition that other conditions remain unchanged, only the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area is changed. Compare the measurement results obtained by using the photosensitive surface A and using the photosensitive surface B, wherein the measurement results are characterized by the relative variation of the light intensity value or the standard deviation of the light intensity value received by the photosensitive surface during a preset time period. The calculation method of the relative change of the light intensity value is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the variation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface B is smaller than the variation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface A, and the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface B is smaller than that of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface A. Standard deviation of light intensity values. From this, it can be concluded that whether the relative change of the light intensity value of the light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, or the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, and the measurement obtained by the photosensitive surface B is used. The results are all better than the measurement results obtained with the photosensitive surface A.
  • the measurement results obtained by using the photosensitive surface B are better than those obtained by using the photosensitive surface A, and the area of the photosensitive surface B is larger than the area of the photosensitive surface A, it can be said that the larger the area of the photosensitive surface, the inhibition of the incident light irradiation to the The better the effect of jitter caused by changes in the intensity distribution of the light spot in the measurement area.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a measurement result obtained by a Monte Carlo simulation method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the standard deviation of the number of emitted photons per unit area corresponding to the photosensitive surface B is smaller than the standard deviation of the number of emitted photons per unit area corresponding to the photosensitive surface A. That is, the measurement results obtained using the photosensitive surface B are better than the measurement results obtained using the photosensitive surface A.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface B is larger than that of the photosensitive surface A, it can be explained that the larger the area of the photosensitive surface is, the greater the area of the photosensitive surface can be The better the effect of jitter caused by the uncertainty of the transmission.
  • each photosensitive surface may be set as a ring-shaped photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, wherein the non-annular photosensitive surface may include a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, an elliptical photosensitive surface, or a Polygonal photosensitive surface.
  • the polygonal photosensitive surface may include a square photosensitive surface, a rectangular photosensitive surface, or a triangular photosensitive surface.
  • each of the M photosensitive surfaces can be used alone, partially combined, or all combined, and the combined use means outputting one output light intensity.
  • a photosensitive surface for outputting one output light intensity is referred to as a similar photosensitive surface, and a similar photosensitive surface may include one or more photosensitive surfaces.
  • the condition for the combined use of different photosensitive surfaces may be that the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface is within the range of the average optical length.
  • the average optical path range may be a range consisting of greater than or equal to the first average optical path threshold and less than or equal to the second average optical path threshold.
  • the first average optical path threshold and the second average optical path threshold may be determined according to the optical path average value and the optical path variation amplitude.
  • the average optical path length is an average value calculated from the average optical path lengths of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface. Exemplarily, if the average optical path length is a, and the optical path variation range is ⁇ 30%, the first average optical path threshold may be 0.7a, and the second average optical path threshold may be 1.3a.
  • the average optical path length will be described below.
  • the transmission path of light in the tissue can be represented by the optical path and the penetration depth, where the optical path is used to represent the total distance of light transmission in the tissue, and the penetration depth is used to represent the maximum longitudinal distance that the light can reach in the tissue .
  • the average optical path length is used to represent the average of the optical path lengths of light in the tissue.
  • the probability distribution function of the optical path can be understood as a function of the source-detection distance and tissue optical parameters, wherein the source-detection distance represents the radial distance between the center of the incident light and the center of the photosensitive surface.
  • the average optical path can be understood as a function of the source-probe distance and tissue optical parameters, wherein the tissue optical parameters can include absorption coefficient, scattering coefficient and anisotropy factor. Factors affecting the average optical path may include absorption coefficient, scattering coefficient, anisotropy factor, and source-detection distance.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface may be an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is an annular photosensitive surface, which may be included in the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent annular photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes multiple photosensitive surfaces, the same type of photosensitive surface is a ring-shaped photosensitive surface formed by combining the multiple photosensitive surfaces.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface, which may be included in the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent non-annular photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes a plurality of photosensitive surfaces
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface formed according to the combination of the multiple photosensitive surfaces.
  • the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the interference suppression method may be used to process the at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component.
  • the interference suppression method may include a differential measurement method.
  • the differential measurement method may include a time differential measurement method or a position differential measurement method.
  • at least one output light intensity can also be processed using a non-differential measurement method to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component.
  • Each output light intensity may include diffusely scattered light intensity or diffusely transmitted light intensity.
  • the photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the corresponding preset anti-disturbance range.
  • the ratio of the area of stably receiving the outgoing light to the area of the photosensitive surface therefore, improves the stability of receiving outgoing light, thereby reducing the adverse effects of changes in the intensity distribution of the outgoing light caused by jitter, thereby improving the accuracy of the measurement results. reliability.
  • a single preset wavelength is used in combination with the photosensitive surface with the above characteristics to measure the tissue composition, and the real measured tissue composition signal is directly obtained.
  • Using a single preset wavelength for tissue composition measurement reduces the volume and structural complexity of the light source module, thereby reducing the volume and structural complexity of devices and equipment, facilitating portable measurement, reducing the capacity requirements for power modules, and reducing cost of production. In addition, the amount of data processing is also reduced.
  • the ratio of the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface in the target tissue layer to the total optical length is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, where the total optical length is the transmission of the outgoing light in the measurement area. total distance.
  • the tissue model of the measured object is usually a layered structure, that is, it can be divided into one or more layers. Different tissue layers carry different information on the measured tissue components. In order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, it is necessary to make the transmission path of the outgoing light mainly pass through the tissue layers with rich information on the measured tissue components.
  • the target tissue layer can be understood as the tissue layer that carries the information of the measured tissue components, or the tissue layer that is the main source of the measured tissue components. The following description will be given by taking the measured object as the human body and the measured tissue component as blood glucose as an example.
  • the human skin tissue model can be understood as a three-layer model, from outside to inside are the epidermis, dermis and subcutaneous fat layer.
  • the epidermis contains a small amount of tissue fluid and does not contain plasma and lymph.
  • the dermis contains a large amount of tissue fluid, and because of the abundant capillaries, it also contains a large amount of plasma and a small amount of lymph.
  • the subcutaneous fat layer contains a small amount of cellular fluid, and because of the existence of blood vessels such as veins and arteries, it contains a large amount of plasma and a small amount of lymph fluid. It can be seen that the information of the measured tissue components carried by different tissue layers is different.
  • the epidermis contains a small amount of tissue fluid, the epidermis is not a suitable source of blood glucose information.
  • the subcutaneous fat layer contains a large amount of plasma and a relatively small amount of interstitial fluid, it is also not a suitable source of blood glucose information due to the limited depth of penetration of incident light.
  • the dermis layer contains abundant capillaries and a large amount of tissue fluid, and incident light can easily reach the dermis layer, the dermis layer can be the main source of blood glucose information.
  • the target tissue layer may be the dermis layer.
  • the average optical path length of the outgoing light in each tissue layer can be determined according to the optical path length and the penetration depth.
  • the total optical path may be the total distance traveled by the outgoing light in the measurement area, that is, the total distance traveled by the incident light from entering the measurement area, traveling in the measurement area until reaching the outgoing position.
  • the proportional threshold is related to the source-detection distance between the center of the photosensitive surface and the center of the incident light and the tissue optical parameters.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure limit the ratio of the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface in the target tissue layer to the total optical path length, the area of the photosensitive surface in the embodiments of the present disclosure cannot exceed Large, which is a large area within an area range.
  • the total area of the same type of photosensitive surface is determined according to the tissue structure features in the measurement area, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the same type of photosensitive surface is used to output one output light intensity.
  • the total area of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type may be determined according to the tissue structure characteristics in the measurement area.
  • the organizational structure feature can be understood as the structural feature possessed by the measurement area.
  • the total area of the same photosensitive surface is limited by the area where the three blood vessels intersect, that is, the same photosensitive surface. The total area needs to be determined based on the area of the area where the three vessels intersect.
  • the measurement area is the area where the finger is located. If the same photosensitive surface is set in the area where the finger is located, the total area of the same photosensitive surface is limited by the area where the finger is located, that is, the total area of the same photosensitive surface needs to be based on the area where the finger is located. area is determined.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface in the embodiment of the present disclosure can be determined according to the characteristics of the tissue structure, and generally the area determined according to the characteristics of the tissue structure cannot be too large, therefore, the area of the photosensitive surface in the embodiment of the present disclosure cannot be too large, It is a large area within an area.
  • the ratio of the area of each photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface can be The reason is that the ratio to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is as large as possible.
  • the photosensitive surface is divided into two parts, ie, an edge part and a non-edge part (or inner part).
  • the jitter mainly affects the outgoing light collected by the edge part, and the non-edge part is less affected, that is, the non-edge part can collect the outgoing light relatively stably.
  • the intensity distribution of the outgoing light in the measurement area will change slightly, the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the edge portion will change with the intensity distribution of the outgoing light.
  • the ratio of the area corresponding to the non-edge portion to the area of the photosensitive surface can be made as large as possible, and the larger the ratio, the better the effect of weakening the adverse effect.
  • the edge portion can be represented by the perimeter of the photosensitive surface, and the non-edge portion can be represented by the area of the photosensitive surface. Thereby, the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface can be made as large as possible.
  • the photosensitive surface 1 is a circular photosensitive surface, and the photosensitive surface 2 is a square photosensitive surface, in the case of the same perimeter, since the area of the photosensitive surface 1 is larger than the area of the photosensitive surface 2, the area of the photosensitive surface 1 is The ratio to the perimeter is greater than the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface 2 to the perimeter. Therefore, the photosensitive surface 1 has a better effect of reducing adverse effects than the photosensitive surface 2 has.
  • the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, the condition that the area of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the area threshold is satisfied.
  • the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, the size of the photosensitive surface is actually limited. This is because for most shapes of graphics, the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the graphic has a positive correlation with the size of the area, that is, the larger the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the graphic, the larger the area of the graphic.
  • the area of the circle is ⁇ R 2
  • the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the circle is R/2, where R represents the radius. Since the ratio of the area to the circumference of a circle is only related to the radius, and the size of the area of the circle is only related to the radius, therefore, the ratio of the area to the circumference of a circle has a positive correlation with the size of the area.
  • the ratio of the area of the circle to the perimeter also defines the size of the area of the circle.
  • Another example is a square, the area of the square is a 2 , the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the square is a/4, and a represents the length of the side.
  • the ratio of the area to the perimeter of a square is only related to the length of the side, and the size of the area of the square is only related to the length of the side, therefore, the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the square has a positive correlation with the size of the area, if the square is defined
  • the ratio of the area to the perimeter also defines the size of the area of the square.
  • the ratio threshold is greater than or equal to 0.04 mm.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface of the present disclosure is a relatively large area, that is, the area of the photosensitive surface is a large area within an area range. This case will be described below.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface cannot be too small. Since the large-area photosensitive surface in the embodiment of the present disclosure refers to the area of the photosensitive surface such that the photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range, the large-area photosensitive surface of the embodiment of the present disclosure is The large area of the area photosensitive surface is a large area used to achieve anti-shake. At the same time, because the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface can be used to characterize the area of the photosensitive surface, the photosensitive surface can capture the preset anti-shake surface.
  • the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter has a positive correlation with the area of the photosensitive surface. Therefore, if the area of the photosensitive surface is If the ratio of the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, the area of the photosensitive surface is actually limited, that is, the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold. The area cannot be too small.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface should not be too large.
  • the embodiment of the present disclosure requires that the ratio of the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface to the total optical path in the target tissue layer is greater than or equal to the proportional threshold, and/or the area of the photosensitive surface is determined according to the characteristics of the tissue structure. The above description of the photosensitive surface area should not be too large.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface of the embodiment of the present disclosure is a relatively large area, that is, a large area within an area range.
  • the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is not large due to the large perimeter of the photosensitive surface.
  • the ratio of the perimeters of the surfaces is smaller than the ratio threshold. Therefore, it may be difficult for an absolutely large-area photosensitive surface to meet the requirements of anti-shake.
  • the area of the photosensitive surface is too small and the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is large, so that the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is less than the ratio threshold. Therefore, the area of the photosensitive surface is too small. jitter requirements.
  • the photosensitive surface is in contact or non-contact with the surface of the measurement area.
  • the form of tissue composition measurement may include contact measurement and non-contact measurement.
  • the contact measurement can prevent the interference light from being received by the photosensitive surface, thereby improving the reliability of the measurement results.
  • Non-contact measurement can avoid the influence of interfering factors such as temperature and pressure on the measurement results, thereby improving the reliability of the measurement results.
  • the form of tissue composition measurement can be considered as contact measurement. If the photosensitive surface is set to be non-contact with the surface of the measurement area, the form of tissue composition measurement can be considered as non-contact measurement.
  • the distance of the photosensitive surface from the surface of the measurement area is less than or equal to the first distance threshold and the efficiency of the photosensitive surface receiving the outgoing light is greater than or equal to the efficiency threshold.
  • the photosensitive surface is made of photosensitive material, the area of the photosensitive surface is continuous, therefore, the reception of a wide range of light intensity values can be realized, and the efficiency of receiving outgoing light can be improved. Based on this, even in the case of being close to the surface of the measurement area, that is, when the distance between the photosensitive surface and the surface of the measurement area is less than or equal to the first distance threshold, the efficiency of receiving outgoing light greater than or equal to the efficiency threshold can be achieved.
  • the method before irradiating the measurement area with the incident light of a single preset wavelength, the method may further include the following operations.
  • Identify work features From the positioning features, a measurement area is determined, wherein the measurement area is an area that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions.
  • the measurement probe is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area, wherein the measurement probe includes M photosensitive surfaces.
  • changes in the measurement conditions may overwhelm the weak measured tissue component signals, making it difficult to obtain the real measured tissue component signals, and have a greater impact on the measurement results .
  • the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions may refer to maintaining the controllable measurement conditions within a preset variation range during each tissue composition measurement, so that the controllable measurement conditions remain unchanged or substantially unchanged.
  • the use of an effective control method to control the controllable measurement conditions can reduce the influence of changes in the controllable measurement conditions on the measurement results to a negligible level, thereby avoiding complex mathematical algorithms for processing , thereby improving the reliability of the measurement results, in addition to reducing the difficulty of data processing and reducing the amount of data processing.
  • the measurement posture reproducibility and the measurement area reproducibility are mainly aimed at.
  • the measurement posture refers to the posture of the limb supporting the measurement site. And in the related art, no relevant content for measuring posture is found.
  • the positioning deviation of the measurement area is caused by the non-uniformity of tissue distribution and the difference in the flat state of the skin surface.
  • the transmission path of light in the tissue will be changed. It can be seen that in order to achieve the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions, it is necessary to ensure the reproducibility of the measurement area as much as possible.
  • the skin state may include the shape of the skin surface and the internal structure of the skin. It can be seen that it is necessary to achieve the reproducibility of the measurement posture.
  • the purpose of the measurement posture positioning is to make the measurement posture when the tissue component measurement is performed as the target measurement posture, that is, when the tissue component measurement is performed, if the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture, then the current measurement posture needs to be adjusted to the target measurement posture,
  • the target measurement posture is a measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions.
  • the reproducibility of the measurement pose was not found to be an important factor affecting the reliability of the measurement results.
  • the most important reason for affecting the reproducibility of controllable measurement conditions is the reproducibility of the measurement area.
  • the improvement direction revolves around how to improve the positioning accuracy of the measurement area, and it is not found that in terms of controllable measurement conditions, measurement posture reproducibility is also an important factor affecting the reliability of measurement results.
  • the positioning feature may include a posture positioning feature and an area positioning feature, the posture positioning feature is used for positioning the measurement posture, and the area positioning feature is used for positioning the measurement area.
  • the posture positioning feature can be set on the measured object or the non-measured object, the regional positioning feature can be set on the measured object or the non-measured object, and the non-measured object can include a measuring probe or other devices.
  • the positioning features may include artificially set positioning features or inherent features on the measured object, wherein the inherent features may include palm prints, fingerprints, birthmarks, moles or scabs and the like.
  • the positioning feature is set manually, since the positioning feature set manually usually fades gradually over time, it needs to be set again, which may introduce new errors and affects the positioning accuracy.
  • the inherent feature has better stability, and it is not easy to generate setting errors.
  • the positioning features on the measured object are used as the positioning features.
  • the internal structure of the skin will be affected by the change of the measurement posture, which will also cause the positioning deviation of the measurement area.
  • the position on the object is not arbitrary, and needs to be determined according to the measurement site and the bone-muscle relationship between the measurement site and the surrounding site.
  • the measurement site is the extensor side of the forearm, and its peripheral site includes the wrist.
  • positioning features can be set on the forearm extension side and the back of the hand respectively. It should be noted that, if there is no inherent feature that can be used as the positioning feature, the positioning feature can be set manually.
  • the positioning feature may be a dot-shaped mark point or a graphic mark point, and the graphic mark point may include a cross mark point.
  • the current measurement posture of the measured object is adjusted to a target measurement posture, wherein the target measurement posture is a measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement condition.
  • the measurement area is determined according to the area positioning feature.
  • the premise of realizing the positioning of the measurement area is to realize the positioning of the measurement posture, and in the subsequent measurement process after the positioning of the measurement area is completed, usually the measurement area does not need to be positioned again. , there may also be situations where measurement pose positioning is required.
  • the condition for completing the positioning of the measurement posture is that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture, and the target measurement posture is the measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions.
  • the reason why the above-mentioned situation that measurement posture positioning is required is that, in the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to bring a better user experience to the measured object, a non-measurement method can be used.
  • the measurement position is allowed to move within a certain range, and the measurement posture is positioned during measurement.
  • the measurement posture is positioned during measurement.
  • it is necessary to ensure that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture. Therefore, if the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture, it is necessary to Adjust the measurement posture to ensure that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the positioning can be divided into the positioning of the first measurement posture, the positioning of the measurement area, and the positioning of the second measurement posture.
  • the positioning of the first measurement posture can be understood as the measurement posture positioning of the measurement area in cooperation.
  • the re-measurement posture positioning can be understood as the measurement posture positioning performed when the measurement probe is set after the position corresponding to the measurement area and the measurement posture is not the target measurement posture.
  • the area location feature is used to perform measurement area location.
  • the posture localization feature adopted for the first measurement of posture localization is referred to as the first posture localization feature.
  • the posture location feature used to measure the posture location again is referred to as the second posture location feature.
  • Both the first posture positioning feature and the second posture positioning feature are used to perform measurement posture positioning, and the area positioning feature, the first posture positioning feature and the second posture positioning feature may all be the same, partially the same or all different.
  • the number of area location features, first gesture location features, and second gesture location features may include one or more.
  • the current measurement posture of the measured object can be adjusted according to the first posture positioning feature so that the first posture positioning feature matches the preset feature, and the first posture positioning feature matches the preset feature.
  • feature matching it can be determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the measurement area is determined according to the area positioning feature.
  • determining the measurement area according to the regional positioning feature may be understood as determining the area corresponding to the regional positioning feature as the measurement area, which includes determining the area where the regional positioning feature is located as the measurement area. Or another area having an associated relationship with the area positioning feature is determined as the measurement area.
  • the positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture are realized synchronously.
  • disposing the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area may include the following operations.
  • the measuring probe is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the fixing part, wherein the fixing part and the measuring probe are integrated, partially separated or completely separated.
  • the fixing part is used to fix the measuring probe, and the fixing part and the measuring probe may be integrated, partially or completely independent, that is, the fixing part may be used as a component of the measuring probe, and may be mutually connected with the measuring probe.
  • the two independent parts can also be part of the measuring probe, and the other part and the measuring probe are independent parts.
  • the fixing part may include a fixing seat and a first fitting, or the fixing part may comprise a second fitting.
  • the first matching piece is used for setting the fixing base at a position corresponding to the measurement area
  • the fixing base is used for setting the measuring probe.
  • the second fitting is used to set the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area.
  • the fixing part includes a fixing base and a first fitting, the fixing base and the measuring probe are separate, and the first fitting and the fixing base are integrated or separate. If the fixing part includes the second fitting, the second fitting and the measuring probe are integral or separate.
  • the fixing part includes a fixing seat and a first fitting part.
  • Setting the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the fixing portion may include the following operations.
  • the fixing base is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area through the first matching piece. Set the measuring probe to the holder.
  • the measurement probe is not directly disposed at the position corresponding to the measurement area, but is disposed at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the fixing seat.
  • the measurement probe In the process of tissue composition measurement, if the measurement probe is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the fixing seat, since the fixing seat can be set in the measurement area for a long time without departing from the measurement area, the measurement probe can be set during measurement. It is attached to the fixed seat, and it is separated from the fixed seat during non-measurement.
  • the fixing base since the fixing base is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area, when the measuring probe is separated from the fixing base and then installed on the fixing base, a good positioning accuracy can still be maintained, and the positioning difficulty of the measuring probe is reduced.
  • the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the first preset condition during the process of setting the fixing seat at the position corresponding to the measurement area by the first fitting.
  • the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the second preset condition during the process of disposing the measurement probe on the fixing seat.
  • the first fitting During the process of fixing the fixing base, it is ensured that the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the first preset condition.
  • the first preset condition may refer to the change of the skin state of the skin at the corresponding position during the process of fixing the fixing seat by the first fitting member within the first preset range. Changes in skin condition can include skin deformation.
  • the first preset range may include the first preset deformation range.
  • the fixing seat can be fixed During the process of measuring the probe, it is ensured that the skin state of the skin in the measurement area satisfies the second preset condition.
  • the second preset condition may refer to the change of the skin state of the skin at the corresponding position during the process of fixing the measurement probe on the fixing base within the second preset range. Changes in skin condition can include skin deformation.
  • the second preset range may include a second preset deformation range.
  • the measurement probe does not move in the holder.
  • the problem of affecting the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions also occurs due to the weak fixing.
  • it can be ensured as far as possible that the measurement probe does not move in the fixed seat during the tissue composition measurement process.
  • the fixing part includes a second fitting.
  • Setting the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the fixing portion may include the following operations.
  • the measurement probe is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
  • a direct The method of disposing the measuring probe at the position corresponding to the measuring area does not require a fixing seat, but requires the cooperation of the second fitting.
  • the above-mentioned need of no fixing seat may include the following two understandings.
  • the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the third preset condition during the process of setting the measurement probe at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
  • the second fitting can be made During the process of fixing the measurement probe, it is ensured that the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the third preset condition.
  • the third preset condition may refer to the change of the skin state of the skin at the corresponding position during the process of fixing the measurement probe by the second fitting member within the third preset range. Changes in skin condition can include skin deformation.
  • the third preset range may include a third preset deformation range.
  • determining the measurement area according to the area positioning feature may include the following operations.
  • the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing portion is adjusted until the regional positioning feature matches the first projected feature.
  • the region corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing portion is determined as the measurement region.
  • an optical method in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of the positioning of the measurement area, an optical method can be used, that is, the area positioning feature is matched with the first projection feature, and the measurement area is determined according to the matching result, wherein the first The projection feature is formed according to an optical method, that is, a light spot of a preset shape is projected by the light source, and the shape of the light spot can be determined according to the regional positioning feature.
  • the light spot with the preset shape is a cross light spot.
  • the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing base can be adjusted so that the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature.
  • the region positioning feature matches the first projection feature it can be indicated that the region where the measurement probe and/or the fixing base are currently located is the measurement region.
  • the structure for projecting the first projection feature may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the holder, or other objects.
  • the other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured.
  • the area locating feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the mount, the object to be measured, and other objects.
  • the area positioning feature can be arranged on at least one of the object to be measured, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects.
  • the positioning of the measurement region can be achieved by the following methods, that is, according to the regional positioning feature and the first projection feature, the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixed seat is adjusted. , until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature.
  • the matching of the regional positioning feature and the first projection feature here means that the regional positioning feature is blocked by the measuring probe and/or the fixed seat, so that the first projection feature cannot be projected to the region.
  • the location of the work feature If the region positioning feature does not match the first gesture positioning feature, there is at least one first projection feature that can be projected to the location where the region positioning feature is located.
  • the regional positioning feature cannot be set on the measuring probe, but can be set on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects. It should be noted that, if the area positioning feature is set on the fixed seat, and the positioning of the measuring probe is realized by setting the measuring probe at the position corresponding to the measuring area through the fixing part provided with the fixed seat, then in order to be able to realize the positioning of the measuring probe. The positioning of the measurement area can be achieved by adjusting the position of the fixed seat. Before the matching of the regional positioning feature and the first projection feature is achieved, the position of the measuring probe is fixed.
  • the position of the fixing seat is adjusted until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature.
  • the area corresponding to the fixed seat is determined as the measurement area, so that the measurement probe can be set on the fixed seat.
  • the regional positioning feature cannot be set on the fixed base, but can be set on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects.
  • the area positioning feature is provided on the measurement probe, and the measurement probe is positioned by setting the measurement probe at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the fixing part provided with the fixing seat, then in order to be able to realize the positioning of the measurement probe.
  • the positioning of the measurement area can be achieved by adjusting the position of the fixed seat.
  • the position of the measuring probe is fixed.
  • the position of the fixing seat is adjusted until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature.
  • the area corresponding to the fixed seat is determined as the measurement area, so that the measurement probe can be set on the fixed seat.
  • the area positioning feature can be set on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects. It should be noted that, if the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object or other objects, the structure used to project the first projection feature can be set on the measured object, and the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object or other objects. The positioning of the measurement area is implemented in a similar manner, which will not be repeated here.
  • the structure for projecting the first projection feature can be set on the object to be measured, a measuring probe, a fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is set on the object to be measured or other objects, the positioning of the measurement area can be achieved by the following methods, that is, according to the area positioning feature and the first projection feature, adjust the measurement probe and / or the position of the fixed seat, until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature, and the matching of the regional positioning feature with the first projected feature here means that the regional positioning feature is blocked by the measuring probe and/or the fixed seat, so that the first The projected feature cannot be projected to the location where the area work feature is located. If the region positioning feature does not match the first gesture positioning feature, there is at least one first projection feature that can be projected to the location where the region positioning feature is located.
  • the structure for projecting the first projection feature is separate from the measuring probe, and can be set on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is disposed on the fixed seat, the description in the corresponding part above can be referred to, and details are not repeated here.
  • the structure for projecting the first projection feature is separate from the fixing base, and can be set on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is disposed on the measurement probe, reference may be made to the description in the corresponding part above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the structure for projecting the first projection feature can be set on the object to be measured, the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is provided on the object to be measured or other objects, reference may be made to the description in the corresponding part above, and details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 5 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the area locating feature in Figure 5 is provided on the measuring probe.
  • FIG. 6 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another implementation of positioning the measurement area based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object.
  • the positioning of the measurement area is realized by the optical method.
  • the position and angle of the light source can be flexibly adjusted, it can be easily matched with the regional positioning feature. Therefore, the regional positioning feature can be set flexibly, thereby reducing the setting of the regional positioning feature. difficulty.
  • the matching with the regional positioning features can be better achieved, and the positioning accuracy can be improved.
  • determining the measurement area according to the area positioning feature may include the following operations.
  • a first template image is acquired, wherein the first template image includes regional positioning features. If it is determined that the first target image does not match the first template image, adjust the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing part to acquire a new first target image until the new first target image matches the first template image . When it is determined that the first target image matches the first template image, an area corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing portion is determined as a measurement area.
  • an image matching method can be used, that is, the first target image is matched with the first template image, and the measurement area is determined according to the matching result.
  • the first template image may include a region positioning feature, and the position of the region positioning feature in the first template image is a preset position.
  • the first target image may be a target image that does not include regional positioning features, or may include regional positioning features but the position of the regional positioning features in the first target image is not
  • the target image at the preset position may also be a target image including a region positioning feature and the position of the region positioning feature in the first target image is a preset position. Since the first template image includes the region positioning feature at the preset position, if the first target image matches the first template image, it can be said that the first target image includes the region positioning feature and the region positioning feature is in the first target image is the default position.
  • the purpose of matching the first target image with the first template image is to make the acquired first target image include regional positioning features and the positions of the regional positioning features in the first target image are preset positions.
  • the structure for acquiring the first target image may be disposed on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat, or other objects.
  • the other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured.
  • the area locating feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the mount, the object to be measured, and other objects.
  • the area positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the object to be measured, the measuring probe, the holder and other objects. If the structure for capturing the first target image is provided on the mount, the area positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the mount, and other objects.
  • FIG. 7 schematically shows a schematic diagram of positioning a measurement area based on an image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the area locating feature in Figure 7 is provided on the measuring probe.
  • FIG. 8 schematically shows a schematic diagram of implementing positioning of a measurement area based on another image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object.
  • determining the measurement area according to the area positioning feature may include the following operations.
  • a second target image is acquired, wherein the second target image includes regional localization features.
  • the position of the positioning feature in the middle area is the first preset position.
  • the area corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing part is determined as the measurement area.
  • an imaging method can be used to achieve, that is, if the position of the area positioning feature in the second target image is the first preset position, it can be indicated that the completion of location of the measurement area.
  • the process of using the imaging method to realize the measurement area positioning is the process of determining whether the position of the area positioning feature in the second target image is the first preset position. If the area positioning feature is in the second target image is not the first preset position, the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing seat can be adjusted to obtain a new second target image, until the position of the regional positioning feature in the new second target image is the first preset position set location. In the case where the position of the area positioning feature in the new second target image is the first preset position, it can be stated that the area where the measurement probe and/or the fixing base are currently located is the measurement area.
  • the structure for acquiring the second target image may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat or other objects.
  • the other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured.
  • the area locating feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the mount, the object to be measured, and other objects.
  • FIG. 9 schematically shows a schematic diagram of positioning the measurement area implemented by an imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the area locating feature in Figure 9 is provided on the measurement probe.
  • FIG. 10 schematically shows a schematic diagram of implementing positioning of a measurement area based on another imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object. The movement of the measuring probe and the fixing base in FIG. 10 changes the relative positions of the two and the regional positioning feature, so that the position of the regional positioning feature presented in the image is located at the first preset position.
  • adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to the target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
  • the current measurement posture is adjusted until the first posture locating feature and the second projection feature match.
  • the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • an optical method can be used to achieve, that is, the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature are matched, and the target measurement posture is determined according to the matching result, wherein , the second projection feature is formed according to an optical method, that is, the second projection feature is formed by projecting a light spot of a preset shape by the light source, and the shape of the light spot can be determined according to the first posture positioning feature. That is, for the measured object, a second projection feature matching the first posture positioning feature is set according to the first posture positioning feature, so that the current measurement posture matching the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature is the target measurement posture.
  • the structure for projecting the second projection feature may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the mount, or other objects.
  • the other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured.
  • the first posture locating feature may be provided on at least one of the measuring probe, the holder, the measured object and other objects. The adjustment process based on the optical method will be described below from two angles of the setting position of the structure for projecting the second projection feature and the setting position of the first posture positioning feature.
  • the first posture positioning feature can be arranged on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects. It should be noted that, if the first posture positioning feature is provided on the measurement probe, in order to realize the positioning of the measurement posture, the position of the measurement probe needs to be fixed during the first measurement posture positioning stage. Similarly, if the first posture positioning feature is provided on the fixed seat, in order to realize the positioning of the measurement posture, it is necessary to make the position of the fixed seat be fixed during the first measurement posture positioning stage.
  • the first posture positioning feature cannot be arranged on the measuring probe, but can be arranged on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects. It should be noted that the position of the measurement probe needs to be fixed in the first measurement posture positioning stage. In addition, if the first posture positioning feature is set on the fixed seat, the positioning of the first measurement posture can be realized by the following method, that is, according to the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature, the current measurement posture of the measured object is adjusted until the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature are adjusted. The posture positioning feature matches the second projection feature.
  • the matching of the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature here means that the first posture positioning feature is blocked by the measured object, so that the second projection feature cannot be projected to the first posture.
  • the location of the work feature If the first gesture location feature does not match the second gesture location feature, then there is at least one second projection feature that can be projected to the location where the first gesture location feature is located. If the first posture positioning feature is set on other objects, the positioning of the measurement posture can be implemented in a manner similar to that when the first posture positioning feature is set on the fixed seat, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first posture positioning feature cannot be installed on the fixed seat, but can be installed on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects. It should be noted that, it is necessary to make the position of the fixed seat be fixed in the first measurement posture positioning stage.
  • the first posture positioning feature is provided on the measuring probe or other object, it can be used in a similar manner as the structure for projecting the second projection feature is provided on the measuring probe, and the first posture positioning feature is provided on the holder or other object The positioning of the measurement posture is realized, which is not repeated here.
  • the first posture positioning feature can be set on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects. It should be noted that, if the first posture positioning feature is set on the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects, the same structure as the structure used to project the second projection feature can be set on the measuring probe, and the first posture positioning feature is set on the fixed position. The positioning of the measurement posture can be achieved in a similar manner to a seat or other objects, which will not be repeated here.
  • the structure for projecting the second projection feature can be set on the measured object, a measuring probe, a fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is provided on the measurement probe, it is required that the position of the measurement probe is fixed in the first measurement posture positioning stage. Similarly, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is arranged on the fixed seat, it is necessary to make the position of the fixed seat be fixed during the first measurement of the posture positioning stage.
  • the structure for projecting the second projection feature is separate from the measuring probe, and can be set on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is disposed on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects, the description in the corresponding part above can be referred to, and details are not repeated here.
  • the structure for projecting the second projection feature is separate from the fixed base, and can be set on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is provided on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects, reference may be made to the description of the corresponding part above, and details are not repeated here.
  • the structure for projecting the second projection feature can be set on the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is provided on the object to be measured, the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects, the description of the corresponding part above can be referred to, and details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 11 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the first posture positioning feature is set on the measured object.
  • the positioning of the measurement posture is realized by an optical method.
  • the position and angle of the light source can be flexibly adjusted, it can be easily matched with the first posture positioning feature. Therefore, the first posture positioning feature can be flexibly set, thereby reducing the The difficulty of a pose localization feature setting.
  • the shape of the outgoing light spot by adjusting the shape of the outgoing light spot, the matching with the first posture positioning feature can be better achieved, and the positioning accuracy can be ensured.
  • adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to the target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
  • a third target image is acquired.
  • a second template image is acquired, wherein the second template image includes the first gesture location feature.
  • the current measurement posture is adjusted to obtain a new third target image until the new third target image matches the second template image.
  • the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • an image matching method can be used, that is, the third target image is matched with the second template image, and the target measurement posture is determined according to the matching result.
  • the second template image may include a first posture locating feature and the position of the first posture locating feature in the second template image is a preset position.
  • the third target image may be a target image that does not include the first posture positioning feature, or may include the first posture positioning feature but the first posture positioning feature is in the third
  • the position of the target image is not the target image at the preset position, and may also be a target image including the first posture positioning feature and the position of the first posture positioning feature in the third target image is the preset position. Since the second template image includes the first posture localization feature at the preset position, if the third target image matches the second template image, it can be explained that the third target image includes the first posture localization feature and the first posture localization feature
  • the position in the third target image is a preset position.
  • the purpose of matching the third target image with the second template image is to make the acquired third target image include the first posture positioning feature and the position of the first posture positioning feature in the third target image is predetermined set location.
  • the structure for acquiring the third target image may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat or other objects.
  • the other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured.
  • the first posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the fixed seat, the object to be measured, and other objects.
  • the first posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixing seat and other objects. If the structure for capturing the third target image is provided on the fixture, the first posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixture, and other objects.
  • FIG. 12 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the positioning of the measurement posture implemented by an image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the first posture positioning feature is set on the measured object.
  • the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to the target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
  • a fourth target image is acquired, wherein the fourth target image includes the first gesture positioning feature.
  • adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new fourth target image until the first posture is positioned in the new fourth target image
  • the location of the feature is at the second preset location.
  • the current measurement posture is determined as the target measurement posture.
  • an imaging method can be used, that is, if the position of the first posture positioning feature in the fourth target image is the second preset position, it can be It indicates that the positioning of the measurement pose is completed.
  • the process of using the imaging method to measure the posture positioning is the process of determining whether the position of the first posture positioning feature in the fourth target image is the second preset position.
  • the position in the four target images is not the second preset position, then the current measurement posture can be adjusted to obtain a new fourth target image, until the position of the first posture positioning feature in the new fourth target image is the second preset position set location.
  • the position of the first posture positioning feature in the new fourth target image is the second preset position, it can be explained that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the structure for acquiring the fourth target image may be disposed on the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed seat or other objects.
  • the other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured.
  • the first posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the fixed seat, the object to be measured, and other objects.
  • FIG. 13 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture based on an imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the first posture positioning feature is set on the object to be measured.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • the second posture positioning feature is determined. According to the second posture positioning feature, the current measurement posture is adjusted to the target measurement posture.
  • the re-measurement posture positioning described above needs to be performed. That is, after completing the positioning of the measurement area, if the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture, it is necessary to perform the above-mentioned re-measurement posture positioning.
  • the current measurement posture may be adjusted according to the second posture positioning feature until the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the second gesture location feature may be the same as or different from the first gesture location feature.
  • adjusting the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
  • the current measurement posture is adjusted until the second posture locating feature matches the third projection feature.
  • the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • an optical method can be adopted, that is, the second posture positioning feature is matched with the third projection feature, and the target measurement posture is determined according to the matching result, wherein , the third projection feature is formed according to an optical method, that is, a light spot with a preset shape is projected by the light source to form the third projection feature, and the shape of the light spot can be determined according to the second posture positioning feature. That is, for the measured object, set the matching third projection feature according to the second posture positioning feature, so that the current measurement posture that the second posture positioning feature matches with the third projection feature is the target measurement posture.
  • the structure for projecting the third projection feature may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the mount, or other objects.
  • the other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured.
  • the second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measuring probe, the fixing base, the object to be measured, and other objects. The adjustment process based on the optical method will be described below from two angles of the setting position of the structure for projecting the third projection feature and the setting position of the second posture positioning feature.
  • the second posture positioning feature can be arranged on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects.
  • the second posture positioning feature cannot be set on the measuring probe and the holder, but can be set on the measured object or other objects, because the After being set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the probe head is set on the fixed seat.
  • the second posture positioning feature cannot be set on the measuring probe and the fixed base, but can be set on the measured object or other objects. It is also caused by the fact that after the measuring probe is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the probe probe is set on the fixed seat.
  • the second posture positioning feature can be set on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects. It should be noted that, if the second posture positioning feature is set on other objects, the positioning of the measurement posture can be realized by the following method, that is, when it is determined that the second posture positioning feature does not match the third projection feature, the current measurement posture is adjusted. , until the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature, and when it is determined that the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature, the current measurement posture is determined as the target measurement posture.
  • the matching between the second posture positioning feature and the third projection feature mentioned here means that the second posture positioning feature is blocked by the measured object, so that the third projection feature cannot be projected to the position where the second posture positioning feature is located. If the matching of the positioning feature and the third projection feature does not match, there is at least one third projection feature that can be projected to the position where the second posture positioning feature is located.
  • the structure for projecting the third projection feature can be arranged on the object to be measured, a measuring probe, a fixed seat or other objects.
  • the structure for projecting the third projection feature is separate from the measuring probe and the fixed seat, and can be set on the object to be measured or other objects. After the probe is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the probe probe is set on the fixed seat.
  • the structure for projecting the third projection feature is separate from the measurement probe and the fixed seat, and can be arranged on the measured object or other objects. It is also caused by the fact that after the measuring probe is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the probe probe is set on the fixed seat.
  • the structure for projecting the third projection feature can be set on the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the third projection feature is set on another object, please refer to the description of the corresponding part above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the positioning of the measurement posture is realized by an optical method.
  • the position and angle of the light source can be flexibly adjusted, it can be easily matched with the second posture positioning feature. Therefore, the second posture positioning feature can be flexibly set, thereby reducing the The difficulty of setting the feature of the second pose location.
  • the matching with the second posture positioning feature can be better achieved, and the positioning accuracy can be improved.
  • adjusting the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
  • a fifth target image is acquired.
  • a third template image is acquired, wherein the third template image includes the second gesture location feature.
  • the current measurement posture is adjusted to acquire a new fifth target image until the new fifth target image matches the third template image.
  • the current measurement posture is determined to be the target measurement posture.
  • an image matching method can be used, that is, the fifth target image is matched with the third template image, and the target measurement posture is determined according to the matching result.
  • the third template image may include the second posture positioning feature and the position of the second posture positioning feature in the third template image is a preset position.
  • the fifth target image may be a target image that does not include the second posture positioning feature, or may include the second posture positioning feature but the second posture positioning feature is in the fifth target image.
  • the position of the target image is not the target image at the preset position, and may also be a target image including the second posture positioning feature and the position of the second posture positioning feature is the preset position at the position of the fifth target image. Since the third template image includes the second gesture positioning feature located at the preset position, if the fifth target image matches the third template image, it can be explained that the fifth target image includes the second gesture positioning feature and the second gesture positioning feature The position in the fifth target image is a preset position. In other words, the purpose of matching the fifth target image with the third template image is to make the acquired fifth target image include the second posture positioning feature and the position of the second posture positioning feature in the fifth target image is a predetermined set location.
  • the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the structure for acquiring the fifth target image may be disposed on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat or other objects.
  • the other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured.
  • the second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measuring probe, the fixing base, the object to be measured, and other objects.
  • the second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed seat and other objects. If the structure for capturing the fifth target image is provided on the fixed seat, the second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed seat and other objects.
  • adjusting the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
  • a sixth target image is acquired, wherein the sixth target image includes the second gesture positioning feature. If it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is not at the third preset position, adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new sixth target image until the second posture is positioned in the new sixth target image The location of the feature is at the third preset location. When it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is at the third preset position, the current measurement posture is determined as the target measurement posture.
  • an imaging method can be used, that is, if the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is the third preset position, it can be It indicates that the positioning of the measurement pose is completed.
  • the second process of using the imaging method to measure the posture positioning is the process of determining whether the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is the third preset position.
  • the position in the sixth target image is not the third preset position, then the current measurement posture can be adjusted to obtain a new sixth target image, until the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is the third Preset position.
  • the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is the third preset position, it can be explained that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the structure for acquiring the sixth target image may be disposed on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat, or other objects.
  • the other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured.
  • the second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measuring probe, the fixing base, the object to be measured, and other objects.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • Prompt information is generated, wherein the prompt information is used to prompt that the measurement posture positioning and/or the measurement area positioning is completed, and the form of the prompt information includes at least one of image, voice or vibration.
  • prompt information may be generated after the positioning of the measurement posture and/or the positioning of the measurement area is completed.
  • the specific expression form of the prompt information may include at least one of image, voice and vibration.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • the measurement probe is installed on the fixing seat.
  • the fixing seat is arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting, and the measuring probe is arranged on the fixing seat.
  • the fixing seat can be separated from the measurement area, and the measurement probe can be separated from the fixing seat. If the fixing base is not set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the fixing base can be set at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting, and the measuring probe can be set at the fixing base. If the fixing base is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area and the measuring probe is not set on the fixing base, the measuring probe can be set at the fixing base.
  • the fixing base can be arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area, the measuring probe can be separated from the fixing base, and the measuring probe can be arranged on the fixing base when measurement is required.
  • the fixing seat can be separated from the measurement area, and the measuring probe can be separated from the fixing seat.
  • the fixing seat is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting, and the measuring probe is set on the fixing seat.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • the measurement probe When it is determined that the measurement probe is not arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the measurement probe is arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
  • the measurement probe if the measurement probe is directly set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the measurement probe can be separated from the measurement area during the tissue composition measurement process, and the measurement probe can be set through the second fitting when measurement is required. at the position corresponding to the measurement area.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity are determined from at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength.
  • the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the average optical length of the outgoing light corresponding to the first output light intensity is different from the average optical length of the outgoing light corresponding to the second output light intensity.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • Differential processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal. According to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined.
  • an interference suppression method can be adopted, wherein the interference suppression method can include a differential measurement method.
  • the differential measurement method may include a time differential measurement method and a position differential measurement method. The reason why the differential measurement method can reduce the influence of uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results is that if the interference information carried by the output light intensities under different average optical paths is basically the same, that is, the output light intensities under different average optical paths are disturbed.
  • the influences are basically the same, since the effective information carried by the output light intensities under different average optical paths is different, therefore, the output light intensities under the two average optical paths (that is, the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity ) to perform differential processing to obtain a differential signal, and determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal.
  • the interference information can be understood as the response of the output light intensity to the interference.
  • Effective information can be understood as the response of the output light intensity to the measured tissue composition.
  • the differential processing in the differential processing of the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include a processing method in hardware and a processing method in software.
  • the processing manner in terms of hardware may include processing by using a differential circuit.
  • the processing method in software may include using a difference algorithm to perform a difference operation.
  • Differentiation algorithms may include direct differencing operations and logarithmic differencing operations. Among them, the direct difference operation refers to the difference processing of two parameters directly.
  • the logarithmic difference operation refers to first performing the logarithmic operation on two parameters to obtain the logarithmic parameters, and then performing the difference processing of the two logarithmic parameters.
  • the common mode interference information can be effectively attenuated by the differential measurement method, thereby improving the reliability of the measurement result.
  • performing differential processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
  • a differential circuit is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
  • a differential circuit can be used to implement differential processing of the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity, so as to directly obtain a differential signal.
  • performing differential processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
  • a differential algorithm is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
  • using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
  • a direct differential operation is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
  • using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
  • Logarithmic processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity. Perform a direct differential operation on the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
  • the first logarithmic light intensity represents the logarithm of the first output light intensity
  • the second logarithmic light intensity represents the logarithm of the second output light intensity
  • the differential signal can be determined by the following formula (1).
  • a D represents the differential signal, represents the first output light intensity, Indicates the second output light intensity. represents the average optical path corresponding to the first output light intensity, represents the average optical path length corresponding to the second output light intensity.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength is input into the first tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
  • the first tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated based on training of a chemometric model, wherein the chemometric model may include a regression model.
  • the regression model may include a linear regression model, and the linear regression model may include a univariate linear regression model.
  • a first training sample set is obtained, wherein the first training sample set includes a plurality of first training samples, wherein each first training sample includes a first true concentration of a measured tissue component and a A differential signal corresponding to a true concentration.
  • a first tissue component concentration prediction model is established.
  • the first tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a first training sample set, where the first training sample set includes a plurality of first training samples, and the first training samples include The first real concentration and the differential signal corresponding to the first real concentration, using the differential signal corresponding to the first real concentration as an input variable, and using the first real concentration as an output variable, train the mathematical model to be trained, and obtain the first tissue component Concentration prediction model.
  • establishing the first tissue component concentration prediction model according to the first training sample set may include the following operations.
  • the first training sample set is preprocessed to obtain the processed first training sample set. According to the processed first training sample set, a first tissue component concentration prediction model is established.
  • the first training sample set may be preprocessed to determine abnormal training samples in the first training sample set, so as to establish a model based on the first training sample set after deleting the abnormal training samples A first tissue component concentration prediction model.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • the first tissue component concentration prediction model is modified to process the new differential signal using the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • the first tissue component concentration prediction model is revised to obtain a revised first tissue component concentration prediction model.
  • the fourth preset condition may include that the time interval between the current tissue component measurement and the establishment of the first tissue component concentration prediction model is less than or equal to the time threshold and/or the state of the measured object has not changed significantly, the measured object
  • the state may include the physical state of the subject and/or the skin state of the subject, such as skin burns.
  • the inapplicability of the first tissue component concentration prediction model caused by the changes in the tissue composition of the measured object and the state of the measurement device can be determined by analyzing the first tissue component.
  • the component concentration prediction model was revised to solve.
  • a new difference signal may be obtained, input the new difference signal into the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model, and output a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • modifying the first tissue component concentration prediction model may include the following operations.
  • the first tissue component concentration prediction model is corrected based on the difference signal corresponding to the first target concentration and the first target concentration.
  • the first tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by training based on a univariate linear regression model. Since the two input parameters of the univariate linear regression model include the slope and the intercept, the model training process is to determine the slope and intercept. If the fourth preset condition is satisfied, it is found according to the research that the slope of the first tissue concentration prediction model remains unchanged but the intercept changes. In this case, the intercept needs to be re-determined. The target concentration and the differential signal corresponding to the first target concentration are used to modify the first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new intercept, and further obtain the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • the new differential signal is processed by using the new first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • the fifth preset condition may include that the time interval between the current tissue component measurement and the establishment of the first tissue component concentration prediction model is greater than the time threshold and/or the state of the measured object changes greatly, and the state of the measured object may Including the physical condition of the subject and/or the skin condition of the subject, such as skin burns.
  • the reason for adopting the above method is that, usually in a long period of time or the state of the measured object changes greatly, the tissue composition of the measured object and the state of the measuring device change greatly, so that the original first tissue component concentration The prediction model is no longer applicable, and cannot be applied by modifying the original first tissue component concentration prediction model, and a new first tissue component concentration prediction model needs to be re-established.
  • a new first tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a new first training sample set, wherein the new first training sample set includes a plurality of new first training samples, wherein, each new first training sample includes a new first true concentration of the measured tissue component and a differential signal corresponding to the new first true concentration, and a new first training sample set is established according to the new first training sample set Tissue component concentration prediction models.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • the plurality of current interference parameter values and the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength are input into the second tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
  • the process of measuring the concentration of tissue components is also affected by interference parameters, wherein the interference parameters may include temperature and pressure, etc. Therefore, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, an interference-based parameter may be established. Parameter of the second tissue component concentration prediction model.
  • the second tissue component concentration prediction model to process multiple current interference parameter values and differential signals corresponding to preset wavelengths to obtain the measured tissue component concentration, which may include inputting multiple current interference parameter values into the second tissue component concentration prediction model , output a differential interference signal, use the differential interference signal to correct the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength, obtain a correction signal corresponding to the preset wavelength, and determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the correction signal corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the reliability of the measurement result is further improved.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • a second training sample set Acquiring a second training sample set, wherein the second training sample set includes a plurality of second training samples, wherein each second training sample includes a second true concentration of the measured tissue component and a differential signal corresponding to the second true concentration .
  • Obtain a third training sample set wherein the third training sample set includes a plurality of third training samples, wherein each third training sample includes a training interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters and a The differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter value.
  • a prediction model for the concentration of tissue components to be corrected is established.
  • a correction parameter model is established.
  • a second tissue component concentration prediction model is obtained.
  • the correction parameter model is a mathematical model between the interference parameter and the differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter.
  • the tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected is a mathematical model between the tissue component concentration and the differential signal corresponding to the tissue component concentration.
  • Obtaining and establishing the second tissue component concentration prediction model according to the tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected and the correction parameter model may include obtaining a differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter according to the correction parameter model, and using the differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter to pair the tissue component concentration with the tissue component concentration.
  • the corresponding differential signal is corrected, and a second tissue component concentration prediction model is established according to the tissue component concentration and the corrected differential signal.
  • the tissue component concentration is the second real concentration
  • the differential signal corresponding to the tissue component concentration is the differential signal corresponding to the second real concentration.
  • both the second training sample set and the third training sample set may be preprocessed to determine abnormal training samples in the second training sample set and abnormal training samples in the third training sample set
  • the training samples are used to establish a prediction model for the concentration of tissue components to be corrected according to the second training sample set after the abnormal training samples are deleted.
  • a correction parameter model is established according to the third training sample set after removing abnormal samples.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • the second tissue component concentration prediction model is revised, so as to use the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model to process the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values to obtain Concentrations of new tested tissue components.
  • the second tissue component concentration prediction model is revised to obtain a revised second tissue component concentration prediction model.
  • the fourth preset condition may include that the time interval between the current tissue component measurement and the establishment of the second tissue component concentration model is less than or equal to the time threshold and/or the state of the measured object has not changed significantly, the measured object’s state
  • the state may include the physical state of the subject and/or the skin state of the subject, such as skin burns.
  • the inapplicability of the second tissue component concentration prediction model caused by the change of the tissue composition of the measured object and the state change of the measuring device can be determined by applying the second Tissue component concentration prediction model revisions to address.
  • a new differential signal and new multiple current interference parameter values can be obtained, and the new differential signal and new multiple current interference parameter values can be input into the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model.
  • the tissue component concentration prediction model outputs the new measured tissue component concentration.
  • modifying the second tissue component concentration prediction model may include the following operations.
  • a differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration is acquired.
  • the second tissue component concentration prediction model is modified according to the second target concentration, the plurality of interference parameter values, and the differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration.
  • the second tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by training based on a univariate linear regression model. Since the two input parameters of the univariate linear regression model include the slope and the intercept, the model training process is to determine the slope and intercept. If the first preset condition is met, it is found according to the research that the slope of the second tissue concentration prediction model remains unchanged but the intercept changes. In this case, the intercept needs to be re-determined.
  • the target concentration, the differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration, and the multiple interference parameter values are used to modify the second tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new intercept, and further obtain the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model.
  • the method may further include the following operations.
  • the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values are processed by using the new second tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • the fifth preset condition may include that the time interval between the current tissue component measurement and the establishment of the second tissue component concentration model is greater than the time threshold and/or the state of the measured object has changed greatly, and the state of the measured object may include The physical condition of the subject and/or the skin condition of the subject, such as skin burns.
  • the reason for adopting the above method is that usually in a long time or the state of the measured object changes greatly, the tissue composition of the measured object and the state of the measuring device change greatly, so that the original concentration of the second tissue component
  • the prediction model is no longer applicable, and cannot be adapted by modifying the original second tissue component concentration prediction model, and a new second tissue component concentration prediction model needs to be re-established.
  • a new second tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a new second training sample set, wherein the new second training sample set includes a plurality of new second training samples, Wherein, each new second training sample includes a new second true concentration of the measured tissue component and a differential signal corresponding to the new true concentration.
  • Obtain a new third training sample set wherein the new third training sample set includes a plurality of new third training samples, wherein each new third training sample includes a new value of each interference parameter of the plurality of interference parameters. and the differential signal corresponding to each new training disturbance parameter value.
  • a new tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected is established.
  • a new correction parameter model is established.
  • a new second tissue component concentration prediction model is obtained.
  • the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity are collected by the same or different photosensitive surfaces of the same type at different times, wherein the first output light intensity is the systolic light intensity, and the second output light intensity is The light intensity is the light intensity in the diastolic period, and the same photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the same photosensitive surface is used to output one output light intensity.
  • a pulse wave-based time difference measurement method can be used to measure tissue composition Measurement.
  • Pulse is the arterial pulsation, which refers to the periodic contraction and relaxation with the beating of the heart.
  • the pressure in the aorta causes pulsatile changes in the diameter of the blood vessels, and the blood flow in the blood vessels also changes regularly and periodically.
  • Each pulse waveform includes an ascending branch and a descending branch, where the ascending branch represents the dilation of the ventricular systolic artery and the descending branch represents the ventricular diastolic arterial retraction.
  • a single contraction of the ventricle represents a pulsatile cycle.
  • the photosensitive surface can be set as close as possible to the target part (for example, the target blood vessels) location. That is, the same photosensitive surfaces for outputting the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity can be set at a position where the distance from the target site is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
  • the fourth distance threshold can be zero, that is, the same photosensitive surface can be set on the target part.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface used to output the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity is set at a position where the distance from the target site is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold, that is, used for outputting the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity
  • the distance between each photosensitive surface of the same strong photosensitive surface and the target site is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
  • the distance between each photosensitive surface of the same photosensitive surface and the target site is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold, which may be the distance between the edge of the photosensitive surface farthest from the target site and the target blood vessel in the same photosensitive surface is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
  • the pulse wave-based time difference measurement method it is not contradictory to use the pulse information as much as possible and the above-mentioned use of a large-area photosensitive surface to reduce the adverse effects of pulse beating on the measurement. It is possible to utilize useful information from the pulse beat, which minimizes the adverse effects of the pulse beat.
  • the first output light intensity may also be the diastolic light intensity
  • the second output light intensity may also be the systolic light intensity.
  • the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may be the output light intensity in the same pulsation period, or may be the output light intensity in different pulsation periods.
  • the first output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is collected by a first photosensitive surface of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelength
  • the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is Set the wavelength corresponding to the second photosensitive surface of the same type to be collected, wherein the first photosensitive surface of the same type includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the second similar photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces.
  • a preset wavelength there are a first photosensitive surface of the same type and a second photosensitive surface of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the first photosensitive surface of the same type is used to output the first photosensitive surface corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the second photosensitive surface of the same type is used for outputting a second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • Both the first homogeneous photosensitive surface and the second homogeneous photosensitive surface may include one or more photosensitive surfaces.
  • the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity may be processed using a position differential measurement method to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component.
  • the photosensitive surface can be set as far as possible from the target part. That is, the first similar photosensitive surface for outputting the first output light intensity can be set at a position where the distance from the target site is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold, that is, each photosensitive surface of the first similar photosensitive surface is located at a distance from the target site. The distance is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold.
  • the distance between each photosensitive surface of the first similar photosensitive surface and the target site is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold, which may be the distance from the edge of the photosensitive surface closest to the target site in the first similar photosensitive surface to the target site is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold.
  • Five distance thresholds may be the distance from the edge of the photosensitive surface closest to the target site in the first similar photosensitive surface to the target site is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold.
  • the photosensitive surfaces of the first similar type are not in contact with the target portion, and the distance from the center of the photosensitive surface closest to the target portion in the first similar photosensitive surfaces to the target portion is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold.
  • the photosensitive surface for outputting the second output light intensity is set at a position whose distance from the target site is greater than or equal to a sixth distance threshold.
  • the second same type of photosensitive surface for outputting the second light intensity is arranged at a position with a distance from the target site greater than or equal to the sixth distance threshold, please refer to the first similar photosensitive surface for outputting the first output light intensity description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the second photosensitive surface of the same type are the same photosensitive surface, and the outgoing light received by the first photosensitive surface and the second photosensitive surface of the same type is the incident light incident from different incident positions through the transmitted.
  • the first photosensitive surface of the same kind and the second photosensitive surface of the same kind are different photosensitive surfaces of the same kind.
  • the incident position of the incident light may include at least one, if the incident position of the incident light includes at least two, the first photosensitive surface of the same kind and the second photosensitive surface of the second kind may be the same photosensitive surface, so The difference is that if the same type of photosensitive surface is used to receive the outgoing light corresponding to the first output light intensity, that is, it is used as the first photosensitive surface of the same type, the incident position of the outgoing light is the first incident position.
  • the photosensitive surface of the same type is the same photosensitive surface used to receive the outgoing light corresponding to the second output light intensity, that is, it is used as the second photosensitive surface of the same type
  • the incident position of the outgoing light is the second incident position
  • the first incident light The position and the second incident position are different incident positions.
  • the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the second photosensitive surface of the same type may also be different photosensitive surfaces of the same type.
  • the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the first same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the first average optical path range, wherein the first average optical path range is based on the first The optical path average value is determined, and the first optical path average value is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive position of the first photosensitive surface of the same type.
  • the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the second same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the second average optical path range, wherein the second average optical path range is determined according to the average value of the second optical path, wherein, the average value of the second optical path is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface of the second same type of photosensitive surface.
  • the outgoing light received by the first photosensitive surface has the characteristics of a short optical path
  • the second photosensitive surface has the characteristics of short optical path.
  • the outgoing light received by the surface also has the characteristics of a short optical path.
  • the short optical path can be understood as the average optical path of the outgoing light within the range of the average optical path.
  • the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface in the first same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the first average optical path range.
  • the first average optical path range is determined in the following manner.
  • the first optical path average value of the average optical path lengths of the outgoing light received by the respective photosensitive positions of the first same type of photosensitive surfaces is determined, and the variation range of the first optical path is determined.
  • the first average optical path range is determined according to the first optical path average value and the first optical path variation range. Exemplarily, if the average value of the first optical path is b and the variation range of the first optical path is ⁇ 40%, the first average optical path range may be greater than or equal to 0.6b and less than or equal to 1.4b.
  • the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface in the second same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the second average optical length range.
  • the second average optical path range is determined in the following manner.
  • the second optical path average value of the average optical path lengths of the outgoing light received by the respective photosensitive positions of the second same type of photosensitive surfaces is determined, and the variation range of the second optical path is determined.
  • the second average optical path range is determined according to the second optical path average value and the second optical path variation range.
  • the absolute value of the difference between the first optical path average value and the second optical path average value belongs to the first optical path difference range.
  • the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the second photosensitive surface of the same type within a suitable position range.
  • the following description will be given by taking the measured tissue component as blood glucose as an example. If the measured tissue component is blood glucose, the target tissue layer is the dermis layer, and the required output light intensity is the output light intensity that mainly carries the tissue component information in the dermis layer.
  • the output light intensity of the outgoing light will mainly carry the tissue composition information in the epidermis layer. If the distance between the position of the photosensitive surface and the center of the incident light is too large, the output light intensity of the outgoing light will mainly carry the tissue composition information in the subcutaneous fat layer.
  • the dermis layer is located between the epidermis layer and the subcutaneous fat layer. It can be seen that the setting positions of the first and second similar photosensitive surfaces need to be selected within an appropriate range of positions. The first and second similar photosensitive surfaces The distance between the faces should not be too large.
  • the differential measurement method can effectively weaken the common mode interference, the differential measurement method will also lose a part of effective information, that is, blood glucose information, while weakening the common mode interference. If the two locations are extremely close, the useful information may be completely lost. It can be seen that the setting positions of the first and second similar photosensitive surfaces need to be selected within a suitable position range, and the distance between the first and second similar photosensitive surfaces cannot be too small.
  • the principle of effective information measurement may refer to the fact that the outgoing light at the two positions can carry as much tissue composition information in the target tissue layer as possible, therefore, the two positions should be within a reasonable position range.
  • the principle of precision optimization of differential measurement can mean that there should be a certain distance between two positions to ensure that as much valid information as possible remains after the difference.
  • the principle of effective interference signal elimination can mean that the distance between two locations should be as small as possible to improve the effect of the differential measurement method in eliminating common mode interference.
  • the first optical path difference range is determined according to the optimal differential optical path.
  • the optimal differential optical path may be determined according to at least one of the above three principles.
  • the position setting requirements for the first similar photosensitive surface and the second similar photosensitive surface also require that the area of the photosensitive surface should not be too large, otherwise the differential effect will be affected, thereby affecting the reliability of the measurement results.
  • the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range
  • the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range
  • the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path as far as possible, as reflected in the optical path. difference range, and the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range.
  • the absolute value of the difference between the average value of the first optical path corresponding to the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the average value of the second optical path corresponding to the second photosensitive surface of the same type belongs to the first optical path difference range
  • the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range
  • the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range.
  • the first optical path difference range is determined according to the optimal differential optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the optimal differential sensitivity when the measurement area of the measured object is determined, there is an optimal differential sensitivity corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the optimal differential sensitivity may represent a difference caused by a unit concentration change of the measured tissue component
  • the optimal differential optical path can be determined according to the optimal differential sensitivity, that is, the optimal differential optical path can be determined according to the principle of differential measurement precision optimization, thus, the optical path corresponding to the optimal differential sensitivity can be determined called the optimal differential optical path.
  • the up and down adjustment range can be set, and according to the optimal differential optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength and the up and down adjustment amplitude, The corresponding first optical path difference range.
  • the source-detection distance of each photosensitive surface of the first same type of photosensitive surfaces corresponding to the preset wavelength from the center of the incident light is within the range of the preset source-detection distance corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the preset It is assumed that the source-detection distance range is determined according to the source-detection distance from the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength to the center of the incident light.
  • the position of the photosensitive surface may be set based on the floating reference method.
  • the floating reference method will be described as follows.
  • the incident light when the incident light enters the tissue, absorption and scattering will occur.
  • the absorption will directly lead to the attenuation of light energy, and the scattering will affect the distribution of the outgoing light by changing the direction of photon transmission.
  • the distribution is the result of the combined action of the two.
  • the floating reference method for the measured tissue composition, there is a certain position from the center of the incident light. At this position, the output light intensity of the outgoing light is affected by absorption and scattering to the same extent but in opposite directions. , resulting in the outgoing light being insensitive to changes in the concentration of the measured tissue components.
  • a position with the above characteristics can be called a reference position (or a reference position).
  • the output intensity of the outgoing light at the reference position reflects the response to disturbances other than the measured tissue composition during the measurement.
  • the output light intensity of the outgoing light at the measurement location reflects the response to the measured tissue component during the measurement process, as well as the response to other disturbances other than the measured tissue component.
  • the reference position and the measurement position vary depending on the wavelength, the object to be measured, and the measurement area, and thus the reference position can be called a floating reference position.
  • the output light intensity of the outgoing light emitted at the floating reference position mainly carries the response to other disturbances other than the measured tissue components in the measurement process
  • the light emitted from the floating reference position can be The output light intensity of the outgoing light is introduced into the differential measurement to minimize common-mode interference and minimize the loss of useful information.
  • the preset source detection distance range is determined according to the source detection distance between the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength and the center of the incident light.
  • the source-detection distance of each of the photosensitive surfaces of the first same type from the center of the incident light may be within a preset source-detection distance range corresponding to a preset wavelength.
  • the distance between the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength ⁇ 1 and the center of the incident light is 1.7 mm, then the preset source detector corresponding to the preset wavelength ⁇ 1 is 1.7 mm.
  • the distance can range from 1.5mm to 1.9mm.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the reference position and the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the measurement position can be determined, and the output light intensity collected by the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the reference position is called the first output light intensity.
  • the output light intensity collected by the same photosensitive surface corresponding to the measurement area is called the second output light intensity.
  • the output light intensity collected by the same photosensitive surface corresponding to the measurement area is called the first output light intensity
  • the output light intensity collected by the same photosensitive surface corresponding to the reference position is called the second output light intensity.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • the third output light intensity is determined from at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength. According to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined.
  • a non-differential measurement method can be used to measure tissue components, that is, the concentration of the measured tissue components can be determined according to the third output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength.
  • the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is collected by the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the preset wavelength, and the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface in the same type of photosensitive surface
  • the difference between the average optical path and the optimal optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength belongs to the second optical path difference range.
  • the average optical length of the received outgoing light is close to the optimal optical length corresponding to the preset wavelength, that is, the average optical length of the outgoing light received at different photosensitive positions in the same photosensitive surface used to collect the third output light intensity and
  • the absolute value of the optimal optical path difference corresponding to the preset wavelength is less than or equal to the second optical path difference range.
  • the optimal optical path length corresponding to the preset wavelength can be understood as the optical path length corresponding to the maximum sensitivity of the measured tissue component under the preset wavelength.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is input into the third tissue component concentration prediction model, and the measured tissue component concentration is output.
  • the third tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a fourth training sample set, wherein the fourth training sample set includes a plurality of fourth training samples, wherein each fourth training sample Including the third true concentration of the measured tissue component and the output light intensity corresponding to the third true concentration, a third tissue component concentration prediction model is established according to the fourth training sample set.
  • the third target concentration of the measured tissue component is obtained, the output light intensity corresponding to the third target concentration is obtained, and according to the output light intensity corresponding to the third target concentration and the third target concentration , modifying the third tissue component concentration prediction model, so as to use the revised third tissue component concentration prediction model to process the new output light intensity to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • the new output light intensity is processed by using the new third tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • the plurality of current interference parameter values and the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength are input into the fourth tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
  • the fourth tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a fifth training sample set, wherein the fifth training sample set includes a plurality of fifth training samples, wherein each fifth training sample Including the fourth real concentration of the measured tissue component and the output light intensity corresponding to the fourth real concentration, obtaining a sixth training sample set, wherein the sixth training sample set includes a plurality of sixth training samples, wherein each sixth training sample set
  • the training sample includes the training interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters and the light intensity value corresponding to each training interference parameter value.
  • a tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected is established, according to the sixth training sample set.
  • a sample set is trained, a correction parameter model is established, and a fourth tissue component concentration prediction model is obtained according to the tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected and the correction parameter model.
  • the fourth target concentration of the measured tissue component is obtained, the output light intensity corresponding to the fourth target concentration is obtained, and the current interference parameter value of each interference parameter among the plurality of interference parameters is obtained, Modifying the fourth tissue component concentration prediction model based on the fourth target concentration, the plurality of interference parameter values, and the output light intensity corresponding to the fourth target concentration to process the new output using the revised fourth tissue component concentration prediction model
  • the light intensity and the new multiple current interference parameter values are used to obtain new concentrations of the measured tissue components.
  • the new output light intensity and the new multiple current interference parameter values are processed by using the new fourth tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • each photosensitive surface includes an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, and the shapes of different photosensitive surfaces are the same or different.
  • each photosensitive surface may be made of a photosensitive material.
  • the ring-shaped photosensitive surface can avoid the problem of azimuth positioning, and can also realize the design of a large area within a small source detection distance range. It should be noted that, in the measurement of living tissue composition, the source detection distance is usually a relatively important physical quantity, so it is very meaningful to realize a larger area design within a smaller source detection distance range.
  • the use of a non-annular photosensitive surface has the following beneficial effects.
  • the photosensitive surface is set in the measurement area that is conducive to measurement, compared to the photosensitive surface set in the measurement area that interferes with the measurement. Better measurement results are obtained, so that the photosensitive surface can be positioned in the right position according to the characteristics of the tissue structure.
  • the non-annular photosensitive surface can easily avoid the measurement area that interferes with the measurement, such as the blood vessel or the wound area. Therefore, the use of the non-annular photosensitive surface will have a better effect.
  • the transmission paths of the same incident light in the tissue may be different, and thus the average optical paths corresponding to the outgoing light at different outgoing positions are different.
  • the tissue component as blood glucose as an example
  • the dermis is usually the main source of the blood glucose signal, so it is required that the outgoing light is mainly transmitted in the dermis layer.
  • the average optical path corresponding to the outgoing light is There are certain requirements.
  • the average optical path corresponding to the outgoing light received by the different photosensitive positions of the annular photosensitive surface is basically similar and the outgoing light mainly passes through the dermis,
  • the average optical path is within the average optical path range C.
  • the skin tissue is usually not uniform, the average optical path difference corresponding to the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of the same annular photosensitive surface is relatively large.
  • the average optical path lengths are basically similar, all within the average optical path range C, and the average optical path corresponding to the outgoing light received by another part of the photosensitive surface of the ring-shaped photosensitive surface is quite different from the aforementioned, and is not within the average optical path range C. Since the average optical path of the outgoing light is within the average optical path range C, it can be shown that the outgoing light mainly passes through the dermis layer.
  • the ring-shaped photosensitive surface outputs one output light intensity. Therefore, in the case of uneven skin tissue, the signal quality of the output light intensity obtained by using the ring-shaped photosensitive surface is not high, thereby affecting the reliability of the measurement results.
  • the non-ring photosensitive surface can be set according to the actual situation. Taking the above example as an example, assuming that the average optical length not within the average optical path range C is within the average optical path range D, two non-ring photosensitive surfaces can be used, where, One non-annular photosensitive surface is used to receive the light intensity value of the outgoing light whose average optical path is within the average optical path range C, and the other non-annular photosensitive surface is used to receive the average optical path of the outgoing light within the average optical path range D.
  • One non-annular photosensitive surface is used to receive the light intensity value of the outgoing light whose average optical path is within the average optical path range C
  • the other non-annular photosensitive surface is used to receive the average optical path of the outgoing light within the average optical path range D
  • the light intensity value of the outgoing light inside and the output light intensity of the two non-ring photosensitive surfaces are consistent with the actual situation, which is beneficial to ensure the reliability of the measurement results.
  • the average optical path of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive surfaces with the same source detection distance from the center of the incident light may be different. Therefore, it can be used. Differential operation is performed on the output light intensities collected by different photosensitive surfaces with the same source-detection distance from the center of the incident light to measure tissue composition.
  • the above non-annular photosensitive surface can be realized, that is, for the same source detection distance, at least two non-annular photosensitive surfaces can be discretely arranged with the center of the incident light as the center, so as to output two output light intensities.
  • FIG. 14 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a differential measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 14 includes four fan ring photosensitive surfaces, namely fan ring photosensitive surface 1, fan ring photosensitive surface 2, fan ring photosensitive surface 3 and fan ring photosensitive surface 4, and the four fan ring photosensitive surfaces are individually In use, each fan ring photosensitive surface has a corresponding output light intensity.
  • the centers of the four fan-ring photosensitive surfaces have the same distance from the center of the incident light, that is, have the same source-detection distance.
  • the average optical paths corresponding to the outgoing light received by the fan ring photosensitive surface 1 and the fan ring photosensitive surface 2 are different. Therefore, according to the output light intensity collected by the fan ring photosensitive surface 1 and the fan ring photosensitive surface 2 The collected output light intensity is subjected to differential operation to realize differential measurement.
  • the non-ring-shaped photosensitive surface includes a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, an elliptical photosensitive surface, or a polygonal photosensitive surface.
  • the polygonal photosensitive surface includes a square photosensitive surface, a rectangular photosensitive surface, or a triangular photosensitive surface.
  • the central angle can be designed according to the actual situation, so as to obtain the corresponding photosensitive surface of the fan ring.
  • a fan ring photosensitive surface with a central angle of 90° a fan ring photosensitive surface with a central angle of 180°, and a fan ring photosensitive surface with a central angle of 45°.
  • FIG. 15 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a ring-shaped photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 16 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a fan ring photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 17 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a circular photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 18 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a square photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the same type of photosensitive surface is used to output one output light intensity.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface may be a ring-shaped photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, that is, the same type of photosensitive surface appears as a ring-shaped photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface as a whole.
  • the number of photosensitive surfaces included in the same type of photosensitive surface it can be determined whether the overall shape is formed by a single photosensitive surface or formed by a combination of multiple photosensitive surfaces.
  • the shape of each photosensitive surface in the same type of photosensitive surface may be an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is an annular photosensitive surface, which may include: in the case that the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent annular photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes multiple photosensitive surfaces, the same type of photosensitive surface is a ring-shaped photosensitive surface formed by combining the multiple photosensitive surfaces.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface, which may include: in the case that the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent non-annular photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes a plurality of photosensitive surfaces
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface formed according to the combination of the multiple photosensitive surfaces.
  • the plurality of photosensitive surfaces participating in the combination are closely arranged to ensure that there is no gap between adjacent photosensitive surfaces as much as possible. Since the circular photosensitive surface or the square photosensitive surface is more common at present, the manufacturing process is less difficult and the manufacturing cost is lower, while the photosensitive surface of other shapes usually needs to be customized, the manufacturing process is more difficult and the manufacturing cost is higher. Therefore, if limited In terms of production cost, a combination method can be used to combine multiple circular photosensitive surfaces and/or multiple square photosensitive surfaces to form similar photosensitive surfaces of other shapes. Among them, square includes square and rectangle.
  • the production cost of the photosensitive surface is also related to the area of the photosensitive surface. Generally, the larger the area of the photosensitive surface, the higher the production cost. If a larger-area photosensitive surface is required, and there are currently multiple smaller-area photosensitive surfaces, in order to reduce the manufacturing cost, multiple smaller-area photosensitive surfaces can be combined to obtain a larger-area photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes a ring photosensitive surface, a fan ring photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface or Square photosensitive surface.
  • a photosensitive surface with an appropriate shape can be selected according to the jitter of the actual emitted light to minimize the jitter adverse effects on measurements.
  • the target site may be the site where jitter occurs. Since one of the sources of jitter is pulse beating, and pulse beating is related to blood vessels, the target site can be blood vessels. Generally, the jitter distribution of the outgoing light close to the blood vessel has a certain directionality, while the jitter distribution of the outgoing light far from the blood vessel is relatively uniform and has no directionality.
  • photosensitive surface If the same type of photosensitive surface is far away from the target part (for example, the target blood vessel), it means that the jitter distribution of the outgoing light is relatively uniform. photosensitive surface. That the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are far away from the target portion can be understood as the distance between each photosensitive surface of the same photosensitive surface from the target portion is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold.
  • the distance between each photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface and the target site is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold value may include that the distance between the edge of the photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface closest to the target site and the target site is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold value, or, The photosensitive surfaces of the same type are not in contact with the target part, and the distance from the center of the photosensitive surface closest to the target part in the photosensitive surfaces of the same type to the target part is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold.
  • the arc length corresponding to the position farther from the center of the incident light can be designed to be longer, so that a ring-shaped photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface or a fan-shaped photosensitive surface can be selected.
  • the average optical path of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface in the same photosensitive surface is greater than the optical path threshold, it can indicate the jitter of the outgoing light and the size of the optical path almost irrelevant.
  • a circular photosensitive surface or a square photosensitive surface can be selected.
  • the fan ring photosensitive surface in the case where the same type of photosensitive surface is a fan ring photosensitive surface, if the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the fan ring photosensitive surface is an independent fan ring photosensitive surface. If the same photosensitive surface includes multiple photosensitive surfaces, the fan ring photosensitive surface is a photosensitive surface formed by combining the multiple photosensitive surfaces. Similarly, for the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes a ring-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a square photosensitive surface or a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, it can be the same type of photosensitive surface formed independently or the same type of photosensitive surface formed in combination.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes a circular photosensitive surface or a square photosensitive surface.
  • the shape of the same type of photosensitive surface is determined according to the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
  • the jitter distribution of the outgoing light has a certain directionality.
  • the shapes of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type can be determined according to the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
  • the shapes of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type and the jitter distribution of the outgoing light are similar figures.
  • the shape of the same photosensitive surface can be designed to be an elliptical photosensitive surface.
  • the shape of the photosensitive surface of the same type can be designed to be a rectangular photosensitive surface.
  • the shape of the same photosensitive surface can be designed to be a rhombus photosensitive surface.
  • the jitter distribution of the outgoing light includes a jitter distribution along a first direction and a jitter distribution along the second direction, the first direction and the second direction are perpendicular to each other, and the same photosensitive surfaces are along the first direction.
  • the ratio of the upward length to the length of the same photosensitive surface along the second direction is determined according to the ratio of the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the first direction to the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the second direction.
  • the upward jitter is the largest.
  • the jitter distributions in the two mutually perpendicular directions are obtained by decomposing the jitter of the outgoing light into these two mutually perpendicular directions. obtained from the direction of
  • the ratio is greater than or equal to the ratio of the dither amplitudes of the outgoing light along the first direction and along the second direction.
  • the ratio of the shaking amplitude along the Y-axis direction of the outgoing light to the shaking amplitude along the X-axis direction can be expressed as: for
  • the ratio of the length of the same photosensitive surface along the Y-axis direction to the length along the X-axis direction can be expressed as but
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes a rectangular photosensitive surface or an elliptical photosensitive surface, and the ratio of the length to the width of the rectangular photosensitive surface is based on the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the first direction and the outgoing light in the second direction.
  • the ratio of the jitter amplitude is determined, and the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis of the elliptical photosensitive surface is determined according to the ratio of the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the first direction to the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the second direction.
  • the same photosensitive surface can include a rectangular photosensitive surface or an elliptical photosensitive surface.
  • the ratio of the length to the width of the rectangular photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio of the shaking amplitude of the emitted light along the first direction to the shaking amplitude along the second direction.
  • the ratio of the long axis to the short axis of the elliptical photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio of the shaking amplitude along the first direction to the shaking amplitude along the second direction of the outgoing light.
  • each output light intensity is obtained by processing according to the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by one or more photosensitive surfaces, which may include the following operations.
  • a photosensitive surface for outputting one output light intensity is referred to as a similar photosensitive surface, and a similar photosensitive surface may include one or more photosensitive surfaces.
  • the condition for the combined use of different photosensitive surfaces may be that the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface is within the range of the average optical length.
  • the average optical path range may be a range consisting of greater than or equal to the first average optical path threshold and less than or equal to the second average optical path threshold.
  • the first average optical path threshold and the second average optical path threshold may be determined according to the optical path average value and the optical path variation amplitude.
  • the average optical path length is an average value calculated from the average optical path lengths of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface.
  • the photosensitive surface is usually used in conjunction with the amplifier circuit corresponding to the photosensitive surface to output a light intensity value.
  • the product of the photoresponsivity of each photosensitive surface in the same photosensitive surface and the magnification of the amplification circuit used in conjunction with the photosensitive surface needs to be a preset value.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface can output one output light intensity. If the product of the photoresponsivity of the photosensitive surface and the magnification of the amplifying circuit used in conjunction with the photosensitive surface is not the same preset value, a corresponding method needs to be taken to make the product be the same preset value.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface can output one output light intensity by means of hardware or software.
  • the first method is the hardware method.
  • the cathodes of different photosensitive surfaces of the same photosensitive surface can be electrically connected to each other and the anodes of the same photosensitive surfaces can be electrically connected to each other, that is, the electrical connection of common cathode and common anode between different photosensitive surfaces can be realized.
  • it is equivalent to connecting different photosensitive surfaces in parallel, so that one or more photosensitive surfaces are used in combination to output one output light intensity. It should be noted that it is necessary to ensure that the light responsivity of different photosensitive surfaces is consistent as much as possible, so as to obtain a more accurate output light intensity.
  • the second method is the software method.
  • the cathodes between different photosensitive surfaces in the same photosensitive surface are not connected to each other and the anodes are not connected to each other, that is, each photosensitive surface is used alone to output a light intensity value.
  • a corresponding algorithm can be used to perform a weighted summation of the light intensity values of each photosensitive surface in the same photosensitive surface to obtain an output light intensity.
  • the output light intensity corresponding to the same type of photosensitive surface can be determined by the following formulas (2) and (3).
  • I represents the output light intensity corresponding to the same photosensitive surface
  • I i represents the light intensity value corresponding to the photosensitive surface i
  • i ⁇ 1,2,...,N-1,N ⁇ ,N Indicates the number of photosensitive surfaces included in the same type of photosensitive surface, 1 ⁇ N ⁇ M
  • M denotes the total number of photosensitive surfaces
  • ⁇ i denotes the weighting coefficient corresponding to the photosensitive surface i
  • H denotes the preset value
  • ⁇ i denotes the photosensitive surface i
  • ⁇ i represents the magnification of the amplifier circuit used in conjunction with the photosensitive surface i.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • At least one superimposed light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is determined, wherein the superimposed light intensity is obtained by adding a plurality of output light intensities corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to at least one superimposed light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength.
  • the acquired data when determining the concentration of the measured tissue component, can be flexibly used according to the actual situation, such as the value of a single output light intensity is small, or the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity is low , to improve the reliability of the measurement results.
  • the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to at least one superimposed light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength, wherein the superimposed light intensity may be obtained by adding a plurality of output light intensities.
  • the output light intensity is the light intensity of the diffused light (ie the outgoing light).
  • the preset wavelength is a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue composition.
  • the preset wavelength may be a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue composition.
  • the preset wavelength may be 1550 nm or 1609 nm.
  • the temperature of the measurement region is maintained within a preset temperature range during tissue composition measurement.
  • the temperature of the measurement area can be controlled to keep at the temperature of the tissue composition measurement process based on the temperature control method. within the preset temperature range.
  • the photosensitive surface is obtained by disposing a mask on the initial photosensitive surface, and the light transmittance of the mask is less than or equal to a light transmittance threshold.
  • the shape of the mask plate is determined according to the shape of the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
  • the manufacturing process is less difficult and the manufacturing cost is lower, while other shapes of the photosensitive surface usually need to be customized, the manufacturing process is more difficult, and the manufacturing cost is relatively low. Therefore, if it is limited by the production cost, the method of setting a mask plate on the initial photosensitive surface can be adopted, wherein the part of the initial photosensitive surface blocked by the mask plate is less than or equal to the light transmittance of the mask plate.
  • the light transmittance threshold is difficult to receive the light intensity value.
  • the shape and position of the mask plate can be set according to the actual required shape and area, so as to obtain a photosensitive surface with a preset shape and area.
  • the actual required shape and area can be determined according to the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
  • FIG. 19 schematically shows a schematic diagram of setting a mask plate on an initial photosensitive surface to obtain a photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the initial photosensitive surface is a square photosensitive surface
  • the photosensitive surface is a circular photosensitive surface.
  • the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area is uniform.
  • the intensity distribution of the light spot that ensures that the incident light irradiates the measurement area can be used. achieved in a uniform manner.
  • the more uniform the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area the lower the requirement for the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions, and the better the effect of using the differential measurement method to suppress the influence of the uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results. Therefore, the reliability of the measurement results can also be better guaranteed.
  • the measures to make the intensity distribution of the incident light spot on the measurement area uniform will attenuate the light energy of the incident light to a certain extent, and the tissue composition measurement requires that the light energy of the incident light cannot be too small, it is necessary to try to Under the condition that the intensity distribution of the incident light spot on the measurement area is uniform, the light energy attenuation of the incident light is as small as possible.
  • the incident light is realized by means of optical fiber transmission, the distribution of the incident light spot on the measurement area is uniform, and the adverse effect of fiber jitter on the measurement result is also reduced.
  • the area of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement region is greater than or equal to the light spot area threshold.
  • the area of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area may be larger than or equal to the spot area threshold.
  • the larger the area of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area the lower the requirement for the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions, and the effect of using the differential measurement method to suppress the influence of the uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results. The better, and therefore, the better the reliability of the measurement results can be guaranteed.
  • the light spot area threshold can be set according to the actual situation, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the incident light is realized by optical fiber transmission, the area of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area is greater than or equal to the light spot area threshold, which also reduces the adverse effect of fiber jitter on the measurement results.
  • the measurement device used to realize the tissue composition has the ability to sense the change of the expected tissue composition concentration.
  • the influence of uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results is reduced.
  • the measurement device for realizing tissue composition has the ability to sense the concentration change of the expected tissue composition, and achieves high stability and efficiency of receiving outgoing light by adopting a large-area photosensitive surface.
  • the differential measurement method is used. Aiming at controlling the controllable measurement conditions, it is realized by adopting an effective control method.
  • FIG. 20 schematically shows a block diagram of a tissue composition measurement device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 includes a light source module 2010 , a collection module 2020 and a processing module 2030 .
  • the light source module 2010 is used to illuminate the measurement area with incident light of a single preset wavelength, wherein each incident light passes through the measurement area and exits from at least one exit position to form at least one exit light, and the incident light of the incident light includes at least one.
  • the acquisition module includes M photosensitive surfaces, each photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range corresponding to the photosensitive surface, and the acquisition module is used to acquire The light intensity values corresponding to each outgoing light collected by the M photosensitive surfaces are obtained, and T output light intensities are obtained, wherein each output light intensity is processed according to the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by one or more photosensitive surfaces obtained, 1 ⁇ T ⁇ M.
  • the processing module 2030 is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength.
  • the photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the corresponding preset anti-disturbance range.
  • the ratio of the area of stably receiving the outgoing light to the area of the photosensitive surface therefore, improves the stability of receiving outgoing light, thereby reducing the adverse effects of changes in the intensity distribution of the outgoing light caused by jitter, thereby improving the accuracy of the measurement results. reliability.
  • a single preset wavelength is used in combination with the photosensitive surface with the above characteristics to measure the tissue composition, and the real measured tissue composition signal is directly obtained.
  • Using a single preset wavelength for tissue composition measurement reduces the volume and structural complexity of the light source module, thereby reducing the volume and structural complexity of devices and equipment, facilitating portable measurement, reducing the capacity requirements for power modules, and reducing cost of production. In addition, the amount of data processing is also reduced.
  • the ratio of the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface in the target tissue layer to the total optical length is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, where the total optical length is the transmission of the outgoing light in the measurement area. total distance.
  • the total area of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type is determined according to the tissue structure features in the measurement area, wherein the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are used to output an output light intensity.
  • the ratio of the area of each photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold.
  • the ratio threshold is greater than or equal to 0.04 mm.
  • the photosensitive surface is in contact or non-contact with the surface of the measurement area.
  • the distance of the photosensitive surface from the surface of the measurement area is less than or equal to the first distance threshold and the efficiency of the photosensitive surface receiving the outgoing light is greater than or equal to the efficiency threshold.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a first determination module 2040 , a second determination module 2050 and a setting module 2060 .
  • the first determining module 2040 is used to determine the positioning feature.
  • the second determination module 2050 is configured to determine a measurement area according to the positioning feature, where the measurement area is an area that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement condition.
  • the setting module 2060 is configured to set the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area, wherein the measurement probe includes M photosensitive surfaces.
  • the positioning features include a first gesture positioning feature and an area positioning feature.
  • the second determination module includes a first adjustment unit and a first determination unit.
  • the first adjustment unit is configured to adjust the current measurement posture of the measured object to a target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature, wherein the target measurement posture is a measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement condition.
  • the first determining unit is configured to determine the measurement area according to the area positioning feature when the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a fixing part 2080, and the fixing part 2080 is used to set the measurement probe 2070 at a position corresponding to the measurement area, wherein the fixing part 2080 is connected to the measurement area.
  • Probe 2070 is integral, partially discrete, or fully discrete.
  • the fixing part and the measuring probe in FIG. 22 may be integrated or separate.
  • the fixing part 2080 includes a fixing seat 2081 and a first fitting part 2082 .
  • the first fitting 2082 is used to set the fixing base 2081 at a position corresponding to the measurement area.
  • the fixing base 2081 is used to fix the measuring probe 2070 .
  • the hardness of the first fitting 20822070 includes a first hardness and a second hardness, wherein the first hardness is smaller than the second hardness, and the first hardness is the first hardness that the first fitting 2082 fixes in the process of fixing the fixing seat 2081
  • the second hardness is the hardness corresponding to the first fitting member 2082 after fixing the fixing seat 2081 .
  • the first fitting member 2082 in order for the first fitting member 2082 to play a fixing role on the fixing seat 2081, the first fitting member 2082 needs to be relatively rigid. At the same time, in order to minimize the influence caused when the first fitting member 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081, the first fitting member 2082 needs to have a certain degree of flexibility. It can be seen that the above-mentioned requirements are imposed on the hardness of the first fitting member 2082 .
  • the hardness of the first fitting member 2082 includes the first hardness and the second hardness.
  • the first hardness represents the hardness corresponding to the process of fixing the fixing seat 2082 by the first fitting 2082
  • the second hardness represents the hardness corresponding to the fixing of the fixing seat 2081 by the first fitting 2082
  • the first hardness is smaller than the second hardness
  • the first fitting 2082 includes a first Velcro or a first elastic band.
  • FIG. 24 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first fitting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the first fitting 2082 in FIG. 24 is a Velcro. Since the material of the matte surface of the Velcro is very soft, the influence generated when the first fitting 2082 is fixed to the fixing seat 2081 can be reduced. At this time, the hardness of the first fitting 2082 is the first hardness. At the same time, in order to enable it to play a fixing role, after the first fitting 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081, the hook surface can be pasted on the rough surface to increase the hardness of the first fitting 2082. At this time, the first fitting The hardness of the piece 2082 is the second hardness.
  • the hardness corresponding to the first matching piece 2082 in the process of fixing the fixing seat 2081 is the first hardness, it can reduce the influence produced when the first matching piece 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081, therefore, it can be Try to ensure that the skin state of the skin in the measurement area satisfies the first preset condition during the process of setting the fixing seat 2081 at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting 2082 .
  • the hardness of the first fitting 2082 is greater than or equal to the first hardness threshold and less than or equal to the second hardness threshold.
  • the first matching member 2082 can be used to fix the fixing seat 2081 , and the influence of the first matching member 2082 in fixing the fixing seat 2081 can be reduced as much as possible.
  • the first hardness threshold and the second hardness threshold may be set according to actual conditions, which are not specifically limited herein.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a first magnetic part 2090 , the whole or part of the first fitting 2082 is a metal hinge, and the first magnetic part 2090 is matched with the first fitting 2082 to fix the fixing base 2081.
  • the first fitting member 2082 may be entirely or partially a metal hinge. It is realized that the first fitting member 2082 can fix the fixing seat 2081, and the influence generated when the first fitting member 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081 to 2082 is reduced as much as possible.
  • the implementation is as follows. After the first fitting 2082 completes the fixing of the fixing base 2081, the first magnetic part 2090 can be adsorbed to the first fitting 2082, so that the first magnetic part 2090 cooperates with the first fitting 2082 to fix the fixing base 2081. play a fixed role. See Figure 25.
  • FIG. 25 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another first fitting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. All of the first fittings 2082 in FIG. 25 are metal hinges.
  • the first magnetic portion 2090 can be adsorbed to the first matching member 2082 .
  • the first magnetic part 2090 may be a micro electromagnet.
  • the metal hinge is a ferromagnetic metal, and the metal is easy to absorb heat, the direct contact between the metal hinge and the skin will have a greater impact on the skin temperature. Therefore, in order to avoid the impact of the metal heat absorption on the skin temperature, the metal hinge can be The way the insulation is placed below. Alternatively, the insulation may be fleece.
  • the reason why the above can be achieved is that, since the metal hinge has better flexibility, the influence produced when the first fitting member 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081 can be reduced. At the same time, after the first fitting 2082 completes the fixing of the fixing seat 2081, since the first magnetic part 2090 is adsorbed on the first fitting 2082, the cooperation of the two makes the first fitting 2082 more rigid. Therefore, the first fitting 2082 can be achieve a fixed effect.
  • the first matching member 2082 is a metal hinge, and the metal hinge is more flexible, it can reduce the influence of the first matching member 2082 when the fixing seat 2081 is fixed. Therefore, it can be ensured as much as possible.
  • the skin state of the skin of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the first preset condition during the process of setting the fixing seat 2081 at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting 2082 .
  • the surface of the first fitting 2082 is provided with holes.
  • the measurement probe 2070 is fixed to the fixing base 2081 in at least one of the following manners: the measurement probe 2070 is fixed to the fixing base 2081 by an adhesive tape.
  • the measuring probe 2070 is fixed to the fixing base 2081 by fasteners.
  • the measuring probe 2070 is fixed to the fixing base 2081 by magnetic force.
  • the friction coefficient between the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing base 2081 is greater than or equal to the friction coefficient threshold.
  • the measurement probe 2070 in order to realize that the measurement probe 2070 is fixed to the fixed seat 2081 and ensure that the measurement probe 2070 does not move in the fixed seat 2081, at least one of the following methods can be adopted.
  • the measuring probe 2070 can be fixed to the fixing base 2081 by tape.
  • the measuring probe 2070 can be fixed to the fixing base 2081 by a fastener.
  • the measuring probe 2070 can be fixed to the fixing base 2081 by magnetic force.
  • the friction coefficient between the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing seat 2081 is greater than or equal to the friction coefficient threshold.
  • the material of the fixing base 2081 includes rubber, aluminum or plastic.
  • the fixing part 2080 includes a second fitting.
  • the second fitting is used to set the measurement probe 2070 at a position corresponding to the measurement area.
  • the hardness of the second fitting includes a third hardness and a fourth hardness, wherein the third hardness is smaller than the fourth hardness, and the third hardness corresponds to the process of fixing the measurement probe 2070 by the second fitting Hardness, the fourth hardness is the hardness corresponding to the second fitting member after fixing the measuring probe 2070 .
  • the second fitting includes a second Velcro or a second elastic band.
  • the hardness of the second fitting is greater than or equal to the third hardness threshold and less than or equal to the fourth hardness threshold.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a second magnetic part, all or part of the second fitting is a metal hinge, and the second magnetic part cooperates with the second fitting to fix the measurement probe 2070 .
  • the surface of the second fitting is provided with holes.
  • the second fitting member for the relevant description of the second fitting member, reference may be made to the description of the first fitting member 2082 above, and details are not repeated here. The difference is that the second fitting is used to fix the measuring probe 2070 .
  • the area positioning feature is provided on at least one of the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 and the measured object.
  • the first determining unit is used for: acquiring the first projection feature.
  • the position of the measuring probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 is adjusted until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature.
  • the region corresponding to the measurement probe 2070 and/or the fixing portion 2080 is determined as the measurement region.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a region positioning part 2100 , and the region positioning part 2100 is arranged on the object to be measured, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects,
  • the area positioning part 2100 is used for projecting the first projection feature.
  • the region positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 .
  • the region positioning feature is not provided on the fixing portion 2080 .
  • FIG. 26 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a region positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 are not shown in FIG. 26 , and the area positioning part 2100 is used to project the first projection feature, and the first projection feature is a cross light spot.
  • the regional positioning feature is the cross mark point.
  • FIG. 27 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another area positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the area positioning part 2100 is integrated with the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 , and the area positioning feature is set on the back of the hand of the measured object.
  • the area positioning part 2100 is used to project the first projection feature, and the first projection feature is a cross light spot.
  • the area positioning part 2100 includes a first laser.
  • the first laser may project a spot of a preset shape to form the first projection feature.
  • the first determination unit is configured to: acquire the first target image.
  • a first template image is acquired, wherein the first template image includes regional positioning features.
  • adjust the position of the measuring probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 to acquire a new first target image until the new first target image matches the first template Image matching.
  • an area corresponding to the measurement probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 is determined as a measurement area.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a first image acquisition part 2110 , and the first image acquisition part 2110 is arranged on the object to be measured, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects , the first image acquisition part 2110 is used to acquire the first target image.
  • FIG. 28 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first image acquisition part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the first image acquisition part 2110 is integrated with the measurement probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 , and the area positioning feature is set on the back of the hand of the measured object.
  • the first image acquisition part 2110 is used for acquiring a first target image.
  • the first image acquisition part 2110 may be an image sensor.
  • the first determination unit is configured to: acquire a second target image, wherein the second target image includes a region localization feature. If it is determined that the position of the region positioning feature in the second target image is not the first preset position, adjust the position of the measuring probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 to acquire a new second target image until a new second target image is obtained.
  • the position of the regional positioning feature in the target image is the first preset position. In the case that the position of the region positioning feature in the new second target image is determined to be the first preset position, the region corresponding to the measurement probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 is determined as the measurement region.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a second image acquisition part, the second image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the second image acquisition part is used for A second target image is acquired.
  • the second image capturing part is the same as or different from the first image capturing part 2110 .
  • the area positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 .
  • the area positioning feature is not arranged on the fixing part 2080 .
  • the first adjustment unit is configured to: acquire the second projection feature.
  • the current measurement posture is adjusted until the first posture locating feature and the second projection feature match.
  • it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the tissue composition measuring device 2000 further includes a first posture positioning part 2120 , and the first posture positioning part 2120 is arranged on the measured object, the measuring probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects , the first posture positioning part 2120 is used to project the second projection feature.
  • the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 .
  • the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the fixing portion 2080 .
  • FIG. 29 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first posture positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 are not shown in FIG. 29 , and the first posture positioning part 2120 is used to project the second projection feature, and the second projection feature is a cross light spot.
  • the first pose localization feature is a cross mark point.
  • FIG. 30 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another first posture positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the first posture positioning part 2120 is integrated with the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 , and the first posture positioning feature is set on the back of the hand of the measured object.
  • the first posture positioning part 2120 is used to project the second projection feature, and the second projection feature is a cross light spot.
  • the first posture positioning part 2120 includes a second laser.
  • the second laser may project a predetermined shaped light spot to form the second projection feature.
  • the first adjustment unit is configured to: acquire a third target image.
  • a second template image is acquired, wherein the second template image includes the first gesture location feature.
  • the current measurement posture is adjusted to obtain a new third target image until the new third target image matches the second template image.
  • the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a third image acquisition part 2130 , and the third image acquisition part 2130 is disposed on the object to be measured, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects , and the third image acquisition part 2130 is used to acquire a third target image.
  • FIG. 31 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a third image acquisition part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the third image acquisition part 2130 is integrated with the measurement probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 , and the first posture positioning feature is set on the back of the hand of the measured object.
  • the third image acquisition part 2130 is used to acquire a third target image.
  • the third image acquisition part 2130 may be an image sensor.
  • the third image capturing part 2130 , the first image capturing part 2110 and the second image capturing part may be different, partially the same, or all the same.
  • the first adjustment unit is configured to: acquire a fourth target image, wherein the fourth target image includes the first posture positioning feature.
  • the current measurement posture is determined as the target measurement posture.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a fourth image acquisition part, the fourth image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the fourth image acquisition part is used for A fourth target image is acquired.
  • the fourth image capturing part, the third image capturing part 2130, the first image capturing part 2110, and the second image capturing part may be different, partially the same, or all the same.
  • the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 in a case where it is determined that the fourth image acquisition part is provided on the measurement probe 2070 . In the case where it is determined that the fourth image capturing part is provided on the fixing part 2080 , the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the fixing part 2080 .
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a third determination module and an adjustment module.
  • the third determining module is configured to determine the second posture positioning feature if the measurement probe 2070 is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area, in the case that the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture.
  • the adjustment module is configured to adjust the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature.
  • the second posture positioning feature is provided on at least one of the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing portion 2080 , and the measured object.
  • the adjustment module includes a first acquisition unit, a second adjustment unit and a second determination unit.
  • the first obtaining unit is used to obtain the third projection feature.
  • the second adjustment unit is configured to adjust the current measurement posture when it is determined that the second posture positioning feature does not match the third projection feature until the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature.
  • the second determining unit is configured to determine the current measurement posture as the target measurement posture when it is determined that the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature.
  • the tissue composition measuring device 2000 further includes a second posture positioning part, the second posture positioning part is arranged on the measured object, the measuring probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the second posture positioning part is used for Project a third projected feature.
  • the second posture positioning feature in a case where it is determined that the second posture positioning part is provided on the measuring probe 2070 , the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 . In the case where it is determined that the second posture positioning part is provided on the fixing part 2080 , the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 .
  • the second posture positioning part is the same as or different from the first posture positioning part 2120 .
  • the second posture positioning portion includes a third laser.
  • the third laser may project a predetermined shaped light spot to form the third projection feature.
  • the adjustment module includes a second acquisition unit, a third acquisition unit, a third adjustment unit, and a third determination unit.
  • the second acquiring unit is configured to acquire the fifth target image.
  • a third acquiring unit configured to acquire a third template image, wherein the third template image includes the second posture positioning feature.
  • a third adjustment unit configured to adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new fifth target image when it is determined that the fifth target image does not match the third template image, until the new fifth target image and the third template image match.
  • the third determination unit is configured to determine the current measurement posture as the target measurement posture when it is determined that the new fifth target image matches the third template image.
  • the tissue composition measurement device further includes a fifth image acquisition part, the fifth image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the fifth image acquisition part is used for acquiring Fifth target image.
  • the adjustment module includes a fourth acquisition unit, a fourth adjustment unit, and a fourth determination unit.
  • the fourth acquisition unit is configured to acquire a sixth target image, wherein the sixth target image includes the second posture positioning feature.
  • the fourth adjustment unit is configured to adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new sixth target image when it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is not at the third preset position, until the new sixth The position of the second gesture positioning feature in the target image is at a third preset position.
  • the fourth determining unit is configured to determine the current measurement posture as the target measurement posture when it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is at the third preset position.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a sixth image acquisition part, the sixth image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the sixth image acquisition part is used for A sixth target image is acquired.
  • the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 .
  • the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 .
  • the sixth image acquisition part, the fifth image acquisition part, the fourth image acquisition part, the third image acquisition part 2130, the first image acquisition part 2110, and the second image acquisition part may be different, partially the same, or All the same.
  • the area locating part 2100 , the first posture locating part 2120 and the second posture locating part may be all the same, partially the same, or all different
  • the said part is the same means that two of the above three structures are the same. If the three structures are all the same, it can be stated that the same structure can be used to generate the first projected feature, the second projected feature and the third projected feature. The above manner can simplify the complexity of the positioning structure.
  • the first image acquisition part 2110, the third image acquisition part 2130 and the fifth image acquisition part may be all the same, partially the same or all different,
  • the said part is the same means that two of the above three structures are the same. If the three structures are all the same, it can be stated that the same structure can be used to generate the first target image, the third target image and the fifth target image. The above manner can simplify the complexity of the positioning structure.
  • the second image acquisition part, the fourth image acquisition part and the sixth image acquisition part may be all the same, partially the same or all different, and the parts are the same It means that two of the above three structures are the same. If the three structures are all the same, it can be stated that the same structure can be used to generate the second target image, the fourth target image and the sixth target image. The above manner can simplify the complexity of the positioning structure.
  • optical method is used as an example for description below.
  • the area positioning unit 2100, the first posture positioning unit 2120, and the second posture positioning unit have the same structure.
  • the second pose location feature is identical to the region location feature and is partially identical to the first pose location feature.
  • the measurement area is the extended side of the forearm.
  • FIG. 32 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a measurement posture and measurement area positioning according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the area positioning part 2100 , the first attitude positioning part 2120 and the second attitude positioning part all include laser 1 and laser 2 .
  • the laser 1 and the laser 2 are provided in the measurement probe 2070 .
  • the measurement probe 2070 When the first measurement posture positioning is performed, the measurement probe 2070 is set on the base. Before the first measurement posture positioning is completed, the position of the measurement probe 2070 is fixed. According to the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature, adjust the current measurement posture until the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature match, and in the case of matching, the first measurement posture positioning is completed.
  • the measurement probe 2070 When positioning the measurement area, the measurement probe 2070 is set on the object to be measured, and the position of the measurement probe 2070 is adjusted according to the area location feature and the first projection feature until the area location feature matches the first projection feature. Next, it explains that the positioning of the measurement area is completed.
  • the measurement probe 2070 After the measurement probe 2070 is set on the object to be measured, if the current measurement posture is not the target posture, before the measurement, it is necessary to perform the positioning of the measurement posture again.
  • the second posture positioning feature and the third projection feature adjust the current measurement posture until the second posture positioning feature and the third projection feature match.
  • the region positioning unit 2100, the first posture positioning unit 2120, and the second posture positioning unit have the same configuration.
  • the region location feature is exactly the same as the second gesture location feature, and is partially the same as the first gesture location feature.
  • the measurement area is the extended side of the forearm.
  • FIG. 33 schematically shows another schematic diagram of measurement posture and measurement area positioning according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the area positioning part 2100 and the second posture positioning part both include the laser 3 and the laser 4 .
  • the first posture positioning unit 2120 includes the laser 5 and the laser 6 .
  • the laser 3 and the laser 4 are provided in the measurement probe 2070 .
  • the laser 5 and the laser 6 are provided on the base.
  • the tissue composition measurement device further includes a prompting module.
  • the prompting module is used to generate prompting information, wherein the prompting information is used to prompt that the measurement posture positioning and/or the measurement area positioning is completed, and the form of the prompting information includes at least one of image, voice or vibration.
  • the measuring probe 2070 is set on the fixing base 2081 .
  • the fixing base 2081 When it is determined that the fixing base 2081 is not set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the fixing base 2081 is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting 2082 , and the measurement probe 2070 is set on the fixing base 2081 .
  • the measurement probe 2070 when it is determined that the measurement probe 2070 is not arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area, the measurement probe 2070 is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
  • the processing module 2030 is configured to determine the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity from at least two output light intensities corresponding to preset wavelengths.
  • the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • Differential processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal. According to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined.
  • Differential processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal, which may include the following operations.
  • a differential circuit is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
  • performing differential processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
  • a differential algorithm is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
  • using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
  • a direct differential operation is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
  • using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations. Logarithmic processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity. Perform a direct differential operation on the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength is input into the first tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 is also used for:
  • a first tissue component concentration prediction model is established.
  • establishing the first tissue component concentration prediction model according to the first training sample set may include the following operations.
  • the first training sample set is preprocessed to obtain the processed first training sample set. According to the processed first training sample set, a first tissue component concentration prediction model is established.
  • the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
  • the first tissue component concentration prediction model is modified to process the new differential signal using the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • modifying the first tissue component concentration prediction model may include the following operations.
  • the first tissue component concentration prediction model is corrected based on the difference signal corresponding to the first target concentration and the first target concentration.
  • the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
  • the new differential signal is processed by using the new first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
  • the plurality of current interference parameter values and the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength are input into the second tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
  • the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
  • a second training sample set Acquiring a second training sample set, wherein the second training sample set includes a plurality of second training samples, wherein each second training sample includes a second true concentration of the measured tissue component and a differential signal corresponding to the second true concentration .
  • Obtain a third training sample set wherein the third training sample set includes a plurality of third training samples, wherein each third training sample includes a training interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters and a The differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter value.
  • a prediction model for the concentration of tissue components to be corrected is established.
  • a correction parameter model is established.
  • a second tissue component concentration prediction model is obtained.
  • the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
  • the second tissue component concentration prediction model is revised, so as to use the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model to process the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values to obtain Concentrations of new tested tissue components.
  • modifying the second tissue component concentration prediction model may include the following operations.
  • a differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration is acquired.
  • the second tissue component concentration prediction model is modified according to the second target concentration, the plurality of interference parameter values, and the differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration.
  • the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
  • the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values are processed by using the new second tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  • one or more photosensitive surfaces of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelengths exist in the M photosensitive surfaces, wherein the same photosensitive surfaces are used to collect the first output light intensity and the corresponding preset wavelengths at different times.
  • the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength are the output light intensity in the same pulsation period, wherein the first output light intensity is the systolic light intensity, the second output light intensity
  • the output light intensity is the diastolic light intensity
  • the same photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces.
  • the processing module 2030 is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the M photosensitive surfaces there are a first photosensitive surface of the same type and a second photosensitive surface of the same type corresponding to a preset wavelength, wherein the first photosensitive surface of the same type is used to collect the first output corresponding to the preset wavelength Light intensity, the second same type of photosensitive surface is used to collect the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, the first same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the second same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces.
  • the processing module 2030 is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the second photosensitive surface of the same type are the same photosensitive surface, and the outgoing light received by the first photosensitive surface and the second photosensitive surface of the same type is the incident light incident from different incident positions through the transmitted.
  • the first photosensitive surface of the same kind and the second photosensitive surface of the same kind are different photosensitive surfaces of the same kind.
  • the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the first same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the first average optical path range, wherein the first average optical path range is based on the first The optical path average value is determined, and the first optical path average value is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive position of the first photosensitive surface of the same type.
  • the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the second same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the second average optical path range, wherein the second average optical path range is determined according to the average value of the second optical path, wherein, the average value of the second optical path is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface of the second same type of photosensitive surface.
  • the absolute value of the difference between the first optical path average value and the second optical path average value belongs to the first optical path difference range.
  • the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range
  • the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range
  • the first optical path difference range is determined according to the optimal differential optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the source-detection distance of each photosensitive surface of the first same type of photosensitive surfaces corresponding to the preset wavelength from the center of the incident light is within the range of the preset source-detection distance corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the preset It is assumed that the source-detection distance range is determined according to the source-detection distance from the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength to the center of the incident light.
  • the M photosensitive surfaces have the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface is used to collect the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, and the same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surface.
  • the processing module 2030 is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  • the difference between the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface and the optimal optical length corresponding to the preset wavelength belongs to the second optical path difference range.
  • each photosensitive surface includes an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, and the shapes of different photosensitive surfaces are the same or different.
  • the non-ring-shaped photosensitive surface includes a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, an elliptical photosensitive surface, or a polygonal photosensitive surface.
  • the polygonal photosensitive surface includes a square photosensitive surface, a rectangular photosensitive surface, or a triangular photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the same type of photosensitive surface is used to output one output light intensity.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is an annular photosensitive surface, including:
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent annular photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is a ring-shaped photosensitive surface formed by combining the multiple photosensitive surfaces.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface, including: in the case that the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent non-annular photosensitive surface.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes a plurality of photosensitive surfaces
  • the same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface formed according to the combination of the multiple photosensitive surfaces.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes a ring photosensitive surface, a fan ring photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface or Square photosensitive surface.
  • the shape of the same type of photosensitive surface is determined according to the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
  • the jitter distribution of the outgoing light includes a jitter distribution along a first direction and a jitter distribution along the second direction, the first direction and the second direction are perpendicular to each other, and the same photosensitive surfaces are along the first direction.
  • the ratio of the upward length to the length of the same photosensitive surface along the second direction is determined according to the ratio of the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the first direction to the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the second direction.
  • the upward jitter is the largest.
  • the same type of photosensitive surface includes a rectangular photosensitive surface or an elliptical photosensitive surface, and the ratio of the length to the width of the rectangular photosensitive surface is based on the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the first direction and the outgoing light in the second direction.
  • the ratio of the jitter amplitude is determined, and the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis of the elliptical photosensitive surface is determined according to the ratio of the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the first direction to the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the second direction.
  • the anodes of different photosensitive surfaces among the M photosensitive surfaces are not electrically connected to each other, the anodes of some of the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected, or the anodes of all the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected.
  • the anodes of different photosensitive surfaces among the M photosensitive surfaces are not electrically connected to each other, the anodes of some of the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected, or the anodes of all the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected.
  • each of the M photosensitive surfaces may be used independently, and in this case, anodes of different photosensitive surfaces of the M photosensitive surfaces are not electrically connected.
  • M photosensitive surfaces may be used in combination, and in this case, the anodes of the different photosensitive surfaces used in combination are electrically connected.
  • All of the M photosensitive surfaces may be used in combination, in which case the anodes of the different photosensitive surfaces used in combination are electrically connected.
  • FIG. 34 schematically shows a schematic diagram of an anode electrical connection of different photosensitive surfaces according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 34, the anodes of all the photosensitive surfaces were electrically connected.
  • different parts of the same photosensitive surface are on the same plane or different planes.
  • the photosensitive surface may be a flat photosensitive surface or a three-dimensional photosensitive surface, wherein if different parts of the photosensitive surface are on the same plane, the photosensitive surface is a flat photosensitive surface. If there are different parts of the photosensitive surface on different planes, the photosensitive surface is a three-dimensional photosensitive surface, and the specific use of a flat photosensitive surface or a three-dimensional photosensitive surface can be set according to the actual situation, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the target surface of the photosensitive surface refers to the surface close to the measurement area. Since the flatness of the skin surface in the measurement area may not be high, if a flat photosensitive surface is used, it may be difficult to achieve a good fit between the target surface of the photosensitive surface and the skin surface of the measurement area, while the stereo photosensitive surface is There are photosensitive surfaces with different parts in different planes. Therefore, a three-dimensional photosensitive surface can be used, and a specific stereoscopic photosensitive surface can be set according to the organizational structure characteristics of the measurement area.
  • FIG. 35 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a stereoscopic photosensitive surface in the form of a glove according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 36 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another stereoscopic photosensitive surface in the form of a glove according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 37 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of a wristband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 38 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a stereoscopic photosensitive surface in the form of another wristband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • h1 and h2 represent the distances of different parts of the photosensitive surface from the preset plane.
  • FIG. 39 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a stereoscopic photosensitive surface for arm measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the distances of different parts of the photosensitive surface from the preset plane can be set according to the structural characteristics of the arm.
  • the photosensitive surface sets are on the same plane or different planes, wherein the photosensitive surface set includes a plurality of photosensitive surfaces.
  • each photosensitive surface included in the set of photosensitive surfaces may be a planar photosensitive surface or a three-dimensional photosensitive surface. If the photosensitive surface set includes multiple plane photosensitive surfaces, the photosensitive surface form presented by the photosensitive surface set can be realized by setting some or all of the plane photosensitive surfaces on different planes. It is a three-dimensional photosensitive surface.
  • the preset wavelength is a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue composition.
  • the tissue composition measurement device further includes a temperature control module configured to control the temperature of the measurement region to remain within a preset temperature range during the tissue composition measurement process.
  • the tissue composition measurement device further includes a mask, which is disposed on the initial photosensitive surface, wherein the light transmittance of the mask is less than or equal to a light transmittance threshold.
  • the mask plate is used to obtain the photosensitive surface after setting the mask plate on the initial photosensitive surface.
  • the shape of the mask plate is determined according to the shape of the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
  • the measurement probe 2070 is provided with a first sleeve 2140 .
  • the first end face of the first sleeve extends beyond the target surface of the measurement probe 2070, wherein the first end face represents the end face close to the measurement area, and the target surface of the measurement probe 2070 refers to the surface close to the measurement area.
  • the first sleeve 2140 may be provided on the measurement probe 2070 so that the end face of the first sleeve 2140 close to the measurement area exceeds the target surface of the measurement probe 2070 .
  • Interfering light may include surface reflected light and/or diffracted light.
  • the second end face and/or the inner area of the first sleeve 2140 are provided with scattering objects, wherein the first end face and the second end face are opposite end faces, and the inner area includes a partial inner area or the entire area inside.
  • the scatterer can include sulfated paper, silica gel, or a target mixture, wherein the target mixture can include a mixture of polydimethylsiloxane and titanium dioxide particles.
  • the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a second sleeve 2150 , and the second sleeve 2150 is disposed outside the target area of the first sleeve 2140 , wherein the target area represents The first sleeve 2140 extends beyond part or all of the target surface of the measurement probe 2070 .
  • a manner of disposing the second sleeve 2150 outside the target area of the first sleeve 2140 may be adopted.
  • the second sleeve 2150 is provided with a diffuser.
  • the second sleeve 2150 in order to make the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area uniform, a way of disposing scatterers in the corresponding part of the second sleeve 2150 may be adopted.
  • the inner diameter of the first sleeve 2140 is greater than or equal to the inner diameter threshold.
  • the opening of the first end surface of the first sleeve 2140 is greater than or equal to the opening of the second end surface of the first sleeve 2140 .
  • the inner diameter of the first sleeve 2140 may be greater than or equal to the inner diameter threshold, and/or the first end face of the first sleeve 2140 may be used.
  • the opening of the first sleeve 2140 is greater than or equal to the opening of the second end surface of the first sleeve 2140, that is, the opening of the end surface of the first sleeve 2140 close to the measurement area is greater than or equal to the opening of the first sleeve 2140 away from the measurement area. End openings.
  • a refractive index matcher is filled between the photosensitive surface and the measurement area.
  • the skin surface in the measurement area is unstable due to the jitter, which in turn causes the exit angle of the outgoing light to change, which affects the reliability of the measurement results.
  • the refractive index matching material is filled between the photosensitive surface and the measurement area to improve the stability and efficiency of the photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light.
  • FIG. 42 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light without filling with a refractive index matcher according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the blood vessel state 1 represents the vasoconstriction state
  • the blood vessel state 2 represents the vasodilation state
  • the skin state 1 represents the skin state corresponding to the blood vessel state 1
  • the skin state 2 represents the skin state corresponding to the blood vessel state 2 . It can be seen from Figure 42 that jitter will cause instability of the skin surface in the measurement area, which in turn will change the exit angle of the exiting light.
  • FIG. 43 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light under the condition of filling with a refractive index matcher according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 44 schematically shows another schematic diagram of the photosensitive surface receiving the outgoing light under the condition of filling with an index matching material according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the included angle between each part of the photosensitive surface and the direction of the corresponding incident light is greater than or equal to 0° and less than or equal to 360°.
  • the included angle between each part of the photosensitive surface and the direction of the corresponding incident light is greater than or equal to 0° and less than or equal to 360°, so as to realize the diffusion measurement.
  • a suitable location of the photosensitive surface can be determined according to the wavelength characteristic and/or the measurement area characteristic, wherein the wavelength characteristic may include the penetration depth of the wavelength, and the measurement area characteristic may include the thickness of the measurement area.
  • the position of the photosensitive surface and the incident position of the corresponding incident light may be located on opposite sides of the measurement area. If the penetration depth of the wavelength is shallow and/or the thickness of the measurement area is thick, the position of the photosensitive surface can be set to be on the same side of the measurement area as the incident position of the corresponding incident light.
  • FIG. 45 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a diffusion measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the angle between the photosensitive surface C and the incident light is 90°
  • the position of the photosensitive surface D and the position of the incident light are located on the same side of the measurement area
  • the position of the photosensitive surface E and the position of the incident light are located on the different side of the measurement area. side.
  • any of the modules, units, or at least part of the functions of any of the modules according to the embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented in one module. Any one or more of the modules and units according to the embodiments of the present disclosure may be divided into multiple modules for implementation. Any one or more of the modules and units according to the embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented at least partially as hardware circuits, such as Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA), Programmable Logic Arrays (Programmable Logic Arrays, PLA), system-on-chip, system-on-substrate, system-on-package, Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or any other reasonable means of hardware or firmware that can integrate or package a circuit, Or it can be implemented in any one of the three implementation manners of software, hardware and firmware, or in an appropriate combination of any of them. Alternatively, one or more of the modules and units according to the embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented at least in part as computer program modules, which, when executed, may perform corresponding functions.
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate
  • any number of acquisition modules and processing modules may be combined into one module/unit for implementation, or any one of the modules/units may be split into multiple modules/units.
  • at least part of the functionality of one or more of these modules/units may be combined with at least part of the functionality of other modules/units and implemented in one module/unit.
  • At least one of the acquisition module and the processing module may be implemented at least in part as a hardware circuit, such as a field programmable gate array (FPGA), a programmable logic array (PLA), a system on a chip, a A system, a system on a package, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or any other reasonable means of integrating or packaging a circuit can be implemented in hardware or firmware, or in any one of software, hardware, and firmware implementations or any appropriate combination of any of them.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • PLA programmable logic array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • at least one of the acquisition module and the processing module may be implemented, at least in part, as a computer program module that, when executed, may perform corresponding functions.
  • tissue composition measurement device in the embodiment of the present disclosure corresponds to the tissue composition measurement method part in the embodiment of the present disclosure, and the description of the tissue composition measurement device part refers to the tissue composition measurement method part, which is not described here. Repeat.
  • FIG. 46 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a wearable device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the wearable device 4600 shown in FIG. 46 is only an example, and should not impose any limitation on the functions and scope of use of the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the wearable device 4600 includes the tissue composition measurement device 2000 .
  • a single preset wavelength is used in combination with a photosensitive surface with the above characteristics to measure tissue components, and the real measured tissue component signals are directly obtained.
  • Using a single preset wavelength for tissue composition measurement reduces the volume and structural complexity of the light source module, thereby reducing the volume and structural complexity of devices and equipment, facilitating portable measurement, reducing the capacity requirements for power modules, and reducing cost of production.
  • the amount of data processing is also reduced.
  • the wearable device 4600 further includes a buckle portion 4610 and a body 4620 .
  • the buckle portion 4610 and the main body 4620 are used to cooperate to realize the fixation of the tissue composition measuring device 2000 .
  • FIG. 47 schematically shows a schematic diagram of an assembling process of a wearable device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the quality of the wearable device 4600 is less than or equal to a quality threshold, so that the movement law of the wearable device 4600 is consistent with the skin shaking law at the measurement area.
  • the weight of the wearable device 4600 in order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, can be made lighter, so that when the wearable device 4600 is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area, the wearable device 4600 can follow
  • the skin shaking at the measurement area that is, the movement law of the wearable device 4600 can be consistent with the skin shaking law at the measurement area, so that the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe 2070 is kept at a predetermined value during the skin shaking process. within the optical path range.
  • the reason why the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe 2070 can be maintained within the preset optical path range during the skin shaking process at the measurement area is that if the wearable device 4600 can follow the skin shaking at the measurement area, Then, the relative position of the measurement probe 2070 on the measurement area can be kept unchanged or basically unchanged, so that the measurement probe 2070 can receive the outgoing light emitted from the fixed outgoing position.
  • the relative position of the measurement area remains the same or remains substantially unchanged at the exit position.
  • the relative position of the incident position of the incident light on the measurement area can remain unchanged or substantially unchanged. Under the circumstance, it can be ensured that the average optical path of the outgoing light remains unchanged as much as possible.
  • FIG. 48 schematically illustrates a method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, under the condition that the wearable device is consistent with the skin shaking law, the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measuring probe is kept at the same value during the skin shaking process.
  • the measurement probe 2070 (not shown in FIG. 48 ) can stably receive the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position B in the measurement area after the incident light is incident from the incident position A in the measurement area.
  • the movement range of the skin is represented by ⁇ 1
  • the movement range of the measuring probe 2070 is represented by ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 .
  • the wearable device 4600 makes the movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area less than or equal to the movement amplitude threshold.
  • the quality of the wearable device 4600 can be made larger, and when the wearable device 4600 is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area, the skin at the measurement area can be pressed against the skin Shaking, that is, the movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area is less than or equal to the movement amplitude threshold, so that the average optical length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe 2070 is kept within the preset optical length range during the skin shaking process.
  • the reason why the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe 2070 can be kept within the preset optical path range during the skin shaking process at the measurement area is that if the wearable device 4600 can suppress the skin shaking at the measurement area , the relative position of the measurement probe 2070 on the measurement area can be kept unchanged or substantially unchanged as much as possible, so that the measurement probe 2070 can receive the outgoing light emitted from the fixed outgoing position. At the same time, during the skin shaking process at the measurement area, the relative position of the incident position of the incident light on the measurement area can remain unchanged or substantially unchanged. Under the circumstance, it can be ensured that the average optical path of the outgoing light remains unchanged as much as possible.
  • FIG. 49 schematically shows the average light of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe under the condition that the wearable device makes the movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area less than or equal to the movement amplitude threshold according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area in Figure 49 is close to zero.
  • the tissue composition measurement device includes a processor that can be executed according to a program stored in a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM) or a program loaded from a storage portion into a random access memory (RAM)
  • ROM Read-Only Memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • a processor may include, for example, a general-purpose microprocessor (eg, a CPU), an instruction set processor and/or a related chipset, and/or a special-purpose microprocessor (eg, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC)), among others.
  • Processing may also include on-board memory for caching purposes.
  • the processor may comprise a single processing unit or multiple processing units for performing different actions of the method flow according to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • various programs and data necessary for the operation of the tissue composition measurement device are stored.
  • the processor, ROM, and RAM are connected to each other through a bus.
  • the processor performs various operations of the method flow according to the embodiments of the present disclosure by executing programs in the ROM and/or RAM.
  • the program may also be stored in one or more memories other than ROM and RAM. Processes may also perform various operations of method flows according to embodiments of the present disclosure by executing programs stored in the one or more memories.
  • the wearable device may further include an input/output (I/O) interface, which is also connected to the bus.
  • the wearable device may also include one or more of the following components connected to the I/O interface: an input portion including a keyboard, mouse, etc.; including components such as a cathode ray tube (CRT), a liquid crystal display (LCD) etc., and an output portion of a speaker, etc.; a storage portion including a hard disk, etc.; and a communication portion including a network interface card such as a LAN card, a modem, and the like.
  • the communication section performs communication processing via a network such as the Internet.
  • Drives are also connected to the I/O interface as required. Removable media, such as magnetic disks, optical disks, magneto-optical disks, semiconductor memories, etc., are mounted on the drive as needed, so that the computer program read therefrom is installed into the storage section as needed.
  • the present disclosure also provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be included in the device/apparatus/system described in the above embodiments; it may also exist alone without being assembled into the device/system. device/system.
  • the above-mentioned computer-readable storage medium carries one or more programs, and when the above-mentioned one or more programs are executed, implement the method according to the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium. Examples may include, but are not limited to, portable computer disks, hard disks, random access memory (RAM), read only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read only memory (EPROM) or flash memory), portable compact Disk read-only memory (Computer Disc Read-Only Memory, CD-ROM), optical storage device, magnetic storage device, or any suitable combination of the above.
  • a computer-readable storage medium may be any tangible medium that contains or stores a program that can be used by or in conjunction with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device.
  • a computer-readable storage medium may include one or more memories other than ROM and/or RAM and/or ROM and RAM described above.
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure also include a computer program product, which includes a computer program, and the computer program includes program codes for executing the methods provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the computer program may rely on a tangible storage medium such as an optical storage device, a magnetic storage device, or the like.
  • the computer program may also be transmitted, distributed in the form of a signal over a network medium, and downloaded and installed through the communication portion, and/or installed from a removable medium.
  • the program code embodied by the computer program may be transmitted using any suitable network medium, including but not limited to: wireless, wired, etc., or any suitable combination of the foregoing.
  • the program code for executing the computer program provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure may be written in any combination of one or more programming languages, and specifically, high-level procedures and/or object-oriented programming may be used. programming language, and/or assembly/machine language to implement these computational programs. Programming languages include, but are not limited to, languages such as Java, C++, python, "C" or similar programming languages.
  • the program code may execute entirely on the user computing device, partly on the user device, partly on a remote computing device, or entirely on the remote computing device or server.
  • the remote computing devices may be connected to the user computing device through any kind of network, including Local Area Networks (LANs) or Wide Area Networks (WANs), or may be connected to external A computing device (eg, connected via the Internet using an Internet service provider).
  • LANs Local Area Networks
  • WANs Wide Area Networks
  • a computing device eg, connected via the Internet using an Internet service provider.
  • the measured tissue component is blood sugar
  • the measured area is the forearm extension side of the left arm
  • the preset wavelength is 1550 nm. That is, it is verified by in vivo experiments that a tissue composition measurement device with a single preset wavelength combined with a large-area photosensitive surface is used for tissue composition measurement, and the real blood glucose signal that changes synchronously with the blood glucose concentration can be directly obtained.
  • the inner diameters of the four annular photosensitive surfaces from the inside to the outside in the radial direction are the first inner diameter, the second inner diameter, the third inner diameter and the fourth inner diameter, wherein the first inner diameter is 0.8mm, and the second inner diameter is 3.2mm, The third inner diameter is 3.8 mm and the fourth inner diameter is 4.4 mm.
  • the first inner diameter, the second inner diameter, the third inner diameter and the fourth inner diameter all represent diameters.
  • the first gesture location feature and the second gesture location feature are the same, hereinafter referred to as the gesture location feature.
  • the first is the setting of the pose positioning feature. That is, according to the relationship between the forearm extension side and the bones and muscles between the forearm extension side and the surrounding parts, the setting position of the posture positioning feature is determined. For the forearm extension side, since the change of the wrist state will greatly affect the skin condition of the forearm extension side, in order to improve the positioning accuracy of the measurement posture, a position for setting the positioning feature can be determined on both sides of the wrist. It is the first preset position of the forearm extension side of the left arm close to the elbow joint and the second preset position of the back of the left hand close to the wrist.
  • a support plane is used for the support of the arm and the palm, and it is required that the arm should be tightly attached to the support plane during the positioning process to limit the rotation of the arm. Therefore, in order to achieve To measure the precise positioning of the posture, it is only necessary to set a posture positioning feature at the selected first preset position and the second preset position respectively.
  • the two posture positioning features can be selected from inherent features on the object to be measured, or can be set manually. In this specific example, they are two manually set posture positioning features, and the two posture positioning features are cross mark points.
  • the positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture are realized by the optical method. Among them, the positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture are realized based on the positioning unit.
  • the positioning part includes a region positioning part and a posture positioning part.
  • the posture positioning part is used to realize the functions of the first posture positioning part and the second posture positioning part, that is, the first posture positioning part and the second posture positioning part are the same posture positioning part.
  • the positioning part and the measuring probe are separate. Both the area positioning part and the posture positioning part use a red laser capable of projecting a cross beam spot.
  • FIG. 50 schematically shows a schematic diagram of synchronizing the positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the first method is oral glucose solution. Blood glucose concentration regulation was performed by oral glucose tolerance test (Oral Glucose Tolerance Test, OGTT).
  • OGTT Oral Glucose Tolerance Test
  • the OGTT usually requires the subject to take a glucose solution in which 75 g of glucose is dissolved in 250 ml of water orally. This approach was used for healthy volunteers.
  • MTT oral normal food tolerance test
  • MTT usually requires the subjects to take ordinary food with carbohydrates as the mainstay, and a small amount of protein, and to drink as little water as possible or drink high-water drinks, and the total amount of water consumed is less than 50ml. This method is used for volunteers with diabetes.
  • the venous blood was collected from the back of the right hand with a venous indwelling needle and measured by three portable blood glucose meters (GT-1820, Arkray, Japan). The average blood glucose value was taken as the true blood glucose value.
  • the measured signal-to-noise ratio of the standard reflector and the forearm extension side of the test object was measured, and the measured signal-to-noise ratio was compared with the target signal-to-noise ratio to determine the performance of the experimental device. If the measured SNR is lower than the target SNR, the experimental setup is feasible.
  • the reflectivity of the standard reflector is 40%, and the light intensity values collected by the four annular photosensitive surfaces when measuring the reflector are similar to those when measuring the tissue composition.
  • FIG. 51 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a variation of a differential signal obtained by measuring a standard reflective plate according to an embodiment of the present disclosure as a function of measurement duration.
  • the differential signal fluctuates in the range of about 0.0003a.u. This corresponds to a change in blood glucose concentration of 4.5 mg/dL.
  • the measured object needs to keep an empty stomach when measuring, and the positioning of the measurement area and the measurement posture is realized by an optical method, and during the measurement process, the measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  • the logarithmic difference operation of the output light intensity collected by the two annular photosensitive surfaces with the inner diameter of the third inner diameter and the fourth inner diameter is carried out to obtain a differential signal, which is calculated based on the differential signal at the end of eating when the blood sugar concentration is stable.
  • the variation of the differential signal during the corresponding variation of the differential signal the result is shown in Figure 52.
  • Fig. 52 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the variation of the differential signal obtained by measuring the forearm extension side of the subject under a steady state of blood glucose concentration according to an embodiment of the present disclosure as a function of the measurement time.
  • the tested objects included 10 healthy volunteers and 7 diabetic volunteers, including 11 males and 6 females, and 27 tests were performed on the tested objects.
  • the age distribution of the subjects included 5 people aged 20 to 30, 4 people aged 30 to 50, and 8 people aged 50 to 72. Among them, 8 people aged 50 to 72 included 6 diabetic patients.
  • the left arm of the object to be measured is placed on the workbench, and the arm can be moved slightly during non-measurement. After the device is warmed up, continuous optical measurement is performed, and the true value of blood glucose is also collected at 5-minute intervals while the optical measurement is performed until the blood glucose concentration of the measured object returns to a lower level. In the process of signal acquisition, the optical method is used to locate the measurement posture.
  • the experiment was divided into a warm-up phase, a feeding phase, and a sugar-loading experimental phase.
  • the warm-up phase is the first 0 to 1 hour of the experiment. During this phase, the measurement probe and the skin will exchange heat until thermal equilibrium is reached. A fasting blood glucose value needs to be collected during the warm-up phase.
  • the eating phase generally takes ten minutes to eat. At this time, the tested subjects can move slightly. During the period from the end of eating until the end of the measurement, the arm posture of the subject is optically set as the target measurement posture.
  • the sugar loading experiment phase lasted 1 to 1.5 hours.
  • the true value of blood glucose was measured every 5 to 10 minutes, and the measurement signal was recorded at the same time.
  • the amplitude of the variation of the average differential signal is about 0.0012 a.u. every time the blood glucose concentration of the measured object changes by 1 mmol/L.
  • the change of the differential signal is synchronized with the change of the blood glucose concentration.
  • the correlation coefficient between the two reaches a maximum of 0.96 and an average of 0.80.
  • the corresponding root mean square error of the directly distinguishable blood glucose concentration is at least 0.34 mmol/L, and the average is 0.82. mmol/L.
  • FIG. 53 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the results of a single sugar loading experiment using the OGTT method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 53 is a schematic diagram of the results for a certain measured object.
  • FIG. 54 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the variation of the differential signal and the true value of blood glucose according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the test object was a 29-year-old male healthy volunteer.
  • the difference from the single sugar loading experiment is that this experiment requires two meals, that is, after the first sugar loading experiment is completed, the experiment is still continued.
  • the overall experiment lasted about 6 hours, and the rest of the setup was the same as the single sugar loading experiment.
  • FIG. 56 schematically shows a blood glucose prediction value and a blood glucose true value according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 56 schematically shows a blood glucose prediction value and a blood glucose true value according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • tissue composition measuring device measures the tissue composition, and directly obtains the real blood glucose signal. At the same time, the importance and validity of the three principles of tissue composition measurement are also confirmed.
  • each block in the flowchart or block diagrams may represent a module, segment, or portion of code that contains one or more logical functions for implementing the specified functions executable instructions.
  • the functions noted in the blocks may occur out of the order noted in the figures. For example, two blocks shown in succession may, in fact, be executed substantially concurrently, or the blocks may sometimes be executed in the reverse order, depending upon the functionality involved.
  • each block of the block diagrams or flowchart illustrations, and combinations of blocks in the block diagrams or flowchart illustrations can be implemented in special purpose hardware-based systems that perform the specified functions or operations, or can be implemented using A combination of dedicated hardware and computer instructions is implemented.
  • Those skilled in the art will appreciate that various combinations and/or combinations of features recited in various embodiments and/or claims of the present disclosure are possible, even if such combinations or combinations are not expressly recited in the present disclosure.
  • various combinations and/or combinations of the features recited in the various embodiments of the present disclosure and/or in the claims may be made without departing from the spirit and teachings of the present disclosure. All such combinations and/or combinations fall within the scope of this disclosure.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Artificial Intelligence (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
  • Physiology (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
  • Evolutionary Computation (AREA)
  • Fuzzy Systems (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Measurement Of The Respiration, Hearing Ability, Form, And Blood Characteristics Of Living Organisms (AREA)
  • Investigating Or Analysing Materials By Optical Means (AREA)

Abstract

A tissue element measurement method and apparatus, and a wearable device. Said method comprises: irradiating a measurement area with incident light having a single preset wavelength (S310), each beam of incident light passing through the measurement area and then emitting from at least one emergent position to form at least one beam of emergent light, and the incident light having at least one incident position; acquiring light intensity values corresponding to each beam of emergent light and acquired by M photosensitive surfaces, so as to obtain T output light intensities, the output light intensities being obtained by processing the light intensity values of the emergent light acquired by one or more photosensitive surfaces, each of the photosensitive surfaces being capable of acquiring the light intensity value of the emergent light emitted from the emergent position, corresponding to the photosensitive surface, within a preset anti-shake range, and 1 ≤ T ≤ M (S320); according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, determining the concentration of the measured tissue element (S330).

Description

组织成分测量方法、装置及可穿戴设备Tissue composition measurement method, device and wearable device 技术领域technical field
本公开实施例涉及光谱测量技术领域,更具体地,涉及一种组织成分测量方法、装置及可穿戴设备。Embodiments of the present disclosure relate to the technical field of spectral measurement, and more particularly, to a tissue composition measurement method, device, and wearable device.
背景技术Background technique
人体的体液中包含有多种组织成分,如血糖、脂肪和白细胞等,每种组织成分的浓度需在其对应的浓度范围内,才能保证人体的健康运转。但是,针对某些个体来说,由于其组织成分易出现失衡情况,即组织成分的浓度不在数值范围内,进而导致身体罹患疾病,危害健康甚至生命,因此,针对这类对象,需要对组织成分进行实时测量。The body fluids of the human body contain a variety of tissue components, such as blood sugar, fat, and white blood cells. The concentration of each tissue component must be within its corresponding concentration range to ensure the healthy operation of the human body. However, for some individuals, because their tissue components are prone to imbalance, that is, the concentration of tissue components is not within the value range, which will lead to diseases, endanger health and even life. Therefore, for such objects, it is necessary to analyze the tissue components. Take real-time measurements.
由于光学方法具有快速、无创伤和信息多维化等特点,因此,在相关技术中通常采用光学方法进行组成成分测量。根据测量原理来分,光学方法主要包括拉曼光谱法、偏振法、光学相干断层成像法、光声光谱法、中红外光谱和近红外光谱法等。Because the optical method has the characteristics of rapidity, non-invasiveness and multi-dimensional information, the optical method is usually used to measure the composition in the related art. According to the measurement principle, optical methods mainly include Raman spectroscopy, polarization method, optical coherence tomography, photoacoustic spectroscopy, mid-infrared spectroscopy and near-infrared spectroscopy.
在实现本公开构思的过程中,发明人发现相关技术中至少存在如下问题:采用相关技术难以获取到可靠的测量结果。In the process of realizing the concept of the present disclosure, the inventor found that the related art has at least the following problem: it is difficult to obtain reliable measurement results by using the related art.
公开内容public content
有鉴于此,本公开实施例提供了一种组织成分测量方法、装置及可穿戴设备。In view of this, embodiments of the present disclosure provide a tissue composition measurement method, device, and wearable device.
本公开实施例的一个方面提供了一种组织成分测量方法,该方法包括:以单个预设波长的入射光照射测量区域,其中,每束上述入射光通过上述测量区域后从至少一个出射位置出射形成至少一束出射光,上述入射光的入射位置包括至少一个;获取由M个感光面采集的与每束上述出射光对应的光强值,得到T个输出光强,其中,每个上述输出光强是根据一个或多个上述感光面采集到的出射光的光强值处理得到的,每个上述感光面能够采集到与上述感光面对应的预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,1≤T≤M;以及,根据与上述预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。One aspect of the embodiments of the present disclosure provides a method for measuring tissue components, the method comprising: irradiating a measurement area with incident light of a single preset wavelength, wherein each beam of the incident light exits from at least one exit position after passing through the measurement area At least one beam of outgoing light is formed, and the incident position of the above-mentioned incident light includes at least one; the light intensity values corresponding to each beam of the above-mentioned outgoing light collected by the M photosensitive surfaces are obtained, and T output light intensities are obtained, wherein each of the above-mentioned outputs The light intensity is obtained by processing according to the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by one or more of the above-mentioned photosensitive surfaces. The light intensity value of the outgoing outgoing light is 1≤T≤M; and, according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined.
本公开实施例的另一个方面提供了一种组织成分测量装置,该装置包括:光源模块,用于以单个预设波长的入射光照射测量区域,其中,每束上述入射光通过上述测量区域后从至少一个出射位置出射形成至少一束出射光,上述入射光的入射位置包括至少一个;采集模块,上述采集模块包括M个感光面,每个上述感光面能够采集到与上述感光面对应的预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,上述采集模块用于获取由上述M个感光面采集 的与每束上述出射光对应的光强值,得到T个输出光强,其中,每个上述输出光强是根据一个或多个上述感光面采集到的出射光的光强值处理得到的,1≤T≤M;以及,处理模块,用于根据与上述预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。Another aspect of the embodiments of the present disclosure provides a tissue composition measurement device, the device includes: a light source module for irradiating a measurement area with incident light of a single preset wavelength, wherein after each beam of the incident light passes through the measurement area At least one beam of outgoing light is emitted from at least one outgoing position, and the incident position of the incident light includes at least one; a collection module, the collection module includes M photosensitive surfaces, and each of the photosensitive surfaces can collect a corresponding photosensitive surface. The light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range, the above-mentioned acquisition module is used to obtain the light intensity value corresponding to each beam of the above-mentioned outgoing light collected by the above-mentioned M photosensitive surfaces, and obtain T outputs Light intensity, wherein each of the above-mentioned output light intensity is obtained by processing according to the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by one or more of the above-mentioned photosensitive surfaces, 1≤T≤M; At least one output light intensity corresponding to the wavelength is set to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component.
本公开实施例的另一个方面提供了一种可穿戴设备,该设备包括如上所述的组织成分测量装置。Another aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a wearable device including the tissue composition measurement device as described above.
附图说明Description of drawings
通过以下参照附图对本公开实施例的描述,本公开的上述以及其他目的、特征和优点将更为清楚,在附图中:The above and other objects, features and advantages of the present disclosure will become more apparent from the following description of embodiments of the present disclosure with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which:
图1示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在发生抖动时采用较小面积的感光面接收出射光的示意图;1 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a small area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图2示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在发生抖动时采用较大面积的感光面接收出射光的示意图;FIG. 2 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a larger area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图3示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种组织成分测量方法的流程图;FIG. 3 schematically shows a flow chart of a tissue composition measurement method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图4示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于蒙特卡罗模拟方法得到的测量结果的示意图;FIG. 4 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a measurement result obtained by a Monte Carlo simulation method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图5示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于光学方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图;FIG. 5 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种基于光学方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图;FIG. 6 schematically shows another schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于图像匹配方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图;FIG. 7 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on an image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图8示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种基于图像匹配方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图;FIG. 8 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on another image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图9示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种成像方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图;FIG. 9 schematically shows a schematic diagram of positioning the measurement area implemented by an imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种基于成像方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图;FIG. 10 schematically shows a schematic diagram of implementing positioning of a measurement area based on another imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图11示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于光学方法实现测量姿势的定位的示意图;FIG. 11 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图12示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种图像匹配方法实现测量姿势的定位的示意图;FIG. 12 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture by an image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图13示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于成像方法实现测量姿势的定位的示意 图;Fig. 13 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture based on an imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图14示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种差分测量的示意图;FIG. 14 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a differential measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图15示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种环形感光面的示意图;15 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a ring-shaped photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图16示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种扇环感光面的示意图;16 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a fan ring photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图17示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种圆形感光面的示意图;17 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a circular photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图18示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种正方形感光面的示意图;FIG. 18 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a square photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图19示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在初始感光面上设置掩膜板得到感光面的示意图;19 schematically shows a schematic diagram of setting a mask plate on an initial photosensitive surface to obtain a photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图20示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种组织成分测量装置的框图;FIG. 20 schematically shows a block diagram of a tissue composition measurement device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图21示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种组织成分测量装置的框图;FIG. 21 schematically shows a block diagram of another tissue composition measurement device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图22示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种固定部和测量探头的位置关系的示意图;FIG. 22 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the positional relationship between a fixing part and a measuring probe according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图23示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种固定部的结构示意图;FIG. 23 schematically shows a schematic structural diagram of a fixing part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图24示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种第一配合件的示意图;Fig. 24 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first fitting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图25示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种第一配合件的示意图;FIG. 25 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another first fitting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图26示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种区域定位部的示意图;Fig. 26 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a region positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图27示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种区域定位部的示意图;FIG. 27 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another area positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图28示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种第一图像采集部的示意图;FIG. 28 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first image acquisition part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图29示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种第一姿势定位部的示意图;FIG. 29 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first posture positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图30示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种第一姿势定位部的示意图;FIG. 30 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another first posture positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图31示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种第三图像采集部的示意图;FIG. 31 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a third image acquisition part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图32示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种测量姿势和测量区域定位的示意图;FIG. 32 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a measurement posture and measurement area positioning according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图33示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种测量姿势和测量区域定位的示意图;FIG. 33 schematically shows another schematic diagram of measurement posture and measurement area positioning according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图34示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种不同感光面的阳极电连接的示意图;FIG. 34 schematically shows a schematic diagram of anode electrical connection of different photosensitive surfaces according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图35示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种手套形式的立体感光面的示意图;FIG. 35 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of a glove according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图36示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种手套形式的立体感光面的示意图;FIG. 36 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of another glove according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图37示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种手环形式的立体感光面的示意图;37 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of a wristband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图38示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种手环形式的立体感光面的示意图;FIG. 38 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of another wristband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图39示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种用于手臂测量的立体感光面的示意图;FIG. 39 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a stereoscopic photosensitive surface for arm measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图40示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种测量探头上设置第一套筒的示意图;FIG. 40 schematically shows a schematic diagram of setting a first sleeve on a measuring probe according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图41示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种第一套筒的目标区域的外部设置第二套筒的示意图;41 schematically shows a schematic diagram of disposing a second sleeve outside the target area of a first sleeve according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图42示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在未填充折射率匹配物的情况下感光面接收出射光的示意图;FIG. 42 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light without an index matching material being filled according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图43示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在填充折射率匹配物的情况下感光面接收出射光的示意图;FIG. 43 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light under the condition of filling with an index matching material according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图44示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种在填充折射率匹配物的情况下感光面接收出射光的示意图;FIG. 44 schematically shows another schematic diagram of the photosensitive surface receiving the outgoing light under the condition of filling the index matching material according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图45示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种漫射测量的示意图;Figure 45 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a diffusion measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图46示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种可穿戴设备的示意图;FIG. 46 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a wearable device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图47示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种可穿戴设备的装配过程的示意图;FIG. 47 schematically shows a schematic diagram of an assembling process of a wearable device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图48示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在可穿戴设备与皮肤抖动规律保持一致的情况下使得测量探头接收的出射光的平均光程在皮肤抖动过程中保持在预设光程范围内的示意图;FIG. 48 schematically shows a method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, under the condition that the wearable device is consistent with the skin shaking law, the average optical length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe is kept at a preset optical length during the skin shaking process A schematic diagram of the range;
图49示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在可穿戴设备使得测量区域处的皮肤的移动幅度小于或等于移动幅度阈值的情况下测量探头接收的出射光的平均光程在皮肤抖动过程中保持在预设光程范围内的示意图;FIG. 49 schematically shows the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe under the condition that the movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area is less than or equal to the movement amplitude threshold value in the case where the wearable device according to the embodiment of the present disclosure is jittered on the skin Schematic diagram of keeping within the preset optical path range during the process;
图50示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于光学方法同步实现测量区域的定位和测量姿势的定位的示意图;Fig. 50 schematically shows a schematic diagram of synchronously realizing the positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图51示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种测量标准反射板得到的差分信号的变化量随测量时长变化的示意图;FIG. 51 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the variation of the differential signal obtained by measuring a standard reflective plate according to an embodiment of the present disclosure as a function of the measurement duration;
图52示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在被测对象血糖浓度稳定状态下测量其前臂伸侧得到的差分信号的变化量随测量时长变化的示意图;Figure 52 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the variation of the differential signal obtained by measuring the extension side of the forearm of the subject under a steady state of blood glucose concentration with the measurement duration according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图53示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种采用OGTT方式进行单次糖负载实验的结果示意图;Figure 53 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the results of a single sugar loading experiment using the OGTT method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图54示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种差分信号的变化量与血糖真值之间关系的示意图;Figure 54 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the variation of the differential signal and the true value of blood glucose according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图55示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种采用MTT方式进行双次糖负载实验的结果示意图;以及Figure 55 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the results of a double sugar loading experiment using the MTT method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; and
图56示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种血糖预测值与血糖真值之间关系的示意图。FIG. 56 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a relationship between a predicted blood glucose value and a true blood glucose value according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
以下,将参照附图来描述本公开的实施例。但是应该理解,这些描述只是示例性的,而 并非要限制本公开的范围。在下面的详细描述中,为便于解释,阐述了许多具体的细节以提供对本公开实施例的全面理解。然而,明显地,一个或多个实施例在没有这些具体细节的情况下也可以被实施。此外,在以下说明中,省略了对公知结构和技术的描述,以避免不必要地混淆本公开的概念。Hereinafter, embodiments of the present disclosure will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be understood, however, that these descriptions are exemplary only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present disclosure. In the following detailed description, for convenience of explanation, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the embodiments of the present disclosure. It will be apparent, however, that one or more embodiments may be practiced without these specific details. Also, in the following description, descriptions of well-known structures and techniques are omitted to avoid unnecessarily obscuring the concepts of the present disclosure.
在此使用的术语仅仅是为了描述具体实施例,而并非意在限制本公开。在此使用的术语“包括”、“包含”等表明了所述特征、步骤、操作和/或部件的存在,但是并不排除存在或添加一个或多个其他特征、步骤、操作或部件。The terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to limit the present disclosure. The terms "comprising", "comprising" and the like as used herein indicate the presence of stated features, steps, operations and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, steps, operations or components.
在此使用的所有术语(包括技术和科学术语)具有本领域技术人员通常所理解的含义,除非另外定义。应注意,这里使用的术语应解释为具有与本说明书的上下文相一致的含义,而不应以理想化或过于刻板的方式来解释。All terms (including technical and scientific terms) used herein have the meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art, unless otherwise defined. It should be noted that terms used herein should be construed to have meanings consistent with the context of the present specification and should not be construed in an idealized or overly rigid manner.
在使用类似于“A、B和C等中至少一个”这样的表述的情况下,一般来说应该按照本领域技术人员通常理解该表述的含义来予以解释(例如,“具有A、B和C中至少一个的系统”应包括但不限于单独具有A、单独具有B、单独具有C、具有A和B、具有A和C、具有B和C、和/或具有A、B、C的系统等)。在使用类似于“A、B或C等中至少一个”这样的表述的情况下,一般来说应该按照本领域技术人员通常理解该表述的含义来予以解释(例如,“具有A、B或C中至少一个的系统”应包括但不限于单独具有A、单独具有B、单独具有C、具有A和B、具有A和C、具有B和C、和/或具有A、B、C的系统等)。Where expressions like "at least one of A, B, and C, etc.," are used, they should generally be interpreted in accordance with the meaning of the expression as commonly understood by those skilled in the art (eg, "has A, B, and C") At least one of the "systems" shall include, but not be limited to, systems with A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B, A and C, B and C, and/or A, B, C, etc. ). Where expressions like "at least one of A, B, or C, etc.," are used, they should generally be interpreted in accordance with the meaning of the expression as commonly understood by those skilled in the art (eg, "has A, B, or C, etc." At least one of the "systems" shall include, but not be limited to, systems with A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B, A and C, B and C, and/or A, B, C, etc. ).
基于光学方法进行活体组织成分测量的研究至今已经经历了近五十年的发展,虽然大量的科研院所和公司在该领域投入了极大的研究热情,但由于被测组织成分本身吸收通常较弱,被测对象自身的被测组织成分浓度的变化范围通常也不大,因此,被测组织成分信号通常比较微弱,并且测量条件的变动等干扰会轻易淹没微弱的被测组织成分信号,而至今尚未出现实现可靠的活体组织成分测量的方案。由此,活体组织成分测量是一个亟待解决的世界难题。其中,组织成分可以包括血糖、脂肪和白细胞等。被测组织成分信号表示被测组织成分的浓度变化引起的输出光强变化。测量条件可以理解为是影响光的传输路径的条件。测量条件可以包括可控测量条件和不可控测量条件。可控测量条件是指在每次组织成分测量过程中,能够通过采用有效控制方法控制其保持在预设变化范围内(即保持不变或基本保持不变)的测量条件。不可控测量条件是指具有难以预知和不可控的特性的测量条件。可控测量条件可以包括温度、压力、测量区域和测量姿势等。不可控测量条件可以包括生理背景变动和测量装置漂移等。The research on the measurement of living tissue components based on optical methods has experienced nearly 50 years of development. Although a large number of scientific research institutes and companies have invested great research enthusiasm in this field, the absorption of the measured tissue components is usually higher than that of the measured tissue components. Weak, the variation range of the measured tissue component concentration of the measured object itself is usually not large, therefore, the measured tissue component signal is usually weak, and interference such as changes in measurement conditions will easily overwhelm the weak measured tissue component signal, while No solution has yet emerged to achieve reliable measurement of tissue composition in vivo. Therefore, the measurement of tissue composition in vivo is a world problem that needs to be solved urgently. Among them, the tissue components can include blood sugar, fat and white blood cells. The measured tissue component signal represents the output light intensity change caused by the concentration change of the measured tissue component. The measurement conditions can be understood as conditions affecting the transmission path of light. The measurement conditions may include controllable measurement conditions and uncontrollable measurement conditions. The controllable measurement conditions refer to the measurement conditions that can be controlled to remain within a preset variation range (ie, remain unchanged or substantially unchanged) by using an effective control method during each tissue component measurement process. Uncontrollable measurement conditions are measurement conditions with unpredictable and uncontrollable characteristics. Controllable measurement conditions may include temperature, pressure, measurement area, measurement posture, and the like. Uncontrollable measurement conditions may include physiological background changes and measurement device drift, among others.
在实现本公开构思的过程中,发明人发现采用相关技术难以获取到可靠的测量结果的主要原因在于。In the process of realizing the concept of the present disclosure, the inventors found that the main reason why it is difficult to obtain reliable measurement results by using related technologies is that.
发明人发现如果在其它条件不变的情况下,仅改变入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布,则得到的测量结果不同。如果将感光面设置于靠近血管得到的测量结果,与在其它条件不变的情况下,将同一感光面设置于远离血管得到的测量结果相比,则远离血管设置得到的测量结果优于靠近血管设置得到的测量结果。其中,测量结果可以用感光面接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量或光强值的标准差表征。在研究测量结果不同的原因时,发现改变入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布可以体现光源照射的随机性,与血管的远近可以体现脉搏跳动的强弱,而光源照射的随机性和脉搏跳动都是导致抖动的来源。由此,发现导致难以获取到可靠的测量结果的原因之一在于抖动。The inventors found that if only the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area is changed under the condition that other conditions remain unchanged, the obtained measurement results are different. If the measurement results obtained by setting the photosensitive surface close to the blood vessel are compared with the measurement results obtained by setting the same photosensitive surface far away from the blood vessel under the condition that other conditions remain unchanged, the measurement results obtained by setting the photosensitive surface away from the blood vessel are better than those obtained by setting the photosensitive surface away from the blood vessel. Set the resulting measurement. Wherein, the measurement result can be characterized by the relative variation of the light intensity value of the light received by the photosensitive surface and the standard deviation of the light intensity value. When studying the reasons for the different measurement results, it was found that changing the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area can reflect the randomness of the light source irradiation, the distance from the blood vessel can reflect the strength of the pulse beat, and the randomness of the light source irradiation and the pulse Jitter is a source of jitter. Thus, it was found that one of the reasons for the difficulty in obtaining reliable measurement results is jitter.
在对抖动研究的基础上,发现根据引起抖动的来源,可以将其分为内部来源和外部来源。其中,内部来源除了可以包括脉搏跳动外,还可以包括生理背景变动。外部来源除了可以包括光源照射的随机性,还可以包括入射光本身传输的不确定性。光源照射的随机性可以由入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布体现。并发现无论是内部来源导致的抖动,还是外部来源导致的抖动,均会影响光在组织内的传输路径,进而影响出射光在测量区域上的强度分布。Based on the research on jitter, it is found that according to the source that causes jitter, it can be divided into internal sources and external sources. Among them, the internal source can include not only the pulse beat, but also the physiological background variation. In addition to the randomness of the illumination of the light source, the external source can also include the uncertainty of the transmission of the incident light itself. The randomness of the light source illumination can be reflected by the intensity distribution of the light spot illuminated by the incident light to the measurement area. It was found that both the jitter caused by internal sources and the jitter caused by external sources will affect the transmission path of light in the tissue, thereby affecting the intensity distribution of the outgoing light on the measurement area.
为了解决由抖动导致的测量结果的可靠性不高的问题,发明人发现可以采用具有较大面积的感光面(即大面积感光面)采集出射光的光强值的方案,以有效抑制抖动对测量结果造成的不利影响。即大面积感光面可以有效抑制抖动造成的不利影响,所谓“大面积感光面”可以理解为感光面的面积使得感光面能够采集到预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值。大面积感光面的面积是连续的,大面积感光面是采用光敏材料制成的,其不同于单点光纤接收和多个单根光纤联合接收。下面将具体说明为什么采用大面积感光面采集出射光的输出光强的方案,可以有效抑制抖动对测量结果造成的不利影响。In order to solve the problem of low reliability of measurement results caused by jitter, the inventors found that a photosensitive surface with a large area (ie, a large-area photosensitive surface) can be used to collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light, so as to effectively suppress the effect of jitter on the adverse effects on measurement results. That is to say, the large-area photosensitive surface can effectively suppress the adverse effects caused by jitter. The so-called "large-area photosensitive surface" can be understood as the area of the photosensitive surface that enables the photosensitive surface to collect the outgoing light from the exit position within the preset anti-shake range. light intensity value. The area of the large-area photosensitive surface is continuous, and the large-area photosensitive surface is made of photosensitive materials, which is different from single-point fiber receiving and multiple single-fiber joint receiving. The following will specifically explain why the scheme of collecting the output light intensity of the outgoing light with a large-area photosensitive surface can effectively suppress the adverse effect of jitter on the measurement results.
由于大面积感光面可以提高感光面中能够稳定接收出射光的面积占该感光面的面积的比例,因此,能够提高接收出射光的稳定性,进而能够降低由抖动导致的出射光的强度分布的变化的不利影响,从而提高测量结果的可靠性。其中,稳定性可以用感光面接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量或光强值的标准差表征,光强值的相对变化量越小,稳定性越高,光强值的标准差越小,稳定性越高。Since the large-area photosensitive surface can increase the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface that can stably receive the outgoing light to the area of the photosensitive surface, the stability of receiving outgoing light can be improved, and the intensity distribution of the outgoing light caused by jitter can be reduced. adverse effects of changes, thereby increasing the reliability of the measurement results. Among them, the stability can be characterized by the relative change of the light intensity value of the light received by the photosensitive surface or the standard deviation of the light intensity value. The smaller the relative change of the light intensity value, the higher the stability, and the higher the standard deviation of the light intensity value. Smaller, the higher the stability.
示意性的,以脉搏跳动导致的抖动为例进行说明。脉搏跳动可以通过血管状态反映。图1示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在发生抖动时采用较小面积的感光面接收出射光的示意图。图2示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在发生抖动时采用较大面积的感光面接收出射光的示意图。图1和图2发生的抖动相同。图1中感光面A的面积小于图2中感光面B的面积。感光面A和感光面B均为正方形感光面。图1和图2中血管状态1表示血管收缩 状态,血管状态2表示血管舒张状态,皮肤状态1表示与血管状态1对应的皮肤状态,皮肤状态2表示与血管状态2对应的皮肤状态。皮肤状态1到皮肤状态2体现抖动。Illustratively, the jitter caused by pulse beating is taken as an example for description. Pulse beat can be reflected by the state of blood vessels. FIG. 1 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a small area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 2 schematically shows a schematic diagram of using a photosensitive surface with a larger area to receive outgoing light when jitter occurs according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The same jitter occurs in Figures 1 and 2. The area of the photosensitive surface A in FIG. 1 is smaller than the area of the photosensitive surface B in FIG. 2 . Both the photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B are square photosensitive surfaces. In FIGS. 1 and 2 , the vascular state 1 represents the vasoconstriction state, the vascular state 2 represents the vasodilation state, the skin state 1 represents the skin state corresponding to the vascular state 1 , and the skin state 2 represents the skin state corresponding to the vascular state 2 . Skin state 1 to skin state 2 embody jitter.
在发生相同抖动的情况下,比较采用不同面积的感光面获得的测量结果。测量结果用感光面在预设时间段内接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量或光强值的标准差表征。其中,光强值的相对变化量可以通过如下方式确定:计算预设时间段内的最大光强值和最小光强值的差值,计算预设时间段内的出射值的平均值,计算差值与平均值的比值,将该比值作为光强值的相对变化量。预设时间段可以为一个脉动周期。Compare measurements obtained with photosensitive surfaces of different areas under the same jitter. The measurement result is characterized by the relative variation of the light intensity value or the standard deviation of the light intensity value when the photosensitive surface receives the outgoing light within a preset time period. Wherein, the relative change of the light intensity value can be determined by the following methods: calculating the difference between the maximum light intensity value and the minimum light intensity value within the preset time period, calculating the average value of the outgoing values within the preset time period, and calculating the difference The ratio of the value to the average value, and the ratio is used as the relative change of the light intensity value. The preset time period may be a pulse period.
测量结果也显示无论采用感光面接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量表征测量结果,还是采用感光面接收出射光的光强值的标准差表征测量结果,采用感光面B获得的测量结果均优于采用感光面A获得的测量结果。The measurement results also show that no matter whether the relative variation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, or the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, the measurement results obtained by the photosensitive surface B are all the same. Better than measurements obtained with photosensitive surface A.
由于感光面B的面积大于感光面A的面积,因此,可以说明大面积感光面能够提高接收出射光的稳定性,进而能够降低由抖动导致的出射光的强度分布的变化的不利影响,从而提高测量精度。Since the area of the photosensitive surface B is larger than that of the photosensitive surface A, it can be explained that the large-area photosensitive surface can improve the stability of receiving the outgoing light, thereby reducing the adverse effects of changes in the intensity distribution of the outgoing light caused by jitter, thereby improving the measurement accuracy.
此外,由于出射光的输出光强比较微弱,由被测组织成分的浓度变化引起的输出光强变化也比较微弱,并且相关技术中采用的接收出射光的方式接收到的出射光的效率较低,因此,使得接收到的输出光强的信噪比比较低,进而导致测量结果的可靠性不高。本公开实施例的大面积感光面可以提高输出光强的信噪比,进而提高测量结果的可靠性。这是由于大面积感光面可以实现大范围出射光的接收,提高接收出射光的效率,由此可以提高输出光强的信噪比,提高测量结果的可靠性。In addition, since the output light intensity of the outgoing light is relatively weak, the change in the output light intensity caused by the concentration change of the measured tissue component is also relatively weak, and the method of receiving the outgoing light adopted in the related art has a low efficiency of the outgoing light received. , therefore, the signal-to-noise ratio of the received output light intensity is relatively low, resulting in low reliability of the measurement results. The large-area photosensitive surface of the embodiment of the present disclosure can improve the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity, thereby improving the reliability of the measurement result. This is because the large-area photosensitive surface can receive a wide range of outgoing light and improve the efficiency of receiving outgoing light, thereby improving the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity and improving the reliability of the measurement results.
需要说明的是,本公开实施例所述的大面积感光面能够在距测量区域的表面的距离较小的情况下,即能够在贴近测量区域的表面的情况下,实现较高的接收出射光的稳定性和效率。这是采用单点光纤接收和多个单根光纤联合接收所无法实现的,原因在于,其一,受限于光纤的数值孔径的约束;其二,受限于光纤的状态变化。光纤的状态易受到环境的影响,其变化对接收出射光的稳定性有较大影响。It should be noted that, the large-area photosensitive surface described in the embodiments of the present disclosure can achieve higher received and outgoing light when the distance from the surface of the measurement area is small, that is, when it is close to the surface of the measurement area stability and efficiency. This cannot be achieved by single-point fiber receiving and multiple single-fiber joint receiving because, first, it is limited by the numerical aperture of the fiber; second, it is limited by the state change of the fiber. The state of the optical fiber is easily affected by the environment, and its change has a great influence on the stability of receiving outgoing light.
还需要说明的是,通常为了提高输出光强的信噪比,可以采用大面积感光面。换句话说,大面积感光面通常所起到的作用在于提高输出光强的信噪比,这与大面积感光面在本公开实施例中主要所起的作用不同,在本公开实施例中,大面积感光面所起到的作用主要在于有效抑制抖动。It should also be noted that, generally, in order to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity, a large-area photosensitive surface can be used. In other words, the large-area photosensitive surface usually plays a role in improving the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity, which is different from the main role played by the large-area photosensitive surface in the embodiment of the present disclosure. In the embodiment of the present disclosure, The role of the large-area photosensitive surface is to effectively suppress jitter.
同时,在实现本公开构思的过程中,发明人发现在相关技术中,通常采用多变量分析方法处理多波长光谱数据,即通过多变量分析方法建立光学信号和被测组织成分浓度真值之间的数学模型,并采用建立的数学模型预测被测组织成分的浓度,从而能够间接获取到被测组 织成分信号。并且认为采用多变量分析方法才能实现活体组织成分测量,这是由于组织成分和物理状态(例如温度和压力等)在预设波段具有特征吸收,因此,普遍认为多变量分析方法是进行活体组织成分测量中干扰校正的潜在工具。其中,预设波段可以包括可见-近红外波段。鉴于多变量分析方法具有上述性能,因此,使得一些研究人员过度相信了多变量分析方法的可靠性。由此,相关技术中改进的方向也是沿着多变量分析方法展开的。At the same time, in the process of realizing the concept of the present disclosure, the inventors found that in the related art, multivariate analysis method is usually used to process multi-wavelength spectral data, that is, the multivariate analysis method is used to establish the relationship between the optical signal and the true value of the measured tissue component concentration The established mathematical model is used to predict the concentration of the measured tissue component, so that the measured tissue component signal can be obtained indirectly. And it is believed that the measurement of living tissue components can only be achieved by using multivariate analysis methods. This is because tissue components and physical states (such as temperature and pressure, etc.) have characteristic absorption in preset frequency bands. Potential tool for interference correction in measurements. Wherein, the preset wavelength band may include visible-near infrared wavelength band. Given the above-mentioned properties of multivariate analysis methods, some researchers are overconfident in the reliability of multivariate analysis methods. Therefore, the direction of improvement in the related art is also developed along the multivariate analysis method.
但是上述方法存在如下问题,由于测量条件的变动所引起的信号变化通常远大于被测组织成分浓度变化引起的信号变化,因此,采用多变量分析方法得到的测量结果很可能会与被测组织成分以外的干扰(例如生理背景干扰)引起的信号变化之间存在偶然相关,进而导致这种间接的被测组织成分信号的提取方式得到的结果可能是伪相关结果。However, the above methods have the following problems. The signal changes caused by changes in measurement conditions are usually much larger than those caused by changes in the concentration of the measured tissue components. Therefore, the measurement results obtained by the multivariate analysis method are likely to be different from the measured tissue components. There is an accidental correlation between signal changes caused by external interference (such as physiological background interference), which in turn leads to the result of this indirect extraction of the measured tissue component signal may be a false correlation result.
由于上述方式得到的测量结果可能是伪相关结果,因此,其并不能直接证明获取到的被测组织成分信号为真实的被测组织成分信号,由此,也不能直接证明活体组织成分测量的可行性,相应的,测量结果的可靠性不高。Since the measurement results obtained by the above methods may be pseudo-correlation results, they cannot directly prove that the obtained measured tissue component signal is the real measured tissue component signal, and therefore, cannot directly prove that the measurement of living tissue component is feasible. Therefore, the reliability of the measurement results is not high.
而直接获取真实的被测组织成分信号是实现活体组织成分测量的先决条件。为了确保能够获取到真实的被测组织成分信号,以提高测量结果的可靠性,本公开实施例提出采用单个预设波长结合大面积感光面进行活体组织成分测量的方案。The direct acquisition of the real measured tissue composition signal is a prerequisite for the realization of living tissue composition measurement. In order to ensure that the real measured tissue composition signal can be obtained to improve the reliability of the measurement result, the embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a solution of using a single preset wavelength combined with a large-area photosensitive surface to measure the tissue composition of the living body.
同时,为了实现活体组织成分测量装置及其设置活体组织成分测量装置的可穿戴设备的应用,需要使得装置和设备的体积尽可能小,电源消耗尽可能小,便于实际使用。当采用单个预设波长时,可以减少光源模块的体积和结构复杂度,进而减少装置和设备的体积和结构复杂度,便于便携测量,并可以降低对电源模块的容量要求,由此,可以降低制作成本。此外,也可以减少数据处理量。At the same time, in order to realize the application of the living tissue composition measurement device and the wearable device provided with the living tissue composition measurement device, it is necessary to make the volume of the device and the device as small as possible, and the power consumption is as small as possible, which is convenient for practical use. When a single preset wavelength is used, the volume and structural complexity of the light source module can be reduced, thereby reducing the volume and structural complexity of devices and equipment, facilitating portable measurement, and reducing the capacity requirement for the power module, thereby reducing the cost of production. In addition, the amount of data processing can also be reduced.
下面将结合具体实施例进行说明。The following will be described with reference to specific embodiments.
图3示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种组织成分测量方法的流程图。FIG. 3 schematically shows a flow chart of a tissue composition measurement method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
如图3所示,该方法包括操作S310~S330。As shown in FIG. 3, the method includes operations S310-S330.
在操作S310,以单个预设波长的入射光照射测量区域,其中,每束入射光通过测量区域后从至少一个出射位置出射形成至少一束出射光,入射光的入射位置包括至少一个。In operation S310, the measurement area is irradiated with a single preset wavelength of incident light, wherein each incident light passes through the measurement area and is emitted from at least one exit position to form at least one exit light, and the incident light incident position includes at least one.
根据本公开的实施例,由于不同测量部位具有不同的皮肤特性,可以包括光滑程度、有无毛发、平坦状态、皮肤厚度和柔软程度等,因此,需要根据实际情况,如测量探头的结构,选择合适的测量部位。测量部位可以包括手指、手掌、手臂、额头和耳垂中的至少一种。测量区域可以为测量部位上的区域。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, since different measurement sites have different skin characteristics, which may include smoothness, presence or absence of hair, flatness, skin thickness and softness, etc., it is necessary to select the measurement according to the actual situation, such as the structure of the measurement probe. suitable measurement site. The measurement site may include at least one of fingers, palms, arms, foreheads, and earlobes. The measurement area may be an area on the measurement site.
根据本公开的实施例,单个预设波长可以为对被测组织成分敏感的波长。单个预设波长所属的波段可以包括紫外波段、可见光波段、近红外波段、中红外波段或远红外波段。示例 性的,如被测组织成分为血糖,相应的,单个预设波长可以为对血糖敏感的波长,具体可以为1550nm或1609nm。入射光可以为准直光或非准直光。入射光的入射位置可以为一个或多个。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the single preset wavelength may be a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue composition. The band to which a single preset wavelength belongs may include an ultraviolet band, a visible light band, a near-infrared band, a mid-infrared band, or a far-infrared band. Exemplarily, if the measured tissue component is blood sugar, correspondingly, the single preset wavelength can be a wavelength sensitive to blood sugar, and specifically can be 1550 nm or 1609 nm. Incident light can be collimated or non-collimated. The incident position of the incident light may be one or more.
在操作S320,获取由M个感光面采集的与每束出射光对应的光强值,得到T个输出光强,其中,每个输出光强是根据一个或多个感光面采集到的出射光的光强值处理得到的,每个感光面能够采集到与感光面对应的预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,1≤T≤M。In operation S320, light intensity values corresponding to each outgoing light collected by the M photosensitive surfaces are acquired, and T output light intensities are obtained, wherein each output light intensity is an outgoing light collected according to one or more photosensitive surfaces Each photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range corresponding to the photosensitive surface, 1≤T≤M.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,需要尽量确保每个感光面能够采集与该感光面对应的预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,这就要求感光面的面积尽可能的大。每个感光面具有对应的预设防抖动范围,不同感光面的预设防抖动范围相同或不同。下面将结合示例从三个方面说明感光面的面积越大,抑制抖动的效果越好。预先设定感光面A的面积小于感光面B的面积。感光面A和感光面B均为正方形感光面。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, it is necessary to try to ensure that each photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range corresponding to the photosensitive surface , which requires the area of the photosensitive surface to be as large as possible. Each photosensitive surface has a corresponding preset anti-shake range, and the preset anti-shake ranges of different photosensitive surfaces are the same or different. In the following, it will be explained from three aspects that the larger the area of the photosensitive surface, the better the effect of suppressing jitter. It is preset that the area of the photosensitive surface A is smaller than the area of the photosensitive surface B. Both the photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B are square photosensitive surfaces.
其一,抑制由脉搏跳动导致的抖动。将感光面A和感光面B分别设置于测量区域上的同一位置,该位置为靠近血管的位置。在其它条件相同的情况下,比较采用感光面A和采用感光面B获得的测量结果,其中,测量结果用感光面在一个脉动周期内接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量或光强值的标准差表征。光强值的相对变化量的计算方式如上文所述,在此不再赘述。发现感光面B接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量小于感光面A接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量,感光面B接收出射光的光强值的标准差小于感光面A接收出射光的光强值的标准差。由此可以得出,无论采用感光面接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量表征测量结果,还是采用感光面接收出射光的光强值的标准差表征测量结果,采用感光面B获得的测量结果均优于采用感光面A获得的测量结果。One is to suppress the jitter caused by the pulse beat. The photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B are respectively set at the same position on the measurement area, which is a position close to the blood vessel. Under other conditions being the same, compare the measurement results obtained with the photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B, wherein the measurement results use the relative change or the light intensity value of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface during one pulsation period. standard deviation representation. The calculation method of the relative change of the light intensity value is as described above, and will not be repeated here. It is found that the relative variation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface B is smaller than the relative change of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface A, and the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface B is smaller than that received by the photosensitive surface A. The standard deviation of the light intensity values of the incident light. From this, it can be concluded that whether the measurement result is characterized by the relative change of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface, or the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, the measurement obtained by the photosensitive surface B is used to characterize the measurement result. The results are all better than those obtained with the photosensitive surface A.
由于采用感光面B获得的测量结果优于采用感光面A获得的测量结果,同时感光面B的面积大于感光面A的面积,因此,可以说明感光面的面积越大,抑制由脉搏跳动导致的抖动的效果越好。Since the measurement results obtained by using the photosensitive surface B are better than those obtained by using the photosensitive surface A, and the area of the photosensitive surface B is larger than the area of the photosensitive surface A, it can be said that the larger the area of the photosensitive surface, the more effective it is to suppress the pulse beat. The better the dithering effect.
其二,抑制由入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布变化导致的抖动。在其它条件不变的情况下,仅改变入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布。比较采用感光面A和采用感光面B获得的测量结果,其中,测量结果用感光面在预设时间段内接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量或光强值的标准差表征。光强值的相对变化量的计算方式如上文所述,在此不再赘述。发现感光面B接收出射光的光强值的变化量小于感光面A接收出射光的光强值的变化量,感光面B接收出射光的光强值的标准差小于感光面A接收出射光的光强值的标准差。由此可以得出,无论采用感光面接收出射光的光强值的相对变化量表征测量结果,还是采用感光面 接收出射光的光强值的标准差表征测量结果,采用感光面B获得的测量结果均优于采用感光面A获得的测量结果。Second, the jitter caused by the change in the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated to the measurement area by the incident light is suppressed. Under the condition that other conditions remain unchanged, only the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area is changed. Compare the measurement results obtained by using the photosensitive surface A and using the photosensitive surface B, wherein the measurement results are characterized by the relative variation of the light intensity value or the standard deviation of the light intensity value received by the photosensitive surface during a preset time period. The calculation method of the relative change of the light intensity value is as described above, and will not be repeated here. It is found that the variation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface B is smaller than the variation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface A, and the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface B is smaller than that of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface A. Standard deviation of light intensity values. From this, it can be concluded that whether the relative change of the light intensity value of the light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, or the standard deviation of the light intensity value of the light received by the photosensitive surface is used to characterize the measurement result, and the measurement obtained by the photosensitive surface B is used. The results are all better than the measurement results obtained with the photosensitive surface A.
由于采用感光面B获得的测量结果优于采用感光面A获得的测量结果,同时感光面B的面积大于感光面A的面积,因此,可以说明感光面的面积越大,抑制由入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布变化导致的抖动的效果越好。Since the measurement results obtained by using the photosensitive surface B are better than those obtained by using the photosensitive surface A, and the area of the photosensitive surface B is larger than the area of the photosensitive surface A, it can be said that the larger the area of the photosensitive surface, the inhibition of the incident light irradiation to the The better the effect of jitter caused by changes in the intensity distribution of the light spot in the measurement area.
其三,抑制由入射光本身传输的不确定性导致的抖动。采用蒙特卡罗模拟方法。以光子数为10 15的入射光的中心入射,感光面A和感光面B分别设置于距入射光的中心为2.4mm处,模拟次数为22次。比较采用感光面A和感光面B获得的测量结果,其中,测量结果以单位面积出射光子数的标准差表征,单位面积出射光子数的标准差越小,说明抑制效果越好。图4示意性示为根据本公开实施例的一种基于蒙特卡罗模拟方法得到的测量结果的示意图。发现与感光面B对应的单位面积出射光子数的标准差小于与感光面A对应的单位面积出射光子数的标准差。即采用感光面B获得的测量结果优于采用感光面A获得的测量结果。 Third, the jitter caused by the uncertainty of the transmission of the incident light itself is suppressed. The Monte Carlo simulation method was used. The center of incident light with a photon number of 10 15 is incident, and the photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B are respectively set at 2.4 mm from the center of the incident light, and the number of simulations is 22. Compare the measurement results obtained by using the photosensitive surface A and the photosensitive surface B. The measurement results are characterized by the standard deviation of the number of emitted photons per unit area. The smaller the standard deviation of the number of emitted photons per unit area, the better the suppression effect. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a measurement result obtained by a Monte Carlo simulation method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. It is found that the standard deviation of the number of emitted photons per unit area corresponding to the photosensitive surface B is smaller than the standard deviation of the number of emitted photons per unit area corresponding to the photosensitive surface A. That is, the measurement results obtained using the photosensitive surface B are better than the measurement results obtained using the photosensitive surface A.
由于采用感光面B获得的测量结果优于采用感光面A获得的测量结果,同时感光面B的面积大于感光面A的面积,因此,可以说明采用感光面的面积越大,抑制由入射光本身传输的不确定性导致的抖动的效果越好。Since the measurement results obtained by using the photosensitive surface B are better than the measurement results obtained by using the photosensitive surface A, and the area of the photosensitive surface B is larger than that of the photosensitive surface A, it can be explained that the larger the area of the photosensitive surface is, the greater the area of the photosensitive surface can be The better the effect of jitter caused by the uncertainty of the transmission.
通过以上三方面的示例,说明了感光面的面积越大,抑制抖动对测量结果造成的不利影响的效果越好。Through the examples of the above three aspects, it is explained that the larger the area of the photosensitive surface, the better the effect of suppressing the adverse effects of jitter on the measurement results.
根据本公开的实施例,可以设置每个感光面为环形感光面或非环形感光面,其中,非环形感光面可以包括扇环感光面、圆形感光面、扇形感光面、椭圆形感光面或多边形感光面。多边形感光面可以包括正方形感光面、长方形感光面或三角形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, each photosensitive surface may be set as a ring-shaped photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, wherein the non-annular photosensitive surface may include a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, an elliptical photosensitive surface, or a Polygonal photosensitive surface. The polygonal photosensitive surface may include a square photosensitive surface, a rectangular photosensitive surface, or a triangular photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,M个感光面中的各个感光面可以单独使用、部分结合使用或全部结合使用,结合使用的含义是输出一个输出光强。在本公开的实施例中,将用于输出一个输出光强的感光面称为同类感光面,同类感光面可以包括一个或多个感光面。其中,不同感光面结合使用的条件可以为各个感光面接收的出射光的平均光程在平均光程范围内。平均光程范围可以为由大于或等于第一平均光程阈值且小于或等于第二平均光程阈值组成的范围。第一平均光程阈值和第二平均光程阈值可以是根据光程平均值和光程变化幅度确定的。光程平均值是根据同类感光面的各个感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值。示例性的,如光程平均值为a,光程变化幅度为±30%,则第一平均光程阈值可以为0.7a,第二平均光程阈值可以为1.3a。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, each of the M photosensitive surfaces can be used alone, partially combined, or all combined, and the combined use means outputting one output light intensity. In the embodiments of the present disclosure, a photosensitive surface for outputting one output light intensity is referred to as a similar photosensitive surface, and a similar photosensitive surface may include one or more photosensitive surfaces. Wherein, the condition for the combined use of different photosensitive surfaces may be that the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface is within the range of the average optical length. The average optical path range may be a range consisting of greater than or equal to the first average optical path threshold and less than or equal to the second average optical path threshold. The first average optical path threshold and the second average optical path threshold may be determined according to the optical path average value and the optical path variation amplitude. The average optical path length is an average value calculated from the average optical path lengths of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface. Exemplarily, if the average optical path length is a, and the optical path variation range is ±30%, the first average optical path threshold may be 0.7a, and the second average optical path threshold may be 1.3a.
针对平均光程进行如下说明。光在组织中的传输路径可以用光程和穿透深度来表示,其中,光程用于表示光在组织中传输的总距离,穿透深度用于表示光在组织中能到达的最大纵 向距离。针对确定的源探距离,平均光程用于表示光在组织中光程的平均值。光程的概率分布函数可以理解是源探距离和组织光学参数的函数,其中,源探距离表示入射光的中心与感光面的中心之间的径向距离。相应的,在数学表达式上,平均光程可以理解是源探距离和组织光学参数的函数,其中,组织光学参数可以包括吸收系数、散射系数和各向异性因子。影响平均光程的因素可以包括吸收系数、散射系数、各向异性因子和源探距离。The average optical path length will be described below. The transmission path of light in the tissue can be represented by the optical path and the penetration depth, where the optical path is used to represent the total distance of light transmission in the tissue, and the penetration depth is used to represent the maximum longitudinal distance that the light can reach in the tissue . For a determined source-to-detection distance, the average optical path length is used to represent the average of the optical path lengths of light in the tissue. The probability distribution function of the optical path can be understood as a function of the source-detection distance and tissue optical parameters, wherein the source-detection distance represents the radial distance between the center of the incident light and the center of the photosensitive surface. Correspondingly, in mathematical expression, the average optical path can be understood as a function of the source-probe distance and tissue optical parameters, wherein the tissue optical parameters can include absorption coefficient, scattering coefficient and anisotropy factor. Factors affecting the average optical path may include absorption coefficient, scattering coefficient, anisotropy factor, and source-detection distance.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面可以为环形感光面或非环形感光面。同类感光面为环形感光面,可以包括在同类感光面包括一个感光面的情况下,同类感光面为独立环形感光面。在同类感光面包括多个感光面的情况下,同类感光面是根据多个感光面组合形成的环形感光面。同类感光面为非环形感光面,可以包括在同类感光面包括一个感光面的情况下,同类感光面为独立非环形感光面。在同类感光面包括多个感光面的情况下,同类感光面是根据多个感光面组合形成的非环形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the same type of photosensitive surface may be an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface. The same type of photosensitive surface is an annular photosensitive surface, which may be included in the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent annular photosensitive surface. When the same type of photosensitive surface includes multiple photosensitive surfaces, the same type of photosensitive surface is a ring-shaped photosensitive surface formed by combining the multiple photosensitive surfaces. The same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface, which may be included in the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent non-annular photosensitive surface. In the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes a plurality of photosensitive surfaces, the same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface formed according to the combination of the multiple photosensitive surfaces.
在操作S330,根据与预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。In operation S330, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,在获得与预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强后,可以采用干扰抑制方法处理与预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,以确定被测组织成分的的浓度。其中,干扰抑制方法可以包括差分测量方法。差分测量方法可以包括时间差分测量方法或位置差分测量方法。或者,还可以采用非差分测量方法处理至少一个输出光强,以确定被测组织成分的浓度。每个输出光强可以包括漫散射光强或漫透射光强。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, after obtaining at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, the interference suppression method may be used to process the at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component. Wherein, the interference suppression method may include a differential measurement method. The differential measurement method may include a time differential measurement method or a position differential measurement method. Alternatively, at least one output light intensity can also be processed using a non-differential measurement method to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component. Each output light intensity may include diffusely scattered light intensity or diffusely transmitted light intensity.
根据本公开实施例的技术方案,所述感光面能够采集在对应的预设防扰动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,由于具有上述特性的感光面提高了感光面中能够稳定接收出射光的面积占该感光面的面积的比例,因此,提高了接收出射光的稳定性,进而降低了由抖动导致的出射光的强度分布的变化的不利影响,从而提高了测量结果的可靠性。同时,采用单个预设波长结合具有上述特性的感光面进行组织成分测量,直接获取到了真实的被测组织成分信号。采用单个预设波长进行组织成分测量,减少了光源模块的体积和结构复杂度,进而减少了装置和设备的体积和结构复杂度,便于便携测量,降低了对电源模块的容量要求,并降低了制作成本。此外,也减少了数据处理量。According to the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present disclosure, the photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the corresponding preset anti-disturbance range. The ratio of the area of stably receiving the outgoing light to the area of the photosensitive surface, therefore, improves the stability of receiving outgoing light, thereby reducing the adverse effects of changes in the intensity distribution of the outgoing light caused by jitter, thereby improving the accuracy of the measurement results. reliability. At the same time, a single preset wavelength is used in combination with the photosensitive surface with the above characteristics to measure the tissue composition, and the real measured tissue composition signal is directly obtained. Using a single preset wavelength for tissue composition measurement reduces the volume and structural complexity of the light source module, thereby reducing the volume and structural complexity of devices and equipment, facilitating portable measurement, reducing the capacity requirements for power modules, and reducing cost of production. In addition, the amount of data processing is also reduced.
根据本公开的实施例,每个感光面接收到的出射光在目标组织层中的平均光程占总光程的比例大于或等于比例阈值,其中,总光程为出射光在测量区域内传输的总距离。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the ratio of the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface in the target tissue layer to the total optical length is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, where the total optical length is the transmission of the outgoing light in the measurement area. total distance.
根据本公开的实施例,被测对象的组织模型通常是层状结构,即可分为一层或多层。而不同组织层所携带的被测组织成分的信息不同,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,需要尽量使得出射光的传输路径是主要通过携带被测组织成分的信息较为丰富的组织层的。目标组织层可以理解为是携带被测组织成分的信息较为丰富的组织层,或者,是被测组织成分的主要来源 的组织层。下面以被测对象为人体,被测组织成分为血糖为例进行说明。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue model of the measured object is usually a layered structure, that is, it can be divided into one or more layers. Different tissue layers carry different information on the measured tissue components. In order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, it is necessary to make the transmission path of the outgoing light mainly pass through the tissue layers with rich information on the measured tissue components. The target tissue layer can be understood as the tissue layer that carries the information of the measured tissue components, or the tissue layer that is the main source of the measured tissue components. The following description will be given by taking the measured object as the human body and the measured tissue component as blood glucose as an example.
人体的皮肤组织模型可以理解为是三层模型,由外向内分别是表皮层、真皮层和皮下脂肪层。其中,表皮层包含少量的组织液,不包含血浆以及淋巴液。真皮层包含大量的组织液,并且由于存在丰富的毛细血管,因此,还包含较多的血浆和少量的淋巴液。皮下脂肪层包含少量的细胞液,并且由于存在静脉与动脉等血管,因此,包含大量的血浆和少量的淋巴液。由此可见,不同组织层携带的被测组织成分的信息不同。The human skin tissue model can be understood as a three-layer model, from outside to inside are the epidermis, dermis and subcutaneous fat layer. Among them, the epidermis contains a small amount of tissue fluid and does not contain plasma and lymph. The dermis contains a large amount of tissue fluid, and because of the abundant capillaries, it also contains a large amount of plasma and a small amount of lymph. The subcutaneous fat layer contains a small amount of cellular fluid, and because of the existence of blood vessels such as veins and arteries, it contains a large amount of plasma and a small amount of lymph fluid. It can be seen that the information of the measured tissue components carried by different tissue layers is different.
由于表皮层包含少量的组织液,因此,表皮层并不是合适的血糖信息来源。虽然皮下脂肪层包含大量的血浆和相对少量的组织液,但由于受到入射光穿透深度的限制,因此,皮下脂肪层也不是合适的血糖信息来源。由于真皮层包含丰富的毛细血管以及大量的组织液,并且入射光可以较为容易地到达真皮层,因此,真皮层可以作为血糖信息的主要来源。相应的,目标组织层可以为真皮层。Since the epidermis contains a small amount of tissue fluid, the epidermis is not a suitable source of blood glucose information. Although the subcutaneous fat layer contains a large amount of plasma and a relatively small amount of interstitial fluid, it is also not a suitable source of blood glucose information due to the limited depth of penetration of incident light. Since the dermis layer contains abundant capillaries and a large amount of tissue fluid, and incident light can easily reach the dermis layer, the dermis layer can be the main source of blood glucose information. Correspondingly, the target tissue layer may be the dermis layer.
根据本公开的实施例,可以根据光程和穿透深度,确定出射光在每个组织层中的平均光程。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, the average optical path length of the outgoing light in each tissue layer can be determined according to the optical path length and the penetration depth.
为了尽量确保出射光的传输路径主要是经过目标组织层的出射光,需要使得每个感光面接收到的出射光在目标组织层中的平均光程占总光程的比例大于或等于比例阈值,其中,总光程可以为出射光在测量区域内传输的总距离,即入射光从进入测量区域,在测量区域内传输直至到达出射位置所经历路径的总距离。其中,比例阈值与感光面的中心与入射光的中心之间的源探距离和组织光学参数相关。In order to ensure that the transmission path of the outgoing light is mainly the outgoing light passing through the target tissue layer, it is necessary to make the ratio of the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface in the target tissue layer to the total optical length greater than or equal to the proportional threshold. The total optical path may be the total distance traveled by the outgoing light in the measurement area, that is, the total distance traveled by the incident light from entering the measurement area, traveling in the measurement area until reaching the outgoing position. Among them, the proportional threshold is related to the source-detection distance between the center of the photosensitive surface and the center of the incident light and the tissue optical parameters.
需要说明的是,由于本公开实施例对感光面接收到的出射光在目标组织层中的平均光程占总光程的比例进行了限定,因此,本公开实施例的感光面的面积不能过大,其是在面积范围内的大面积。It should be noted that, since the embodiments of the present disclosure limit the ratio of the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface in the target tissue layer to the total optical path length, the area of the photosensitive surface in the embodiments of the present disclosure cannot exceed Large, which is a large area within an area range.
根据本公开的实施例,根据测量区域内的组织结构特征确定同类感光面的总面积,其中,同类感光面包括一个或多个感光面,同类感光面用于输出一个输出光强。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the total area of the same type of photosensitive surface is determined according to the tissue structure features in the measurement area, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the same type of photosensitive surface is used to output one output light intensity.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面的总面积可以根据测量区域内的组织结构特征确定。其中,组织结构特征可以理解为测量区域所具有的结构特征。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the total area of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type may be determined according to the tissue structure characteristics in the measurement area. Among them, the organizational structure feature can be understood as the structural feature possessed by the measurement area.
示例性的,如测量区域为三条血管交叉的区域,如果将同类感光面设置于三条血管交叉的区域,则同类感光面的总面积受限于三条血管交叉的区域的面积,即同类感光面的总面积需要根据三条血管交叉的区域的面积确定。Exemplarily, if the measurement area is the area where three blood vessels intersect, if the same photosensitive surface is set in the area where the three blood vessels intersect, the total area of the same photosensitive surface is limited by the area where the three blood vessels intersect, that is, the same photosensitive surface. The total area needs to be determined based on the area of the area where the three vessels intersect.
又如测量区域为手指所在的区域,如果将同类感光面设置于手指所在的区域,则同类感光面的总面积受限于手指所在区域的面积,即同类感光面的总面积需要根据手指所在区域的面积确定。Another example is that the measurement area is the area where the finger is located. If the same photosensitive surface is set in the area where the finger is located, the total area of the same photosensitive surface is limited by the area where the finger is located, that is, the total area of the same photosensitive surface needs to be based on the area where the finger is located. area is determined.
需要说明的是,由于本公开实施例中感光面的面积可以根据组织结构特征确定,而通常根据组织结构特征确定的面积不能过大,因此,本公开实施例的感光面的面积不能过大,其是在面积范围内的大面积。It should be noted that, since the area of the photosensitive surface in the embodiment of the present disclosure can be determined according to the characteristics of the tissue structure, and generally the area determined according to the characteristics of the tissue structure cannot be too large, therefore, the area of the photosensitive surface in the embodiment of the present disclosure cannot be too large, It is a large area within an area.
根据本公开的实施例,每个感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值大于或等于比值阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the ratio of the area of each photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,为了降低由入射光传输的不确定性、光源的随机性、生理背景变动以及脉搏跳动导致的抖动对出射光在测量区域上的分布的影响,可以使感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值尽量大的原因在于。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to reduce the influence of the uncertainty of incident light transmission, randomness of light source, physiological background variation, and jitter caused by pulse beating on the distribution of outgoing light on the measurement area, the area of the photosensitive surface can be The reason is that the ratio to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is as large as possible.
为了便于说明,下面将感光面分为两部分,即边缘部分和非边缘部分(或内部部分)。通常抖动主要影响的是边缘部分采集的出射光,而非边缘部分受到的影响小,即非边缘部分能够较为稳定地采集出射光。换个角度理解,在存在抖动的情况下,由于测量区域的出射光的强度分布会发生细微的变化,因此,被边缘部分所接收的出射光的光强值会随着出射光的强度分布的变化而发生较大的变化,而由于位于非边缘部分的出射光大部分可以较为稳定地被感光面采集到,因此,被非边缘部分所接收的出射光的光强值能够保持相对稳定。由此,为了有效抑制抖动对测量结果造成的不利影响,可以使得非边缘部分所对应的面积与感光面的面积的比值尽量大,比值越大削弱不利影响的效果越好。其中,边缘部分可以用感光面的周长表示,非边缘部分可以用感光面的面积表示。由此,可以使感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值尽量大。For convenience of description, the photosensitive surface is divided into two parts, ie, an edge part and a non-edge part (or inner part). Usually, the jitter mainly affects the outgoing light collected by the edge part, and the non-edge part is less affected, that is, the non-edge part can collect the outgoing light relatively stably. From another perspective, in the presence of jitter, since the intensity distribution of the outgoing light in the measurement area will change slightly, the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the edge portion will change with the intensity distribution of the outgoing light. However, a large change occurs, and since most of the outgoing light located in the non-edge portion can be collected by the photosensitive surface relatively stably, the light intensity value of the outgoing light received by the non-edge portion can remain relatively stable. Therefore, in order to effectively suppress the adverse effect of jitter on the measurement results, the ratio of the area corresponding to the non-edge portion to the area of the photosensitive surface can be made as large as possible, and the larger the ratio, the better the effect of weakening the adverse effect. The edge portion can be represented by the perimeter of the photosensitive surface, and the non-edge portion can be represented by the area of the photosensitive surface. Thereby, the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface can be made as large as possible.
示例性的,如感光面1为圆形感光面,感光面2为正方形感光面,在周长相同的情况下,由于感光面1的面积大于感光面2的面积,因此,感光面1的面积与周长的比值大于感光面2的面积与周长的比值,由此,感光面1削弱不利影响的效果较感光面2削弱不利影响的效果好。Exemplarily, if the photosensitive surface 1 is a circular photosensitive surface, and the photosensitive surface 2 is a square photosensitive surface, in the case of the same perimeter, since the area of the photosensitive surface 1 is larger than the area of the photosensitive surface 2, the area of the photosensitive surface 1 is The ratio to the perimeter is greater than the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface 2 to the perimeter. Therefore, the photosensitive surface 1 has a better effect of reducing adverse effects than the photosensitive surface 2 has.
需要说明的是,针对感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值大于或等于比值阈值是在满足感光面的面积大于或等于面积阈值这一条件进行说明。针对大多数形状的感光面,通常如果感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值大于或等于比值阈值,则实际上也对感光面的面积的大小进行了限定。这是由于通常针对大多数形状的图形,图形的面积与周长的比值和面积的大小具有正相关关系,即图形的面积与周长的比值越大,图形的面积也越大。It should be noted that when the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, the condition that the area of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the area threshold is satisfied. For most shapes of photosensitive surfaces, if the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, the size of the photosensitive surface is actually limited. This is because for most shapes of graphics, the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the graphic has a positive correlation with the size of the area, that is, the larger the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the graphic, the larger the area of the graphic.
示例性的,如圆形,圆形的面积为πR 2,圆形的面积与周长的比值为R/2,其中,R表示半径。由于圆形的面积与周长的比值大小仅与半径有关,圆形的面积的大小仅与半径有关,因此,圆形的面积与周长的比值和面积的大小具有正相关关系,如果限定了圆形的面积与周长的比值,则也限定了圆形的面积的大小。又如正方形,正方形的面积为a 2,正方形的面积 与周长的比值为a/4,a表示边长。由于正方形的面积与周长的比值大小仅与边长有关,正方形的面积的大小仅与边长有关,因此,正方形的面积与周长的比值和面积的大小具有正相关关系,如果限定了正方形的面积与周长的比值,则也限定了正方形的面积的大小。 Exemplarily, such as a circle, the area of the circle is πR 2 , and the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the circle is R/2, where R represents the radius. Since the ratio of the area to the circumference of a circle is only related to the radius, and the size of the area of the circle is only related to the radius, therefore, the ratio of the area to the circumference of a circle has a positive correlation with the size of the area. The ratio of the area of the circle to the perimeter also defines the size of the area of the circle. Another example is a square, the area of the square is a 2 , the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the square is a/4, and a represents the length of the side. Since the ratio of the area to the perimeter of a square is only related to the length of the side, and the size of the area of the square is only related to the length of the side, therefore, the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the square has a positive correlation with the size of the area, if the square is defined The ratio of the area to the perimeter also defines the size of the area of the square.
根据本公开的实施例,比值阈值大于或等于0.04mm。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the ratio threshold is greater than or equal to 0.04 mm.
根据本公开的实施例,本公开的感光面的面积是一个相对的大面积,即感光面的面积是在面积范围内的大面积。下面针对该情况进行说明。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, the area of the photosensitive surface of the present disclosure is a relatively large area, that is, the area of the photosensitive surface is a large area within an area range. This case will be described below.
其一,感光面的面积不能过小。由于本公开实施例的大面积感光面是指感光面的面积使得感光面能够采集到预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,因此,本公开实施例的大面积感光面中的大面积是用于实现防抖动的大面积,同时,由于可以用感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值来表征感光面的面积使得感光面能够采集到预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,而在通常情况下,感光面的面积与周长的比值和感光面的面积具有正相关关系,因此,如果感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值大于或等于比值阈值,则实际上也对感光面的面积的大小进行了限定,即通过感光面的面积与周长的比值大于或等于比值阈值也可以限定感光面的面积不能过小。First, the area of the photosensitive surface cannot be too small. Since the large-area photosensitive surface in the embodiment of the present disclosure refers to the area of the photosensitive surface such that the photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range, the large-area photosensitive surface of the embodiment of the present disclosure is The large area of the area photosensitive surface is a large area used to achieve anti-shake. At the same time, because the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface can be used to characterize the area of the photosensitive surface, the photosensitive surface can capture the preset anti-shake surface. The light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the jitter range, and under normal circumstances, the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter has a positive correlation with the area of the photosensitive surface. Therefore, if the area of the photosensitive surface is If the ratio of the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, the area of the photosensitive surface is actually limited, that is, the ratio of the area to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold. The area cannot be too small.
其二,感光面的面积不能过大。本公开实施例要求感光面接收到的出射光在目标组织层中的平均光程占总光程的比例大于或等于比例阈值,和/或感光面的面积根据组织结构特征确定,上述说明感光面的面积不能过大。Second, the area of the photosensitive surface should not be too large. The embodiment of the present disclosure requires that the ratio of the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the photosensitive surface to the total optical path in the target tissue layer is greater than or equal to the proportional threshold, and/or the area of the photosensitive surface is determined according to the characteristics of the tissue structure. The above description of the photosensitive surface area should not be too large.
由此可以说明,本公开实施例的感光面的面积是一个相对的大面积,即是在面积范围内的大面积。From this, it can be explained that the area of the photosensitive surface of the embodiment of the present disclosure is a relatively large area, that is, a large area within an area range.
此外,可能存在虽然感光面的面积较大,但由于感光面的周长也较大所导致的感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值并不大的情况,即感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值小于比值阈值,因此,绝对的大面积的感光面可能也难以满足防抖动的要求。还可能存在由于感光面的面积过小,感光面的周长较大,使得感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值小于比值阈值的情况,因此,感光面的面积过小也难以满足防抖动的要求。In addition, although the area of the photosensitive surface is large, the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is not large due to the large perimeter of the photosensitive surface. The ratio of the perimeters of the surfaces is smaller than the ratio threshold. Therefore, it may be difficult for an absolutely large-area photosensitive surface to meet the requirements of anti-shake. There may also be cases where the area of the photosensitive surface is too small and the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is large, so that the ratio of the area of the photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is less than the ratio threshold. Therefore, the area of the photosensitive surface is too small. jitter requirements.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面与测量区域的表面接触或非接触。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the photosensitive surface is in contact or non-contact with the surface of the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,组织成分测量的形式可包括接触式测量和非接触式测量。其中,接触式测量可以避免干扰光被感光面接收到,进而可以提高测量结果的可靠性。非接触式测量可以避免温度和压力等干扰因素对测量结果的影响,进而可以提高测量结果的可靠性。According to embodiments of the present disclosure, the form of tissue composition measurement may include contact measurement and non-contact measurement. Among them, the contact measurement can prevent the interference light from being received by the photosensitive surface, thereby improving the reliability of the measurement results. Non-contact measurement can avoid the influence of interfering factors such as temperature and pressure on the measurement results, thereby improving the reliability of the measurement results.
如果设置感光面与测量区域的表面接触,则可以认为组织成分测量的形式为接触式测量。如果设置感光面与测量区域的表面非接触,则可以认为组织成分测量的形式为非接触式测量。If the photosensitive surface is set in contact with the surface of the measurement area, the form of tissue composition measurement can be considered as contact measurement. If the photosensitive surface is set to be non-contact with the surface of the measurement area, the form of tissue composition measurement can be considered as non-contact measurement.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面距测量区域的表面的距离小于或等于第一距离阈值且感光面接收出射光的效率大于或等于效率阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the distance of the photosensitive surface from the surface of the measurement area is less than or equal to the first distance threshold and the efficiency of the photosensitive surface receiving the outgoing light is greater than or equal to the efficiency threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,由于感光面是由光敏材料制成的,感光面的面积是连续的,因此,可以实现大范围光强值的接收,提高接收出射光的效率。基于此,即使在靠近测量区域的表面的情况下,即在感光面距测量区域的表面的距离小于或等于第一距离阈值的情况下,也可以实现接收出射光的效率大于或等于效率阈值。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, since the photosensitive surface is made of photosensitive material, the area of the photosensitive surface is continuous, therefore, the reception of a wide range of light intensity values can be realized, and the efficiency of receiving outgoing light can be improved. Based on this, even in the case of being close to the surface of the measurement area, that is, when the distance between the photosensitive surface and the surface of the measurement area is less than or equal to the first distance threshold, the efficiency of receiving outgoing light greater than or equal to the efficiency threshold can be achieved.
根据本公开的实施例,在以单个预设波长的入射光照射测量区域之前,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, before irradiating the measurement area with the incident light of a single preset wavelength, the method may further include the following operations.
确定定位特征。根据定位特征,确定测量区域,其中,测量区域是满足可控测量条件的再现性的区域。将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置,其中,测量探头包括M个感光面。Identify work features. From the positioning features, a measurement area is determined, wherein the measurement area is an area that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions. The measurement probe is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area, wherein the measurement probe includes M photosensitive surfaces.
根据本公开的实施例,在活体组织成分测量过程中,测量条件的变动可能会淹没微弱的被测组织成分信号,使得难以获取到真实的被测组织成分信号,对测量结果产生较大的影响。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, during the measurement of living tissue components, changes in the measurement conditions may overwhelm the weak measured tissue component signals, making it difficult to obtain the real measured tissue component signals, and have a greater impact on the measurement results .
发明人发现由于可控测量条件的变动影响测量结果的机理各不相同,因此,难以通过采用数学算法的方式抑制其对测量结果的影响。但发现可控测量条件能够通过有效控制使其实现再现性,使得其对测量结果的影响降低到可以忽略的程度,即使得可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响与随机噪声对测量结果的影响的水平相当。由此,针对可控测量条件,发明人提出最合适的处理方法是采用有效控制方法对可控测量条件进行控制以实现其再现性。其中,有效控制方法不是数学算法,其可以配合硬件设计实现。可控测量条件的再现性可以指在每次组织成分测量时,可控测量条件保持在预设变化范围内,使得可控测量条件保持不变或基本保持不变。The inventors found that since the mechanism of the variation of the controllable measurement conditions affecting the measurement result is different, it is difficult to suppress its influence on the measurement result by adopting a mathematical algorithm. However, it is found that the controllable measurement conditions can achieve reproducibility through effective control, so that its influence on the measurement results can be reduced to a negligible level, that is, the influence of the changes of the controllable measurement conditions on the measurement results and the influence of random noise on the measurement results. The level of impact is comparable. Therefore, for the controllable measurement conditions, the inventor proposes that the most suitable processing method is to use an effective control method to control the controllable measurement conditions to achieve its reproducibility. Among them, the effective control method is not a mathematical algorithm, which can be implemented with hardware design. The reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions may refer to maintaining the controllable measurement conditions within a preset variation range during each tissue composition measurement, so that the controllable measurement conditions remain unchanged or substantially unchanged.
根据本公开的实施例,采用有效控制方法对可控测量条件进行控制便能够将可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响降低到可以忽略的程度,由此可以避免采用复杂的数学算法进行处理,从而提高了测量结果的可靠性,此外还降低了数据处理难度和减少了数据处理量。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, the use of an effective control method to control the controllable measurement conditions can reduce the influence of changes in the controllable measurement conditions on the measurement results to a negligible level, thereby avoiding complex mathematical algorithms for processing , thereby improving the reliability of the measurement results, in addition to reducing the difficulty of data processing and reducing the amount of data processing.
下面针对采用有效控制方法实现可控测量条件的再现性,以将可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响降低到可以忽略的程度进行说明。在本公开实施例中,主要针对测量姿势再现性和测量区域再现性。其中,测量姿势是指支撑测量部位肢体的姿势。并且在相关技术中,未发现针对测量姿势的相关内容。The following describes the use of an effective control method to achieve the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions, so as to reduce the influence of the variation of the controllable measurement conditions on the measurement results to a negligible level. In the embodiments of the present disclosure, the measurement posture reproducibility and the measurement area reproducibility are mainly aimed at. The measurement posture refers to the posture of the limb supporting the measurement site. And in the related art, no relevant content for measuring posture is found.
其一,测量区域再现性。测量区域的定位偏差是由组织分布的非均匀性以及皮肤表面平坦状态的差异导致的,当测量探头与测量区域之间的相对位置发生偏差便会改变光在组织内的传输路径。由此可见,为了实现可控测量条件的再现性,需要尽量保证测量区域再现性。One is to measure the regional reproducibility. The positioning deviation of the measurement area is caused by the non-uniformity of tissue distribution and the difference in the flat state of the skin surface. When the relative position between the measurement probe and the measurement area is deviated, the transmission path of light in the tissue will be changed. It can be seen that in order to achieve the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions, it is necessary to ensure the reproducibility of the measurement area as much as possible.
其二,测量姿势再现性。在组织成分测量中,被测对象很难保持同一测量姿势不变,而 由于测量姿势变化会导致测量区域的皮肤状态发生变化,进而导致光在组织内的传输路径发生变化,因此,测量姿势变化将产生定位误差而影响测量结果的可靠性,其中,皮肤状态可以包括皮肤表面形状和皮肤内部结构,由此可见,实现测量姿势再现性是很有必要的。测量姿势定位的目的在于使得进行组织成分测量时的测量姿势为目标测量姿势,即在进行组织成分测量时,如果当前测量姿势不为目标测量姿势,则需要将当前测量姿势调整为目标测量姿势,目标测量姿势是满足可控测量条件的再现性的测量姿势。Second, measure postural reproducibility. In the measurement of tissue components, it is difficult for the measured object to keep the same measurement posture, and the change of the measurement posture will lead to changes in the state of the skin in the measurement area, which in turn leads to changes in the transmission path of light in the tissue. Therefore, the measurement posture changes. Positioning errors will occur and affect the reliability of the measurement results. The skin state may include the shape of the skin surface and the internal structure of the skin. It can be seen that it is necessary to achieve the reproducibility of the measurement posture. The purpose of the measurement posture positioning is to make the measurement posture when the tissue component measurement is performed as the target measurement posture, that is, when the tissue component measurement is performed, if the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture, then the current measurement posture needs to be adjusted to the target measurement posture, The target measurement posture is a measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions.
但实际上,实现测量姿势再现性的重要性往往是被忽略的,体现在如下两个方面。But in fact, the importance of achieving the reproducibility of measured poses is often overlooked, which is reflected in the following two aspects.
其一,未发现测量姿势再现性是影响测量结果的可靠性的一个重要原因。在相关技术中,通常认为在可控测量条件方面,影响可控测量条件再现性的最主要的原因在于测量区域再现性,即如果实现了测量区域再现性,便可以实现从可控测量条件方面提高测量结果的可靠性而无需再考虑其它原因。换句话说,在相关技术中,改进方向是围绕如何提高测量区域的定位精度展开的,并没有发现在可控测量条件方面,测量姿势再现性也是影响测量结果的可靠性的一个重要原因。First, the reproducibility of the measurement pose was not found to be an important factor affecting the reliability of the measurement results. In the related art, it is generally believed that in terms of controllable measurement conditions, the most important reason for affecting the reproducibility of controllable measurement conditions is the reproducibility of the measurement area. Improve the reliability of measurement results without considering other reasons. In other words, in the related art, the improvement direction revolves around how to improve the positioning accuracy of the measurement area, and it is not found that in terms of controllable measurement conditions, measurement posture reproducibility is also an important factor affecting the reliability of measurement results.
并且,根据上述分析可知,即便实现了测量区域再现性,但由于当支撑测量部位肢体的姿势发生变化时,测量区域处的皮肤内部结构也会发生变化,导致光在组织内的传输路径发生了变化,因此,也影响了测量结果的可靠性。换句话说,仅确保测量区域再现性而忽视测量姿势再现性,也不利于测量结果的可靠性的提高。In addition, according to the above analysis, even if the reproducibility of the measurement area is achieved, when the posture of the limb supporting the measurement site changes, the internal structure of the skin at the measurement area will also change, resulting in the transmission path of light in the tissue. Variations, therefore, also affect the reliability of the measurement results. In other words, only ensuring the reproducibility of the measurement area and ignoring the reproducibility of the measurement posture is not conducive to improving the reliability of the measurement results.
其二,未采取有效的方式实现测量姿势再现性。由于未对影响测量结果的可靠性的因素进行深入研究,没有认识到实现测量姿势再现性的重要性,因此,在组织成分测量中,认为采用由被测对象自身通过保持身体稳定的方式即可实现测量姿势的控制,即被测对象自身如果认为其身体状态没有变化,则测量姿势得到了较好的控制。但在多数情况下,测量姿势的变化并不能被被测对象感知,由此该种实现测量姿势再现性的方式的误差较大,会对测量结果的可靠性造成较大干扰。即即使采取方式控制测量姿势,但由于未认识到实现测量姿势再现性的重要性,该方式实质上也无法保证测量姿势再现性。Second, there is no effective way to achieve measurement posture reproducibility. Since the factors affecting the reliability of the measurement results have not been deeply studied, and the importance of achieving the reproducibility of the measurement posture has not been recognized, it is considered that in the measurement of tissue components, it is sufficient to use a method in which the subject itself maintains a stable body. Realize the control of the measurement posture, that is, if the measured object thinks that its body state has not changed, the measurement posture is well controlled. However, in most cases, the change of the measurement posture cannot be perceived by the measured object. Therefore, the error of this method of realizing the reproducibility of the measurement posture is large, which will greatly interfere with the reliability of the measurement result. That is, even if a method is adopted to control the measurement posture, since the importance of realizing the reproducibility of the measurement posture is not recognized, this method cannot substantially guarantee the reproducibility of the measurement posture.
由此可见,为了实现测量区域再现性,需要尽量保证测量姿势再现性,即实现测量姿势的准确定位。基于上述,测量区域再现性需要以测量姿势再现性为前提,由此,测量区域的定位需要以测量姿势的定位为前提。It can be seen that in order to achieve the reproducibility of the measurement area, it is necessary to ensure the reproducibility of the measurement posture as much as possible, that is, to achieve accurate positioning of the measurement posture. Based on the above, the reproducibility of the measurement area needs to be premised on the reproducibility of the measurement posture, and therefore, the positioning of the measurement area needs to be premised on the positioning of the measurement posture.
在定位过程中,可以根据定位特征进行定位。其中,定位特征可以包括姿势定位特征和区域定位特征,姿势定位特征用于进行测量姿势的定位,区域定位特征用于进行测量区域的定位。姿势定位特征可以设置于被测对象或非被测对象,区域定位特征可以设置于被测对象或非被测对象,非被测对象可以包括测量探头或其它装置。定位特征可以包括人为设置的定 位特征或被测对象上的固有特征,其中,固有特征可以包括掌纹、指纹、胎记、痣或痦子等。During the positioning process, the positioning can be carried out according to the positioning features. The positioning feature may include a posture positioning feature and an area positioning feature, the posture positioning feature is used for positioning the measurement posture, and the area positioning feature is used for positioning the measurement area. The posture positioning feature can be set on the measured object or the non-measured object, the regional positioning feature can be set on the measured object or the non-measured object, and the non-measured object can include a measuring probe or other devices. The positioning features may include artificially set positioning features or inherent features on the measured object, wherein the inherent features may include palm prints, fingerprints, birthmarks, moles or scabs and the like.
根据本公开的实施例,如果采用人为设置定位特征的方式,则由于人为设置的定位特征通常会随着时间的推移而逐渐褪色,因此,需要再次进行设置,由此可能会引入新的误差而影响了定位精度。而固有特征具有较好的稳定性,不易产生设置误差。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, if the positioning feature is set manually, since the positioning feature set manually usually fades gradually over time, it needs to be set again, which may introduce new errors and affects the positioning accuracy. The inherent feature has better stability, and it is not easy to generate setting errors.
为了降低定位的复杂度,提高定位精度,可以采用将被测对象上的固有特征作为定位特征的设置方式。但即使采用将被测对象上的固有特征作为姿势定位特征的设置方式,由于皮肤内部结构会受到测量姿势变动的影响,这也会产生测量区域的定位偏差,因此,将定位特征设置于被测对象上的哪个位置并不是任意的,需要根据测量部位和测量部位与周边部位之间的骨骼与肌肉关系进行确定。示例性的,如测量部位为前臂伸侧,其周边部位包括手腕。针对前臂伸侧,由于手腕状态的改变会极大地影响前臂伸侧的皮肤状态,因此,为了提高定位精度,可以在前臂伸侧和手背上分别设置定位特征。需要说明的是,如果不存在可以作为定位特征的固有特征,则可以人为设置定位特征。示例性的,如定位特征可以为点状标记点或图形标记点,图形标记点可以包括十字标记点。In order to reduce the complexity of the positioning and improve the positioning accuracy, a setting method in which the inherent features on the measured object are used as the positioning features can be adopted. However, even if the inherent feature on the measured object is used as the setting method of the posture positioning feature, the internal structure of the skin will be affected by the change of the measurement posture, which will also cause the positioning deviation of the measurement area. The position on the object is not arbitrary, and needs to be determined according to the measurement site and the bone-muscle relationship between the measurement site and the surrounding site. Exemplarily, for example, the measurement site is the extensor side of the forearm, and its peripheral site includes the wrist. For the forearm extension side, since the change of the wrist state will greatly affect the skin condition of the forearm extension side, in order to improve the positioning accuracy, positioning features can be set on the forearm extension side and the back of the hand respectively. It should be noted that, if there is no inherent feature that can be used as the positioning feature, the positioning feature can be set manually. Exemplarily, for example, the positioning feature may be a dot-shaped mark point or a graphic mark point, and the graphic mark point may include a cross mark point.
根据本公开的实施例,定位特征包括第一姿势定位特征和区域定位特征。根据定位特征,确定测量区域,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the positioning features include a first gesture positioning feature and an area positioning feature. Determining the measurement area according to the positioning feature may include the following operations.
根据第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,其中,目标测量姿势是满足可控测量条件的再现性的测量姿势。在当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势的情况下,根据区域定位特征,确定测量区域。According to the first posture positioning feature, the current measurement posture of the measured object is adjusted to a target measurement posture, wherein the target measurement posture is a measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement condition. When the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture, the measurement area is determined according to the area positioning feature.
根据本公开的实施例,在进行测量姿势和测量区域的定位时,实现测量区域的定位的前提是实现测量姿势的定位,在完成测量区域定位后的后续测量过程中,通常测量区域无需再定位,可能还存在需要进行测量姿势定位的情况。其中,完成测量姿势定位的条件是当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势,目标测量姿势是满足可控测量条件的再现性的测量姿势。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, when positioning the measurement posture and the measurement area, the premise of realizing the positioning of the measurement area is to realize the positioning of the measurement posture, and in the subsequent measurement process after the positioning of the measurement area is completed, usually the measurement area does not need to be positioned again. , there may also be situations where measurement pose positioning is required. The condition for completing the positioning of the measurement posture is that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture, and the target measurement posture is the measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions.
根据本公开的实施例,上述所述的可能还存在需要进行测量姿势定位的情况的原因在于,在本公开实施例中,为了给被测对象带来更好的使用体验,可以采用在非测量时允许测量部位在一定范围内进行活动,测量时进行测量姿势定位的策略,而在测量时,需要保证当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势,由此,如果当前测量姿势不为目标测量姿势,则需要进行测量姿势的调整以保证当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the reason why the above-mentioned situation that measurement posture positioning is required is that, in the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to bring a better user experience to the measured object, a non-measurement method can be used. When measuring, the measurement position is allowed to move within a certain range, and the measurement posture is positioned during measurement. When measuring, it is necessary to ensure that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture. Therefore, if the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture, it is necessary to Adjust the measurement posture to ensure that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
基于上述,可以将定位分为首次测量姿势定位、测量区域定位和再次测量姿势定位。其中,首次测量姿势定位可以理解为配合实现测量区域的测量姿势定位。再次测量姿势定位可以理解为将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置之后且测量姿势不为目标测量姿势的情况下所进行的测量姿势定位。Based on the above, the positioning can be divided into the positioning of the first measurement posture, the positioning of the measurement area, and the positioning of the second measurement posture. Wherein, the positioning of the first measurement posture can be understood as the measurement posture positioning of the measurement area in cooperation. The re-measurement posture positioning can be understood as the measurement posture positioning performed when the measurement probe is set after the position corresponding to the measurement area and the measurement posture is not the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,区域定位特征用于进行测量区域定位。将首次测量姿势定位所采用的姿势定位特征称为第一姿势定位特征。将再次测量姿势定位所采用的姿势定位特征称为第二姿势定位特征。第一姿势定位特征和第二姿势定位特征均用于进行测量姿势定位,区域定位特征、第一姿势定位特征和第二姿势定位特征可以全部相同、部分相同或全部不同。区域定位特征、第一姿势定位特征和第二姿势定位特征的数量可以包括一个或多个。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the area location feature is used to perform measurement area location. The posture localization feature adopted for the first measurement of posture localization is referred to as the first posture localization feature. The posture location feature used to measure the posture location again is referred to as the second posture location feature. Both the first posture positioning feature and the second posture positioning feature are used to perform measurement posture positioning, and the area positioning feature, the first posture positioning feature and the second posture positioning feature may all be the same, partially the same or all different. The number of area location features, first gesture location features, and second gesture location features may include one or more.
在进行首次测量姿势定位和测量区域定位时,可以根据第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势使得第一姿势定位特征与预设特征相匹配,在第一姿势定位特征与预设特征匹配的情况下,可以确定当前测量姿势即为目标测量姿势。在当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势的情况下,根据区域定位特征,确定测量区域。由此,完成了测量姿势和测量区域的定位。During the first measurement posture positioning and measurement area positioning, the current measurement posture of the measured object can be adjusted according to the first posture positioning feature so that the first posture positioning feature matches the preset feature, and the first posture positioning feature matches the preset feature. In the case of feature matching, it can be determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture. When the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture, the measurement area is determined according to the area positioning feature. Thus, the positioning of the measurement posture and the measurement area is completed.
需要说明的是,针对根据区域定位特征确定测量区域,可以理解为将与区域定位特征对应的区域确定为测量区域,其包括将区域定位特征所在的区域确定为测量区域。或将与区域定位特征具有关联关系的另一区域确定为测量区域。It should be noted that, determining the measurement area according to the regional positioning feature may be understood as determining the area corresponding to the regional positioning feature as the measurement area, which includes determining the area where the regional positioning feature is located as the measurement area. Or another area having an associated relationship with the area positioning feature is determined as the measurement area.
通过根据第一姿势定位特征和区域定位特征,实现了同步完成测量区域的定位和测量姿势的定位。By locating the feature according to the first posture and the region locating feature, the positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture are realized synchronously.
根据本公开的实施例,将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, disposing the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area may include the following operations.
通过固定部将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置,其中,固定部与测量探头是一体的、部分分立的或全部分立的。The measuring probe is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the fixing part, wherein the fixing part and the measuring probe are integrated, partially separated or completely separated.
根据本公开的实施例,固定部用于固定测量探头,固定部与测量探头可以是一体的、部分分立的或全部分立的,即固定部可以作为测量探头的组成部分,可以与测量探头是相互独立的两个部分,还可以部分是测量探头的组成部分,部分与测量探头是相互独立的部分。固定部可以包括固定座和第一配合件,或,固定部可以包括第二配合件。第一配合件用于将固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置,固定座用于设置测量探头。第二配合件用于将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the fixing part is used to fix the measuring probe, and the fixing part and the measuring probe may be integrated, partially or completely independent, that is, the fixing part may be used as a component of the measuring probe, and may be mutually connected with the measuring probe. The two independent parts can also be part of the measuring probe, and the other part and the measuring probe are independent parts. The fixing part may include a fixing seat and a first fitting, or the fixing part may comprise a second fitting. The first matching piece is used for setting the fixing base at a position corresponding to the measurement area, and the fixing base is used for setting the measuring probe. The second fitting is used to set the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area.
如果固定部包括固定座和第一配合件,则固定座与测量探头是分立的,第一配合件与固定座是一体的或分立的。如果固定部包括第二配合件,则第二配合件与测量探头是一体的或分立的。If the fixing part includes a fixing base and a first fitting, the fixing base and the measuring probe are separate, and the first fitting and the fixing base are integrated or separate. If the fixing part includes the second fitting, the second fitting and the measuring probe are integral or separate.
根据本公开的实施例,固定部包括固定座和第一配合件。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the fixing part includes a fixing seat and a first fitting part.
通过固定部将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置,可以包括如下操作。Setting the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the fixing portion may include the following operations.
通过第一配合件将固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置。将测量探头设置于固定座。The fixing base is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area through the first matching piece. Set the measuring probe to the holder.
根据本公开的实施例,测量探头并不是直接设置于与测量区域对应的位置,而是通过固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the measurement probe is not directly disposed at the position corresponding to the measurement area, but is disposed at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the fixing seat.
在组织成分测量过程中,如果测量探头通过固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置,则由于固定座可以较长时间设置于测量区域而不脱离测量区域,因此,可以实现测量探头在测量时设置于固定座,非测量时脱离固定座。并且,由于固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置,因此,在测量探头脱离固定座,后再设置于固定座时,仍然可以维持较好的定位精度,并且降低了测量探头的定位难度。In the process of tissue composition measurement, if the measurement probe is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the fixing seat, since the fixing seat can be set in the measurement area for a long time without departing from the measurement area, the measurement probe can be set during measurement. It is attached to the fixed seat, and it is separated from the fixed seat during non-measurement. In addition, since the fixing base is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area, when the measuring probe is separated from the fixing base and then installed on the fixing base, a good positioning accuracy can still be maintained, and the positioning difficulty of the measuring probe is reduced.
根据本公开的实施例,测量区域处皮肤的皮肤状态在通过第一配合件将固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置的过程中满足第一预设条件。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the first preset condition during the process of setting the fixing seat at the position corresponding to the measurement area by the first fitting.
根据本公开的实施例,测量区域处皮肤的皮肤状态在测量探头设置于固定座的过程中满足第二预设条件。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the second preset condition during the process of disposing the measurement probe on the fixing seat.
根据本公开的实施例,由于固定固定座的动作会对对应位置处的皮肤的皮肤状态产生影响,进而影响测量区域的定位精度,因此,为了保证测量区域的定位精度,可以使得第一配合件在固定固定座的过程中,保证测量区域处的皮肤的皮肤状态满足第一预设条件。其中,第一预设条件可以指在第一配合件固定固定座的过程中,对应位置的皮肤的皮肤状态产生的变化在第一预设范围内。皮肤状态产生的变化可以包括皮肤形变。相应的,第一预设范围可以包括第一预设形变范围。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, since the action of fixing the fixing seat will affect the skin condition of the skin at the corresponding position, thereby affecting the positioning accuracy of the measurement area, in order to ensure the positioning accuracy of the measurement area, the first fitting During the process of fixing the fixing base, it is ensured that the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the first preset condition. Wherein, the first preset condition may refer to the change of the skin state of the skin at the corresponding position during the process of fixing the fixing seat by the first fitting member within the first preset range. Changes in skin condition can include skin deformation. Correspondingly, the first preset range may include the first preset deformation range.
根据本公开的实施例,由于固定测量探头的动作会对对应位置处的皮肤的皮肤状态产生影响,进而影响测量区域的定位精度,因此,为了提高测量区域的定位精度,可以使得固定座在固定测量探头的过程中,保证测量区域处的皮肤的皮肤状态满足第二预设条件。其中,第二预设条件可以指在固定座固定测量探头的过程中,对应位置的皮肤的皮肤状态产生的变化在第二预设范围内。皮肤状态产生的变化可以包括皮肤形变。相应的,第二预设范围可以包括第二预设形变范围。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, since the action of fixing the measurement probe will affect the skin condition of the skin at the corresponding position, thereby affecting the positioning accuracy of the measurement area, in order to improve the positioning accuracy of the measurement area, the fixing seat can be fixed During the process of measuring the probe, it is ensured that the skin state of the skin in the measurement area satisfies the second preset condition. Wherein, the second preset condition may refer to the change of the skin state of the skin at the corresponding position during the process of fixing the measurement probe on the fixing base within the second preset range. Changes in skin condition can include skin deformation. Correspondingly, the second preset range may include a second preset deformation range.
根据本公开的实施例,测量探头在固定座中不产生移动。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the measurement probe does not move in the holder.
根据本公开的实施例,当测量探头固定于固定座时,也会出现因固定不牢固而影响可控测量条件的再现性的问题。为了解决该问题,可以尽量保证在组织成分测量过程中,测量探头在固定座中不产生移动。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, when the measurement probe is fixed on the fixing base, the problem of affecting the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions also occurs due to the weak fixing. In order to solve this problem, it can be ensured as far as possible that the measurement probe does not move in the fixed seat during the tissue composition measurement process.
根据本公开的实施例,固定部包括第二配合件。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the fixing part includes a second fitting.
通过固定部将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置,可以包括如下操作。Setting the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the fixing portion may include the following operations.
通过第二配合件将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置。The measurement probe is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
根据本公开的实施例,针对测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置的方式,除了可以采用上述所述的通过固定座将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置的方式外,还可以采用直接将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置的方式,即无需固定座,需要第二配合件配合实 现。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, for the manner in which the measurement probe is arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area, in addition to the above-mentioned method of arranging the measurement probe at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the fixing seat, a direct The method of disposing the measuring probe at the position corresponding to the measuring area does not require a fixing seat, but requires the cooperation of the second fitting.
需要说明的是,上述无需固定座可以包括如下两种理解,其一,测量探头上设置有与其一体的起到与独立的固定座相同作用的结构。其二,测量探头上未设置起到与独立的固定座相同作用的结构。It should be noted that the above-mentioned need of no fixing seat may include the following two understandings. First, the measuring probe is provided with a structure integral with it, which plays the same role as the independent fixing seat. Second, the measuring probe is not provided with a structure that plays the same role as the independent fixing seat.
根据本公开的实施例,测量区域处皮肤的皮肤状态在通过第二配合件将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置的过程中满足第三预设条件。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the third preset condition during the process of setting the measurement probe at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
根据本公开的实施例,由于固定测量探头的动作会对对应位置处的皮肤的皮肤状态产生影响,进而影响测量区域的定位精度,因此,为了保证测量区域的定位精度,可以使得第二配合件在固定测量探头的过程中,保证测量区域处的皮肤的皮肤状态满足第三预设条件。其中,第三预设条件可以指在第二配合件固定测量探头的过程中,对应位置的皮肤的皮肤状态产生的变化在第三预设范围内。皮肤状态产生的变化可以包括皮肤形变。相应的,第三预设范围可以包括第三预设形变范围。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, since the action of fixing the measurement probe will affect the skin state of the skin at the corresponding position, thereby affecting the positioning accuracy of the measurement area, in order to ensure the positioning accuracy of the measurement area, the second fitting can be made During the process of fixing the measurement probe, it is ensured that the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the third preset condition. Wherein, the third preset condition may refer to the change of the skin state of the skin at the corresponding position during the process of fixing the measurement probe by the second fitting member within the third preset range. Changes in skin condition can include skin deformation. Correspondingly, the third preset range may include a third preset deformation range.
根据本公开的实施例,根据区域定位特征,确定测量区域,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the measurement area according to the area positioning feature may include the following operations.
获取第一投影特征。在确定区域定位特征与第一投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整测量探头和/或固定部的位置,直至区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配。在确定区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配的情况下,将与测量探头和/或固定部对应的区域确定为测量区域。Get the first projected feature. In the case where it is determined that the regional positioning feature does not match the first projected feature, the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing portion is adjusted until the regional positioning feature matches the first projected feature. When it is determined that the region positioning feature matches the first projection feature, the region corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing portion is determined as the measurement region.
根据本公开的实施例,为了保证使用的灵活性和测量区域定位的精度,可以采用光学方法实现,即将区域定位特征与第一投影特征进行匹配,根据匹配结果,确定测量区域,其中,第一投影特征是根据光学方法形成的,即由光源投射预设形状的光斑,光斑的形状可以根据区域定位特征确定。示例性的,如预设形状的光斑为十字光斑。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of the positioning of the measurement area, an optical method can be used, that is, the area positioning feature is matched with the first projection feature, and the measurement area is determined according to the matching result, wherein the first The projection feature is formed according to an optical method, that is, a light spot of a preset shape is projected by the light source, and the shape of the light spot can be determined according to the regional positioning feature. Exemplarily, the light spot with the preset shape is a cross light spot.
根据本公开的实施例,采用用于投射第一投影特征的结构获得第一投影特征后,确定区域定位特征与第一投影特征是否匹配,在确定区域定位特征与第一投影特征不匹配的情况下,可以调整测量探头和/或固定座的位置,使得区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配,直至区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配。在确定区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配的情况下,可以说明测量探头和/或固定座当前所在的区域即为测量区域。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, after obtaining the first projected feature by using the structure for projecting the first projected feature, it is determined whether the regional positioning feature matches the first projected feature, and if it is determined that the regional positioning feature does not match the first projected feature Next, the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing base can be adjusted so that the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature. In the case where it is determined that the region positioning feature matches the first projection feature, it can be indicated that the region where the measurement probe and/or the fixing base are currently located is the measurement region.
根据本公开的实施例,用于投射第一投影特征的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。其他对象可以表示除测量探头、固定部和被测对象以外的对象。区域定位特征可以设置于测量探头、固定座、被测对象和其他对象中的至少一种。下面从用于投射第一投影特征的结构的设置位置,与区域定位特征的设置位置两个角度说明基于光学方法实现的调整过程。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the structure for projecting the first projection feature may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the holder, or other objects. The other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured. The area locating feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the mount, the object to be measured, and other objects. The adjustment process based on the optical method will be described below from two perspectives, the setting position of the structure for projecting the first projection feature and the setting position of the regional positioning feature.
从用于投射第一投影特征的结构的设置位置角度说明。Described from the perspective of the setting position of the structure for projecting the first projected feature.
其一,如果用于投射第一投影特征的结构设置于被测对象,则区域定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。需要说明的是,如果区域定位特征设置于被测对象或其他对象,则可以通过如下方式实现测量区域的定位,即根据区域定位特征与第一投影特征,调整测量探头和/或固定座的位置,直至区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配,这里所述的区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配是指区域定位特征被测量探头和/或固定座遮挡,而使得第一投影特征无法投射至区域定位特征所在的位置。如果区域定位特征与第一姿势定位特征不匹配,则至少存在一个第一投影特征可以投射至区域定位特征所在的位置。First, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is arranged on the object to be measured, the area positioning feature can be arranged on at least one of the object to be measured, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects. It should be noted that, if the regional positioning feature is set on the object to be measured or other objects, the positioning of the measurement region can be achieved by the following methods, that is, according to the regional positioning feature and the first projection feature, the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixed seat is adjusted. , until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature. The matching of the regional positioning feature and the first projection feature here means that the regional positioning feature is blocked by the measuring probe and/or the fixed seat, so that the first projection feature cannot be projected to the region. The location of the work feature. If the region positioning feature does not match the first gesture positioning feature, there is at least one first projection feature that can be projected to the location where the region positioning feature is located.
其二,如果用于投射第一投影特征的结构设置于测量探头,则区域定位特征不能设置于测量探头,可以设置于被测对象、固定座或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果区域定位特征设置于固定座,并且采用的是通过设置有固定座的固定部将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置的方式实现的测量探头的定位,则为了能够实现测量区域的定位,可以通过如下方式实现,即调整固定座的位置。在未实现区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配之前,测量探头的位置是固定不变的,根据区域定位特征与第一投影特征,调整固定座的位置,直至区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配,在两者匹配的情况下,将与固定座对应的区域确定为测量区域,由此,可以将测量探头设置于固定座。Second, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is provided on the measuring probe, the regional positioning feature cannot be set on the measuring probe, but can be set on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects. It should be noted that, if the area positioning feature is set on the fixed seat, and the positioning of the measuring probe is realized by setting the measuring probe at the position corresponding to the measuring area through the fixing part provided with the fixed seat, then in order to be able to realize the positioning of the measuring probe. The positioning of the measurement area can be achieved by adjusting the position of the fixed seat. Before the matching of the regional positioning feature and the first projection feature is achieved, the position of the measuring probe is fixed. According to the regional positioning feature and the first projection feature, the position of the fixing seat is adjusted until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature. , in the case of matching the two, the area corresponding to the fixed seat is determined as the measurement area, so that the measurement probe can be set on the fixed seat.
其三,如果用于投射第一投影特征的结构设置于固定座,则区域定位特征不能设置于固定座,可以设置于被测对象、测量探头或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果区域定位特征设置于测量探头,并且采用的是通过设置有固定座的固定部将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置的方式实现的测量探头的定位,则为了能够实现测量区域的定位,可以通过如下方式实现,即调整固定座的位置。在未实现区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配之前,测量探头的位置是固定不变的,根据区域定位特征与第一投影特征,调整固定座的位置,直至区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配,在两者匹配的情况下,将与固定座对应的区域确定为测量区域,由此,可以将测量探头设置于固定座。Thirdly, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is set on the fixed seat, the regional positioning feature cannot be set on the fixed base, but can be set on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects. It should be noted that, if the area positioning feature is provided on the measurement probe, and the measurement probe is positioned by setting the measurement probe at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the fixing part provided with the fixing seat, then in order to be able to realize the positioning of the measurement probe. The positioning of the measurement area can be achieved by adjusting the position of the fixed seat. Before the matching of the regional positioning feature and the first projection feature is achieved, the position of the measuring probe is fixed. According to the regional positioning feature and the first projection feature, the position of the fixing seat is adjusted until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature. , in the case of matching the two, the area corresponding to the fixed seat is determined as the measurement area, so that the measurement probe can be set on the fixed seat.
其四,如果用于投射第一投影特征的结构设置于其他对象,则区域定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。需要说明的是,如果区域定位特征设置于被测对象或其他对象,则可以采用与将用于投射第一投影特征的结构设置于被测对象,区域定位特征设置于被测对象或其他对象的类似的方式实现测量区域的定位,在此不再赘述。Fourth, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is set on other objects, the area positioning feature can be set on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects. It should be noted that, if the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object or other objects, the structure used to project the first projection feature can be set on the measured object, and the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object or other objects. The positioning of the measurement area is implemented in a similar manner, which will not be repeated here.
从区域定位特征的设置位置角度说明。From the perspective of the setting position of the regional positioning feature.
其一,如果区域定位特征设置于被测对象,则用于投射第一投影特征的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果用于投射第一投影特征的结构设置于被测对象或其他对象,则可以通过如下方式实现测量区域的定位,即根据区域定位 特征与第一投影特征,调整测量探头和/或固定座的位置,直至区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配,这里所述的区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配是指区域定位特征被测量探头和/或固定座遮挡,而使得第一投影特征无法投射至区域定位特征所在的位置。如果区域定位特征与第一姿势定位特征不匹配,则至少存在一个第一投影特征可以投射至区域定位特征所在的位置。First, if the area positioning feature is set on the object to be measured, the structure for projecting the first projection feature can be set on the object to be measured, a measuring probe, a fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is set on the object to be measured or other objects, the positioning of the measurement area can be achieved by the following methods, that is, according to the area positioning feature and the first projection feature, adjust the measurement probe and / or the position of the fixed seat, until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature, and the matching of the regional positioning feature with the first projected feature here means that the regional positioning feature is blocked by the measuring probe and/or the fixed seat, so that the first The projected feature cannot be projected to the location where the area work feature is located. If the region positioning feature does not match the first gesture positioning feature, there is at least one first projection feature that can be projected to the location where the region positioning feature is located.
其二,如果区域定位特征设置于测量探头,则用于投射第一投影特征的结构与测量探头是分立的,可以设置于被测对象、固定座或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果用于投射第一投影特征的结构设置于固定座,则可以参见上文对应部分的说明,在此不再赘述。Second, if the area positioning feature is set on the measuring probe, the structure for projecting the first projection feature is separate from the measuring probe, and can be set on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is disposed on the fixed seat, the description in the corresponding part above can be referred to, and details are not repeated here.
其三,如果区域定位特征设置于固定座,则用于投射第一投影特征的结构与固定座是分立的,可以设置于被测对象、测量探头或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果用于投射第一投影特征的结构设置于测量探头,则可以参见上文对应部分说明,在此不再赘述。Thirdly, if the area locating feature is set on the fixing base, the structure for projecting the first projection feature is separate from the fixing base, and can be set on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is disposed on the measurement probe, reference may be made to the description in the corresponding part above, which will not be repeated here.
其四,如果区域定位特征设置于其他对象,则用于投射第一投影特征的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果用于投射第一投影特征的结构设置于被测对象或其他对象,则可以参见上文对应部分说明,在此不再赘述。Fourth, if the regional positioning feature is set on other objects, the structure for projecting the first projection feature can be set on the object to be measured, the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the first projection feature is provided on the object to be measured or other objects, reference may be made to the description in the corresponding part above, and details are not repeated here.
示例性的,图5示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于光学方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图。图5中区域定位特征设置于测量探头。图6示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种基于光学方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图。图6中区域定位特征设置于被测对象。Exemplarily, FIG. 5 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement area based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The area locating feature in Figure 5 is provided on the measuring probe. FIG. 6 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another implementation of positioning the measurement area based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In Figure 6, the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object.
通过光学方法实现测量区域的定位,一方面由于光源的位置与角度能够灵活调节,使得其可以较为容易地与区域定位特征匹配,因此,区域定位特征可以灵活设置,从而降低了区域定位特征设置的难度。另一方面也能够通过调节出射光斑的形状,更好地实现与区域定位特征的匹配,提高定位精度。The positioning of the measurement area is realized by the optical method. On the one hand, since the position and angle of the light source can be flexibly adjusted, it can be easily matched with the regional positioning feature. Therefore, the regional positioning feature can be set flexibly, thereby reducing the setting of the regional positioning feature. difficulty. On the other hand, by adjusting the shape of the outgoing light spot, the matching with the regional positioning features can be better achieved, and the positioning accuracy can be improved.
根据本公开的实施例,根据区域定位特征,确定测量区域,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the measurement area according to the area positioning feature may include the following operations.
获取第一目标图像。获取第一模板图像,其中,第一模板图像包括区域定位特征。在确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整测量探头和/或固定部的位置,以获取新的第一目标图像,直至新的第一目标图像与第一模板图像匹配。在确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像匹配的情况下,将与测量探头和/或固定部对应的区域确定为测量区域。Acquire the first target image. A first template image is acquired, wherein the first template image includes regional positioning features. If it is determined that the first target image does not match the first template image, adjust the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing part to acquire a new first target image until the new first target image matches the first template image . When it is determined that the first target image matches the first template image, an area corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing portion is determined as a measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,为了保证使用的灵活性和测量区域定位的精度,可以采用图像匹配方法实现,即将第一目标图像与第一模板图像进行匹配,根据匹配结果,确定测量区域。其中,第一模板图像可以包括区域定位特征且区域定位特征在第一模板图像中的位置为预设位置。在第一目标图像与第一模板图像匹配的过程中,第一目标图像可能是未包括区域定位特征的目标图像,也可能是包括区域定位特征但区域定位特征在第一目标图像的位置不为预设位置的目标图像,还可能是包括区域定位特征且区域定位特征在第一目标图像的位置为预 设位置的目标图像。由于第一模板图像包括位于预设位置的区域定位特征,因此,如果第一目标图像与第一模板图像匹配,则可以说明第一目标图像包括区域定位特征且区域定位特征在第一目标图像中的位置为预设位置。换句话说,将第一目标图像与第一模板图像进行匹配的目的在于,使得获取到的第一目标图像包括区域定位特征且区域定位特征在第一目标图像中的位置为预设位置。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of the positioning of the measurement area, an image matching method can be used, that is, the first target image is matched with the first template image, and the measurement area is determined according to the matching result. Wherein, the first template image may include a region positioning feature, and the position of the region positioning feature in the first template image is a preset position. In the process of matching the first target image with the first template image, the first target image may be a target image that does not include regional positioning features, or may include regional positioning features but the position of the regional positioning features in the first target image is not The target image at the preset position may also be a target image including a region positioning feature and the position of the region positioning feature in the first target image is a preset position. Since the first template image includes the region positioning feature at the preset position, if the first target image matches the first template image, it can be said that the first target image includes the region positioning feature and the region positioning feature is in the first target image is the default position. In other words, the purpose of matching the first target image with the first template image is to make the acquired first target image include regional positioning features and the positions of the regional positioning features in the first target image are preset positions.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像匹配的情况下,可以说明测量探头和/或固定座当前所在的区域即为测量区域。其中,确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像是否匹配可以包括确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像的相似度。在相似度大于或等于相似度阈值的情况下,确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像匹配。在相似度小于相似度阈值的情况下,确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像不匹配。确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像的相似度可以包括对第一目标图像与第一模板图像进行相关分析,得到相关系数,根据相关系数确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像的相似度。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, when it is determined that the first target image matches the first template image, it can be stated that the area where the measurement probe and/or the fixing base are currently located is the measurement area. Wherein, determining whether the first target image matches the first template image may include determining the similarity between the first target image and the first template image. When the similarity is greater than or equal to the similarity threshold, it is determined that the first target image matches the first template image. In the case that the similarity is less than the similarity threshold, it is determined that the first target image does not match the first template image. Determining the similarity between the first target image and the first template image may include performing a correlation analysis on the first target image and the first template image to obtain a correlation coefficient, and determining the similarity between the first target image and the first template image according to the correlation coefficient.
根据本公开的实施例,用于采集第一目标图像的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。其他对象可以表示除测量探头、固定部和被测对象以外的对象。区域定位特征可以设置于测量探头、固定座、被测对象和其他对象中的至少一种。针对用于采集第一目标图像的结构和区域定位特征的描述,可以参见针对用于投射第一投影特征的结构和区域定位特征的描述,在此不再赘述。所不同的是,如果用于采集第一目标图像的结构设置于测量探头,则区域定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。如果用于采集第一目标图像的结构设置于固定座,则区域定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the structure for acquiring the first target image may be disposed on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat, or other objects. The other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured. The area locating feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the mount, the object to be measured, and other objects. For the description of the structure and the region positioning feature used for acquiring the first target image, reference may be made to the description of the structure and region positioning feature used for projecting the first projection feature, and details are not repeated here. The difference is that if the structure for acquiring the first target image is provided on the measuring probe, the area positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the object to be measured, the measuring probe, the holder and other objects. If the structure for capturing the first target image is provided on the mount, the area positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the mount, and other objects.
示例性的,图7示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于图像匹配方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图。图7中区域定位特征设置于测量探头。图8示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种基于图像匹配方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图。图8中区域定位特征设置于被测对象。Exemplarily, FIG. 7 schematically shows a schematic diagram of positioning a measurement area based on an image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The area locating feature in Figure 7 is provided on the measuring probe. FIG. 8 schematically shows a schematic diagram of implementing positioning of a measurement area based on another image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In Fig. 8, the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object.
根据本公开的实施例,根据区域定位特征,确定测量区域,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the measurement area according to the area positioning feature may include the following operations.
获取第二目标图像,其中,第二目标图像包括区域定位特征。在确定第二目标图像中区域定位特征的位置不为第一预设位置的情况下,调整测量探头和/或固定部的位置,以获取新的第二目标图像,直至新的第二目标图像中区域定位特征的位置为第一预设位置。在确定新的第二目标图像中区域定位特征的位置为第一预设位置的情况下,将与测量探头和/或固定部对应的区域确定为测量区域。A second target image is acquired, wherein the second target image includes regional localization features. In the case where it is determined that the position of the regional positioning feature in the second target image is not the first preset position, adjust the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing part to acquire a new second target image until the new second target image The position of the positioning feature in the middle area is the first preset position. When it is determined that the position of the area positioning feature in the new second target image is the first preset position, the area corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing part is determined as the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,为了保证使用的灵活性和测量区域定位的精度,可以采用成像方 法实现,即如果区域定位特征在第二目标图像中的位置为第一预设位置,则可以说明完成了测量区域的定位。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of the measurement area positioning, an imaging method can be used to achieve, that is, if the position of the area positioning feature in the second target image is the first preset position, it can be indicated that the completion of location of the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,采用成像方法实现测量区域定位的过程即是确定区域定位特征在第二目标图像中的位置是否为第一预设位置的过程,如果区域定位特征在第二目标图像中的位置不为第一预设位置,则可以调整测量探头和/或固定座的位置,以获取新的第二目标图像,直至区域定位特征在新的第二目标图像中的位置为第一预设位置。在新的第二目标图像中区域定位特征的位置为第一预设位置的情况下,可以说明测量探头和/固定座当前所在的区域即为测量区域。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the process of using the imaging method to realize the measurement area positioning is the process of determining whether the position of the area positioning feature in the second target image is the first preset position. If the area positioning feature is in the second target image is not the first preset position, the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing seat can be adjusted to obtain a new second target image, until the position of the regional positioning feature in the new second target image is the first preset position set location. In the case where the position of the area positioning feature in the new second target image is the first preset position, it can be stated that the area where the measurement probe and/or the fixing base are currently located is the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,用于采集第二目标图像的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。其他对象可以表示除测量探头、固定部和被测对象以外的对象。区域定位特征可以设置于测量探头、固定座、被测对象和其他对象中的至少一种。针对用于采集第二目标图像的结构和区域定位特征的描述,可以参见针对用于投射第一投影特征的结构和区域定位特征的描述,在此不再赘述。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the structure for acquiring the second target image may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat or other objects. The other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured. The area locating feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the mount, the object to be measured, and other objects. For the description of the structure and the region positioning feature used for acquiring the second target image, reference may be made to the description of the structure and region positioning feature used for projecting the first projection feature, which will not be repeated here.
示例性的,图9示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种成像方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图。图9中区域定位特征设置于测量探头。图10示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种基于成像方法实现测量区域的定位的示意图。图10中区域定位特征设置于被测对象。图10中测量探头和固定座的移动使得两者与区域定位特征的相对位置发生变化,进而使得呈现在图像中的区域定位特征的位置位于第一预设位置。Exemplarily, FIG. 9 schematically shows a schematic diagram of positioning the measurement area implemented by an imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The area locating feature in Figure 9 is provided on the measurement probe. FIG. 10 schematically shows a schematic diagram of implementing positioning of a measurement area based on another imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In Figure 10, the regional positioning feature is set on the measured object. The movement of the measuring probe and the fixing base in FIG. 10 changes the relative positions of the two and the regional positioning feature, so that the position of the regional positioning feature presented in the image is located at the first preset position.
根据本公开的实施例,根据第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to the target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
获取第二投影特征。在确定第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,直至第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征匹配。在确定第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征匹配的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。Get the second projected feature. In the case where it is determined that the first posture locating feature does not match the second projection feature, the current measurement posture is adjusted until the first posture locating feature and the second projection feature match. When it is determined that the first posture positioning feature matches the second projection feature, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,为了保证使用的灵活性和测量姿势定位的精度,可以采用光学方法实现,即将第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征进行匹配,根据匹配结果,确定目标测量姿势,其中,第二投影特征是根据光学方法形成的,即由光源投射预设形状的光斑形成第二投影特征,光斑的形状可以根据第一姿势定位特征确定。即针对被测对象,根据第一姿势定位特征设置与其匹配的第二投影特征,使得第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征匹配的当前测量姿势即为目标测量姿势。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of the measurement posture positioning, an optical method can be used to achieve, that is, the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature are matched, and the target measurement posture is determined according to the matching result, wherein , the second projection feature is formed according to an optical method, that is, the second projection feature is formed by projecting a light spot of a preset shape by the light source, and the shape of the light spot can be determined according to the first posture positioning feature. That is, for the measured object, a second projection feature matching the first posture positioning feature is set according to the first posture positioning feature, so that the current measurement posture matching the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature is the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,用于投射第二投影特征的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。其他对象可以表示除测量探头、固定部和被测对象以外的对象。第一姿 势定位特征可以设置于测量探头、固定座、被测对象和其他对象中的至少一种。下面从用于投射第二投影特征的结构的设置位置,与第一姿势定位特征的设置位置两个角度说明基于光学方法实现的调整过程。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the structure for projecting the second projection feature may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the mount, or other objects. The other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured. The first posture locating feature may be provided on at least one of the measuring probe, the holder, the measured object and other objects. The adjustment process based on the optical method will be described below from two angles of the setting position of the structure for projecting the second projection feature and the setting position of the first posture positioning feature.
从用于投射第二投影特征的结构的设置位置角度说明。Described from the perspective of the setting position of the structure for projecting the second projection feature.
其一,如果用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于被测对象,则第一姿势定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。需要说明的是,如果第一姿势定位特征设置于测量探头,为了实现测量姿势的定位,则需要使得在首次测量姿势定位阶段,测量探头的位置是固定不变的。同理,如果第一姿势定位特征设置于固定座,为了实现测量姿势的定位,则需要使得在首次测量姿势定位阶段,固定座的位置是固定不变的。First, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is arranged on the measured object, the first posture positioning feature can be arranged on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects. It should be noted that, if the first posture positioning feature is provided on the measurement probe, in order to realize the positioning of the measurement posture, the position of the measurement probe needs to be fixed during the first measurement posture positioning stage. Similarly, if the first posture positioning feature is provided on the fixed seat, in order to realize the positioning of the measurement posture, it is necessary to make the position of the fixed seat be fixed during the first measurement posture positioning stage.
其二,如果用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于测量探头,则第一姿势定位特征不能设置于测量探头,可以设置于被测对象、固定座或其他对象。需要说明的是,需要使得在首次测量姿势定位阶段,测量探头的位置是固定不变的。此外,如果第一姿势定位特征设置于固定座,则可以通过如下方式实现首次测量姿势的定位,即根据第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势,直至第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征匹配,这里所述的第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征匹配是指第一姿势定位特征被被测对象遮挡,而使得第二投影特征无法投射至第一姿势定位特征所在的位置。如果第一姿势定位特征与第二姿势定位特征不匹配,则至少存在一个第二投影特征可以投射至第一姿势定位特征所在的位置。如果第一姿势定位特征设置于其他对象,则可以采用与将第一姿势定位特征设置于固定座类似的方式实现测量姿势的定位,在此不再赘述。Second, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is arranged on the measuring probe, the first posture positioning feature cannot be arranged on the measuring probe, but can be arranged on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects. It should be noted that the position of the measurement probe needs to be fixed in the first measurement posture positioning stage. In addition, if the first posture positioning feature is set on the fixed seat, the positioning of the first measurement posture can be realized by the following method, that is, according to the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature, the current measurement posture of the measured object is adjusted until the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature are adjusted. The posture positioning feature matches the second projection feature. The matching of the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature here means that the first posture positioning feature is blocked by the measured object, so that the second projection feature cannot be projected to the first posture. The location of the work feature. If the first gesture location feature does not match the second gesture location feature, then there is at least one second projection feature that can be projected to the location where the first gesture location feature is located. If the first posture positioning feature is set on other objects, the positioning of the measurement posture can be implemented in a manner similar to that when the first posture positioning feature is set on the fixed seat, which will not be repeated here.
其三,如果用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于固定座,则第一姿势定位特征不能设置于固定座,可以设置于被测对象、测量探头或其他对象。需要说明的是,需要使得在首次测量姿势定位阶段,固定座的位置是固定不变的。此外,如果第一姿势定位特征设置于测量探头或其他对象,则可以采用与将用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于测量探头,第一姿势定位特征设置于固定座或其他对象类似的方式实现测量姿势的定位,在此不再赘述。Third, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is installed on the fixed seat, the first posture positioning feature cannot be installed on the fixed seat, but can be installed on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects. It should be noted that, it is necessary to make the position of the fixed seat be fixed in the first measurement posture positioning stage. In addition, if the first posture positioning feature is provided on the measuring probe or other object, it can be used in a similar manner as the structure for projecting the second projection feature is provided on the measuring probe, and the first posture positioning feature is provided on the holder or other object The positioning of the measurement posture is realized, which is not repeated here.
其四,如果用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于其他对象,则第一姿势定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。需要说明的是,如果第一姿势定位特征设置于测量探头、固定座或其他对象,则可以采用与将用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于测量探头,将第一姿势定位特征设置于固定座或其他对象类似的方式实现测量姿势的定位,在此不再赘述。Fourth, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is set on other objects, the first posture positioning feature can be set on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects. It should be noted that, if the first posture positioning feature is set on the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects, the same structure as the structure used to project the second projection feature can be set on the measuring probe, and the first posture positioning feature is set on the fixed position. The positioning of the measurement posture can be achieved in a similar manner to a seat or other objects, which will not be repeated here.
从第一姿势定位特征的设置位置角度说明。From the perspective of the setting position of the first posture positioning feature.
其一,如果第一姿势定位特征设置于被测对象,则用于投射第二投影特征的结构可以设 置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于测量探头,则需要使得在首次测量姿势定位阶段,测量探头的位置是固定不变的。同理,如果用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于固定座,则需要使得在首次测量姿势定位阶段,固定座的位置是固定不变的。First, if the first posture positioning feature is set on the measured object, the structure for projecting the second projection feature can be set on the measured object, a measuring probe, a fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is provided on the measurement probe, it is required that the position of the measurement probe is fixed in the first measurement posture positioning stage. Similarly, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is arranged on the fixed seat, it is necessary to make the position of the fixed seat be fixed during the first measurement of the posture positioning stage.
其二,如果第一姿势定位特征设置于测量探头,则用于投射第二投影特征的结构与测量探头是分立的,可以设置于被测对象、固定座或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于被测对象、固定座或其他对象,则可以参见上文对应部分的说明,在此不再赘述。Second, if the first posture positioning feature is set on the measuring probe, the structure for projecting the second projection feature is separate from the measuring probe, and can be set on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is disposed on the object to be measured, the holder or other objects, the description in the corresponding part above can be referred to, and details are not repeated here.
其三,如果第一姿势定位特征设置于固定座,则用于投射第二投影特征的结构与固定座是分立的,可以设置于被测对象、测量探头或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于被测对象、测量探头或其他对象,则可以参见上文对应部分的说明,在此不再赘述。Thirdly, if the first posture locating feature is set on the fixed base, the structure for projecting the second projection feature is separate from the fixed base, and can be set on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is provided on the object to be measured, the measuring probe or other objects, reference may be made to the description of the corresponding part above, and details are not repeated here.
其四,如果第一姿势定位特征设置于其他对象,则用于投射第二投影特征的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果用于投射第二投影特征的结构设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象,则可以参见上文对应部分的说明,在此不再赘述。Fourth, if the first posture positioning feature is set on other objects, the structure for projecting the second projection feature can be set on the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the second projection feature is provided on the object to be measured, the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects, the description of the corresponding part above can be referred to, and details are not repeated here.
示例性的,图11示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于光学方法实现测量姿势的定位的示意图。图11中第一姿势定位特征设置于被测对象。Exemplarily, FIG. 11 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 11 , the first posture positioning feature is set on the measured object.
通过光学方法实现测量姿势的定位,一方面由于光源的位置与角度能够灵活调节,使得其可以较为容易地与第一姿势定位特征匹配,因此,第一姿势定位特征可以灵活设置,从而降低了第一姿势定位特征设置的难度。另一方面也能够通过调节出射光斑的形状,更好地实现与第一姿势定位特征的匹配,保证定位精度。The positioning of the measurement posture is realized by an optical method. On the one hand, since the position and angle of the light source can be flexibly adjusted, it can be easily matched with the first posture positioning feature. Therefore, the first posture positioning feature can be flexibly set, thereby reducing the The difficulty of a pose localization feature setting. On the other hand, by adjusting the shape of the outgoing light spot, the matching with the first posture positioning feature can be better achieved, and the positioning accuracy can be ensured.
根据本公开的实施例,根据第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to the target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
获取第三目标图像。获取第二模板图像,其中,第二模板图像包括第一姿势定位特征。在确定第三目标图像与第二模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第三目标图像,直至新的第三目标图像与第二模板图像匹配。在确定新的第三目标图像与第二模板图像匹配的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。A third target image is acquired. A second template image is acquired, wherein the second template image includes the first gesture location feature. When it is determined that the third target image does not match the second template image, the current measurement posture is adjusted to obtain a new third target image until the new third target image matches the second template image. When it is determined that the new third target image matches the second template image, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,为了保证使用的灵活性和测量姿势定位的精度,可以采用图像匹配方法实现,即将第三目标图像与第二模板图像进行匹配,根据匹配结果,确定目标测量姿势。其中,第二模板图像可以包括第一姿势定位特征且第一姿势定位特征在第二模板图像中 的位置为预设位置。在第三目标图像与第二模板图像匹配的过程中,第三目标图像可能是未包括第一姿势定位特征的目标图像,也可能是包括第一姿势定位特征但第一姿势定位特征在第三目标图像的位置不为预设位置的目标图像,还可能是包括第一姿势定位特征且第一姿势定位特征在第三目标图像的位置为预设位置的目标图像。由于第二模板图像包括位于预设位置的第一姿势定位特征,因此,如果第三目标图像与第二模板图像匹配,则可以说明第三目标图像包括第一姿势定位特征且第一姿势定位特征在第三目标图像中的位置为预设位置。换句话说,将第三目标图像与第二模板图像进行匹配的目的在于,使得获取到的第三目标图像包括第一姿势定位特征且第一姿势定位特征在第三目标图像中的位置为预设位置。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of the measurement posture positioning, an image matching method can be used, that is, the third target image is matched with the second template image, and the target measurement posture is determined according to the matching result. Wherein, the second template image may include a first posture locating feature and the position of the first posture locating feature in the second template image is a preset position. In the process of matching the third target image with the second template image, the third target image may be a target image that does not include the first posture positioning feature, or may include the first posture positioning feature but the first posture positioning feature is in the third The position of the target image is not the target image at the preset position, and may also be a target image including the first posture positioning feature and the position of the first posture positioning feature in the third target image is the preset position. Since the second template image includes the first posture localization feature at the preset position, if the third target image matches the second template image, it can be explained that the third target image includes the first posture localization feature and the first posture localization feature The position in the third target image is a preset position. In other words, the purpose of matching the third target image with the second template image is to make the acquired third target image include the first posture positioning feature and the position of the first posture positioning feature in the third target image is predetermined set location.
根据本公开的实施例,用于采集第三目标图像的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。其他对象可以表示除测量探头、固定部和被测对象以外的对象。第一姿势定位特征可以设置于测量探头、固定座、被测对象和其他对象中的至少一种。针对用于采集第三目标图像的结构和第一姿势定位特征的描述,可以参见针对用于投射第二投影特征的结构和第一姿势定位特征的描述,在此不再赘述。所不同的是,如果用于采集第三目标图像的结构设置于测量探头,则第一姿势定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。如果用于采集第三目标图像的结构设置于固定座,则第一姿势定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the structure for acquiring the third target image may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat or other objects. The other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured. The first posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the fixed seat, the object to be measured, and other objects. For the description of the structure for acquiring the third target image and the first posture positioning feature, reference may be made to the description of the structure for projecting the second projection feature and the first posture positioning feature, which will not be repeated here. The difference is that if the structure for acquiring the third target image is provided on the measuring probe, the first posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixing seat and other objects. If the structure for capturing the third target image is provided on the fixture, the first posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixture, and other objects.
示例性的,图12示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种图像匹配方法实现测量姿势的定位的示意图。图12中第一姿势定位特征设置于被测对象。Exemplarily, FIG. 12 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the positioning of the measurement posture implemented by an image matching method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 12 , the first posture positioning feature is set on the measured object.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定第三目标图像与第二模板图像匹配的情况下,可以说明当前测量姿势即为目标测量姿势。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in the case where it is determined that the third target image matches the second template image, it can be stated that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,根据第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to the target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
获取第四目标图像,其中,第四目标图像包括第一姿势定位特征。在确定第四目标图像中第一姿势定位特征的位置不在第二预设位置的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第四目标图像,直至新的第四目标图像中第一姿势定位特征的位置在第二预设位置。在确定新的第四目标图像中第一姿势定位特征的位置在第二预设位置的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。A fourth target image is acquired, wherein the fourth target image includes the first gesture positioning feature. In the case where it is determined that the position of the first posture positioning feature in the fourth target image is not at the second preset position, adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new fourth target image until the first posture is positioned in the new fourth target image The location of the feature is at the second preset location. When it is determined that the position of the first posture positioning feature in the new fourth target image is at the second preset position, the current measurement posture is determined as the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,为了保证使用的灵活性和测量姿势定位的精度,可以采用成像方法实现,即如果第一姿势定位特征在第四目标图像中的位置为第二预设位置,则可以说明完成了测量姿势的定位。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of measuring posture positioning, an imaging method can be used, that is, if the position of the first posture positioning feature in the fourth target image is the second preset position, it can be It indicates that the positioning of the measurement pose is completed.
根据本公开的实施例,采用成像方法实现测量姿势定位的过程即是确定第一姿势定位特 征在第四目标图像中的位置是否为第二预设位置的过程,如果第一姿势定位特征在第四目标图像中的位置不为第二预设位置,则可以调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第四目标图像,直至第一姿势定位特征在新的第四目标图像中的位置为第二预设位置。在新的第四目标图像中第一姿势定位特征的位置为第二预设位置的情况下,可以说明当前测量姿势即为目标测量姿势。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the process of using the imaging method to measure the posture positioning is the process of determining whether the position of the first posture positioning feature in the fourth target image is the second preset position. The position in the four target images is not the second preset position, then the current measurement posture can be adjusted to obtain a new fourth target image, until the position of the first posture positioning feature in the new fourth target image is the second preset position set location. When the position of the first posture positioning feature in the new fourth target image is the second preset position, it can be explained that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,用于采集第四目标图像的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。其他对象可以表示除测量探头、固定部和被测对象以外的对象。第一姿势定位特征可以设置于测量探头、固定座、被测对象和其他对象中的至少一种。针对用于采集第四目标图像的结构和第一姿势定位特征的描述,可以参见针对用于投射第二投影特征的结构和第一姿势定位特征的描述,在此不再赘述。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the structure for acquiring the fourth target image may be disposed on the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed seat or other objects. The other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured. The first posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measurement probe, the fixed seat, the object to be measured, and other objects. For the description of the structure for acquiring the fourth target image and the first posture positioning feature, reference may be made to the description of the structure for projecting the second projection feature and the first posture positioning feature, which will not be repeated here.
示例性的,图13示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于成像方法实现测量姿势的定位的示意图。图13中第一姿势定位特征设置于被测对象。Exemplarily, FIG. 13 schematically shows a schematic diagram of realizing the positioning of the measurement posture based on an imaging method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 13 , the first posture positioning feature is set on the object to be measured.
根据本公开的实施例,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method may further include the following operations.
如果测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置,则在确定当前测量姿势不为目标测量姿势的情况下,确定第二姿势定位特征。根据第二姿势定位特征,调整当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势。If the measurement probe is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area, in a case where it is determined that the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture, the second posture positioning feature is determined. According to the second posture positioning feature, the current measurement posture is adjusted to the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,如果测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置,则在确定当前测量姿势不为目标测量姿势的情况下,需要进行上文所述的再次测量姿势定位。即完成测量区域的定位后,如果当前测量姿势不为目标测量姿势,则需要进行上文所述的再次测量姿势定位。可以根据第二姿势定位特征,调整当前测量姿势,直至当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。第二姿势定位特征可以与第一姿势定位特征相同或不同。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, if the measurement probe is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area, if it is determined that the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture, the re-measurement posture positioning described above needs to be performed. That is, after completing the positioning of the measurement area, if the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture, it is necessary to perform the above-mentioned re-measurement posture positioning. The current measurement posture may be adjusted according to the second posture positioning feature until the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture. The second gesture location feature may be the same as or different from the first gesture location feature.
根据本公开的实施例,根据第二姿势定位特征,调整当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, adjusting the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
获取第三投影特征。在确定第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,直至第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配。在确定第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。Get the third projected feature. If it is determined that the second posture locating feature does not match the third projection feature, the current measurement posture is adjusted until the second posture locating feature matches the third projection feature. When it is determined that the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,为了保证使用的灵活性和测量姿势定位的精度,可以采用光学方法实现,即将第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征进行匹配,根据匹配结果,确定目标测量姿势,其中,第三投影特征是根据光学方法形成的,即由光源投射预设形状的光斑形成第三投影特征,光斑的形状可以根据第二姿势定位特征确定。即针对被测对象,根据第二姿势定位特征设置与其匹配的第三投影特征,使得第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配的当前测量 姿势即为目标测量姿势。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of the measurement posture positioning, an optical method can be adopted, that is, the second posture positioning feature is matched with the third projection feature, and the target measurement posture is determined according to the matching result, wherein , the third projection feature is formed according to an optical method, that is, a light spot with a preset shape is projected by the light source to form the third projection feature, and the shape of the light spot can be determined according to the second posture positioning feature. That is, for the measured object, set the matching third projection feature according to the second posture positioning feature, so that the current measurement posture that the second posture positioning feature matches with the third projection feature is the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,用于投射第三投影特征的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。其他对象可以表示除测量探头、固定部和被测对象以外的对象。第二姿势定位特征可以设置于测量探头、固定座、被测对象和其他对象中的至少一种。下面从用于投射第三投影特征的结构的设置位置,与第二姿势定位特征的设置位置两个角度说明基于光学方法实现的调整过程。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the structure for projecting the third projection feature may be provided on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the mount, or other objects. The other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured. The second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measuring probe, the fixing base, the object to be measured, and other objects. The adjustment process based on the optical method will be described below from two angles of the setting position of the structure for projecting the third projection feature and the setting position of the second posture positioning feature.
从用于投射第三投影特征的结构的设置位置角度说明。Described from the perspective of the setting position of the structure for projecting the third projection feature.
其一,如果用于投射第三投影特征的结构设置于被测对象,则第二姿势定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。First, if the structure for projecting the third projection feature is arranged on the measured object, the second posture positioning feature can be arranged on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects.
其二,如果用于投射第三投影特征的结构设置于测量探头,则第二姿势定位特征不能设置于测量探头和固定座,可以设置于被测对象或其他对象,这是由于在将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置之后,测头探头设置于固定座所导致的。Second, if the structure for projecting the third projection feature is set on the measuring probe, the second posture positioning feature cannot be set on the measuring probe and the holder, but can be set on the measured object or other objects, because the After being set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the probe head is set on the fixed seat.
其三,如果用于投射第三投影特征的结构设置于固定座,则第二姿势定位特征不能设置于测量探头和固定座,可以设置于被测对象或其他对象。同样是由于在将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置之后,测头探头设置于固定座所导致的。Thirdly, if the structure for projecting the third projection feature is set on the fixed seat, the second posture positioning feature cannot be set on the measuring probe and the fixed base, but can be set on the measured object or other objects. It is also caused by the fact that after the measuring probe is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the probe probe is set on the fixed seat.
其四,如果用于投射第三投影特征的结构设置于其他对象,则第二姿势定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。需要说明的是,如果第二姿势定位特征设置于其他对象,则可以通过如下方式实现测量姿势的定位,即在确定第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,直至第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配,在确定第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。这里所述的第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配是指第二姿势定位特征被被测对象遮挡,而使得第三投影特征无法投射至第二姿势定位特征所在的位置,如果第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配不匹配,则至少存在一个第三投影特征可以投射至第二姿势定位特征所在的位置。Fourth, if the structure for projecting the third projection feature is set on other objects, the second posture positioning feature can be set on at least one of the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat and other objects. It should be noted that, if the second posture positioning feature is set on other objects, the positioning of the measurement posture can be realized by the following method, that is, when it is determined that the second posture positioning feature does not match the third projection feature, the current measurement posture is adjusted. , until the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature, and when it is determined that the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature, the current measurement posture is determined as the target measurement posture. The matching between the second posture positioning feature and the third projection feature mentioned here means that the second posture positioning feature is blocked by the measured object, so that the third projection feature cannot be projected to the position where the second posture positioning feature is located. If the matching of the positioning feature and the third projection feature does not match, there is at least one third projection feature that can be projected to the position where the second posture positioning feature is located.
从第二姿势定位特征的设置位置角度说明。From the perspective of the setting position of the second posture positioning feature.
其一,如果第二姿势定位特征设置于被测对象,则用于投射第三投影特征的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。First, if the second posture positioning feature is arranged on the object to be measured, the structure for projecting the third projection feature can be arranged on the object to be measured, a measuring probe, a fixed seat or other objects.
其二,如果第二姿势定位特征设置于测量探头,则用于投射第三投影特征的结构与测量探头和固定座是分立的,可以设置于被测对象或其他对象,这是由于在将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置之后,测头探头设置于固定座所导致的。Second, if the second posture positioning feature is set on the measuring probe, the structure for projecting the third projection feature is separate from the measuring probe and the fixed seat, and can be set on the object to be measured or other objects. After the probe is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the probe probe is set on the fixed seat.
其三,如果第二姿势定位特征设置于固定座,则用于投射第三投影特征的结构与测量探 头和固定座是分立的,可以设置于被测对象或其他对象。同样是由于在将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置之后,测头探头设置于固定座所导致的。Thirdly, if the second posture positioning feature is arranged on the fixed seat, the structure for projecting the third projection feature is separate from the measurement probe and the fixed seat, and can be arranged on the measured object or other objects. It is also caused by the fact that after the measuring probe is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the probe probe is set on the fixed seat.
其四,如果第二姿势定位特征设置于其他对象,则用于投射第三投影特征的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。需要说明的是,如果用于投射第三投影特征的结构设置于其他对象,则参见上文对应部分说明,在此不再赘述。Fourth, if the second posture positioning feature is set on other objects, the structure for projecting the third projection feature can be set on the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixed seat or other objects. It should be noted that, if the structure for projecting the third projection feature is set on another object, please refer to the description of the corresponding part above, which will not be repeated here.
通过光学方法实现测量姿势的定位,一方面由于光源的位置与角度能够灵活调节,使得其可以较为容易地与第二姿势定位特征匹配,因此,第二姿势定位特征可以灵活设置,从而降低了第二姿势定位特征设置的难度。另一方面也能够通过调节出射光斑的形状,更好地实现与第二姿势定位特征的匹配,提高定位精度。The positioning of the measurement posture is realized by an optical method. On the one hand, since the position and angle of the light source can be flexibly adjusted, it can be easily matched with the second posture positioning feature. Therefore, the second posture positioning feature can be flexibly set, thereby reducing the The difficulty of setting the feature of the second pose location. On the other hand, by adjusting the shape of the outgoing light spot, the matching with the second posture positioning feature can be better achieved, and the positioning accuracy can be improved.
根据本公开的实施例,根据第二姿势定位特征,调整当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, adjusting the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
获取第五目标图像。获取第三模板图像,其中,第三模板图像包括第二姿势定位特征。在确定第五目标图像与第三模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第五目标图像,直至新的第五目标图像与第三模板图像匹配。在确定新的第五目标图像与第三模板图像匹配的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。A fifth target image is acquired. A third template image is acquired, wherein the third template image includes the second gesture location feature. When it is determined that the fifth target image does not match the third template image, the current measurement posture is adjusted to acquire a new fifth target image until the new fifth target image matches the third template image. When it is determined that the new fifth target image matches the third template image, the current measurement posture is determined to be the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,为了保证使用的灵活性和测量姿势定位的精度,可以采用图像匹配方法实现,即将第五目标图像与第三模板图像进行匹配,根据匹配结果,确定目标测量姿势。其中,第三模板图像可以包括第二姿势定位特征且第二姿势定位特征在第三模板图像中的位置为预设位置。在第五目标图像与第三模板图像匹配的过程中,第五目标图像可能是未包括第二姿势定位特征的目标图像,也可能是包括第二姿势定位特征但第二姿势定位特征在第五目标图像的位置不为预设位置的目标图像,还可能是包括第二姿势定位特征且第二姿势定位特征在第五目标图像的位置为预设位置的目标图像。由于第三模板图像包括位于预设位置的第二姿势定位特征,因此,如果第五目标图像与第三模板图像匹配,则可以说明第五目标图像包括第二姿势定位特征且第二姿势定位特征在第五目标图像中的位置为预设位置。换句话说,将第五目标图像与第三模板图像进行匹配的目的在于,使得获取到的第五目标图像包括第二姿势定位特征且第二姿势定位特征在第五目标图像中的位置为预设位置。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of the measurement posture positioning, an image matching method can be used, that is, the fifth target image is matched with the third template image, and the target measurement posture is determined according to the matching result. Wherein, the third template image may include the second posture positioning feature and the position of the second posture positioning feature in the third template image is a preset position. In the process of matching the fifth target image with the third template image, the fifth target image may be a target image that does not include the second posture positioning feature, or may include the second posture positioning feature but the second posture positioning feature is in the fifth target image. The position of the target image is not the target image at the preset position, and may also be a target image including the second posture positioning feature and the position of the second posture positioning feature is the preset position at the position of the fifth target image. Since the third template image includes the second gesture positioning feature located at the preset position, if the fifth target image matches the third template image, it can be explained that the fifth target image includes the second gesture positioning feature and the second gesture positioning feature The position in the fifth target image is a preset position. In other words, the purpose of matching the fifth target image with the third template image is to make the acquired fifth target image include the second posture positioning feature and the position of the second posture positioning feature in the fifth target image is a predetermined set location.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定第五目标图像与第三模板图像匹配的情况下,可以说明当前测量姿势即为目标测量姿势。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in the case where it is determined that the fifth target image matches the third template image, it can be stated that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,用于采集第五目标图像的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。其他对象可以表示除测量探头、固定部和被测对象以外的对象。第二姿势定位特征可以设置于测量探头、固定座、被测对象和其他对象中的至少一种。针对用于采 集第五目标图像的结构和第二姿势定位特征的描述,可以参见针对用于投射第三投影特征的结构和第二姿势定位特征的描述,在此不再赘述。所不同的是,如果用于采集第五目标图像的结构设置于测量探头,则第二姿势定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。如果用于采集第五目标图像的结构设置于固定座,则第二姿势定位特征可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座和其他对象中的至少一种。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the structure for acquiring the fifth target image may be disposed on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat or other objects. The other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured. The second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measuring probe, the fixing base, the object to be measured, and other objects. For the description of the structure for acquiring the fifth target image and the second posture positioning feature, reference may be made to the description of the structure for projecting the third projection feature and the second posture positioning feature, which will not be repeated here. The difference is that if the structure for acquiring the fifth target image is provided on the measurement probe, the second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed seat and other objects. If the structure for capturing the fifth target image is provided on the fixed seat, the second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed seat and other objects.
根据本公开的实施例,根据第二姿势定位特征,调整当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, adjusting the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature may include the following operations.
获取第六目标图像,其中,第六目标图像包括第二姿势定位特征。在确定第六目标图像中第二姿势定位特征的位置不在第三预设位置的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第六目标图像,直至新的第六目标图像中第二姿势定位特征的位置在第三预设位置。在确定新的第六目标图像中第二姿势定位特征的位置在第三预设位置的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。A sixth target image is acquired, wherein the sixth target image includes the second gesture positioning feature. If it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is not at the third preset position, adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new sixth target image until the second posture is positioned in the new sixth target image The location of the feature is at the third preset location. When it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is at the third preset position, the current measurement posture is determined as the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,为了保证使用的灵活性和测量姿势定位的精度,可以采用成像方法实现,即如果第二姿势定位特征在第六目标图像中的位置为第三预设位置,则可以说明完成了测量姿势的定位。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to ensure the flexibility of use and the accuracy of measuring posture positioning, an imaging method can be used, that is, if the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is the third preset position, it can be It indicates that the positioning of the measurement pose is completed.
根据本公开的实施例,二采用成像方法实现测量姿势定位的过程即是确定第二姿势定位特征在第六目标图像中的位置是否为第三预设位置的过程,如果第二姿势定位特征在第六目标图像中的位置不为第三预设位置,则可以调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第六目标图像,直至第二姿势定位特征在新的第六目标图像中的位置为第三预设位置。在新的第六目标图像中第二姿势定位特征的位置为第三预设位置的情况下,可以说明当前测量姿势即为目标测量姿势。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the second process of using the imaging method to measure the posture positioning is the process of determining whether the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is the third preset position. The position in the sixth target image is not the third preset position, then the current measurement posture can be adjusted to obtain a new sixth target image, until the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is the third Preset position. In the case where the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is the third preset position, it can be explained that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,用于采集第六目标图像的结构可以设置于被测对象、测量探头、固定座或其他对象。其他对象可以表示除测量探头、固定部和被测对象以外的对象。第二姿势定位特征可以设置于测量探头、固定座、被测对象和其他对象中的至少一种。针对用于采集第六目标图像的结构和第二姿势定位特征的描述,可以参见针对用于投射第三投影特征的结构和第二姿势定位特征的描述,在此不再赘述。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the structure for acquiring the sixth target image may be disposed on the object to be measured, the measurement probe, the fixed seat, or other objects. The other objects may represent objects other than the measurement probe, the fixture, and the object to be measured. The second posture positioning feature may be provided on at least one of the measuring probe, the fixing base, the object to be measured, and other objects. For the description of the structure for acquiring the sixth target image and the second posture positioning feature, reference may be made to the description of the structure for projecting the third projection feature and the second posture positioning feature, which will not be repeated here.
根据本公开的实施例,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method may further include the following operations.
生成提示信息,其中,提示信息用于提示测量姿势定位和/或测量区域定位完成,提示信息的形式包括图像、语音或震动中的至少一种。Prompt information is generated, wherein the prompt information is used to prompt that the measurement posture positioning and/or the measurement area positioning is completed, and the form of the prompt information includes at least one of image, voice or vibration.
根据本公开的实施例,为了使用户可以及时获知测量姿势定位和/或测量区域定位是否完成,可以在完成测量姿势定位和/或测量区域定位之后,生成提示信息。其中,提示信息的具 体表现形式可以包括图像、语音和震动中的至少一种。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order for the user to know in time whether the positioning of the measurement posture and/or the positioning of the measurement area is completed, prompt information may be generated after the positioning of the measurement posture and/or the positioning of the measurement area is completed. Wherein, the specific expression form of the prompt information may include at least one of image, voice and vibration.
根据本公开的实施例,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method may further include the following operations.
在确定固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置且测量探头未设置于固定部的情况下,将测量探头设置于固定座。在确定固定座未设置于与测量区域对应的位置的情况下,通过第一配合件将固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置,并将测量探头设置于固定座。When it is determined that the fixing seat is installed at the position corresponding to the measurement area and the measurement probe is not installed in the fixing portion, the measurement probe is installed on the fixing seat. When it is determined that the fixing seat is not arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the fixing seat is arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting, and the measuring probe is arranged on the fixing seat.
根据本公开的实施例,如果测量探头通过固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置,则在组织成分测量过程中,固定座可以脱离测量区域,测量探头可以脱离固定座,在需要测量时,如果固定座未设置于与测量区域对应的位置,则可以通过第一配合件将固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置,并将测量探头设置于固定座。如果固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置且测量探头未设置于固定座,则可以将测量探头设置于固定座。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, if the measurement probe is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area through the fixing seat, during the tissue composition measurement process, the fixing seat can be separated from the measurement area, and the measurement probe can be separated from the fixing seat. If the fixing base is not set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the fixing base can be set at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting, and the measuring probe can be set at the fixing base. If the fixing base is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area and the measuring probe is not set on the fixing base, the measuring probe can be set at the fixing base.
示例性的,如针对短期的随时测量,可以使得固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置,测量探头可以脱离固定座,在需要进行测量时,再将测量探头设置于固定座。针对长期测量,固定座可以脱离测量区域,测量探头可以脱离固定座,在需要测量时,再通过第一配合件将固定座设置于与测量区域对应的位置,并将测量探头设置于固定座。Exemplarily, for short-term measurement at any time, the fixing base can be arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area, the measuring probe can be separated from the fixing base, and the measuring probe can be arranged on the fixing base when measurement is required. For long-term measurement, the fixing seat can be separated from the measurement area, and the measuring probe can be separated from the fixing seat. When measurement is required, the fixing seat is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting, and the measuring probe is set on the fixing seat.
根据本公开的实施例,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method may further include the following operations.
在确定测量探头未设置于与测量区域对应的位置的情况下,通过第二配合件将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置。When it is determined that the measurement probe is not arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the measurement probe is arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
根据本公开的实施例,如果测量探头直接设置于与测量区域对应的位置,则在组织成分测量过程中,测量探头可以脱离测量区域,在需要测量时,再通过第二配合件将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, if the measurement probe is directly set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the measurement probe can be separated from the measurement area during the tissue composition measurement process, and the measurement probe can be set through the second fitting when measurement is required. at the position corresponding to the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength may include the following operations.
从与预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强中确定第一输出光强和第二输出光强。根据与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。The first output light intensity and the second output light intensity are determined from at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength. The concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,第一输出光强对应的出射光的平均光程与第二输出光强对应的出射光的平均光程不同。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the average optical length of the outgoing light corresponding to the first output light intensity is different from the average optical length of the outgoing light corresponding to the second output light intensity.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理,得到差分信号。根据与预设波长对应的差分信号,确定被测组织成分的浓度。Differential processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal. According to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined.
根据本公开的实施例,由于不可控测量条件的变动具有难以预知和不可控的特性,因此, 难以通过采用有效控制方法实现再现性的方式降低不可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响。为了提高测量结果的可靠性,发明人发现可以通过采用合理的数学算法减小不可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响,使得其对测量结果的影响可以降低到可以忽略的程度,即使得不可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响与随机噪声对测量结果的影响的水平相当。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, since changes in uncontrollable measurement conditions are unpredictable and uncontrollable, it is difficult to reduce the influence of changes in uncontrollable measurement conditions on measurement results by adopting an effective control method to achieve reproducibility. In order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, the inventor found that the influence of changes in uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results can be reduced by using a reasonable mathematical algorithm, so that the influence on the measurement results can be reduced to a negligible level, even if it is impossible to The influence of the variation of the controlled measurement conditions on the measurement results is comparable to the influence of random noise on the measurement results.
为了降低不可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响,可以采用干扰抑制方法实现,其中,干扰抑制方法可以包括差分测量方法。差分测量方法可以包括时间差分测量方法和位置差分测量方法。差分测量方法可以降低不可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响的原因在于,如果不同平均光程下的输出光强所携带的干扰信息基本相同,即不同平均光程下的输出光强受干扰的影响基本一致,则由于不同平均光程下的输出光强所携带的有效信息不同,因此,可以对两个平均光程下的输出光强(即第一输出光强和第二输出光强)进行差分处理,得到差分信号,根据差分信号确定被测组织成分的浓度。其中,干扰信息可以理解为输出光强对干扰的响应。有效信息可以理解为输出光强对被测组织成分的响应。In order to reduce the influence of the variation of uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement result, an interference suppression method can be adopted, wherein the interference suppression method can include a differential measurement method. The differential measurement method may include a time differential measurement method and a position differential measurement method. The reason why the differential measurement method can reduce the influence of uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results is that if the interference information carried by the output light intensities under different average optical paths is basically the same, that is, the output light intensities under different average optical paths are disturbed. The influences are basically the same, since the effective information carried by the output light intensities under different average optical paths is different, therefore, the output light intensities under the two average optical paths (that is, the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity ) to perform differential processing to obtain a differential signal, and determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal. Among them, the interference information can be understood as the response of the output light intensity to the interference. Effective information can be understood as the response of the output light intensity to the measured tissue composition.
根据本公开的实施例,将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理中的差分处理可以包括硬件方面的处理方式和软件方面的处理方式。其中,硬件方面的处理方式可以包括采用差分电路进行处理。软件方面的处理方式可以包括采用差分算法进行差分运算。差分算法可以包括直接差分运算和对数差分运算。其中,直接差分运算是指直接将两个参数进行作差处理。对数差分运算是指先对两个参数进行取对数运算,得到取对数后的参数,再将两个取对数后的参数进行作差处理。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the differential processing in the differential processing of the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include a processing method in hardware and a processing method in software. Wherein, the processing manner in terms of hardware may include processing by using a differential circuit. The processing method in software may include using a difference algorithm to perform a difference operation. Differentiation algorithms may include direct differencing operations and logarithmic differencing operations. Among them, the direct difference operation refers to the difference processing of two parameters directly. The logarithmic difference operation refers to first performing the logarithmic operation on two parameters to obtain the logarithmic parameters, and then performing the difference processing of the two logarithmic parameters.
根据本公开的实施例,通过差分测量方法可以实现有效地削弱共模干扰信息,进而提高测量结果的可靠性。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, the common mode interference information can be effectively attenuated by the differential measurement method, thereby improving the reliability of the measurement result.
根据本公开的实施例,将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理,得到差分信号,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, performing differential processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
采用差分电路处理与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到差分信号。A differential circuit is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
根据本公开的实施例,可以采用差分电路实现对第一输出光强和第二输出光强的差分处理,以直接获取差分信号。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, a differential circuit can be used to implement differential processing of the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity, so as to directly obtain a differential signal.
根据本公开的实施例,将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理,得到差分信号,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, performing differential processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
采用差分算法处理与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到差分信号。A differential algorithm is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
根据本公开的实施例,采用差分算法处理与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到差分信号,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行直接差分运算,得到差分信号。A direct differential operation is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
根据本公开的实施例,采用差分算法处理与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到差分信号,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations.
将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行取对数处理,得到第一对数光强和第二对数光强。将与预设波长对应的第一对数光强和第二对数光强进行直接差分运算,得到差分信号。Logarithmic processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity. Perform a direct differential operation on the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
根据本公开的实施例,第一对数光强表示第一输出光强的对数,第二对数光强表示第二输出光强的对数。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first logarithmic light intensity represents the logarithm of the first output light intensity, and the second logarithmic light intensity represents the logarithm of the second output light intensity.
差分信号可以通过如下公式(1)确定。The differential signal can be determined by the following formula (1).
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000001
其中,A D表示差分信号,
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000002
表示第一输出光强,
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000003
表示第二输出光强。
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000004
表示与第一输出光强对应的平均光程,
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000005
表示与第二输出光强对应的平均光程。
Among them, A D represents the differential signal,
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000002
represents the first output light intensity,
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000003
Indicates the second output light intensity.
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000004
represents the average optical path corresponding to the first output light intensity,
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000005
represents the average optical path length corresponding to the second output light intensity.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的差分信号,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
将与预设波长对应的差分信号输入第一组织成分浓度预测模型,输出被测组织成分的浓度。The differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength is input into the first tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
根据本公开的实施例,第一组织成分浓度预测模型可以是基于化学计量学模型训练生成,其中,化学计量学模型可以包括回归模型。回归模型可以包括线性回归模型,线性回归模型可以包括一元线性回归模型。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated based on training of a chemometric model, wherein the chemometric model may include a regression model. The regression model may include a linear regression model, and the linear regression model may include a univariate linear regression model.
根据本公开的实施例,获取第一训练样本集,其中,第一训练样本集包括多个第一训练样本,其中,每个第一训练样本包括被测组织成分的第一真实浓度和与第一真实浓度对应的差分信号。根据第一训练样本集,建立第一组织成分浓度预测模型。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, a first training sample set is obtained, wherein the first training sample set includes a plurality of first training samples, wherein each first training sample includes a first true concentration of a measured tissue component and a A differential signal corresponding to a true concentration. According to the first training sample set, a first tissue component concentration prediction model is established.
根据本公开的实施例,第一组织成分浓度预测模型可以通过如下方式生成,获取第一训练样本集,第一训练样本集包括多个第一训练样本,第一训练样本包括被测组织成分的第一真实浓度和与第一真实浓度对应的差分信号,将与第一真实浓度对应的差分信号作为输入变量,将第一真实浓度作为输出变量,训练待训练的数学模型,得到第一组织成分浓度预测模型。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a first training sample set, where the first training sample set includes a plurality of first training samples, and the first training samples include The first real concentration and the differential signal corresponding to the first real concentration, using the differential signal corresponding to the first real concentration as an input variable, and using the first real concentration as an output variable, train the mathematical model to be trained, and obtain the first tissue component Concentration prediction model.
根据本公开的实施例,根据第一训练样本集,建立第一组织成分浓度预测模型,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, establishing the first tissue component concentration prediction model according to the first training sample set may include the following operations.
对第一训练样本集进行预处理,得到处理后的第一训练样本集。根据处理后的第一训练样本集,建立第一组织成分浓度预测模型。The first training sample set is preprocessed to obtain the processed first training sample set. According to the processed first training sample set, a first tissue component concentration prediction model is established.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高模型的预测精度,可以对第一训练样本集进行预处理,确定第一训练样本集中的异常训练样本,以根据删除异常训练样本后的第一训练样本集建立第一组织成分浓度预测模型。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the prediction accuracy of the model, the first training sample set may be preprocessed to determine abnormal training samples in the first training sample set, so as to establish a model based on the first training sample set after deleting the abnormal training samples A first tissue component concentration prediction model.
根据本公开的实施例,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method may further include the following operations.
在满足第四预设条件的情况下,对第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,以利用修正后的第一组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。When the fourth preset condition is satisfied, the first tissue component concentration prediction model is modified to process the new differential signal using the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高模型的预测精度,需要根据组织成分测量过程中的实际条件,对第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行调整,即如果实际条件满足第四预设条件,则可以对第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,得到修正后的第一组织成分浓度预测模型。其中,第四预设条件可以包括当前次组织成分测量与建立第一组织成分浓度预测模型之间的时间间隔小于或等于时间阈值和/或被测对象的状态未发生较大变化,被测对象的状态可以包括被测对象的身体状态和/或被测对象的皮肤状态,例如皮肤灼伤,。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to improve the prediction accuracy of the model, it is necessary to adjust the first tissue component concentration prediction model according to the actual conditions in the tissue component measurement process. The first tissue component concentration prediction model is revised to obtain a revised first tissue component concentration prediction model. Wherein, the fourth preset condition may include that the time interval between the current tissue component measurement and the establishment of the first tissue component concentration prediction model is less than or equal to the time threshold and/or the state of the measured object has not changed significantly, the measured object The state may include the physical state of the subject and/or the skin state of the subject, such as skin burns.
通常在较短的时间内或被测对象的状态未发生较大变化,被测对象的组织成分变化和测量装置的状态变化导致的第一组织成分浓度预测模型的不适用可以通过对第一组织成分浓度预测模型修正来解决。Usually in a relatively short period of time or the state of the measured object does not change significantly, the inapplicability of the first tissue component concentration prediction model caused by the changes in the tissue composition of the measured object and the state of the measurement device can be determined by analyzing the first tissue component. The component concentration prediction model was revised to solve.
在获得修正后的第一组织成分浓度预测模型后,可以获取新的差分信号,将新的差分信号输入修正后的第一组织成分浓度预测模型,输出新的被测组织成分的浓度。After obtaining the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model, a new difference signal may be obtained, input the new difference signal into the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model, and output a new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,对第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, modifying the first tissue component concentration prediction model may include the following operations.
获取被测组织成分的第一目标浓度。获取与第一目标浓度对应的差分信号。根据与第一目标浓度对应的差分信号和第一目标浓度,对第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正。Obtain the first target concentration of the measured tissue component. A differential signal corresponding to the first target concentration is acquired. The first tissue component concentration prediction model is corrected based on the difference signal corresponding to the first target concentration and the first target concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,第一组织成分浓度预测模型可以是基于一元线性回归模型训练生成的。由于一元线性回归模型的两个输入参数包括斜率和截距,因此,模型训练过程即是确定斜率和截距。如果满足第四预设条件,则根据研究发现,第一组织浓度预测模型的斜率不变而截距发生了改变,在此情况下,需要重新确定的是截距,由此,可以根据第一目标浓度和与第一目标浓度对应的差分信号对第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,得到新的截距,进而得到修正后的第一组织成分浓度预测模型。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by training based on a univariate linear regression model. Since the two input parameters of the univariate linear regression model include the slope and the intercept, the model training process is to determine the slope and intercept. If the fourth preset condition is satisfied, it is found according to the research that the slope of the first tissue concentration prediction model remains unchanged but the intercept changes. In this case, the intercept needs to be re-determined. The target concentration and the differential signal corresponding to the first target concentration are used to modify the first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new intercept, and further obtain the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model.
根据本公开的实施例,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method may further include the following operations.
在满足第五预设条件的情况下,利用新的第一组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fifth preset condition is satisfied, the new differential signal is processed by using the new first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高模型的预测精度,需要根据组织成分测量过程中的实际条件,确定是否需要重新建立新的第一组织成分浓度预测模型,即如果实际条件满足第五预 设条件,则可以建立新的第一组织成分浓度预测模型。其中,第五预设条件可以包括当前次组织成分测量与建立第一组织成分浓度预测模型之间的时间间隔大于时间阈值和/或被测对象的状态发生较大变化,被测对象的状态可以包括被测对象的身体状态和/或被测对象的皮肤状态,例如皮肤灼伤。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the prediction accuracy of the model, it is necessary to determine whether a new first tissue component concentration prediction model needs to be re-established according to the actual conditions in the tissue component measurement process, that is, if the actual conditions satisfy the fifth preset condition , a new first tissue component concentration prediction model can be established. Wherein, the fifth preset condition may include that the time interval between the current tissue component measurement and the establishment of the first tissue component concentration prediction model is greater than the time threshold and/or the state of the measured object changes greatly, and the state of the measured object may Including the physical condition of the subject and/or the skin condition of the subject, such as skin burns.
采用上述方式的原因在于,通常在较长的时间内或被测对象的状态发生较大变化,被测对象的组织成分变化和测量装置的状态变化较大,使得原有的第一组织成分浓度预测模型不再适用,且无法通过在原有的第一组织成分浓度预测模型的基础上进行修正使其适用,需要重新建立新的第一组织成分浓度预测模型。The reason for adopting the above method is that, usually in a long period of time or the state of the measured object changes greatly, the tissue composition of the measured object and the state of the measuring device change greatly, so that the original first tissue component concentration The prediction model is no longer applicable, and cannot be applied by modifying the original first tissue component concentration prediction model, and a new first tissue component concentration prediction model needs to be re-established.
根据本公开的实施例,新的第一组织成分浓度预测模型可以通过如下方式生成,获取新的第一训练样本集,其中,新的第一训练样本集包括多个新的第一训练样本,其中,每个新的第一训练样本包括被测组织成分的新的第一真实浓度和与新的第一真实浓度对应的差分信号,并根据新的第一训练样本集,建立新的第一组织成分浓度预测模型。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, a new first tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a new first training sample set, wherein the new first training sample set includes a plurality of new first training samples, Wherein, each new first training sample includes a new first true concentration of the measured tissue component and a differential signal corresponding to the new first true concentration, and a new first training sample set is established according to the new first training sample set Tissue component concentration prediction models.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的差分信号,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
获取多个干扰参数中每个干扰参数的当前干扰参数值。将多个当前干扰参数值和与预设波长对应的差分信号输入第二组织成分浓度预测模型,输出被测组织成分的浓度。Obtain the current interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters. The plurality of current interference parameter values and the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength are input into the second tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
根据本公开的实施例,由于在组织成分浓度测量的过程中,也会受到干扰参数的影响,其中,干扰参数可以包括温度和压力等,因此,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,可以建立基于干扰参数的第二组织成分浓度预测模型。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, since the process of measuring the concentration of tissue components is also affected by interference parameters, wherein the interference parameters may include temperature and pressure, etc. Therefore, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, an interference-based parameter may be established. Parameter of the second tissue component concentration prediction model.
利用第二组织成分浓度预测模型处理多个当前干扰参数值和与预设波长对应的差分信号,得到被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括将多个当前干扰参数值输入第二组织成分浓度预测模型,输出差分干扰信号,利用差分干扰信号修正与预设波长对应的差分信号,得到与预设波长对应的修正信号,根据与预设波长对应的修正信号,确定被测组织成分的浓度。Using the second tissue component concentration prediction model to process multiple current interference parameter values and differential signals corresponding to preset wavelengths to obtain the measured tissue component concentration, which may include inputting multiple current interference parameter values into the second tissue component concentration prediction model , output a differential interference signal, use the differential interference signal to correct the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength, obtain a correction signal corresponding to the preset wavelength, and determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the correction signal corresponding to the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,通过建立基于干扰参数的第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行组织成分浓度预测,进一步提高了测量结果的可靠性。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, by establishing the second tissue component concentration prediction model based on the interference parameter to predict the tissue component concentration, the reliability of the measurement result is further improved.
根据本公开的实施例,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method may further include the following operations.
获取第二训练样本集,其中,第二训练样本集包括多个第二训练样本,其中,每个第二训练样本包括被测组织成分的第二真实浓度和与第二真实浓度对应的差分信号。获取第三训练样本集,其中,第三训练样本集包括多个第三训练样本,其中,每个第三训练样本包括多个干扰参数中每个干扰参数的训练干扰参数值和与每个训练干扰参数值对应的差分信号。根据第二训练样本集,建立待校正组织成分浓度预测模型。根据第三训练样本集,建立校正参 数模型。根据待校正组织成分浓度预测模型和校正参数模型,得到第二组织成分浓度预测模型。Acquiring a second training sample set, wherein the second training sample set includes a plurality of second training samples, wherein each second training sample includes a second true concentration of the measured tissue component and a differential signal corresponding to the second true concentration . Obtain a third training sample set, wherein the third training sample set includes a plurality of third training samples, wherein each third training sample includes a training interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters and a The differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter value. According to the second training sample set, a prediction model for the concentration of tissue components to be corrected is established. According to the third training sample set, a correction parameter model is established. According to the tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected and the correction parameter model, a second tissue component concentration prediction model is obtained.
根据本公开的实施例,校正参数模型是针对干扰参数和与干扰参数对应的差分信号之间的数学模型。待校正组织成分浓度预测模型是针对组织成分浓度和与组织成分浓度对应的差分信号之间的数学模型。根据待校正组织成分浓度预测模型和校正参数模型,得到建立第二组织成分浓度预测模型可以包括根据校正参数模型得到与干扰参数对应的差分信号,利用与干扰参数对应的差分信号对与组织成分浓度对应的差分信号进行修正,根据组织成分浓度和修正后的差分信号,建立第二组织成分浓度预测模型。其中,模型训练过程中,组织成分浓度即是第二真实浓度,与组织成分浓度对应的差分信号即是与第二真实浓度对应的差分信号。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the correction parameter model is a mathematical model between the interference parameter and the differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter. The tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected is a mathematical model between the tissue component concentration and the differential signal corresponding to the tissue component concentration. Obtaining and establishing the second tissue component concentration prediction model according to the tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected and the correction parameter model may include obtaining a differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter according to the correction parameter model, and using the differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter to pair the tissue component concentration with the tissue component concentration. The corresponding differential signal is corrected, and a second tissue component concentration prediction model is established according to the tissue component concentration and the corrected differential signal. In the model training process, the tissue component concentration is the second real concentration, and the differential signal corresponding to the tissue component concentration is the differential signal corresponding to the second real concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高模型的预测精度,可以对第二训练样本集和第三训练样本集均进行预处理,确定第二训练样本集中的异常训练样本和第三训练样本集中的异常训练样本,以根据删除异常训练样本后的第二训练样本集,建立待校正组织成分浓度预测模型。根据删除异常样本后的第三训练样本集,建立校正参数模型。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the prediction accuracy of the model, both the second training sample set and the third training sample set may be preprocessed to determine abnormal training samples in the second training sample set and abnormal training samples in the third training sample set The training samples are used to establish a prediction model for the concentration of tissue components to be corrected according to the second training sample set after the abnormal training samples are deleted. A correction parameter model is established according to the third training sample set after removing abnormal samples.
根据本公开的实施例,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method may further include the following operations.
在满足第四预设条件的情况下,对第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,以利用修正后的第二组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号和新的多个当前干扰参数值,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fourth preset condition is satisfied, the second tissue component concentration prediction model is revised, so as to use the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model to process the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values to obtain Concentrations of new tested tissue components.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高模型的预测精度,需要根据组织成分测量过程中的实际条件,对第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行调整,即如果实际条件满足第四预设条件,则可以对第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,得到修正后的第二组织成分浓度预测模型。其中,第四预设条件可以包括当前次组织成分测量与建立第二组织成分浓度模型之间的时间间隔小于或等于时间阈值和/或被测对象的状态未发生较大变化,被测对象的状态可以包括被测对象的身体状态和/或被测对象的皮肤状态,例如皮肤灼伤。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the prediction accuracy of the model, it is necessary to adjust the second tissue component concentration prediction model according to the actual conditions in the tissue component measurement process. The second tissue component concentration prediction model is revised to obtain a revised second tissue component concentration prediction model. Wherein, the fourth preset condition may include that the time interval between the current tissue component measurement and the establishment of the second tissue component concentration model is less than or equal to the time threshold and/or the state of the measured object has not changed significantly, the measured object’s state The state may include the physical state of the subject and/or the skin state of the subject, such as skin burns.
通常在较短的时间内或被测对象的状态未发生较大变化,被测对象的组织成分变化和测量装置的状态变化导致的第二组织成分浓度预测模型的不适用,可以通过对第二组织成分浓度预测模型修正来解决。Usually in a relatively short period of time or the state of the measured object does not change greatly, the inapplicability of the second tissue component concentration prediction model caused by the change of the tissue composition of the measured object and the state change of the measuring device can be determined by applying the second Tissue component concentration prediction model revisions to address.
在获得修正后的第二组织成分浓度预测模型后,可以获取新的差分信号和新的多个当前干扰参数值,将新的差分信号和新的多个当前干扰参数值输入修正后的第二组织成分浓度预测模型,输出新的被测组织成分的浓度。After obtaining the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model, a new differential signal and new multiple current interference parameter values can be obtained, and the new differential signal and new multiple current interference parameter values can be input into the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model. The tissue component concentration prediction model outputs the new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,对第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, modifying the second tissue component concentration prediction model may include the following operations.
获取被测组织成分的第二目标浓度。获取与第二目标浓度对应的差分信号。获取多个干 扰参数中每个干扰参数的当前干扰参数值。根据第二目标浓度、多个干扰参数值和与第二目标浓度对应的差分信号,对第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正。Obtain a second target concentration of the measured tissue component. A differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration is acquired. Obtain the current interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the multiple interference parameters. The second tissue component concentration prediction model is modified according to the second target concentration, the plurality of interference parameter values, and the differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,第二组织成分浓度预测模型可以是基于一元线性回归模型训练生成的。由于一元线性回归模型的两个输入参数包括斜率和截距,因此,模型训练过程即是确定斜率和截距。如果满足第一预设条件,则根据研究发现,第二组织浓度预测模型的斜率不变而截距发生了改变,在此情况下,需要重新确定的是截距,由此,可以根据第二目标浓度、与第二目标浓度对应的差分信号和多个干扰参数值对第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,得到新的截距,进而得到修正后的第二组织成分浓度预测模型。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by training based on a univariate linear regression model. Since the two input parameters of the univariate linear regression model include the slope and the intercept, the model training process is to determine the slope and intercept. If the first preset condition is met, it is found according to the research that the slope of the second tissue concentration prediction model remains unchanged but the intercept changes. In this case, the intercept needs to be re-determined. The target concentration, the differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration, and the multiple interference parameter values are used to modify the second tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new intercept, and further obtain the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model.
根据本公开的实施例,该方法还可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the method may further include the following operations.
在满足第五预设条件的情况下,利用新的第二组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号和新的多个当前干扰参数值,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fifth preset condition is satisfied, the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values are processed by using the new second tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高模型的预测精度,需要根据组织成分测量过程中的实际条件,确定是否需要重新建立新的第二组织成分浓度预测模型,即如果实际条件满足第五预设条件,则可以建立新的第二组织成分浓度预测模型。其中,第五预设条件可以包括当前次组织成分测量与建立第二组织成分浓度模型之间的时间间隔大于时间阈值和/或被测对象的状态发生较大变化,被测对象的状态可以包括被测对象的身体状态和/或被测对象的皮肤状态,例如皮肤灼伤。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the prediction accuracy of the model, it is necessary to determine whether a new second tissue component concentration prediction model needs to be re-established according to the actual conditions in the tissue component measurement process, that is, if the actual conditions satisfy the fifth preset condition , a new prediction model for the concentration of the second tissue component can be established. Wherein, the fifth preset condition may include that the time interval between the current tissue component measurement and the establishment of the second tissue component concentration model is greater than the time threshold and/or the state of the measured object has changed greatly, and the state of the measured object may include The physical condition of the subject and/or the skin condition of the subject, such as skin burns.
采用上述方式的原因在于,通常在较长的时间内或被测对象的状态发生较大变化,被测对象的组织成分变化和测量装置的状态变化较大,使得原有的第二组织成分浓度预测模型不再适用,且无法通过在原有的第二组织成分浓度预测模型的基础上进行修正使其适用,需要重新建立新的第二组织成分浓度预测模型。The reason for adopting the above method is that usually in a long time or the state of the measured object changes greatly, the tissue composition of the measured object and the state of the measuring device change greatly, so that the original concentration of the second tissue component The prediction model is no longer applicable, and cannot be adapted by modifying the original second tissue component concentration prediction model, and a new second tissue component concentration prediction model needs to be re-established.
根据本公开的实施例,新的第二组织成分浓度预测模型可以通过如下方式生成,获取新的第二训练样本集,其中,新的第二训练样本集包括多个新的第二训练样本,其中,每个新的第二训练样本包括被测组织成分的新的第二真实浓度和与新的真实浓度对应的差分信号。获取新的第三训练样本集,其中,新的第三训练样本集包括多个新的第三训练样本,其中,每个新的第三训练样本包括多个干扰参数中每个干扰参数的新的训练干扰参数值和与每个新的训练干扰参数值对应的差分信号。根据新的第二训练样本集,建立新的待校正组织成分浓度预测模型。根据新的第三训练样本集,建立新的校正参数模型。根据新的待校正组织成分浓度预测模型和新的校正参数模型,得到新的第二组织成分浓度预测模型。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, a new second tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a new second training sample set, wherein the new second training sample set includes a plurality of new second training samples, Wherein, each new second training sample includes a new second true concentration of the measured tissue component and a differential signal corresponding to the new true concentration. Obtain a new third training sample set, wherein the new third training sample set includes a plurality of new third training samples, wherein each new third training sample includes a new value of each interference parameter of the plurality of interference parameters. and the differential signal corresponding to each new training disturbance parameter value. According to the new second training sample set, a new tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected is established. According to the new third training sample set, a new correction parameter model is established. According to the new tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected and the new correction parameter model, a new second tissue component concentration prediction model is obtained.
根据本公开的实施例,第一输出光强和第二输出光强是由相同或不同的同类感光面在不同时刻采集得到的,其中,第一输出光强为收缩期光强,第二输出光强为舒张期光强,同类 感光面包括一个或多个感光面,同类感光面用于输出一个输出光强。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity are collected by the same or different photosensitive surfaces of the same type at different times, wherein the first output light intensity is the systolic light intensity, and the second output light intensity is The light intensity is the light intensity in the diastolic period, and the same photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the same photosensitive surface is used to output one output light intensity.
根据本公开的实施例,在第一输出光强和第二输出光强是由相同或不同的同类感光面在不同时刻采集得到的情况下,可以采用基于脉搏波的时间差分测量方法进行组织成分测量。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, when the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity are collected by the same or different photosensitive surfaces of the same type at different times, a pulse wave-based time difference measurement method can be used to measure tissue composition Measurement.
脉搏即动脉搏动,是指随心脏的跳动发生周期性的收缩和舒张,主动脉内的压力引起血管直径发生脉动性变化,血管中的血流量也随之发生有规律的和周期性的改变。每个脉搏波形包括一个升支和一个降支,其中,升支表示心室收缩期动脉的扩张,降支表示心室舒张期动脉的回缩。心室一张一缩表示了一个脉动周期。Pulse is the arterial pulsation, which refers to the periodic contraction and relaxation with the beating of the heart. The pressure in the aorta causes pulsatile changes in the diameter of the blood vessels, and the blood flow in the blood vessels also changes regularly and periodically. Each pulse waveform includes an ascending branch and a descending branch, where the ascending branch represents the dilation of the ventricular systolic artery and the descending branch represents the ventricular diastolic arterial retraction. A single contraction of the ventricle represents a pulsatile cycle.
根据本公开的实施例,由于采用基于脉搏波的时间差分测量方法,需要尽可能地利用脉搏的信息,因此,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,可以将感光面尽量设置在靠近目标部位(例如目标血管)的位置处。即可以将用于输出第一输出光强和第二输出光强的同类感光面设置在距目标部位的距离小于或等于第四距离阈值的位置处。其中,第四距离阈值可以为零,即同类感光面可以设置在目标部位上。用于输出第一输出光强和第二输出光强的同类感光面设置在距目标部位的距离小于或等于第四距离阈值的位置处,即用于输出第一输出光强和第二输出光强的同类感光面中每个感光面距目标部位的距离小于或等于第四距离阈值。同类感光面中每个感光面距目标部位的距离小于或等于第四距离阈值,可以为同类感光面中与目标部位最远离的感光面的边缘距目标血管的距离小于或等于第四距离阈值。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, since the pulse wave-based time difference measurement method is adopted, it is necessary to utilize the pulse information as much as possible. Therefore, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement result, the photosensitive surface can be set as close as possible to the target part (for example, the target blood vessels) location. That is, the same photosensitive surfaces for outputting the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity can be set at a position where the distance from the target site is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold. Wherein, the fourth distance threshold can be zero, that is, the same photosensitive surface can be set on the target part. The same type of photosensitive surface used to output the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity is set at a position where the distance from the target site is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold, that is, used for outputting the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity The distance between each photosensitive surface of the same strong photosensitive surface and the target site is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold. The distance between each photosensitive surface of the same photosensitive surface and the target site is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold, which may be the distance between the edge of the photosensitive surface farthest from the target site and the target blood vessel in the same photosensitive surface is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
需要说明的是,采用基于脉搏波的时间差分测量方法,需要尽可能地利用脉搏的信息与上文所述的采用大面积感光面来降低脉搏跳动对测量造成的不利影响并不矛盾,前者尽可能利用的是脉搏跳动带来的有用信息,后者尽量降低脉搏跳动带来的不利影响。此外,第一输出光强也可以为舒张期光强,第二输出光强也可以为收缩期光强。与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强可以为同一脉动周期内的输出光强,也可以为不同脉动周期内的输出光强。It should be noted that using the pulse wave-based time difference measurement method, it is not contradictory to use the pulse information as much as possible and the above-mentioned use of a large-area photosensitive surface to reduce the adverse effects of pulse beating on the measurement. It is possible to utilize useful information from the pulse beat, which minimizes the adverse effects of the pulse beat. In addition, the first output light intensity may also be the diastolic light intensity, and the second output light intensity may also be the systolic light intensity. The first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may be the output light intensity in the same pulsation period, or may be the output light intensity in different pulsation periods.
根据本公开的实施例,与预设波长对应的第一输出光强是由与预设波长对应的第一同类感光面采集得到的,与预设波长对应的第二输出光强为由与预设波长对应的第二同类感光面采集得到的,其中,第一同类感光面包括一个或多个感光面,第二同类感光面包括一个或多个感光面。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the first output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is collected by a first photosensitive surface of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelength, and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is Set the wavelength corresponding to the second photosensitive surface of the same type to be collected, wherein the first photosensitive surface of the same type includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the second similar photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces.
根据本公开的实施例,针对预设波长,具有与该预设波长对应的第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面,其中,第一同类感光面用于输出与该预设波长对应的第一输出光强,第二同类感光面用于输出与该预设波长对应的第二输出光强。第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面均可以包括一个或多个感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, for a preset wavelength, there are a first photosensitive surface of the same type and a second photosensitive surface of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the first photosensitive surface of the same type is used to output the first photosensitive surface corresponding to the preset wavelength. For an output light intensity, the second photosensitive surface of the same type is used for outputting a second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength. Both the first homogeneous photosensitive surface and the second homogeneous photosensitive surface may include one or more photosensitive surfaces.
根据本公开的实施例,可以采用位置差分测量方法处理第一输出光强和第二输出光强, 以确定被测组织成分的浓度。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity may be processed using a position differential measurement method to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component.
根据本公开的实施例,由于采用位置差分测量方法需要尽量避开目标部位(例如目标血管),因此,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,可以将感光面尽量设置在远离目标部位的位置处。即可以将用于输出第一输出光强的第一同类感光面设置在距目标部位的距离大于或等于第五距离阈值的位置处,即第一同类感光面中每个感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第五距离阈值。第一同类感光面中每个感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第五距离阈值,可以为第一同类感光面中与目标部位最接近的感光面的边缘距目标部位的距离大于或等于第五距离阈值。或者,第一同类感光面与目标部位未接触,第一同类感光面中与目标部位最接近的感光面的中心距目标部位的距离大于或等于第五距离阈值。将用于输出第二输出光强的感光面设置在距目标部位的距离大于或等于第六距离阈值的位置处。针对用于输出第二光强的第二同类感光面设置在距目标部位的距离大于或等于第六距离阈值的位置处的理解可以参见针对用于输出第一输出光强的第一同类感光面的说明,在此不再赘述。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, since the position difference measurement method needs to avoid the target part (for example, the target blood vessel) as much as possible, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement result, the photosensitive surface can be set as far as possible from the target part. That is, the first similar photosensitive surface for outputting the first output light intensity can be set at a position where the distance from the target site is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold, that is, each photosensitive surface of the first similar photosensitive surface is located at a distance from the target site. The distance is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold. The distance between each photosensitive surface of the first similar photosensitive surface and the target site is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold, which may be the distance from the edge of the photosensitive surface closest to the target site in the first similar photosensitive surface to the target site is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold. Five distance thresholds. Alternatively, the photosensitive surfaces of the first similar type are not in contact with the target portion, and the distance from the center of the photosensitive surface closest to the target portion in the first similar photosensitive surfaces to the target portion is greater than or equal to the fifth distance threshold. The photosensitive surface for outputting the second output light intensity is set at a position whose distance from the target site is greater than or equal to a sixth distance threshold. For the understanding that the second same type of photosensitive surface for outputting the second light intensity is arranged at a position with a distance from the target site greater than or equal to the sixth distance threshold, please refer to the first similar photosensitive surface for outputting the first output light intensity description, which will not be repeated here.
根据本公开的实施例,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面是相同的同类感光面,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面接收到的出射光是入射光从不同入射位置入射经传输得到的。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the second photosensitive surface of the same type are the same photosensitive surface, and the outgoing light received by the first photosensitive surface and the second photosensitive surface of the same type is the incident light incident from different incident positions through the transmitted.
根据本公开的实施例,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面是不同的同类感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first photosensitive surface of the same kind and the second photosensitive surface of the same kind are different photosensitive surfaces of the same kind.
根据本公开的实施例,由于入射光的入射位置可以包括至少一个,因此,如果入射光的入射位置包括至少两个,则第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面可以为同一感光面,所不同的是如果该同类感光面是用于接收与第一输出光强对应的出射光的同类感光面,即是作为第一同类感光面使用的,则出射光的入射位置是第一入射位置。如果该同类感光面是用于接收与第二输出光强对应的出射光的同类感光面,即是作为第二同类感光面使用的,则出射光的入射位置是第二入射位置,第一入射位置和第二入射位置是不同入射位置。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, since the incident position of the incident light may include at least one, if the incident position of the incident light includes at least two, the first photosensitive surface of the same kind and the second photosensitive surface of the second kind may be the same photosensitive surface, so The difference is that if the same type of photosensitive surface is used to receive the outgoing light corresponding to the first output light intensity, that is, it is used as the first photosensitive surface of the same type, the incident position of the outgoing light is the first incident position. If the photosensitive surface of the same type is the same photosensitive surface used to receive the outgoing light corresponding to the second output light intensity, that is, it is used as the second photosensitive surface of the same type, the incident position of the outgoing light is the second incident position, and the first incident light The position and the second incident position are different incident positions.
根据本公开的实施例,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面还可以是不同的同类感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the second photosensitive surface of the same type may also be different photosensitive surfaces of the same type.
根据本公开的实施例,第一同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第一平均光程范围,其中,第一平均光程范围是根据第一光程平均值确定的,第一光程平均值是根据第一同类感光面的各个感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值。第二同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第二平均光程范围,其中,第二平均光程范围是根据第二光程平均值确定的,其中,第二光程平均值是根据第二同类感光面的各个感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the first same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the first average optical path range, wherein the first average optical path range is based on the first The optical path average value is determined, and the first optical path average value is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive position of the first photosensitive surface of the same type. The average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the second same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the second average optical path range, wherein the second average optical path range is determined according to the average value of the second optical path, Wherein, the average value of the second optical path is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface of the second same type of photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高采用基于位置差分测量方法进行组织成分测量的测量结果的可靠性,需要尽量确保第一同类感光面接收到的出射光具有近光程的特点,第二同类感光面接收到的出射光也具有近光程的特点。近光程可以理解为出射光的平均光程在平均光程 范围内。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement results of the tissue composition measurement using the position difference measurement method, it is necessary to try to ensure that the outgoing light received by the first photosensitive surface has the characteristics of a short optical path, and the second photosensitive surface has the characteristics of short optical path. The outgoing light received by the surface also has the characteristics of a short optical path. The short optical path can be understood as the average optical path of the outgoing light within the range of the average optical path.
针对第一同类感光面,第一同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第一平均光程范围。其中,第一平均光程范围通过如下方式确定。确定第一同类感光面的各个感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程的第一光程平均值,确定第一光程变化幅度。根据第一光程平均值和第一光程变化幅度,确定第一平均光程范围。示例性的,如第一光程平均值为b,第一光程变化幅度为±40%,则第一平均光程范围可以为大于或等于0.6b且小于或等于1.4b。For the first same type of photosensitive surface, the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface in the first same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the first average optical path range. Wherein, the first average optical path range is determined in the following manner. The first optical path average value of the average optical path lengths of the outgoing light received by the respective photosensitive positions of the first same type of photosensitive surfaces is determined, and the variation range of the first optical path is determined. The first average optical path range is determined according to the first optical path average value and the first optical path variation range. Exemplarily, if the average value of the first optical path is b and the variation range of the first optical path is ±40%, the first average optical path range may be greater than or equal to 0.6b and less than or equal to 1.4b.
针对第二同类感光面,第二同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第二平均光程范围。其中,第二平均光程范围通过如下方式确定。确定第二同类感光面的各个感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程的第二光程平均值,确定第二光程变化幅度。根据第二光程平均值和第二光程变化幅度,确定第二平均光程范围。For the second same type of photosensitive surface, the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface in the second same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the second average optical length range. Wherein, the second average optical path range is determined in the following manner. The second optical path average value of the average optical path lengths of the outgoing light received by the respective photosensitive positions of the second same type of photosensitive surfaces is determined, and the variation range of the second optical path is determined. The second average optical path range is determined according to the second optical path average value and the second optical path variation range.
根据本公开的实施例,第一光程平均值与第二光程平均值的差值的绝对值属于第一光程差范围。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the absolute value of the difference between the first optical path average value and the second optical path average value belongs to the first optical path difference range.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高基于差分测量方法进行组织成分测量得到的测量结果的可靠性,需要在合适位置范围内设置第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面。下面以被测组织成分为血糖为例进行说明。针对被测组织成分为血糖来说,目标组织层为真皮层,要求输出光强是主要携带真皮层中的组织成分信息的输出光强。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement result obtained by the tissue composition measurement based on the differential measurement method, it is necessary to set the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the second photosensitive surface of the same type within a suitable position range. The following description will be given by taking the measured tissue component as blood glucose as an example. If the measured tissue component is blood glucose, the target tissue layer is the dermis layer, and the required output light intensity is the output light intensity that mainly carries the tissue component information in the dermis layer.
其一,如果感光面的位置距入射光的中心的距离过小,则出射光的输出光强将主要携带表皮层中的组织成分信息。如果感光面的位置距入射光的中心的距离过大,则出射光的输出光强将主要携带皮下脂肪层中的组织成分信息。而真皮层位于表皮层和皮下脂肪层之间,由此可见,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面的设置位置需要在一个合适位置范围内选择,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面之间的距离不能够过大。First, if the distance between the position of the photosensitive surface and the center of the incident light is too small, the output light intensity of the outgoing light will mainly carry the tissue composition information in the epidermis layer. If the distance between the position of the photosensitive surface and the center of the incident light is too large, the output light intensity of the outgoing light will mainly carry the tissue composition information in the subcutaneous fat layer. The dermis layer is located between the epidermis layer and the subcutaneous fat layer. It can be seen that the setting positions of the first and second similar photosensitive surfaces need to be selected within an appropriate range of positions. The first and second similar photosensitive surfaces The distance between the faces should not be too large.
其二,虽然差分测量方法可以有效削弱共模干扰,但是差分测量方法在削弱共模干扰的同时也会损失一部分有效信息,即血糖信息。如果两个位置极其接近,则有效信息可能被全部损失。由此可见,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面的设置位置需要在一个合适位置范围内选择,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面之间的距离不能够过小。Second, although the differential measurement method can effectively weaken the common mode interference, the differential measurement method will also lose a part of effective information, that is, blood glucose information, while weakening the common mode interference. If the two locations are extremely close, the useful information may be completely lost. It can be seen that the setting positions of the first and second similar photosensitive surfaces need to be selected within a suitable position range, and the distance between the first and second similar photosensitive surfaces cannot be too small.
为了实现在合理位置范围内设置第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面,可以根据有效信息测量原则、差分测量精密度优化原则和干扰信号有效消除原则确定。其中,有效信息测量原则可以指两个位置处的出射光能够尽可能多的携带目标组织层中的组织成分信息,因此,两个位置应该在一个合理位置范围内。差分测量精密度优化原则可以指两个位置之间应具有一定的距离,以保证差分之后仍然保留尽可能多的有效信息。干扰信号有效消除原则可以指两 个位置之间的距离应该尽可能小,以提高差分测量方法消除共模干扰的效果。In order to realize the setting of the first photosensitive surface and the second photosensitive surface of the same type within a reasonable position range, it can be determined according to the principle of effective information measurement, the principle of differential measurement precision optimization and the principle of effective elimination of interference signals. The principle of effective information measurement may refer to the fact that the outgoing light at the two positions can carry as much tissue composition information in the target tissue layer as possible, therefore, the two positions should be within a reasonable position range. The principle of precision optimization of differential measurement can mean that there should be a certain distance between two positions to ensure that as much valid information as possible remains after the difference. The principle of effective interference signal elimination can mean that the distance between two locations should be as small as possible to improve the effect of the differential measurement method in eliminating common mode interference.
在合理位置范围内设置第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面,反映在光程上,即是与第一同类感光面对应的第一光程平均值和与第二同类感光面对应的第二光程平均值之间的差值的绝对值属于第一光程差范围。其中,第一光程差范围是根据最佳差分光程确定的。最佳差分光程可以是根据上述三个原则中的至少之一确定的。Set the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the second photosensitive surface of the same type within a reasonable range, which is reflected in the optical path, that is, the average value of the first optical path corresponding to the first photosensitive surface and the corresponding photosensitive surface of the second similar type. The absolute value of the difference between the second optical path average values belongs to the first optical path difference range. Wherein, the first optical path difference range is determined according to the optimal differential optical path. The optimal differential optical path may be determined according to at least one of the above three principles.
可以理解到,对第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面的位置设置要求也同样要求感光面的面积不能过大,否则将影响差分效果,进而影响测量结果的可靠性。It can be understood that the position setting requirements for the first similar photosensitive surface and the second similar photosensitive surface also require that the area of the photosensitive surface should not be too large, otherwise the differential effect will be affected, thereby affecting the reliability of the measurement results.
根据本公开的实施例,第一平均光程范围小于或等于第一光程差范围,第二平均光程范围小于或等于第一光程差范围。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range, and the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range.
根据本公开的实施例,为了尽量实现合理位置范围内设置第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面,反映在光程上,还需要尽量保证第一平均光程范围小于或等于第一光程差范围,并且第二平均光程范围小于或等于第一光程差范围。由此可得,与第一同类感光面对应的第一光程平均值和与第二同类感光面对应的第二光程平均值之间的差值的绝对值属于第一光程差范围,第一平均光程范围小于或等于第一光程差范围,并且第二平均光程范围小于或等于第一光程差范围。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to set the first photosensitive surface and the second photosensitive surface of the same type within a reasonable range as far as possible, it is also necessary to ensure that the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path as far as possible, as reflected in the optical path. difference range, and the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range. Therefore, the absolute value of the difference between the average value of the first optical path corresponding to the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the average value of the second optical path corresponding to the second photosensitive surface of the same type belongs to the first optical path difference range, the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range, and the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range.
根据本公开的实施例,第一光程差范围是根据与预设波长对应的最佳差分光程确定的。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first optical path difference range is determined according to the optimal differential optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,在被测对象的测量区域确定的情况下,存在与该预设波长对应的最佳差分灵敏度,其中,最佳差分灵敏度可以表示单位被测组织成分浓度变化引起的差分信号的变化最大时的灵敏度,可以根据最佳差分灵敏度确定最佳差分光程,即可以根据差分测量精密度优化原则确定最佳差分光程,由此,将与最佳差分灵敏度对应的光程称为最佳差分光程。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, when the measurement area of the measured object is determined, there is an optimal differential sensitivity corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the optimal differential sensitivity may represent a difference caused by a unit concentration change of the measured tissue component The sensitivity when the signal changes the most, the optimal differential optical path can be determined according to the optimal differential sensitivity, that is, the optimal differential optical path can be determined according to the principle of differential measurement precision optimization, thus, the optical path corresponding to the optimal differential sensitivity can be determined called the optimal differential optical path.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定与预设波长对应的最佳差分光程后,可以设置上下调整幅度,根据与预设波长对应的最佳差分光程和上下调整幅度,确定与预设波长对应的第一光程差范围。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, after determining the optimal differential optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength, the up and down adjustment range can be set, and according to the optimal differential optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength and the up and down adjustment amplitude, The corresponding first optical path difference range.
根据本公开的实施例,与预设波长对应的第一同类感光面中每个感光面距入射光的中心的源探距离在与预设波长对应的预设源探距离范围内,其中,预设源探距离范围是根据与预设波长对应的浮动基准位置距入射光的中心的源探距离确定的。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the source-detection distance of each photosensitive surface of the first same type of photosensitive surfaces corresponding to the preset wavelength from the center of the incident light is within the range of the preset source-detection distance corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the preset It is assumed that the source-detection distance range is determined according to the source-detection distance from the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength to the center of the incident light.
根据本公开的实施例,为了进一步提高测量结果的可靠性,可以基于浮动基准方法,设置感光面的位置。其中,针对浮动基准方法进行如下说明。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to further improve the reliability of the measurement result, the position of the photosensitive surface may be set based on the floating reference method. Among them, the floating reference method will be described as follows.
对被测对象而言,当入射光进入组织后会发生吸收作用和散射作用,吸收作用会直接导致光能量衰减,散射作用则会通过改变光子传输的方向来影响出射光的分布,出射光的分布 是两者共同作用的结果。基于浮动基准方法,针对被测组织成分而言,存在距入射光的中心的某位置,在该位置处,由于吸收作用和散射作用对出射光的输出光强的影响程度相同而方向相反,因此,导致出射光对被测组织成分的浓度变化不敏感。可将具有上述特点的位置称为基准位置(或称参考位置)。基准位置处的出射光的输出光强反映了测量过程中对除被测组织成分以外的其它干扰的响应。同时,针对被测组织成分,也存在距入射光的中心的某位置,在该位置处的出射光的输出光强对被测组织成分的浓度变化的灵敏度大于或等于灵敏度阈值。可以将具有上述特点的位置称为测量位置。测量位置处的出射光的输出光强反映了测量过程中对被测组织成分的响应,以及,对除被测组织成分外的其它干扰的响应。并且,基准位置和测量位置因波长而异,因被测对象而异,以及,因测量区域而异,由此可以称基准位置为浮动基准位置。For the measured object, when the incident light enters the tissue, absorption and scattering will occur. The absorption will directly lead to the attenuation of light energy, and the scattering will affect the distribution of the outgoing light by changing the direction of photon transmission. The distribution is the result of the combined action of the two. Based on the floating reference method, for the measured tissue composition, there is a certain position from the center of the incident light. At this position, the output light intensity of the outgoing light is affected by absorption and scattering to the same extent but in opposite directions. , resulting in the outgoing light being insensitive to changes in the concentration of the measured tissue components. A position with the above characteristics can be called a reference position (or a reference position). The output intensity of the outgoing light at the reference position reflects the response to disturbances other than the measured tissue composition during the measurement. At the same time, for the measured tissue component, there is also a certain position from the center of the incident light, at which the output light intensity of the outgoing light has a sensitivity to the concentration change of the measured tissue component greater than or equal to the sensitivity threshold. A position having the above characteristics can be called a measurement position. The output light intensity of the outgoing light at the measurement location reflects the response to the measured tissue component during the measurement process, as well as the response to other disturbances other than the measured tissue component. Also, the reference position and the measurement position vary depending on the wavelength, the object to be measured, and the measurement area, and thus the reference position can be called a floating reference position.
根据本公开的实施例,由于在浮动基准位置处出射的出射光的输出光强主要携带测量过程中除对被测组织成分以外的其它干扰的响应,因此,可以将从浮动基准位置处出射的出射光的输出光强引入差分测量中,以最大程度地削弱共模干扰和较小程度地损耗有效信息。基于上述,在被测对象的测量区域确定的情况下,针对预设波长,使得M个感光面中至少存在一个感光面距入射光的中心的源探距离在与预设波长对应的预设源探距离范围内,预设源探距离范围是根据与预设波长对应的浮动基准位置距入射光的中心的源探距离确定的。在本公开的实施例中,可以使得第一同类感光面中每个感光面距入射光的中心的源探距离在与预设波长对应的预设源探距离范围内。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, since the output light intensity of the outgoing light emitted at the floating reference position mainly carries the response to other disturbances other than the measured tissue components in the measurement process, the light emitted from the floating reference position can be The output light intensity of the outgoing light is introduced into the differential measurement to minimize common-mode interference and minimize the loss of useful information. Based on the above, when the measurement area of the measured object is determined, for the preset wavelength, at least one of the M photosensitive surfaces has a source-detection distance from the center of the incident light within the preset source corresponding to the preset wavelength. Within the detection distance range, the preset source detection distance range is determined according to the source detection distance between the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength and the center of the incident light. In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the source-detection distance of each of the photosensitive surfaces of the first same type from the center of the incident light may be within a preset source-detection distance range corresponding to a preset wavelength.
示例性的,如针对被测对象A的测量区域B,与预设波长λ 1对应的浮动基准位置距入射光的中心的距离为1.7mm,则与预设波长λ 1对应的预设源探距离范围可以是1.5mm~1.9mm。 Exemplarily, for example, for the measurement area B of the measured object A, the distance between the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength λ 1 and the center of the incident light is 1.7 mm, then the preset source detector corresponding to the preset wavelength λ 1 is 1.7 mm. The distance can range from 1.5mm to 1.9mm.
基于上述,可以确定与参考位置处对应的同类感光面和与测量位置处对应的同类感光面,将与参考位置处对应的同类感光面所采集的输出光强称为第一输出光强,将与测量区域处对应的同类感光面所采集的输出光强称为第二输出光强。或者,将与测量区域处对应的同类感光面所采集的输出光强称为第一输出光强,将与参考位置处对应的同类感光面所采集的输出光强称为第二输出光强。Based on the above, the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the reference position and the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the measurement position can be determined, and the output light intensity collected by the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the reference position is called the first output light intensity. The output light intensity collected by the same photosensitive surface corresponding to the measurement area is called the second output light intensity. Alternatively, the output light intensity collected by the same photosensitive surface corresponding to the measurement area is called the first output light intensity, and the output light intensity collected by the same photosensitive surface corresponding to the reference position is called the second output light intensity.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength may include the following operations.
从与预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强中确定第三输出光强。根据与预设波长对应的第三输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。The third output light intensity is determined from at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength. According to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined.
根据本公开的实施例,可以采用非差分测量方法进行组织成分测量,即根据与预设波长对应的第三输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, a non-differential measurement method can be used to measure tissue components, that is, the concentration of the measured tissue components can be determined according to the third output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,与预设波长对应的第三输出光强是由与预设波长对应的同类感光面采集得到的,同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程和与预设波长对应的最佳光程的差值属于第二光程差范围。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is collected by the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the preset wavelength, and the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface in the same type of photosensitive surface The difference between the average optical path and the optimal optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength belongs to the second optical path difference range.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,在被测对象的测量区域确定的情况下,针对预设波长,可以使得用于采集第三输出光强的同类感光面中不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程接近与该预设波长对应的最佳光程,即使得用于采集第三输出光强的同类感光面中不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程和与该预设波长对应的最佳光程的差值的绝对值小于或等于第二光程差范围。与该预设波长对应的最佳光程可以理解为在该预设波长下,与被测组织成分灵敏度最大时所对应的光程。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, when the measurement area of the measured object is determined, for the preset wavelength, different photosensitive positions in the same photosensitive surface used for collecting the third output light intensity can be made The average optical length of the received outgoing light is close to the optimal optical length corresponding to the preset wavelength, that is, the average optical length of the outgoing light received at different photosensitive positions in the same photosensitive surface used to collect the third output light intensity and The absolute value of the optimal optical path difference corresponding to the preset wavelength is less than or equal to the second optical path difference range. The optimal optical path length corresponding to the preset wavelength can be understood as the optical path length corresponding to the maximum sensitivity of the measured tissue component under the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的第三输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
将与预设波长对应的第三输出光强输入第三组织成分浓度预测模型,输出被测组织成分的浓度。The third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is input into the third tissue component concentration prediction model, and the measured tissue component concentration is output.
根据本公开的实施例,第三组织成分浓度预测模型可以通过如下方式生成,获取第四训练样本集,其中,第四训练样本集包括多个第四训练样本,其中,每个第四训练样本包括被测组织成分的第三真实浓度和与第三真实浓度对应的输出光强,根据第四训练样本集,建立第三组织成分浓度预测模型。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the third tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a fourth training sample set, wherein the fourth training sample set includes a plurality of fourth training samples, wherein each fourth training sample Including the third true concentration of the measured tissue component and the output light intensity corresponding to the third true concentration, a third tissue component concentration prediction model is established according to the fourth training sample set.
在满足第四预设条件的情况下,获取被测组织成分的第三目标浓度,获取与第三目标浓度对应的输出光强,根据与第三目标浓度对应的输出光强和第三目标浓度,对第三组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,以利用修正后的第三组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的输出光强,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fourth preset condition is satisfied, the third target concentration of the measured tissue component is obtained, the output light intensity corresponding to the third target concentration is obtained, and according to the output light intensity corresponding to the third target concentration and the third target concentration , modifying the third tissue component concentration prediction model, so as to use the revised third tissue component concentration prediction model to process the new output light intensity to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
在满足第五预设条件的情况下,利用新的第三组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的输出光强,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fifth preset condition is satisfied, the new output light intensity is processed by using the new third tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的第三输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
获取多个干扰参数中每个干扰参数的当前干扰参数值。将多个当前干扰参数值和与预设波长对应的第三输出光强输入第四组织成分浓度预测模型,输出被测组织成分的浓度。Obtain the current interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters. The plurality of current interference parameter values and the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength are input into the fourth tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
根据本公开的实施例,第四组织成分浓度预测模型可以通过如下方式生成,获取第五训练样本集,其中,第五训练样本集包括多个第五训练样本,其中,每个第五训练样本包括被测组织成分的第四真实浓度和与第四真实浓度对应的输出光强,获取第六训练样本集,其中,第六训练样本集包括多个第六训练样本,其中,每个第六训练样本包括多个干扰参数中每个 干扰参数的训练干扰参数值和与每个训练干扰参数值对应的光强值,根据第六训练样本集,建立待校正组织成分浓度预测模型,根据第六训练样本集,建立校正参数模型,根据待校正组织成分浓度预测模型和校正参数模型,得到第四组织成分浓度预测模型。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the fourth tissue component concentration prediction model may be generated by obtaining a fifth training sample set, wherein the fifth training sample set includes a plurality of fifth training samples, wherein each fifth training sample Including the fourth real concentration of the measured tissue component and the output light intensity corresponding to the fourth real concentration, obtaining a sixth training sample set, wherein the sixth training sample set includes a plurality of sixth training samples, wherein each sixth training sample set The training sample includes the training interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters and the light intensity value corresponding to each training interference parameter value. According to the sixth training sample set, a tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected is established, according to the sixth training sample set. A sample set is trained, a correction parameter model is established, and a fourth tissue component concentration prediction model is obtained according to the tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected and the correction parameter model.
在满足第四预设条件的情况下,获取被测组织成分的第四目标浓度,获取与第四目标浓度对应的输出光强,获取多个干扰参数中每个干扰参数的当前干扰参数值,根据第四目标浓度、多个干扰参数值和与第四目标浓度对应的输出光强,对第四组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,以利用修正后的第四组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的输出光强和新的多个当前干扰参数值,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fourth preset condition is satisfied, the fourth target concentration of the measured tissue component is obtained, the output light intensity corresponding to the fourth target concentration is obtained, and the current interference parameter value of each interference parameter among the plurality of interference parameters is obtained, Modifying the fourth tissue component concentration prediction model based on the fourth target concentration, the plurality of interference parameter values, and the output light intensity corresponding to the fourth target concentration to process the new output using the revised fourth tissue component concentration prediction model The light intensity and the new multiple current interference parameter values are used to obtain new concentrations of the measured tissue components.
在满足第五预设条件的情况下,利用新的第四组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的输出光强和新的多个当前干扰参数值,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fifth preset condition is satisfied, the new output light intensity and the new multiple current interference parameter values are processed by using the new fourth tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,每个感光面包括环形感光面或非环形感光面,不同感光面的形状相同或不同。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, each photosensitive surface includes an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, and the shapes of different photosensitive surfaces are the same or different.
根据本公开的实施例,每个感光面可以是采用光敏材料制成的。环形感光面可以避免方位定位的问题,还能够在较小的源探距离范围内实现较大面积的设计。需要说明的是,由于在活体组织成分测量中,源探距离通常是一个较为重要的物理量,因此,在较小的源探距离范围内实现较大面积的设计是十分有意义的。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, each photosensitive surface may be made of a photosensitive material. The ring-shaped photosensitive surface can avoid the problem of azimuth positioning, and can also realize the design of a large area within a small source detection distance range. It should be noted that, in the measurement of living tissue composition, the source detection distance is usually a relatively important physical quantity, so it is very meaningful to realize a larger area design within a smaller source detection distance range.
根据本公开的实施例,在一些情况下,采用非环形感光面具有如下有益效果。According to embodiments of the present disclosure, in some cases, the use of a non-annular photosensitive surface has the following beneficial effects.
其一,由于测量结果受测量区域的影响,通常如果感光面设置于有利于测量的测量区域,相比于感光面设置于对测量有干扰的测量区域,感光面设置于有利于测量的测量区域获得的测量结果更好,因此,可以根据组织结构特征将感光面设置在合适的位置。非环形感光面可以较为容易的避开对测量有干扰的测量区域,如血管或伤口区域,由此,采用非环形感光面将具有较好的效果。First, since the measurement results are affected by the measurement area, usually if the photosensitive surface is set in the measurement area that is conducive to measurement, the photosensitive surface is set in the measurement area that is conducive to measurement, compared to the photosensitive surface set in the measurement area that interferes with the measurement. Better measurement results are obtained, so that the photosensitive surface can be positioned in the right position according to the characteristics of the tissue structure. The non-annular photosensitive surface can easily avoid the measurement area that interferes with the measurement, such as the blood vessel or the wound area. Therefore, the use of the non-annular photosensitive surface will have a better effect.
其二,由于组织非均匀性,因此,导致同一入射光在组织内的传输路径可能不同,进而不同出射位置的出射光所对应的平均光程不同。以被测组织成分为血糖为例,通常真皮层是血糖信号的主要来源,由此要求出射光是主要在真皮层中进行传输后得到的出射光,相应的,对出射光对应的平均光程有一定要求。Second, due to the non-uniformity of the tissue, the transmission paths of the same incident light in the tissue may be different, and thus the average optical paths corresponding to the outgoing light at different outgoing positions are different. Taking the measured tissue component as blood glucose as an example, the dermis is usually the main source of the blood glucose signal, so it is required that the outgoing light is mainly transmitted in the dermis layer. Correspondingly, the average optical path corresponding to the outgoing light is There are certain requirements.
假设根据对平均光程的要求设计了对应尺寸的环形感光面,则可以认为该环形感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光对应的平均光程基本相似且是主要通过真皮层的出射光,平均光程在平均光程范围C内。在此情况下,如果皮肤组织是均匀的,则上述结论是符合实际情况的。但由于通常皮肤组织并不是均匀的,因此,导致同一环形感光面的不同感光位置所接收到的出射光对应的平均光程差异较大,如环形感光面的一部分感光位置接收到的出射光对 应的平均光程基本相似,均在平均光程范围C内,该环形感光面的另一部分感光位置接收到的出射光对应的平均光程与前述差异较大,不在平均光程范围C内。由于出射光的平均光程在平均光程范围C内可以说明出射光是主要通过真皮层的出射光,不在平均光程范围C内的出射光可能并不是主要通过真皮层的出射光,同时,环形感光面输出一个输出光强,因此,在皮肤组织不均匀的情况下,采用环形感光面获取到的输出光强的信号质量不高,进而影响了测量结果的可靠性。Assuming that the annular photosensitive surface of the corresponding size is designed according to the requirements for the average optical path, it can be considered that the average optical path corresponding to the outgoing light received by the different photosensitive positions of the annular photosensitive surface is basically similar and the outgoing light mainly passes through the dermis, The average optical path is within the average optical path range C. In this case, if the skin tissue is homogeneous, the above conclusion is in line with the actual situation. However, because the skin tissue is usually not uniform, the average optical path difference corresponding to the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of the same annular photosensitive surface is relatively large. The average optical path lengths are basically similar, all within the average optical path range C, and the average optical path corresponding to the outgoing light received by another part of the photosensitive surface of the ring-shaped photosensitive surface is quite different from the aforementioned, and is not within the average optical path range C. Since the average optical path of the outgoing light is within the average optical path range C, it can be shown that the outgoing light mainly passes through the dermis layer. The ring-shaped photosensitive surface outputs one output light intensity. Therefore, in the case of uneven skin tissue, the signal quality of the output light intensity obtained by using the ring-shaped photosensitive surface is not high, thereby affecting the reliability of the measurement results.
而非环形感光面则可以根据实际情况进行设置,以上述示例为例,假设不在平均光程范围C内的平均光程在平均光程范围D内,可以采用两个非环形感光面,其中,一个非环形感光面用于接收出射光的平均光程在平均光程范围C内的出射光的光强值,另一个非环形感光面用于接收出射光的平均光程在平均光程范围D内的出射光的光强值,两个非环形感光面的输出光强与实际相符,利于保证测量结果的可靠性。The non-ring photosensitive surface can be set according to the actual situation. Taking the above example as an example, assuming that the average optical length not within the average optical path range C is within the average optical path range D, two non-ring photosensitive surfaces can be used, where, One non-annular photosensitive surface is used to receive the light intensity value of the outgoing light whose average optical path is within the average optical path range C, and the other non-annular photosensitive surface is used to receive the average optical path of the outgoing light within the average optical path range D The light intensity value of the outgoing light inside and the output light intensity of the two non-ring photosensitive surfaces are consistent with the actual situation, which is beneficial to ensure the reliability of the measurement results.
其三,当采用基于脉搏波的时间差分测量方法进行组织成分测量时,需要充分利用脉搏信号,即使得收缩期光强和舒张期光强相差尽可能大。在上述情况下,由于环形感光面的绝大部分并不会位于血管上方,影响了脉搏信号的采集效果,因此,降低了收缩期光强和舒张期光强的相差程度。由此可见,采用环形感光面得到的收缩期光强和舒张期光强的相差程度要小于采用非环形感光面得到的收缩期光强和舒张期光强的相差程度。Third, when using the pulse wave-based time difference measurement method to measure tissue components, it is necessary to make full use of the pulse signal, that is, to make the difference between the systolic light intensity and the diastolic light intensity as large as possible. In the above situation, since most of the annular photosensitive surface is not located above the blood vessel, the collection effect of the pulse signal is affected, and therefore, the degree of difference between the light intensity during systole and the light intensity during diastole is reduced. It can be seen that the difference between the systolic light intensity and the diastolic light intensity obtained by using the annular photosensitive surface is smaller than the difference between the systolic and diastolic light intensity obtained by using the non-ring photosensitive surface.
其四,由于组织非均匀性以及生理背景变动对出射光的影响,可能导致距入射光的中心具有相同源探距离的不同感光面接收到的出射光的平均光程具有差异,因此,可以采用距入射光的中心具有相同源探距离的不同感光面所采集的输出光强进行差分运算,以进行组织成分测量。上述非环形感光面可以实现,即针对同一源探距离,可以以入射光的中心为中心,离散设置至少两个非环形感光面,以实现输出两个输出光强。Fourth, due to the influence of tissue inhomogeneity and physiological background changes on the outgoing light, the average optical path of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive surfaces with the same source detection distance from the center of the incident light may be different. Therefore, it can be used. Differential operation is performed on the output light intensities collected by different photosensitive surfaces with the same source-detection distance from the center of the incident light to measure tissue composition. The above non-annular photosensitive surface can be realized, that is, for the same source detection distance, at least two non-annular photosensitive surfaces can be discretely arranged with the center of the incident light as the center, so as to output two output light intensities.
其五,制作工艺难度较小,制作成本较低。Fifth, the manufacturing process is less difficult and the manufacturing cost is lower.
下面结合附图14对第四方面进行说明。图14示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种差分测量的示意图。如图14所示,图14中包括四个扇环感光面,分别为扇环感光面1、扇环感光面2、扇环感光面3和扇环感光面4,四个扇环感光面单独使用,每个扇环感光面具有对应的一个输出光强。四个扇环感光面的中心距入射光的中心的距离相同,即具有相同的源探距离。由于组织非均匀性使得扇环感光面1和扇环感光面2接收到的出射光对应的平均光程不同,因此,可以根据扇环感光面1采集到的输出光强和扇环感光面2采集的输出光强进行差分运算,实现差分测量。The fourth aspect will be described below with reference to FIG. 14 . FIG. 14 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a differential measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in Figure 14, Figure 14 includes four fan ring photosensitive surfaces, namely fan ring photosensitive surface 1, fan ring photosensitive surface 2, fan ring photosensitive surface 3 and fan ring photosensitive surface 4, and the four fan ring photosensitive surfaces are individually In use, each fan ring photosensitive surface has a corresponding output light intensity. The centers of the four fan-ring photosensitive surfaces have the same distance from the center of the incident light, that is, have the same source-detection distance. Due to the non-uniformity of the tissue, the average optical paths corresponding to the outgoing light received by the fan ring photosensitive surface 1 and the fan ring photosensitive surface 2 are different. Therefore, according to the output light intensity collected by the fan ring photosensitive surface 1 and the fan ring photosensitive surface 2 The collected output light intensity is subjected to differential operation to realize differential measurement.
根据本公开的实施例,非环形感光面包括扇环感光面、圆形感光面、扇形感光面、椭圆形感光面或多边形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the non-ring-shaped photosensitive surface includes a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, an elliptical photosensitive surface, or a polygonal photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,多边形感光面包括正方形感光面、长方形感光面或三角形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the polygonal photosensitive surface includes a square photosensitive surface, a rectangular photosensitive surface, or a triangular photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,可以根据实际情况设计圆心角,以得到对应的扇环感光面。例如,圆心角为90°的扇环感光面,圆心角为180°的扇环感光面,圆心角为45°的扇环感光面。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, the central angle can be designed according to the actual situation, so as to obtain the corresponding photosensitive surface of the fan ring. For example, a fan ring photosensitive surface with a central angle of 90°, a fan ring photosensitive surface with a central angle of 180°, and a fan ring photosensitive surface with a central angle of 45°.
根据本公开的实施例,图15示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种环形感光面的示意图。图16示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种扇环感光面的示意图。图17示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种圆形感光面的示意图。图18示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种正方形感光面的示意图。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, FIG. 15 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a ring-shaped photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 16 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a fan ring photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 17 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a circular photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 18 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a square photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面包括环形感光面或非环形感光面,其中,同类感光面包括一个或多个感光面,同类感光面用于输出一个输出光强。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the same type of photosensitive surface includes an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the same type of photosensitive surface is used to output one output light intensity.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面可以为环形感光面或非环形感光面,即从整体上,同类感光面呈现为环形感光面或非环形感光面。根据同类感光面包括的感光面的数量,可以确定从整体上呈现的形状是由一个单独的感光面形成的,还是根据多个感光面组合形成的。其中,同类感光面中的每个感光面的形状可以是环形感光面,也可以是非环形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the same type of photosensitive surface may be a ring-shaped photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, that is, the same type of photosensitive surface appears as a ring-shaped photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface as a whole. According to the number of photosensitive surfaces included in the same type of photosensitive surface, it can be determined whether the overall shape is formed by a single photosensitive surface or formed by a combination of multiple photosensitive surfaces. The shape of each photosensitive surface in the same type of photosensitive surface may be an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面为环形感光面,可以包括:在同类感光面包括一个感光面的情况下,同类感光面为独立环形感光面。在同类感光面包括多个感光面的情况下,同类感光面是根据多个感光面组合形成的环形感光面。同类感光面为非环形感光面,可以包括:在同类感光面包括一个感光面的情况下,同类感光面为独立非环形感光面。在同类感光面包括多个感光面的情况下,同类感光面是根据多个感光面组合形成的非环形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the same type of photosensitive surface is an annular photosensitive surface, which may include: in the case that the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent annular photosensitive surface. When the same type of photosensitive surface includes multiple photosensitive surfaces, the same type of photosensitive surface is a ring-shaped photosensitive surface formed by combining the multiple photosensitive surfaces. The same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface, which may include: in the case that the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent non-annular photosensitive surface. In the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes a plurality of photosensitive surfaces, the same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface formed according to the combination of the multiple photosensitive surfaces.
根据本公开的实施例,参与组合的多个感光面紧密排布,以尽量保证相邻感光面之间无间隙。由于目前圆形感光面或方形感光面较为常见,制作工艺难度较小,制作成本较低,而其它形状的感光面通常需要定制,制作工艺难度较大,制作成本较高,因此,如果受限于制作成本,则可以采用组合的方式,将多个圆形感光面和/或多个正方形感光面组合形成其它形状的同类感光面。其中,方形包括正方形和长方形。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the plurality of photosensitive surfaces participating in the combination are closely arranged to ensure that there is no gap between adjacent photosensitive surfaces as much as possible. Since the circular photosensitive surface or the square photosensitive surface is more common at present, the manufacturing process is less difficult and the manufacturing cost is lower, while the photosensitive surface of other shapes usually needs to be customized, the manufacturing process is more difficult and the manufacturing cost is higher. Therefore, if limited In terms of production cost, a combination method can be used to combine multiple circular photosensitive surfaces and/or multiple square photosensitive surfaces to form similar photosensitive surfaces of other shapes. Among them, square includes square and rectangle.
此外,感光面耗费制作成本的高低还与感光面的面积大小有关,通常感光面的面积越大,则制作成本越高。如果需要一个较大面积的感光面,目前存在多个较小面积的感光面,则为了降低制作成本,可以将多个较小面积的感光面进行组合,以得到一个较大面积的感光面。In addition, the production cost of the photosensitive surface is also related to the area of the photosensitive surface. Generally, the larger the area of the photosensitive surface, the higher the production cost. If a larger-area photosensitive surface is required, and there are currently multiple smaller-area photosensitive surfaces, in order to reduce the manufacturing cost, multiple smaller-area photosensitive surfaces can be combined to obtain a larger-area photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定同类感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值的情况下,同类感光面包括环形感光面、扇环感光面、扇形感光面、圆形感光面或正方形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in the case where it is determined that the distance between the same type of photosensitive surface and the target site is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold, the same type of photosensitive surface includes a ring photosensitive surface, a fan ring photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface or Square photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定同类感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值的情况下,可以根据实际出射光的抖动情况,选择合适形状的感光面,以最大程度地削弱抖动 对测量造成的不利影响。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, when it is determined that the distance between the same photosensitive surface and the target site is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold, a photosensitive surface with an appropriate shape can be selected according to the jitter of the actual emitted light to minimize the jitter adverse effects on measurements.
目标部位可以为抖动发生的部位。由于引起抖动的来源之一是脉搏跳动,而脉搏跳动与血管有关,因此,目标部位可以为血管。通常靠近血管的出射光的抖动分布具有一定的方向性,而远离血管的出射光的抖动分布较为均匀,不具有方向性。The target site may be the site where jitter occurs. Since one of the sources of jitter is pulse beating, and pulse beating is related to blood vessels, the target site can be blood vessels. Generally, the jitter distribution of the outgoing light close to the blood vessel has a certain directionality, while the jitter distribution of the outgoing light far from the blood vessel is relatively uniform and has no directionality.
如果同类感光面远离目标部位(例如目标血管),则可以说明出射光的抖动分布较为均匀,在此情况下,可以选择环形感光面、扇环感光面、扇形感光面、圆形感光面或正方形感光面。同类感光面远离目标部位可以理解为同类感光面中每个感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值。同类感光面中每个感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值可以包括同类感光面中最接近目标部位的感光面的边缘距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值,或者,同类感光面与目标部位未接触,且同类感光面中与目标部位最接近的感光面的中心距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值。If the same type of photosensitive surface is far away from the target part (for example, the target blood vessel), it means that the jitter distribution of the outgoing light is relatively uniform. photosensitive surface. That the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are far away from the target portion can be understood as the distance between each photosensitive surface of the same photosensitive surface from the target portion is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold. The distance between each photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface and the target site is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold value may include that the distance between the edge of the photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface closest to the target site and the target site is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold value, or, The photosensitive surfaces of the same type are not in contact with the target part, and the distance from the center of the photosensitive surface closest to the target part in the photosensitive surfaces of the same type to the target part is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold.
在同类感光面远离目标部位的情况下,如果同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程小于或等于光程阈值,则可以说明出射光的抖动情况受到光程大小的影响,其中,出射光的平均光程越大,则出射光的抖动情况越明显,反之,出射光的抖动情况越不明显。在此情况下,可以设计距入射光的中心越远的位置所对应的弧长越长,由此可以选择环形感光面、扇环感光面或扇形感光面。In the case where the same photosensitive surface is far away from the target part, if the average optical path of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface in the same photosensitive surface is less than or equal to the optical path threshold, it can be shown that the jitter of the outgoing light is affected by the light. The influence of the size of the optical path, wherein, the larger the average optical path of the outgoing light, the more obvious the jitter of the outgoing light, and vice versa, the less obvious the jitter of the outgoing light. In this case, the arc length corresponding to the position farther from the center of the incident light can be designed to be longer, so that a ring-shaped photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface or a fan-shaped photosensitive surface can be selected.
在同类感光面远离目标部位的情况下,如果同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程大于光程阈值,则可以说明出射光的抖动情况与光程大小几乎无关。在此情况下,可以选择圆形感光面或正方形感光面。In the case where the same photosensitive surface is far away from the target part, if the average optical path of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface in the same photosensitive surface is greater than the optical path threshold, it can indicate the jitter of the outgoing light and the size of the optical path almost irrelevant. In this case, a circular photosensitive surface or a square photosensitive surface can be selected.
根据本公开的实施例,在同类感光面为扇环感光面的情况下,如果同类感光面包括一个感光面,则扇环感光面为独立扇环感光面。如果同类感光面包括多个感光面,则扇环感光面是根据多个感光面组合形成的感光面。同样的,针对同类感光面包括环形感光面、圆形感光面、正方形感光面或扇形感光面的情况,可以为独立形成的同类感光面或组合形成的同类感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in the case where the same type of photosensitive surface is a fan ring photosensitive surface, if the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the fan ring photosensitive surface is an independent fan ring photosensitive surface. If the same photosensitive surface includes multiple photosensitive surfaces, the fan ring photosensitive surface is a photosensitive surface formed by combining the multiple photosensitive surfaces. Similarly, for the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes a ring-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a square photosensitive surface or a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, it can be the same type of photosensitive surface formed independently or the same type of photosensitive surface formed in combination.
需要说明的是,由于目前圆形感光面或方形感光面较为常见,制作工艺难度较小,制作成本较低,而其它形状的感光面通常需要定制,制作工艺难度较大,制作成本较高,因此,如果受限于制作成本,则在确定同类感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值的情况下,同类感光面包括圆形感光面或方形感光面。It should be noted that, because the current circular photosensitive surface or square photosensitive surface is more common, the production process is less difficult and the production cost is low, while the photosensitive surface of other shapes usually needs to be customized, the production process is more difficult, and the production cost is high. Therefore, if limited by the manufacturing cost, if the distance between the same type of photosensitive surface and the target site is determined to be greater than or equal to the second distance threshold, the same type of photosensitive surface includes a circular photosensitive surface or a square photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定同类感光面距目标部位的距离小于或等于第三距离阈值的情况下,同类感光面的形状是根据出射光的抖动分布确定的。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, when it is determined that the distance between the same type of photosensitive surface and the target site is less than or equal to the third distance threshold, the shape of the same type of photosensitive surface is determined according to the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
根据本公开的实施例,如果同类感光面靠近目标部位(例如目标血管),则可以说明出射 光的抖动分布具有一定的方向性。在此情况下,可以使得同类感光面的形状根据出射光的抖动分布确定,备选地,同类感光面的形状与出射光的抖动分布是相似图形。示例性的,如出射光的抖动分布是椭圆形状,则可以设计同类感光面的形状是椭圆感光面。或者,如果出射光的抖动分布是长方形的,则可以设计同类感光面的形状是长方形感光面。或者,如果出射光的抖动分布是菱形的,则可以设计同类感光面的形状是菱形感光面。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, if the same type of photosensitive surface is close to the target part (for example, the target blood vessel), it can be shown that the jitter distribution of the outgoing light has a certain directionality. In this case, the shapes of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type can be determined according to the jitter distribution of the outgoing light. Alternatively, the shapes of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type and the jitter distribution of the outgoing light are similar figures. Exemplarily, if the jitter distribution of the outgoing light is an elliptical shape, the shape of the same photosensitive surface can be designed to be an elliptical photosensitive surface. Alternatively, if the jitter distribution of the outgoing light is rectangular, the shape of the photosensitive surface of the same type can be designed to be a rectangular photosensitive surface. Alternatively, if the jitter distribution of the outgoing light is rhombic, the shape of the same photosensitive surface can be designed to be a rhombus photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,出射光的抖动分布包括分解为沿第一方向上的抖动分布和沿第二方向上的抖动分布,第一方向和第二方向相互垂直,同类感光面沿第一方向上的长度与同类感光面沿第二方向上的长度的比值是根据出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与出射光沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的,出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度最大。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the jitter distribution of the outgoing light includes a jitter distribution along a first direction and a jitter distribution along the second direction, the first direction and the second direction are perpendicular to each other, and the same photosensitive surfaces are along the first direction. The ratio of the upward length to the length of the same photosensitive surface along the second direction is determined according to the ratio of the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the first direction to the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the second direction. The upward jitter is the largest.
根据本公开的实施例,如果出射光的抖动分布包括沿两个相互垂直的方向的抖动分布,其中,这两个相互垂直的方向的抖动分布是将出射光的抖动分解至这两个相互垂直的方向得到的,两个相互垂直的方向分别称为第一方向和第二方向,其中,出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度最大,则可以根据出射光沿第一方向与沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值,设置同类感光面沿第一方向上的长度与沿第二方向上的长度的比值,可以使得同类感光面沿第一方向上的长度与沿第二方向上的长度的比值大于或等于出射光沿第一方向与沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, if the jitter distribution of the outgoing light includes jitter distributions along two mutually perpendicular directions, the jitter distributions in the two mutually perpendicular directions are obtained by decomposing the jitter of the outgoing light into these two mutually perpendicular directions. obtained from the direction of By setting the ratio of the length of the same type of photosensitive surface along the first direction to the length along the second direction, it can make the length of the same type of photosensitive surface along the first direction and the length along the second direction. The ratio is greater than or equal to the ratio of the dither amplitudes of the outgoing light along the first direction and along the second direction.
示例性的,如第一方向和第二方向分别为直角坐标系中的Y轴方向和X轴方向,则出射光沿Y轴方向上抖动幅度与沿X轴方向上的抖动幅度的比值可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000006
同类感光面沿Y轴方向上的长度与沿X轴方向上的长度的比值可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000008
Exemplarily, if the first direction and the second direction are the Y-axis direction and the X-axis direction in the Cartesian coordinate system, respectively, the ratio of the shaking amplitude along the Y-axis direction of the outgoing light to the shaking amplitude along the X-axis direction can be expressed as: for
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000006
The ratio of the length of the same photosensitive surface along the Y-axis direction to the length along the X-axis direction can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000007
but
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000008
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面包括长方形感光面或椭圆形感光面,长方形感光面的长度与宽度的比值是根据出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与出射光沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的,椭圆形感光面的长轴与短轴的比值是根据出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与出射光沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the same type of photosensitive surface includes a rectangular photosensitive surface or an elliptical photosensitive surface, and the ratio of the length to the width of the rectangular photosensitive surface is based on the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the first direction and the outgoing light in the second direction. The ratio of the jitter amplitude is determined, and the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis of the elliptical photosensitive surface is determined according to the ratio of the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the first direction to the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the second direction.
根据本公开的实施例,如果同类感光面距目标部位的距离小于或等于第三距离阈值,出射光的抖动分布是沿第一方向和沿第二方向进行抖动,第一方向和第二方向相互垂直,则同类感光面可以包括长方形感光面或椭圆形感光面。其中,长方形感光面的长度与宽度的比值大于或等于出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值。椭圆形感光面的长轴与短轴的比值大于或等于出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, if the distance between the same photosensitive surface and the target site is less than or equal to the third distance threshold, the shaking distribution of the emitted light is shaken along the first direction and the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are mutually Vertical, the same photosensitive surface can include a rectangular photosensitive surface or an elliptical photosensitive surface. Wherein, the ratio of the length to the width of the rectangular photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio of the shaking amplitude of the emitted light along the first direction to the shaking amplitude along the second direction. The ratio of the long axis to the short axis of the elliptical photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio of the shaking amplitude along the first direction to the shaking amplitude along the second direction of the outgoing light.
根据本公开的实施例,每个输出光强是根据一个或多个感光面采集到的出射光的光强值处理得到的,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, each output light intensity is obtained by processing according to the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by one or more photosensitive surfaces, which may include the following operations.
将一个或多个感光面结合使用,以输出一个输出光强。或,在一个或多个感光面中每个感光面单独使用的情况下,将各个感光面采集到的出射光的光强值进行计算得到一个输出光强。Combine one or more photosensitive surfaces to produce one output light intensity. Or, in the case where each photosensitive surface of the one or more photosensitive surfaces is used independently, an output light intensity is obtained by calculating the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by each photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,将用于输出一个输出光强的感光面称为同类感光面,同类感光面可以包括一个或多个感光面。其中,不同感光面结合使用的条件可以为各个感光面接收的出射光的的平均光程在平均光程范围内。平均光程范围可以为由大于或等于第一平均光程阈值且小于或等于第二平均光程阈值组成的范围。第一平均光程阈值和第二平均光程阈值可以是根据光程平均值和光程变化幅度确定的。光程平均值是根据同类感光面的各个感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, a photosensitive surface for outputting one output light intensity is referred to as a similar photosensitive surface, and a similar photosensitive surface may include one or more photosensitive surfaces. Wherein, the condition for the combined use of different photosensitive surfaces may be that the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface is within the range of the average optical length. The average optical path range may be a range consisting of greater than or equal to the first average optical path threshold and less than or equal to the second average optical path threshold. The first average optical path threshold and the second average optical path threshold may be determined according to the optical path average value and the optical path variation amplitude. The average optical path length is an average value calculated from the average optical path lengths of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface.
感光面通常会与该感光面对应的放大电路配合使用,以输出一个光强值。为了使得同类感光面可以输出较为准确的输出光强,需要同类感光面中每个感光面的光响应率和与该感光面配合使用的放大电路的放大倍数的乘积为一个预设值,在确保每个感光面的光响应率和与该感光面配合使用的放大电路的放大倍数为同一预设值的情况下,实现同类感光面输出一个输出光强。如果存在感光面的光响应率和与该感光面配合使用的放大电路的放大倍数的乘积不为同一预设值,则需要采取相应方法使得乘积为同一预设值。The photosensitive surface is usually used in conjunction with the amplifier circuit corresponding to the photosensitive surface to output a light intensity value. In order to enable the same type of photosensitive surface to output more accurate output light intensity, the product of the photoresponsivity of each photosensitive surface in the same photosensitive surface and the magnification of the amplification circuit used in conjunction with the photosensitive surface needs to be a preset value. When the light responsivity of each photosensitive surface and the magnification of the amplifying circuit used in conjunction with the photosensitive surface are the same preset value, the same type of photosensitive surface can output one output light intensity. If the product of the photoresponsivity of the photosensitive surface and the magnification of the amplifying circuit used in conjunction with the photosensitive surface is not the same preset value, a corresponding method needs to be taken to make the product be the same preset value.
可以采用硬件或软件方式实现同类感光面输出一个输出光强。The same type of photosensitive surface can output one output light intensity by means of hardware or software.
方式一,硬件方式。可以将同类感光面中不同感光面的阴极彼此电连接且阳极彼此电连接,即实现不同感光面之间共阴共阳的电连接。在此情况下,相当于将不同感光面进行并联,以实现一个或多个感光面结合使用,用以输出一个输出光强。需要说明的是,需要尽量保证不同感光面的光响应率一致,以得到较为准确的输出光强。The first method is the hardware method. The cathodes of different photosensitive surfaces of the same photosensitive surface can be electrically connected to each other and the anodes of the same photosensitive surfaces can be electrically connected to each other, that is, the electrical connection of common cathode and common anode between different photosensitive surfaces can be realized. In this case, it is equivalent to connecting different photosensitive surfaces in parallel, so that one or more photosensitive surfaces are used in combination to output one output light intensity. It should be noted that it is necessary to ensure that the light responsivity of different photosensitive surfaces is consistent as much as possible, so as to obtain a more accurate output light intensity.
方式二,软件方式。同类感光面中不同感光面之间的阴极彼此未连接且阳极彼此未连接,即每个感光面单独使用,输出一个光强值。在得到与每个感光面对应的光强值后,可以采用相应算法将同类感光面中各个感光面的光强值进行加权求和,以得到一个输出光强。The second method is the software method. The cathodes between different photosensitive surfaces in the same photosensitive surface are not connected to each other and the anodes are not connected to each other, that is, each photosensitive surface is used alone to output a light intensity value. After the light intensity value corresponding to each photosensitive surface is obtained, a corresponding algorithm can be used to perform a weighted summation of the light intensity values of each photosensitive surface in the same photosensitive surface to obtain an output light intensity.
备选地,与同类感光面对应的输出光强可以通过如下公式(2)和(3)确定。Alternatively, the output light intensity corresponding to the same type of photosensitive surface can be determined by the following formulas (2) and (3).
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2021143795-appb-000010
其中,I表示与同类感光面对应的输出光强,I i表示与感光面i对应的光强值, i∈{1,2,......,N-1,N},N表示同类感光面包括的感光面的数量,1≤N≤M,M表示感光面的总数量,α i表示与感光面i对应的加权系数,H表示预设值,β i表示与感光面i对应的光响应率,γ i表示与感光面i配合使用的放大电路的放大倍数。 Among them, I represents the output light intensity corresponding to the same photosensitive surface, I i represents the light intensity value corresponding to the photosensitive surface i, i∈{1,2,...,N-1,N},N Indicates the number of photosensitive surfaces included in the same type of photosensitive surface, 1≤N≤M, M denotes the total number of photosensitive surfaces, α i denotes the weighting coefficient corresponding to the photosensitive surface i, H denotes the preset value, β i denotes the photosensitive surface i The corresponding photoresponsivity, γ i represents the magnification of the amplifier circuit used in conjunction with the photosensitive surface i.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength may include the following operations.
确定与预设波长对应的至少一个叠加光强,其中,叠加光强是根据与预设波长对应的多个输出光强相加得到的。根据与预设波长对应的至少一个叠加光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。At least one superimposed light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is determined, wherein the superimposed light intensity is obtained by adding a plurality of output light intensities corresponding to the preset wavelength. The concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to at least one superimposed light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定被测组织成分的浓度时,可以根据实际情况,如单个输出光强的数值较小,或输出光强的信噪比较低,可以灵活利用获取到的数据,以提高测量结果的可靠性。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, when determining the concentration of the measured tissue component, the acquired data can be flexibly used according to the actual situation, such as the value of a single output light intensity is small, or the signal-to-noise ratio of the output light intensity is low , to improve the reliability of the measurement results.
基于上述,根据与预设波长对应的至少一个叠加光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,其中,叠加光强可以是根据多个输出光强相加得到的。输出光强是漫射光(即出射光)的光强。Based on the above, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to at least one superimposed light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength, wherein the superimposed light intensity may be obtained by adding a plurality of output light intensities. The output light intensity is the light intensity of the diffused light (ie the outgoing light).
根据本公开的实施例,预设波长为对被测组织成分敏感的波长。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset wavelength is a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue composition.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,预设波长可以为对被测组织成分敏感的波长。示例性的,如预设波长可以为1550nm或1609nm。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement result, the preset wavelength may be a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue composition. Exemplarily, the preset wavelength may be 1550 nm or 1609 nm.
根据本公开的实施例,测量区域的温度在组织成分测量过程中保持在预设温度范围内。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the temperature of the measurement region is maintained within a preset temperature range during tissue composition measurement.
根据本公开的实施例,由于测量区域的温度变化会影响测量结果的可靠性,因此,为了尽量保证测量结果的可靠性,可以基于温度控制方法控制测量区域的温度在组织成分测量过程中保持在预设温度范围内。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, since the temperature change of the measurement area will affect the reliability of the measurement result, in order to ensure the reliability of the measurement result as much as possible, the temperature of the measurement area can be controlled to keep at the temperature of the tissue composition measurement process based on the temperature control method. within the preset temperature range.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面为在初始感光面上设置掩膜板后得到的,掩膜板的透光率小于或等于透光率阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the photosensitive surface is obtained by disposing a mask on the initial photosensitive surface, and the light transmittance of the mask is less than or equal to a light transmittance threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,掩膜板的形状是根据出射光的抖动分布形状确定的。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the shape of the mask plate is determined according to the shape of the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
根据本公开的实施例,由于目前圆形感光面或方形感光面较为常见,制作工艺难度较小,制作成本较低,而其它形状的感光面通常需要定制,制作工艺难度较大,制作成本较高,因此,如果受限于制作成本,则可以采用在初始感光面上设置掩膜板的方式,其中,初始感光面上被掩膜板遮挡的部分由于掩膜板的透光率小于或等于透光率阈值而难以接收光强值。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, since a circular photosensitive surface or a square photosensitive surface is relatively common at present, the manufacturing process is less difficult and the manufacturing cost is lower, while other shapes of the photosensitive surface usually need to be customized, the manufacturing process is more difficult, and the manufacturing cost is relatively low. Therefore, if it is limited by the production cost, the method of setting a mask plate on the initial photosensitive surface can be adopted, wherein the part of the initial photosensitive surface blocked by the mask plate is less than or equal to the light transmittance of the mask plate. The light transmittance threshold is difficult to receive the light intensity value.
基于上述,可以根据实际所需的形状和面积,设置掩膜板的形状和位置,以实现得到预设形状和面积的感光面。其中,实际所需的形状和面积可以根据出射光的抖动分布情况确定。Based on the above, the shape and position of the mask plate can be set according to the actual required shape and area, so as to obtain a photosensitive surface with a preset shape and area. Wherein, the actual required shape and area can be determined according to the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
示例性的,图19示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在初始感光面上设置掩膜板得到感光面的示意图。图19中初始感光面为正方形感光面,感光面为圆形感光面。Exemplarily, FIG. 19 schematically shows a schematic diagram of setting a mask plate on an initial photosensitive surface to obtain a photosensitive surface according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In Figure 19, the initial photosensitive surface is a square photosensitive surface, and the photosensitive surface is a circular photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布均匀。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area is uniform.
根据本公开的实施例,为了使得被测对象能够在更为宽松的要求下进行组织成分测量,从而更好地保证测量结果的可靠性,可以采用保证入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布均匀的方式实现。同时,入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布越均匀,对可控测量条件的再现性的要求越低,对采用差分测量方法抑制不可控测量条件对测量结果的影响的效果越好,由此,也可以更好地保证测量结果的可靠性。此外,由于使得入射光的光斑在测量区域上的强度分布均匀的措施会在一定程度上衰减入射光的光能量,而组织成分测量要求入射光的光能量不能够过小,因此,需要尽量在保证入射光的光斑在测量区域上的强度分布均匀的情况下,入射光的光能量衰减尽可能小。此外,如果入射光是采用光纤传输方式实现的,则使得入射光的光斑在测量区域上的分布均匀,也减小了光纤抖动对测量结果的不利影响。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to enable the measured object to perform tissue composition measurement under more relaxed requirements, so as to better ensure the reliability of the measurement results, the intensity distribution of the light spot that ensures that the incident light irradiates the measurement area can be used. achieved in a uniform manner. At the same time, the more uniform the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area, the lower the requirement for the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions, and the better the effect of using the differential measurement method to suppress the influence of the uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results. Therefore, the reliability of the measurement results can also be better guaranteed. In addition, since the measures to make the intensity distribution of the incident light spot on the measurement area uniform will attenuate the light energy of the incident light to a certain extent, and the tissue composition measurement requires that the light energy of the incident light cannot be too small, it is necessary to try to Under the condition that the intensity distribution of the incident light spot on the measurement area is uniform, the light energy attenuation of the incident light is as small as possible. In addition, if the incident light is realized by means of optical fiber transmission, the distribution of the incident light spot on the measurement area is uniform, and the adverse effect of fiber jitter on the measurement result is also reduced.
根据本公开的实施例,入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的面积大于或等于光斑面积阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the area of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement region is greater than or equal to the light spot area threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,为了使得被测对象可以在更为宽松的要求下进行组织成分测量,从而更好地保证测量结果的可靠性,可以采用使得入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的面积大于或等于光斑面积阈值的方式实现。同时,在一定范围内,入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的面积越大,对可控测量条件的再现性的要求越低,对采用差分测量方法抑制不可控测量条件对测量结果的影响的效果越好,由此,也可以更好地保证测量结果的可靠性。其中,光斑面积阈值可以根据实际情况设定,在此不作具体限定。此外,如果入射光是采用光纤传输方式实现的,则使得入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的面积大于或等于光斑面积阈值,也减小了光纤抖动对测量结果的不利影响。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to enable the measured object to perform tissue composition measurement under more relaxed requirements, so as to better ensure the reliability of the measurement results, the area of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area may be larger than or equal to the spot area threshold. At the same time, within a certain range, the larger the area of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area, the lower the requirement for the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions, and the effect of using the differential measurement method to suppress the influence of the uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results. The better, and therefore, the better the reliability of the measurement results can be guaranteed. The light spot area threshold can be set according to the actual situation, which is not specifically limited here. In addition, if the incident light is realized by optical fiber transmission, the area of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area is greater than or equal to the light spot area threshold, which also reduces the adverse effect of fiber jitter on the measurement results.
需要说明的是,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,需要尽可能保证如下三个方面,其一,用于实现组织成分的测量装置具有感知预期组织成分浓度变化的能力。其二,减小不可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响。其三,控制可控测量条件。本公开实施例所提供的技术方案保证了上述三个方面。It should be noted that, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, it is necessary to ensure the following three aspects as much as possible. First, the measurement device used to realize the tissue composition has the ability to sense the change of the expected tissue composition concentration. Second, the influence of uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results is reduced. Third, control the controllable measurement conditions. The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure ensure the above three aspects.
针对用于实现组织成分的测量装置具有感知预期组织成分浓度变化的能力,通过采用大面积感光面实现较高的接收出射光的稳定性和效率。针对减小不可控测量条件的变动对测量结果的影响,通过采用差分测量方法实现。针对控制可控测量条件,通过采用有效控制方法实现。The measurement device for realizing tissue composition has the ability to sense the concentration change of the expected tissue composition, and achieves high stability and efficiency of receiving outgoing light by adopting a large-area photosensitive surface. In order to reduce the influence of uncontrollable measurement conditions on the measurement results, the differential measurement method is used. Aiming at controlling the controllable measurement conditions, it is realized by adopting an effective control method.
图20示意性示出了根据本公开的实施例的一种组织成分测量装置的框图。20 schematically shows a block diagram of a tissue composition measurement device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
如图20所示,组织成分测量装置2000包括光源模块2010、采集模块2020和处理模块2030。As shown in FIG. 20 , the tissue composition measurement device 2000 includes a light source module 2010 , a collection module 2020 and a processing module 2030 .
光源模块2010,用于以单个预设波长的入射光照射测量区域,其中,每束入射光通过测 量区域后从至少一个出射位置出射形成至少一束出射光,入射光的入射位置包括至少一个。The light source module 2010 is used to illuminate the measurement area with incident light of a single preset wavelength, wherein each incident light passes through the measurement area and exits from at least one exit position to form at least one exit light, and the incident light of the incident light includes at least one.
采集模块2020,采集模块包括M个感光面,每个感光面能够采集到与感光面对应的预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,采集模块用于获取由M个感光面采集的与每束出射光对应的光强值,得到T个输出光强,其中,每个输出光强是根据一个或多个感光面采集到的出射光的光强值处理得到的,1≤T≤M。 Acquisition module 2020, the acquisition module includes M photosensitive surfaces, each photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range corresponding to the photosensitive surface, and the acquisition module is used to acquire The light intensity values corresponding to each outgoing light collected by the M photosensitive surfaces are obtained, and T output light intensities are obtained, wherein each output light intensity is processed according to the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by one or more photosensitive surfaces obtained, 1≤T≤M.
处理模块2030,用于根据与预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。The processing module 2030 is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to a preset wavelength.
根据本公开实施例的技术方案,所述感光面能够采集在对应的预设防扰动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,由于具有上述特性的感光面提高了感光面中能够稳定接收出射光的面积占该感光面的面积的比例,因此,提高了接收出射光的稳定性,进而降低了由抖动导致的出射光的强度分布的变化的不利影响,从而提高了测量结果的可靠性。同时,采用单个预设波长结合具有上述特性的感光面进行组织成分测量,直接获取到了真实的被测组织成分信号。采用单个预设波长进行组织成分测量,减少了光源模块的体积和结构复杂度,进而减少了装置和设备的体积和结构复杂度,便于便携测量,降低了对电源模块的容量要求,并降低了制作成本。此外,也减少了数据处理量。According to the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present disclosure, the photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the corresponding preset anti-disturbance range. The ratio of the area of stably receiving the outgoing light to the area of the photosensitive surface, therefore, improves the stability of receiving outgoing light, thereby reducing the adverse effects of changes in the intensity distribution of the outgoing light caused by jitter, thereby improving the accuracy of the measurement results. reliability. At the same time, a single preset wavelength is used in combination with the photosensitive surface with the above characteristics to measure the tissue composition, and the real measured tissue composition signal is directly obtained. Using a single preset wavelength for tissue composition measurement reduces the volume and structural complexity of the light source module, thereby reducing the volume and structural complexity of devices and equipment, facilitating portable measurement, reducing the capacity requirements for power modules, and reducing cost of production. In addition, the amount of data processing is also reduced.
根据本公开的实施例,每个感光面接收到的出射光在目标组织层中的平均光程占总光程的比例大于或等于比例阈值,其中,总光程为出射光在测量区域内传输的总距离。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the ratio of the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface in the target tissue layer to the total optical length is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold, where the total optical length is the transmission of the outgoing light in the measurement area. total distance.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面的总面积是根据测量区域内的组织结构特征确定的,其中,同类感光面包括一个或多个感光面,同类感光面用于输出一个输出光强。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the total area of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type is determined according to the tissue structure features in the measurement area, wherein the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are used to output an output light intensity.
根据本公开的实施例,每个感光面的面积与感光面的周长的比值大于或等于比值阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the ratio of the area of each photosensitive surface to the perimeter of the photosensitive surface is greater than or equal to the ratio threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,比值阈值大于或等于0.04mm。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the ratio threshold is greater than or equal to 0.04 mm.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面与测量区域的表面接触或非接触。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the photosensitive surface is in contact or non-contact with the surface of the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面距测量区域的表面的距离小于或等于第一距离阈值且感光面接收出射光的效率大于或等于效率阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the distance of the photosensitive surface from the surface of the measurement area is less than or equal to the first distance threshold and the efficiency of the photosensitive surface receiving the outgoing light is greater than or equal to the efficiency threshold.
如图21所示,根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第一确定模块2040、第二确定模块2050和设置模块2060。As shown in FIG. 21 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a first determination module 2040 , a second determination module 2050 and a setting module 2060 .
第一确定模块2040,用于确定定位特征。第二确定模块2050,用于根据定位特征,确定测量区域,其中,测量区域是满足可控测量条件的再现性的区域。设置模块2060,用于将测量探头设置于与测量区域对应的位置,其中,测量探头包括M个感光面。The first determining module 2040 is used to determine the positioning feature. The second determination module 2050 is configured to determine a measurement area according to the positioning feature, where the measurement area is an area that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement condition. The setting module 2060 is configured to set the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area, wherein the measurement probe includes M photosensitive surfaces.
根据本公开的实施例,定位特征包括第一姿势定位特征和区域定位特征。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the positioning features include a first gesture positioning feature and an area positioning feature.
第二确定模块包括第一调整单元和第一确定单元。The second determination module includes a first adjustment unit and a first determination unit.
第一调整单元,用于根据第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,其中,目标测量姿势是满足可控测量条件的再现性的测量姿势。第一确定单元,用于在当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势的情况下,根据区域定位特征,确定测量区域。The first adjustment unit is configured to adjust the current measurement posture of the measured object to a target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature, wherein the target measurement posture is a measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement condition. The first determining unit is configured to determine the measurement area according to the area positioning feature when the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
如图22所示,根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括固定部2080,固定部2080用于将测量探头2070设置于与测量区域对应的位置,其中,固定部2080与测量探头2070是一体的、部分分立的或全部分立的。As shown in FIG. 22 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a fixing part 2080, and the fixing part 2080 is used to set the measurement probe 2070 at a position corresponding to the measurement area, wherein the fixing part 2080 is connected to the measurement area. Probe 2070 is integral, partially discrete, or fully discrete.
根据本公开的实施例,图22中固定部和测量探头可以是一体的或分立的。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the fixing part and the measuring probe in FIG. 22 may be integrated or separate.
如图23所示,根据本公开的实施例,固定部2080包括固定座2081和第一配合件2082。As shown in FIG. 23 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the fixing part 2080 includes a fixing seat 2081 and a first fitting part 2082 .
第一配合件2082,用于将固定座2081设置于与测量区域对应的位置。固定座2081,用于固定测量探头2070。根据本公开的实施例,第一配合件20822070的硬度包括第一硬度和第二硬度,其中,第一硬度小于第二硬度,第一硬度是第一配合件2082固定固定座2081的过程中所对应的硬度,第二硬度是第一配合件2082固定固定座2081后所对应的硬度。The first fitting 2082 is used to set the fixing base 2081 at a position corresponding to the measurement area. The fixing base 2081 is used to fix the measuring probe 2070 . According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the hardness of the first fitting 20822070 includes a first hardness and a second hardness, wherein the first hardness is smaller than the second hardness, and the first hardness is the first hardness that the first fitting 2082 fixes in the process of fixing the fixing seat 2081 Corresponding to the hardness, the second hardness is the hardness corresponding to the first fitting member 2082 after fixing the fixing seat 2081 .
根据本公开的实施例,为了使第一配合件2082能够对固定座2081起到固定作用,需要第一配合件2082较为坚硬。同时,为了尽可能降低第一配合件2082固定固定座2081时产生的影响,又需要第一配合件2082具有一定的柔性。由此可见,上述对第一配合件2082的硬度提出了要求。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order for the first fitting member 2082 to play a fixing role on the fixing seat 2081, the first fitting member 2082 needs to be relatively rigid. At the same time, in order to minimize the influence caused when the first fitting member 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081, the first fitting member 2082 needs to have a certain degree of flexibility. It can be seen that the above-mentioned requirements are imposed on the hardness of the first fitting member 2082 .
为了解决上述问题,可以采用改变第一配合件2082的硬度的方式,即第一配合件2082的硬度包括第一硬度和第二硬度。其中,第一硬度表示第一配合件2082固定固定座20812082的过程中所对应的硬度,第二硬度表示第一配件件2082固定固定座2081后所对应的硬度,第一硬度小于第二硬度,上述可以尽量保证第一配件件2082既可以起到固定的作用,又可以尽可能降低第一配合件2082固定固定座2081时所产生的影响。In order to solve the above problem, a method of changing the hardness of the first fitting member 2082 may be adopted, that is, the hardness of the first fitting member 2082 includes the first hardness and the second hardness. Wherein, the first hardness represents the hardness corresponding to the process of fixing the fixing seat 2082 by the first fitting 2082, and the second hardness represents the hardness corresponding to the fixing of the fixing seat 2081 by the first fitting 2082, the first hardness is smaller than the second hardness, The above can try to ensure that the first fitting part 2082 can not only play a fixing role, but also can reduce the influence produced when the first fitting part 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081 as much as possible.
根据本公开的实施例,第一配合件2082包括第一魔术贴或第一松紧带。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first fitting 2082 includes a first Velcro or a first elastic band.
示例性的,图24示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种第一配合件的示意图。图24中第一配合件2082为魔术贴。由于魔术贴的毛面的材质非常柔软,因此,可以降低第一配合件2082固定固定座2081时产生的影响,此时,第一配合件2082的硬度为第一硬度。同时,为了使其可以起到固定作用,可以在第一配合件2082将固定座2081固定后,将勾面粘贴在毛面上,使第一配合件2082的硬度增加,此时,第一配合件2082的硬度为第二硬度。Exemplarily, FIG. 24 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first fitting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The first fitting 2082 in FIG. 24 is a Velcro. Since the material of the matte surface of the Velcro is very soft, the influence generated when the first fitting 2082 is fixed to the fixing seat 2081 can be reduced. At this time, the hardness of the first fitting 2082 is the first hardness. At the same time, in order to enable it to play a fixing role, after the first fitting 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081, the hook surface can be pasted on the rough surface to increase the hardness of the first fitting 2082. At this time, the first fitting The hardness of the piece 2082 is the second hardness.
根据本公开的实施例,由于第一配合件2082固定固定座2081的过程中所对应的硬度为第一硬度,其可以降低第一配合件2082固定固定座2081时所产生的影响,因此,可以尽量保证测量区域处皮肤的皮肤的皮肤状态在通过第一配合件2082将固定座2081设置于与测量区域对应的位置的过程中满足第一预设条件。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, since the hardness corresponding to the first matching piece 2082 in the process of fixing the fixing seat 2081 is the first hardness, it can reduce the influence produced when the first matching piece 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081, therefore, it can be Try to ensure that the skin state of the skin in the measurement area satisfies the first preset condition during the process of setting the fixing seat 2081 at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting 2082 .
根据本公开的实施例,第一配合件2082的硬度大于或等于第一硬度阈值小于或等于第二硬度阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the hardness of the first fitting 2082 is greater than or equal to the first hardness threshold and less than or equal to the second hardness threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,为了满足第一配合件2082的硬度要求,除了可以采用上文所述的方式外,还可以采用硬度大于或等于第一硬度阈值且小于或等于第二硬度阈值的材质来制作第一配合件2082的方式,同样也可以实现第一配合件2082能够对固定座2081起到固定作用,且尽可能降低第一配合件2082固定固定座2081时产生的影响。需要说明的是,第一硬度阈值和第二硬度阈值可以根据实际情况进行设定,在此不作具体限定。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to meet the hardness requirement of the first fitting member 2082 , in addition to the above-mentioned methods, a material whose hardness is greater than or equal to the first hardness threshold and less than or equal to the second hardness threshold can also be used In the same way, the first matching member 2082 can be used to fix the fixing seat 2081 , and the influence of the first matching member 2082 in fixing the fixing seat 2081 can be reduced as much as possible. It should be noted that, the first hardness threshold and the second hardness threshold may be set according to actual conditions, which are not specifically limited herein.
如图25所示,根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第一磁性部2090,第一配合件2082的全部或部分为金属铰链,并且第一磁性部2090配合第一配合件2082以固定固定座2081。As shown in FIG. 25 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a first magnetic part 2090 , the whole or part of the first fitting 2082 is a metal hinge, and the first magnetic part 2090 is matched with the first fitting 2082 to fix the fixing base 2081.
根据本公开的实施例,为了满足第一配合件2082的硬度要求,除了可以采用上文所述的方式外,还可以采用第一配合件2082的全部或部分为金属铰链的方式,同样也可以实现第一配合件2082能够对固定座2081起到固定作用,且尽可能降低第一配合件2082固定固定座20812082时产生的影响。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to meet the hardness requirement of the first fitting member 2082, in addition to the above-mentioned method, the first fitting member 2082 may be entirely or partially a metal hinge. It is realized that the first fitting member 2082 can fix the fixing seat 2081, and the influence generated when the first fitting member 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081 to 2082 is reduced as much as possible.
针对固定作用,实现方式如下。在第一配合件2082完成对固定座2081的固定后,可以将第一磁性部2090吸附至第一配合件2082,以使第一磁性部2090配合第一配合件2082固定固定座2081,上述可以起到固定作用。可以参见图25。图25示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种第一配合件的示意图。图25中第一配合件2082的全部为金属铰链。可以在第一配合件2082完成对固定座2081的固定后,将第一磁性部2090吸附至第一配合件2082。第一磁性部2090可以为微型电磁铁。For the fixed effect, the implementation is as follows. After the first fitting 2082 completes the fixing of the fixing base 2081, the first magnetic part 2090 can be adsorbed to the first fitting 2082, so that the first magnetic part 2090 cooperates with the first fitting 2082 to fix the fixing base 2081. play a fixed role. See Figure 25. FIG. 25 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another first fitting according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. All of the first fittings 2082 in FIG. 25 are metal hinges. After the first matching member 2082 completes the fixing of the fixing base 2081 , the first magnetic portion 2090 can be adsorbed to the first matching member 2082 . The first magnetic part 2090 may be a micro electromagnet.
此外,由于金属铰链是铁磁性金属,而金属易吸热,金属铰链与皮肤直接接触会对皮肤温度产生较大影响,因此,为了避免金属吸热对皮肤温度产生的影响,可以采用在金属铰链下面放置隔热物的方式。备选地,隔热物可以为绒布。In addition, since the metal hinge is a ferromagnetic metal, and the metal is easy to absorb heat, the direct contact between the metal hinge and the skin will have a greater impact on the skin temperature. Therefore, in order to avoid the impact of the metal heat absorption on the skin temperature, the metal hinge can be The way the insulation is placed below. Alternatively, the insulation may be fleece.
上述可以实现的原因在于,由于金属铰链的柔性较好,因此,可以降低第一配合件2082固定固定座2081时所产生的影响。同时,在第一配合件2082完成对固定座2081的固定后,由于第一配合件2082上吸附有第一磁性部2090,两者的配合使得第一配合件2082变得较坚硬,因此,可以实现固定作用。The reason why the above can be achieved is that, since the metal hinge has better flexibility, the influence produced when the first fitting member 2082 fixes the fixing seat 2081 can be reduced. At the same time, after the first fitting 2082 completes the fixing of the fixing seat 2081, since the first magnetic part 2090 is adsorbed on the first fitting 2082, the cooperation of the two makes the first fitting 2082 more rigid. Therefore, the first fitting 2082 can be achieve a fixed effect.
需要说明的是,由于第一配合件2082的全部或部分为金属铰链,而金属铰链的柔性较好,其可以降低第一配合件2082固定固定座2081时所产生的影响,因此,可以尽量保证测量区域处皮肤的皮肤的皮肤状态在通过第一配合件2082将固定座2081设置于与测量区域对应的位置的过程中满足第一预设条件。It should be noted that, since all or part of the first matching member 2082 is a metal hinge, and the metal hinge is more flexible, it can reduce the influence of the first matching member 2082 when the fixing seat 2081 is fixed. Therefore, it can be ensured as much as possible. The skin state of the skin of the skin at the measurement area satisfies the first preset condition during the process of setting the fixing seat 2081 at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting 2082 .
根据本公开的实施例,第一配合件2082的表面设置有孔。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the surface of the first fitting 2082 is provided with holes.
根据本公开的实施例,通过如下至少一种方式将测量探头2070固定于固定座2081:测量探头2070通过胶带固定于固定座2081。测量探头2070通过紧固件固定于固定座2081。测量探头2070通过磁力固定于固定座2081。测量探头2070与固定座2081之间的摩擦系数大于或等于摩擦系数阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the measurement probe 2070 is fixed to the fixing base 2081 in at least one of the following manners: the measurement probe 2070 is fixed to the fixing base 2081 by an adhesive tape. The measuring probe 2070 is fixed to the fixing base 2081 by fasteners. The measuring probe 2070 is fixed to the fixing base 2081 by magnetic force. The friction coefficient between the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing base 2081 is greater than or equal to the friction coefficient threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,为了实现测量探头2070固定于固定座2081,并保证测量探头2070在固定座2081中不产生移动,可以采用如下至少一种方式。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to realize that the measurement probe 2070 is fixed to the fixed seat 2081 and ensure that the measurement probe 2070 does not move in the fixed seat 2081, at least one of the following methods can be adopted.
方式一,可以通过胶带将测量探头2070固定于固定座2081。方式二,可以通过紧固件将测量探头2070固定于固定座2081。方式三,可以通过磁力将测量探头2070固定于固定座2081。方式四,测量探头2070与固定座2081之间的摩擦系数大于或等于摩擦系数阈值。备选地,固定座2081的材质包括橡胶、铝或塑料。In a first way, the measuring probe 2070 can be fixed to the fixing base 2081 by tape. In the second way, the measuring probe 2070 can be fixed to the fixing base 2081 by a fastener. In the third way, the measuring probe 2070 can be fixed to the fixing base 2081 by magnetic force. In the fourth mode, the friction coefficient between the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing seat 2081 is greater than or equal to the friction coefficient threshold. Alternatively, the material of the fixing base 2081 includes rubber, aluminum or plastic.
根据本公开的实施例,固定部2080包括第二配合件。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the fixing part 2080 includes a second fitting.
第二配合件,用于将测量探头2070设置于与测量区域对应的位置。The second fitting is used to set the measurement probe 2070 at a position corresponding to the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,第二配合件的硬度包括第三硬度和第四硬度,其中,第三硬度小于第四硬度,第三硬度是第二配合件固定测量探头2070的过程中所对应的硬度,第四硬度是第二配合件固定测量探头2070后所对应的硬度。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the hardness of the second fitting includes a third hardness and a fourth hardness, wherein the third hardness is smaller than the fourth hardness, and the third hardness corresponds to the process of fixing the measurement probe 2070 by the second fitting Hardness, the fourth hardness is the hardness corresponding to the second fitting member after fixing the measuring probe 2070 .
根据本公开的实施例,第二配合件包括第二魔术贴或第二松紧带。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second fitting includes a second Velcro or a second elastic band.
根据本公开的实施例,第二配合件的硬度大于或等于第三硬度阈值小于或等于第四硬度阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the hardness of the second fitting is greater than or equal to the third hardness threshold and less than or equal to the fourth hardness threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第二磁性部,第二配合件的全部或部分为金属铰链,并且第二磁性部配合第二配合件以固定测量探头2070。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a second magnetic part, all or part of the second fitting is a metal hinge, and the second magnetic part cooperates with the second fitting to fix the measurement probe 2070 .
根据本公开的实施例,第二配合件的表面设置有孔。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the surface of the second fitting is provided with holes.
根据本公开的实施例,针对第二配合件的相关说明可以参见上文对第一配合件2082的说明,在此不再具体赘述。所不同的是,第二配合件用于固定测量探头2070。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, for the relevant description of the second fitting member, reference may be made to the description of the first fitting member 2082 above, and details are not repeated here. The difference is that the second fitting is used to fix the measuring probe 2070 .
根据本公开的实施例,区域定位特征设置于测量探头2070、固定部2080和被测对象中的至少一种。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the area positioning feature is provided on at least one of the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 and the measured object.
第一确定单元,用于:获取第一投影特征。在确定区域定位特征与第一投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整测量探头2070和/或固定部2080的位置,直至区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配。在确定区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配的情况下,将与测量探头2070和/或固定部2080对应的区域确定为测量区域。The first determining unit is used for: acquiring the first projection feature. In the case where it is determined that the regional positioning feature does not match the first projection feature, the position of the measuring probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 is adjusted until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature. In the case where it is determined that the region positioning feature matches the first projection feature, the region corresponding to the measurement probe 2070 and/or the fixing portion 2080 is determined as the measurement region.
如图26和图27所示,根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括区域定位 部2100,区域定位部2100设置于被测对象、测量探头2070、固定部2080或其他对象,区域定位部2100用于投射第一投影特征。As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a region positioning part 2100 , and the region positioning part 2100 is arranged on the object to be measured, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, The area positioning part 2100 is used for projecting the first projection feature.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定区域定位部2100设置于测量探头2070的情况下,区域定位特征未设置于测量探头2070。在确定区域定位部2100设置于固定部2080的情况下,区域定位特征未设置于固定部2080。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in the case where it is determined that the region positioning part 2100 is provided on the measurement probe 2070 , the region positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 . When it is determined that the region positioning portion 2100 is provided on the fixing portion 2080 , the region positioning feature is not provided on the fixing portion 2080 .
根据本公开的实施例,图26示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种区域定位部的示意图。图26中未示出测量探头2070和固定部2080,区域定位部2100用于投射第一投影特征,第一投影特征为十字光斑。区域定位特征为十字标记点。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, FIG. 26 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a region positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 are not shown in FIG. 26 , and the area positioning part 2100 is used to project the first projection feature, and the first projection feature is a cross light spot. The regional positioning feature is the cross mark point.
图27示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种区域定位部的示意图。图27中区域定位部2100与测量探头2070和固定部2080是一体的,区域定位特征设置于被测对象的手背。区域定位部2100用于投射第一投影特征,第一投影特征为十字光斑。FIG. 27 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another area positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 27 , the area positioning part 2100 is integrated with the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 , and the area positioning feature is set on the back of the hand of the measured object. The area positioning part 2100 is used to project the first projection feature, and the first projection feature is a cross light spot.
根据本公开的实施例,区域定位部2100包括第一激光器。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the area positioning part 2100 includes a first laser.
根据本公开的实施例,第一激光器可以投射预设形状的光斑,以形成第一投影特征。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first laser may project a spot of a preset shape to form the first projection feature.
根据本公开的实施例,第一确定单元,用于:获取第一目标图像。获取第一模板图像,其中,第一模板图像包括区域定位特征。在确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整测量探头2070和/或固定部2080的位置,以获取新的第一目标图像,直至新的第一目标图像与第一模板图像匹配。在确定第一目标图像与第一模板图像匹配的情况下,将与测量探头2070和/或固定部2080对应的区域确定为测量区域。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first determination unit is configured to: acquire the first target image. A first template image is acquired, wherein the first template image includes regional positioning features. When it is determined that the first target image does not match the first template image, adjust the position of the measuring probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 to acquire a new first target image until the new first target image matches the first template Image matching. When it is determined that the first target image matches the first template image, an area corresponding to the measurement probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 is determined as a measurement area.
如图28所示,根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第一图像采集部2110,第一图像采集部2110设置于被测对象、测量探头2070、固定部2080或其他对象,第一图像采集部2110用于采集第一目标图像。As shown in FIG. 28 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a first image acquisition part 2110 , and the first image acquisition part 2110 is arranged on the object to be measured, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects , the first image acquisition part 2110 is used to acquire the first target image.
根据本公开的实施例,图28示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种第一图像采集部的示意图。图28中第一图像采集部2110与测量探头2070和固定部2080是一体的,区域定位特征设置于被测对象的手背。第一图像采集部2110用于采集第一目标图像。第一图像采集部2110可以为图像传感器。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, FIG. 28 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first image acquisition part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 28 , the first image acquisition part 2110 is integrated with the measurement probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 , and the area positioning feature is set on the back of the hand of the measured object. The first image acquisition part 2110 is used for acquiring a first target image. The first image acquisition part 2110 may be an image sensor.
根据本公开的实施例,第一确定单元,用于:获取第二目标图像,其中,第二目标图像包括区域定位特征。在确定第二目标图像中区域定位特征的位置不为第一预设位置的情况下,调整测量探头2070和/或固定部2080的位置,以获取新的第二目标图像,直至新的第二目标图像中区域定位特征的位置为第一预设位置。在确定新的第二目标图像中区域定位特征的位置为第一预设位置的情况下,将与测量探头2070和/或固定部2080对应的区域确定为测量区域。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first determination unit is configured to: acquire a second target image, wherein the second target image includes a region localization feature. If it is determined that the position of the region positioning feature in the second target image is not the first preset position, adjust the position of the measuring probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 to acquire a new second target image until a new second target image is obtained. The position of the regional positioning feature in the target image is the first preset position. In the case that the position of the region positioning feature in the new second target image is determined to be the first preset position, the region corresponding to the measurement probe 2070 and/or the fixing part 2080 is determined as the measurement region.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第二图像采集部,第二图像采集部设置于被测对象、测量探头2070、固定部2080或其他对象,第二图像采集部用于采集第二目标图像。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a second image acquisition part, the second image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the second image acquisition part is used for A second target image is acquired.
根据本公开的实施例,第二图像采集部与第一图像采集部2110相同或不同。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second image capturing part is the same as or different from the first image capturing part 2110 .
根据本公开的实施例,在确定第二图像采集部设置于测量探头2070的情况下,区域定位特征未设置于测量探头2070。在确定第二图像采集部设置于固定部2080的情况下,区域定位特征未设置于固定部2080。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in a case where it is determined that the second image acquisition part is provided on the measurement probe 2070 , the area positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 . In the case where it is determined that the second image capturing part is arranged on the fixing part 2080 , the area positioning feature is not arranged on the fixing part 2080 .
根据本公开的实施例,第一调整单元,用于:获取第二投影特征。在确定第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,直至第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征匹配。在确定第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征匹配的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first adjustment unit is configured to: acquire the second projection feature. In the case where it is determined that the first posture locating feature does not match the second projection feature, the current measurement posture is adjusted until the first posture locating feature and the second projection feature match. When it is determined that the first posture positioning feature matches the second projection feature, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
如图29所示,根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第一姿势定位部2120,第一姿势定位部2120设置于被测对象、测量探头2070、固定部2080或其他对象,第一姿势定位部2120用于投射第二投影特征。As shown in FIG. 29 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measuring device 2000 further includes a first posture positioning part 2120 , and the first posture positioning part 2120 is arranged on the measured object, the measuring probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects , the first posture positioning part 2120 is used to project the second projection feature.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定第一姿势定位部2120设置于测量探头2070的情况下,第一姿势定位特征未设置于测量探头2070。在确定第一姿势定位部2120设置于固定部2080的情况下,第一姿势定位特征未设置于固定部2080。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in a case where it is determined that the first posture positioning part 2120 is provided on the measurement probe 2070 , the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 . When it is determined that the first posture positioning portion 2120 is provided on the fixing portion 2080 , the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the fixing portion 2080 .
根据本公开的实施例,图29示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种第一姿势定位部的示意图。图29中未示出测量探头2070和固定部2080,第一姿势定位部2120用于投射第二投影特征,第二投影特征为十字光斑。第一姿势定位特征为十字标记点。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, FIG. 29 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a first posture positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 are not shown in FIG. 29 , and the first posture positioning part 2120 is used to project the second projection feature, and the second projection feature is a cross light spot. The first pose localization feature is a cross mark point.
图30示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种第一姿势定位部的示意图。图30中第一姿势定位部2120与测量探头2070和固定部2080是一体的,第一姿势定位特征设置于被测对象的手背。第一姿势定位部2120用于投射第二投影特征,第二投影特征为十字光斑。FIG. 30 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another first posture positioning part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 30 , the first posture positioning part 2120 is integrated with the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 , and the first posture positioning feature is set on the back of the hand of the measured object. The first posture positioning part 2120 is used to project the second projection feature, and the second projection feature is a cross light spot.
根据本公开的实施例,第一姿势定位部2120包括第二激光器。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first posture positioning part 2120 includes a second laser.
根据本公开的实施例,第二激光器可以投射预设形状的光斑,以形成第二投影特征。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second laser may project a predetermined shaped light spot to form the second projection feature.
根据本公开的实施例,第一调整单元,用于:获取第三目标图像。获取第二模板图像,其中,第二模板图像包括第一姿势定位特征。在确定第三目标图像与第二模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第三目标图像,直至新的第三目标图像与第二模板图像匹配。在确定新的第三目标图像与第二模板图像匹配的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first adjustment unit is configured to: acquire a third target image. A second template image is acquired, wherein the second template image includes the first gesture location feature. When it is determined that the third target image does not match the second template image, the current measurement posture is adjusted to obtain a new third target image until the new third target image matches the second template image. When it is determined that the new third target image matches the second template image, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
如图31所示,根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第三图像采集部 2130,第三图像采集部2130设置于被测对象、测量探头2070、固定部2080或其他对象,第三图像采集部2130用于采集第三目标图像。As shown in FIG. 31 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a third image acquisition part 2130 , and the third image acquisition part 2130 is disposed on the object to be measured, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects , and the third image acquisition part 2130 is used to acquire a third target image.
根据本公开的实施例,图31示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种第三图像采集部的示意图。图31中第三图像采集部2130与测量探头2070和固定部2080是一体的,第一姿势定位特征设置于被测对象的手背。第三图像采集部2130用于采集第三目标图像。第三图像采集部2130可以为图像传感器。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, FIG. 31 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a third image acquisition part according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 31 , the third image acquisition part 2130 is integrated with the measurement probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 , and the first posture positioning feature is set on the back of the hand of the measured object. The third image acquisition part 2130 is used to acquire a third target image. The third image acquisition part 2130 may be an image sensor.
根据本公开的实施例,第三图像采集部2130、第一图像采集部2110和第二图像采集部可以不同、部分相同或全部相同。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the third image capturing part 2130 , the first image capturing part 2110 and the second image capturing part may be different, partially the same, or all the same.
根据本公开的实施例,第一调整单元,用于:获取第四目标图像,其中,第四目标图像包括第一姿势定位特征。在确定第四目标图像中第一姿势定位特征的位置不在第二预设位置的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第四目标图像,直至新的第四目标图像中第一姿势定位特征的位置在第二预设位置。在确定新的第四目标图像中第一姿势定位特征的位置在第二预设位置的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first adjustment unit is configured to: acquire a fourth target image, wherein the fourth target image includes the first posture positioning feature. In the case where it is determined that the position of the first posture positioning feature in the fourth target image is not at the second preset position, adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new fourth target image until the first posture is positioned in the new fourth target image The location of the feature is at the second preset location. When it is determined that the position of the first posture positioning feature in the new fourth target image is at the second preset position, the current measurement posture is determined as the target measurement posture.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第四图像采集部,第四图像采集部设置于被测对象、测量探头2070、固定部2080或其他对象,第四图像采集部用于采集第四目标图像。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a fourth image acquisition part, the fourth image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the fourth image acquisition part is used for A fourth target image is acquired.
根据本公开的实施例,第四图像采集部、第三图像采集部2130、第一图像采集部2110和第二图像采集部可以不同、部分相同或全部相同。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the fourth image capturing part, the third image capturing part 2130, the first image capturing part 2110, and the second image capturing part may be different, partially the same, or all the same.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定第四图像采集部设置于测量探头2070的情况下,第一姿势定位特征未设置于测量探头2070。在确定第四图像采集部设置于固定部2080的情况下,第一姿势定位特征未设置于固定部2080。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in a case where it is determined that the fourth image acquisition part is provided on the measurement probe 2070 , the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 . In the case where it is determined that the fourth image capturing part is provided on the fixing part 2080 , the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the fixing part 2080 .
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第三确定模块和调整模块。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a third determination module and an adjustment module.
第三确定模块,用于如果所述测量探头2070设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,则在当前测量姿势不为目标测量姿势的情况下,确定第二姿势定位特征。调整模块,用于根据第二姿势定位特征,调整当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势。The third determining module is configured to determine the second posture positioning feature if the measurement probe 2070 is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area, in the case that the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture. The adjustment module is configured to adjust the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature.
根据本公开的实施例,第二姿势定位特征设置于测量探头2070、固定部2080和被测对象中的至少一种。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second posture positioning feature is provided on at least one of the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing portion 2080 , and the measured object.
调整模块包括第一获取单元、第二调整单元和第二确定单元。The adjustment module includes a first acquisition unit, a second adjustment unit and a second determination unit.
第一获取单元,用于获取第三投影特征。第二调整单元,用于在确定第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,直至第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配。第二确定单元,用于在确定第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配的情况下,确定 当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。The first obtaining unit is used to obtain the third projection feature. The second adjustment unit is configured to adjust the current measurement posture when it is determined that the second posture positioning feature does not match the third projection feature until the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature. The second determining unit is configured to determine the current measurement posture as the target measurement posture when it is determined that the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第二姿势定位部,第二姿势定位部设置于被测对象、测量探头2070、固定部2080或其他对象,第二姿势定位部用于投射第三投影特征。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measuring device 2000 further includes a second posture positioning part, the second posture positioning part is arranged on the measured object, the measuring probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the second posture positioning part is used for Project a third projected feature.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定第二姿势定位部设置于测量探头2070的情况下,第二姿势定位特征未设置于测量探头2070和固定部2080。在确定第二姿势定位部设置于固定部2080的情况下,第二姿势定位特征未设置于测量探头2070和固定部2080。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in a case where it is determined that the second posture positioning part is provided on the measuring probe 2070 , the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 . In the case where it is determined that the second posture positioning part is provided on the fixing part 2080 , the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 .
根据本公开的实施例,第二姿势定位部与第一姿势定位部2120相同或不同。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second posture positioning part is the same as or different from the first posture positioning part 2120 .
根据本公开的实施例,第二姿势定位部包括第三激光器。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second posture positioning portion includes a third laser.
根据本公开的实施例,第三激光器可以投射预设形状的光斑,以形成第三投影特征。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the third laser may project a predetermined shaped light spot to form the third projection feature.
根据本公开的实施例,调整模块包括第二获取单元、第三获取单元、第三调整单元和第三确定单元。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the adjustment module includes a second acquisition unit, a third acquisition unit, a third adjustment unit, and a third determination unit.
第二获取单元,用于获取第五目标图像。第三获取单元,用于获取第三模板图像,其中,第三模板图像包括第二姿势定位特征。第三调整单元,用于在确定第五目标图像与第三模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第五目标图像,直至新的第五目标图像与第三模板图像匹配。第三确定单元,用于在确定新的第五目标图像与第三模板图像匹配的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。The second acquiring unit is configured to acquire the fifth target image. A third acquiring unit, configured to acquire a third template image, wherein the third template image includes the second posture positioning feature. A third adjustment unit, configured to adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new fifth target image when it is determined that the fifth target image does not match the third template image, until the new fifth target image and the third template image match. The third determination unit is configured to determine the current measurement posture as the target measurement posture when it is determined that the new fifth target image matches the third template image.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置还包括第五图像采集部,第五图像采集部设置于被测对象、测量探头2070、固定部2080或其他对象,第五图像采集部用于采集第五目标图像。,According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device further includes a fifth image acquisition part, the fifth image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the fifth image acquisition part is used for acquiring Fifth target image. ,
根据本公开的实施例,调整模块包括第四获取单元、第四调整单元和第四确定单元。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the adjustment module includes a fourth acquisition unit, a fourth adjustment unit, and a fourth determination unit.
第四获取单元,用于获取第六目标图像,其中,第六目标图像包括第二姿势定位特征。第四调整单元,用于在确定第六目标图像中第二姿势定位特征的位置不在第三预设位置的情况下,调整当前测量姿势,以获取新的第六目标图像,直至新的第六目标图像中第二姿势定位特征的位置在第三预设位置。第四确定单元,用于在确定新的第六目标图像中第二姿势定位特征的位置在第三预设位置的情况下,确定当前测量姿势为目标测量姿势。The fourth acquisition unit is configured to acquire a sixth target image, wherein the sixth target image includes the second posture positioning feature. The fourth adjustment unit is configured to adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new sixth target image when it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is not at the third preset position, until the new sixth The position of the second gesture positioning feature in the target image is at a third preset position. The fourth determining unit is configured to determine the current measurement posture as the target measurement posture when it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is at the third preset position.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第六图像采集部,第六图像采集部设置于被测对象、测量探头2070、固定部2080或其他对象,第六图像采集部用于采集第六目标图像。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a sixth image acquisition part, the sixth image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe 2070 , the fixing part 2080 or other objects, and the sixth image acquisition part is used for A sixth target image is acquired.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定第六图像采集部设置于测量探头2070的情况下,第二姿势定位特征未设置于测量探头2070和固定部2080。在确定第六图像采集部设置于固定部2080 的情况下,第二姿势定位特征未设置于测量探头2070和固定部2080。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in a case where it is determined that the sixth image acquisition part is provided on the measurement probe 2070 , the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 . In the case where it is determined that the sixth image capturing part is provided on the fixing part 2080 , the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measuring probe 2070 and the fixing part 2080 .
根据本公开的实施例,第六图像采集部、第五图像采集部、第四图像采集部、第三图像采集部2130、第一图像采集部2110和第二图像采集部可以不同、部分相同或全部相同。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the sixth image acquisition part, the fifth image acquisition part, the fourth image acquisition part, the third image acquisition part 2130, the first image acquisition part 2110, and the second image acquisition part may be different, partially the same, or All the same.
根据本公开的实施例,当采用光学方法进行测量区域和测量姿势的定位时,区域定位部2100、第一姿势定位部2120和第二姿势定位部可以是全部相同的、部分相同的或全部不同的,所述的部分相同是指上述三种结构中存在两种是相同的。如果三种结构是全部相同的,则可以说明同一结构可以用于产生第一投影特征、第二投影特征和第三投影特征。上述方式可以实现简化定位结构的复杂度。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, when an optical method is used to locate the measurement area and the measurement posture, the area locating part 2100 , the first posture locating part 2120 and the second posture locating part may be all the same, partially the same, or all different The said part is the same means that two of the above three structures are the same. If the three structures are all the same, it can be stated that the same structure can be used to generate the first projected feature, the second projected feature and the third projected feature. The above manner can simplify the complexity of the positioning structure.
当采用图像匹配方法进行测量区域和测量姿势的定位时,用于第一图像采集部2110、第三图像采集部2130和第五图像采集部可以是全部相同的、部分相同的或全部不同的,所述的部分相同是指上述三种结构中存在两种是相同的。如果三种结构是全部相同的,则可以说明同一结构可以用于生成第一目标图像、第三目标图像和第五目标图像。上述方式可以实现简化定位结构的复杂度。When the image matching method is used to locate the measurement area and the measurement posture, the first image acquisition part 2110, the third image acquisition part 2130 and the fifth image acquisition part may be all the same, partially the same or all different, The said part is the same means that two of the above three structures are the same. If the three structures are all the same, it can be stated that the same structure can be used to generate the first target image, the third target image and the fifth target image. The above manner can simplify the complexity of the positioning structure.
当采用成像方法进行测量区域和测量姿势的定位时,第二图像采集部、第四图像采集部和第六图像采集部可以是全部相同的、部分相同的或全部不同的,所述的部分相同是指上述三种结构中存在两种是相同的。如果三种结构是全部相同的,则可以说明同一结构可以用于产生第二目标图像、第四目标图像和第六目标图像。上述方式可以实现简化定位结构的复杂度。When the imaging method is used to locate the measurement area and the measurement posture, the second image acquisition part, the fourth image acquisition part and the sixth image acquisition part may be all the same, partially the same or all different, and the parts are the same It means that two of the above three structures are the same. If the three structures are all the same, it can be stated that the same structure can be used to generate the second target image, the fourth target image and the sixth target image. The above manner can simplify the complexity of the positioning structure.
下面以光学方法为例进行说明。The optical method is used as an example for description below.
针对区域定位部2100、第一姿势定位部2120和第二姿势定位部是同一结构。第二姿势定位特征与区域定位特征是完全相同的,与第一姿势定位特征是部分相同的。测量区域为前臂伸侧。The area positioning unit 2100, the first posture positioning unit 2120, and the second posture positioning unit have the same structure. The second pose location feature is identical to the region location feature and is partially identical to the first pose location feature. The measurement area is the extended side of the forearm.
图32示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种测量姿势和测量区域定位的示意图。图32中区域定位部2100、第一姿势定位部2120和第二姿势定位部均包括激光器1和激光器2。激光器1和激光器2设置于测量探头2070。FIG. 32 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a measurement posture and measurement area positioning according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 32 , the area positioning part 2100 , the first attitude positioning part 2120 and the second attitude positioning part all include laser 1 and laser 2 . The laser 1 and the laser 2 are provided in the measurement probe 2070 .
在进行首次测量姿势定位时,测量探头2070设置于基座,在未完成首次测量姿势定位前,测量探头2070的位置是固定不变的。根据第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征,调整当前测量姿势,直至第一姿势定位特征与第二投影特征匹配,在两者匹配的情况下,说明完成首次测量姿势定位。When the first measurement posture positioning is performed, the measurement probe 2070 is set on the base. Before the first measurement posture positioning is completed, the position of the measurement probe 2070 is fixed. According to the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature, adjust the current measurement posture until the first posture positioning feature and the second projection feature match, and in the case of matching, the first measurement posture positioning is completed.
在进行测量区域定位时,测量探头2070设置于被测对象,根据区域定位特征与第一投影特征,调整测量探头2070的位置,直至区域定位特征与第一投影特征匹配,在两者匹配的情 况下,说明完成测量区域定位。When positioning the measurement area, the measurement probe 2070 is set on the object to be measured, and the position of the measurement probe 2070 is adjusted according to the area location feature and the first projection feature until the area location feature matches the first projection feature. Next, it explains that the positioning of the measurement area is completed.
在测量探头2070设置于被测对象之后,如果当前测量姿势不为目标姿势,则在测量之前,需要进行再次测量姿势定位。根据第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征,调整当前测量姿势,直至第二姿势定位特征与第三投影特征匹配,在两者匹配的情况下,说明完成再次测量姿势定位。After the measurement probe 2070 is set on the object to be measured, if the current measurement posture is not the target posture, before the measurement, it is necessary to perform the positioning of the measurement posture again. According to the second posture positioning feature and the third projection feature, adjust the current measurement posture until the second posture positioning feature and the third projection feature match.
针对区域定位部2100、第一姿势定位部2120以及第二姿势定位部是同一结构。区域定位特征与第二姿势定位特征完全相同,与第一姿势定位特征部分相同。测量区域为前臂伸侧。The region positioning unit 2100, the first posture positioning unit 2120, and the second posture positioning unit have the same configuration. The region location feature is exactly the same as the second gesture location feature, and is partially the same as the first gesture location feature. The measurement area is the extended side of the forearm.
图33示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种测量姿势和测量区域定位的示意图。图33中区域定位部2100和第二姿势定位部均包括激光器3和激光器4。第一姿势定位部2120包括激光器5和激光器6。激光器3和激光器4设置于测量探头2070。激光器5和激光器6设置于基座。FIG. 33 schematically shows another schematic diagram of measurement posture and measurement area positioning according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 33 , the area positioning part 2100 and the second posture positioning part both include the laser 3 and the laser 4 . The first posture positioning unit 2120 includes the laser 5 and the laser 6 . The laser 3 and the laser 4 are provided in the measurement probe 2070 . The laser 5 and the laser 6 are provided on the base.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置还包括提示模块。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device further includes a prompting module.
提示模块,用于生成提示信息,其中,提示信息用于提示测量姿势定位和/或测量区域定位完成,提示信息的形式包括图像、语音或震动中的至少一种。The prompting module is used to generate prompting information, wherein the prompting information is used to prompt that the measurement posture positioning and/or the measurement area positioning is completed, and the form of the prompting information includes at least one of image, voice or vibration.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定固定座2081设置于与测量区域对应的位置且测量探头2070未设置于固定部2080的情况下,将测量探头2070设置于固定座2081。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, when it is determined that the fixing base 2081 is provided at a position corresponding to the measurement area and the measuring probe 2070 is not provided on the fixing part 2080 , the measuring probe 2070 is set on the fixing base 2081 .
在确定固定座2081未设置于与测量区域对应的位置的情况下,通过第一配合件2082将固定座2081设置于与测量区域对应的位置,并将测量探头2070设置于固定座2081。When it is determined that the fixing base 2081 is not set at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the fixing base 2081 is set at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting 2082 , and the measurement probe 2070 is set on the fixing base 2081 .
根据本公开的实施例,在确定测量探头2070未设置于与测量区域对应的位置的情况下,通过第二配合件将测量探头2070设置于与测量区域对应的位置。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, when it is determined that the measurement probe 2070 is not arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area, the measurement probe 2070 is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
根据本公开的实施例,处理模块2030,用于从与预设波长对应的至少两个输出光强中确定第一输出光强和第二输出光强。根据与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the processing module 2030 is configured to determine the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity from at least two output light intensities corresponding to preset wavelengths. The concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理,得到差分信号。根据与预设波长对应的差分信号,确定被测组织成分的浓度。Differential processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal. According to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength, the concentration of the measured tissue component is determined.
将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理,得到差分信号,可以包括如下操作。采用差分电路处理与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到差分信号。Differential processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal, which may include the following operations. A differential circuit is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
根据本公开的实施例,将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理, 得到差分信号,可以包括如下操作。采用差分算法处理与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到差分信号。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, performing differential processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations. A differential algorithm is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
根据本公开的实施例,采用差分算法处理与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到差分信号,可以包括如下操作。将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行直接差分运算,得到差分信号。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations. A direct differential operation is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
根据本公开的实施例,采用差分算法处理与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到差分信号,可以包括如下操作。将与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行取对数处理,得到第一对数光强和第二对数光强。将与预设波长对应的第一对数光强和第二对数光强进行直接差分运算,得到差分信号。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal may include the following operations. Logarithmic processing is performed on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity. Perform a direct differential operation on the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的差分信号,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
将与预设波长对应的差分信号输入第一组织成分浓度预测模型,输出被测组织成分的浓度。The differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength is input into the first tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还用于:According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 is also used for:
获取第一训练样本集,其中,第一训练样本集包括多个第一训练样本,其中,每个第一训练样本包括被测组织成分的第一真实浓度和与第一真实浓度对应的差分信号。根据第一训练样本集,建立第一组织成分浓度预测模型。Acquiring a first training sample set, wherein the first training sample set includes a plurality of first training samples, wherein each first training sample includes a first true concentration of the measured tissue component and a differential signal corresponding to the first true concentration . According to the first training sample set, a first tissue component concentration prediction model is established.
根据本公开的实施例,根据第一训练样本集,建立第一组织成分浓度预测模型,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, establishing the first tissue component concentration prediction model according to the first training sample set may include the following operations.
对第一训练样本集进行预处理,得到处理后的第一训练样本集。根据处理后的第一训练样本集,建立第一组织成分浓度预测模型。The first training sample set is preprocessed to obtain the processed first training sample set. According to the processed first training sample set, a first tissue component concentration prediction model is established.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置还用于:According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
在满足第四预设条件的情况下,对第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,以利用修正后的第一组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。When the fourth preset condition is satisfied, the first tissue component concentration prediction model is modified to process the new differential signal using the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,对第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, modifying the first tissue component concentration prediction model may include the following operations.
获取被测组织成分的第一目标浓度。获取与第一目标浓度对应的差分信号。根据与第一目标浓度对应的差分信号和第一目标浓度,对第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正。Obtain the first target concentration of the measured tissue component. A differential signal corresponding to the first target concentration is acquired. The first tissue component concentration prediction model is corrected based on the difference signal corresponding to the first target concentration and the first target concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置还用于:According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
在满足第五预设条件的情况下,利用新的第一组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fifth preset condition is satisfied, the new differential signal is processed by using the new first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,根据与预设波长对应的差分信号,确定被测组织成分的浓度,可 以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength may include the following operations.
获取多个干扰参数中每个干扰参数的当前干扰参数值。将多个当前干扰参数值和与预设波长对应的差分信号输入第二组织成分浓度预测模型,输出被测组织成分的浓度。Obtain the current interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters. The plurality of current interference parameter values and the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength are input into the second tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置还用于:According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
获取第二训练样本集,其中,第二训练样本集包括多个第二训练样本,其中,每个第二训练样本包括被测组织成分的第二真实浓度和与第二真实浓度对应的差分信号。获取第三训练样本集,其中,第三训练样本集包括多个第三训练样本,其中,每个第三训练样本包括多个干扰参数中每个干扰参数的训练干扰参数值和与每个训练干扰参数值对应的差分信号。根据第二训练样本集,建立待校正组织成分浓度预测模型。根据第三训练样本集,建立校正参数模型。根据待校正组织成分浓度预测模型和校正参数模型,得到第二组织成分浓度预测模型。Acquiring a second training sample set, wherein the second training sample set includes a plurality of second training samples, wherein each second training sample includes a second true concentration of the measured tissue component and a differential signal corresponding to the second true concentration . Obtain a third training sample set, wherein the third training sample set includes a plurality of third training samples, wherein each third training sample includes a training interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters and a The differential signal corresponding to the interference parameter value. According to the second training sample set, a prediction model for the concentration of tissue components to be corrected is established. According to the third training sample set, a correction parameter model is established. According to the tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected and the correction parameter model, a second tissue component concentration prediction model is obtained.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置还用于:According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
在满足第四预设条件的情况下,对第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,以利用修正后的第二组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号和新的多个当前干扰参数值,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fourth preset condition is satisfied, the second tissue component concentration prediction model is revised, so as to use the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model to process the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values to obtain Concentrations of new tested tissue components.
根据本公开的实施例,对第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,可以包括如下操作。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, modifying the second tissue component concentration prediction model may include the following operations.
获取被测组织成分的第二目标浓度。获取与第二目标浓度对应的差分信号。获取多个干扰参数中每个干扰参数的当前干扰参数值。根据第二目标浓度、多个干扰参数值和与第二目标浓度对应的差分信号,对第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正。Obtain a second target concentration of the measured tissue component. A differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration is acquired. Obtain the current interference parameter value of each interference parameter in the plurality of interference parameters. The second tissue component concentration prediction model is modified according to the second target concentration, the plurality of interference parameter values, and the differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置还用于:According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device is further used for:
在满足第五预设条件的情况下,利用新的第二组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号和新的多个当前干扰参数值,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fifth preset condition is satisfied, the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values are processed by using the new second tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
根据本公开的实施例,M个感光面中存在与预设波长对应的一个或多个同类感光面,其中,同类感光面用于在不同时刻采集与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和/或第二输出光强,与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强为同一脉动周期内的输出光强,其中,第一输出光强为收缩期光强,第二输出光强为舒张期光强,同类感光面包括一个或多个感光面。处理模块2030,用于根据与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, one or more photosensitive surfaces of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelengths exist in the M photosensitive surfaces, wherein the same photosensitive surfaces are used to collect the first output light intensity and the corresponding preset wavelengths at different times. /or the second output light intensity, the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength are the output light intensity in the same pulsation period, wherein the first output light intensity is the systolic light intensity, the second output light intensity The output light intensity is the diastolic light intensity, and the same photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces. The processing module 2030 is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,M个感光面中存在与预设波长对应的第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面,其中,第一同类感光面用于采集与预设波长对应的第一输出光强,第二同类感光面用于采集与预设波长对应的第二输出光强,第一同类感光面包括一个或多个感光面,第二同 类感光面包括一个或多个感光面。处理模块2030,用于根据与预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, among the M photosensitive surfaces, there are a first photosensitive surface of the same type and a second photosensitive surface of the same type corresponding to a preset wavelength, wherein the first photosensitive surface of the same type is used to collect the first output corresponding to the preset wavelength Light intensity, the second same type of photosensitive surface is used to collect the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, the first same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the second same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces. The processing module 2030 is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面是相同的同类感光面,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面接收到的出射光是入射光从不同入射位置入射经传输得到的。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the first photosensitive surface of the same type and the second photosensitive surface of the same type are the same photosensitive surface, and the outgoing light received by the first photosensitive surface and the second photosensitive surface of the same type is the incident light incident from different incident positions through the transmitted.
根据本公开的实施例,第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面是不同的同类感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first photosensitive surface of the same kind and the second photosensitive surface of the same kind are different photosensitive surfaces of the same kind.
根据本公开的实施例,第一同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第一平均光程范围,其中,第一平均光程范围是根据第一光程平均值确定的,第一光程平均值是根据第一同类感光面的各个感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值。第二同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第二平均光程范围,其中,第二平均光程范围是根据第二光程平均值确定的,其中,第二光程平均值是根据第二同类感光面的各个感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the first same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the first average optical path range, wherein the first average optical path range is based on the first The optical path average value is determined, and the first optical path average value is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive position of the first photosensitive surface of the same type. The average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the second same type of photosensitive surface belongs to the second average optical path range, wherein the second average optical path range is determined according to the average value of the second optical path, Wherein, the average value of the second optical path is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each photosensitive surface of the second same type of photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,第一光程平均值与第二光程平均值的差值的绝对值属于第一光程差范围。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the absolute value of the difference between the first optical path average value and the second optical path average value belongs to the first optical path difference range.
根据本公开的实施例,第一平均光程范围小于或等于第一光程差范围,第二平均光程范围小于或等于第一光程差范围。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range, and the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range.
根据本公开的实施例,第一光程差范围是根据与预设波长对应的最佳差分光程确定的。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first optical path difference range is determined according to the optimal differential optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,与预设波长对应的第一同类感光面中每个感光面距入射光的中心的源探距离在与预设波长对应的预设源探距离范围内,其中,预设源探距离范围是根据与预设波长对应的浮动基准位置距入射光的中心的源探距离确定的。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the source-detection distance of each photosensitive surface of the first same type of photosensitive surfaces corresponding to the preset wavelength from the center of the incident light is within the range of the preset source-detection distance corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the preset It is assumed that the source-detection distance range is determined according to the source-detection distance from the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength to the center of the incident light.
根据本公开的实施例,M个感光面存在与预设波长对应的同类感光面,其中,同类感光面用于采集与预设波长对应的第三输出光强,同类感光面包括一个或多个感光面。处理模块2030,用于根据与预设波长对应的第三输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the M photosensitive surfaces have the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface is used to collect the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, and the same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surface. The processing module 2030 is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面中每个感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程和与预设波长对应的最佳光程的差值属于第二光程差范围。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the difference between the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each photosensitive surface of the same type of photosensitive surface and the optimal optical length corresponding to the preset wavelength belongs to the second optical path difference range.
根据本公开的实施例,每个感光面包括环形感光面或非环形感光面,不同感光面的形状相同或不同。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, each photosensitive surface includes an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, and the shapes of different photosensitive surfaces are the same or different.
根据本公开的实施例,其中,非环形感光面包括扇环感光面、圆形感光面、扇形感光面、椭圆形感光面或多边形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the non-ring-shaped photosensitive surface includes a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, an elliptical photosensitive surface, or a polygonal photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,多边形感光面包括正方形感光面、长方形感光面或三角形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the polygonal photosensitive surface includes a square photosensitive surface, a rectangular photosensitive surface, or a triangular photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面包括环形感光面或非环形感光面,其中,同类感光面包括一个或多个感光面,同类感光面用于输出一个输出光强。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the same type of photosensitive surface includes an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the same type of photosensitive surface is used to output one output light intensity.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面为环形感光面,包括:According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the same type of photosensitive surface is an annular photosensitive surface, including:
在同类感光面包括一个感光面的情况下,同类感光面为独立环形感光面。在同类感光面包括多个感光面的情况下,同类感光面是根据多个感光面组合形成的环形感光面。同类感光面为非环形感光面,包括:在同类感光面包括一个感光面的情况下,同类感光面为独立非环形感光面。在同类感光面包括多个感光面的情况下,同类感光面是根据多个感光面组合形成的非环形感光面。In the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent annular photosensitive surface. In the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes multiple photosensitive surfaces, the same type of photosensitive surface is a ring-shaped photosensitive surface formed by combining the multiple photosensitive surfaces. The same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface, including: in the case that the same type of photosensitive surface includes one photosensitive surface, the same type of photosensitive surface is an independent non-annular photosensitive surface. In the case where the same type of photosensitive surface includes a plurality of photosensitive surfaces, the same type of photosensitive surface is a non-annular photosensitive surface formed according to the combination of the multiple photosensitive surfaces.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定同类感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值的情况下,同类感光面包括环形感光面、扇环感光面、扇形感光面、圆形感光面或正方形感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in the case where it is determined that the distance between the same type of photosensitive surface and the target site is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold, the same type of photosensitive surface includes a ring photosensitive surface, a fan ring photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface or Square photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,在确定同类感光面距目标部位的距离小于或等于第三距离阈值的情况下,同类感光面的形状是根据出射光的抖动分布确定的。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, when it is determined that the distance between the same type of photosensitive surface and the target site is less than or equal to the third distance threshold, the shape of the same type of photosensitive surface is determined according to the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
根据本公开的实施例,出射光的抖动分布包括分解为沿第一方向上的抖动分布和沿第二方向上的抖动分布,第一方向和第二方向相互垂直,同类感光面沿第一方向上的长度与同类感光面沿第二方向上的长度的比值是根据出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与出射光沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的,出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度最大。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the jitter distribution of the outgoing light includes a jitter distribution along a first direction and a jitter distribution along the second direction, the first direction and the second direction are perpendicular to each other, and the same photosensitive surfaces are along the first direction. The ratio of the upward length to the length of the same photosensitive surface along the second direction is determined according to the ratio of the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the first direction to the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the second direction. The upward jitter is the largest.
根据本公开的实施例,同类感光面包括长方形感光面或椭圆形感光面,长方形感光面的长度与宽度的比值是根据出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与出射光沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的,椭圆形感光面的长轴与短轴的比值是根据出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与出射光沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the same type of photosensitive surface includes a rectangular photosensitive surface or an elliptical photosensitive surface, and the ratio of the length to the width of the rectangular photosensitive surface is based on the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light in the first direction and the outgoing light in the second direction. The ratio of the jitter amplitude is determined, and the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis of the elliptical photosensitive surface is determined according to the ratio of the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the first direction to the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the second direction.
根据本公开的实施例,M个感光面中不同感光面的阳极彼此未电连接、部分感光面的阳极电连接或全部感光面的阳极电连接。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the anodes of different photosensitive surfaces among the M photosensitive surfaces are not electrically connected to each other, the anodes of some of the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected, or the anodes of all the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected.
根据本公开的实施例,M个感光面中不同感光面的阳极彼此未电连接、部分感光面的阳极电连接或全部感光面的阳极电连接。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the anodes of different photosensitive surfaces among the M photosensitive surfaces are not electrically connected to each other, the anodes of some of the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected, or the anodes of all the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected.
根据本公开的实施例,M个感光面中的每个感光面可以单独使用,在此情况下,M个感光面中不同感光面的阳极未电连接。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, each of the M photosensitive surfaces may be used independently, and in this case, anodes of different photosensitive surfaces of the M photosensitive surfaces are not electrically connected.
M个感光面中的部分感光面可以结合使用,在此情况下,结合使用的不同感光面的阳极电连接。Some of the M photosensitive surfaces may be used in combination, and in this case, the anodes of the different photosensitive surfaces used in combination are electrically connected.
M个感光面中的全部感光面可以结合使用,在此情况下,结合使用的不同感光面的阳极电连接。All of the M photosensitive surfaces may be used in combination, in which case the anodes of the different photosensitive surfaces used in combination are electrically connected.
根据本公开的实施例,图34示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种不同感光面的阳极电连接的示意图。如图34所示,将全部感光面的阳极进行了电连接。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, FIG. 34 schematically shows a schematic diagram of an anode electrical connection of different photosensitive surfaces according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 34, the anodes of all the photosensitive surfaces were electrically connected.
根据本公开的实施例,同一感光面的不同部分在同一平面或不同平面。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, different parts of the same photosensitive surface are on the same plane or different planes.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面可以为平面感光面或立体感光面,其中,如果感光面的不同部分均在同一平面,则感光面为平面感光面。如果存在感光面的不同部分在不同平面,则感光面为立体感光面,具体采用平面感光面或立体感光面可以根据实际情况设定,在此不作具体限定。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the photosensitive surface may be a flat photosensitive surface or a three-dimensional photosensitive surface, wherein if different parts of the photosensitive surface are on the same plane, the photosensitive surface is a flat photosensitive surface. If there are different parts of the photosensitive surface on different planes, the photosensitive surface is a three-dimensional photosensitive surface, and the specific use of a flat photosensitive surface or a three-dimensional photosensitive surface can be set according to the actual situation, which is not specifically limited here.
备选地,针对接触式测量,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,需要尽可能使得感光面的目标表面与测量区域的皮肤表面之间处于较好的贴合状态。其中,感光面的目标表面表示与测量区域接近的表面。由于测量区域的皮肤表面的平坦程度可能不高,如果采用平面感光面,则可能导致难以实现感光面的目标表面与测量区域的皮肤表面之间处于较好的贴合状态,而立体感光面是存在不同部分处于不同平面的感光面,因此,可以采用立体感光面,并且可以根据测量区域的组织结构特征设置具体立体感光面的形式。Alternatively, for contact measurement, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement result, it is necessary to make the target surface of the photosensitive surface and the skin surface of the measurement area in a good fit state as much as possible. Among them, the target surface of the photosensitive surface refers to the surface close to the measurement area. Since the flatness of the skin surface in the measurement area may not be high, if a flat photosensitive surface is used, it may be difficult to achieve a good fit between the target surface of the photosensitive surface and the skin surface of the measurement area, while the stereo photosensitive surface is There are photosensitive surfaces with different parts in different planes. Therefore, a three-dimensional photosensitive surface can be used, and a specific stereoscopic photosensitive surface can be set according to the organizational structure characteristics of the measurement area.
图35示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种手套形式的立体感光面的示意图。图36示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种手套形式的立体感光面的示意图。35 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a stereoscopic photosensitive surface in the form of a glove according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 36 schematically shows a schematic diagram of another stereoscopic photosensitive surface in the form of a glove according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
图37示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种手环形式的立体感光面的示意图。图38示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种手环形式的立体感光面的示意图。图38中h1和h2表示感光面的不同部分距预设平面的距离。FIG. 37 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional photosensitive surface in the form of a wristband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 38 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a stereoscopic photosensitive surface in the form of another wristband according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 38, h1 and h2 represent the distances of different parts of the photosensitive surface from the preset plane.
图39示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种用于手臂测量的立体感光面的示意图。图39中,可以根据手臂的组织结构特征设置感光面的不同部分距预设平面的距离。FIG. 39 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a stereoscopic photosensitive surface for arm measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 39 , the distances of different parts of the photosensitive surface from the preset plane can be set according to the structural characteristics of the arm.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面集在同一平面或不同平面,其中,感光面集包括多个感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the photosensitive surface sets are on the same plane or different planes, wherein the photosensitive surface set includes a plurality of photosensitive surfaces.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面集中包括的每个感光面可以为平面感光面或立体感光面。如果感光面集包括的多个平面感光面,则可以通过采用将这多个平面感光面中的部分平面感光面或全部平面感光面设置于不同平面的方式,实现感光面集呈现的感光面形式是立体感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, each photosensitive surface included in the set of photosensitive surfaces may be a planar photosensitive surface or a three-dimensional photosensitive surface. If the photosensitive surface set includes multiple plane photosensitive surfaces, the photosensitive surface form presented by the photosensitive surface set can be realized by setting some or all of the plane photosensitive surfaces on different planes. It is a three-dimensional photosensitive surface.
需要说明的是,根据由多个平面感光面形成的立体感光面,也可以实现上述针对接触式测量的效果,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that, according to the three-dimensional photosensitive surface formed by a plurality of planar photosensitive surfaces, the above-mentioned effects for the contact measurement can also be achieved, which will not be repeated here.
根据本公开的实施例,预设波长为对被测组织成分敏感的波长。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset wavelength is a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue composition.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置还包括温度控制模块,温度控制模块用于控制测量区域的温度在组织成分测量过程中保持在预设温度范围内。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device further includes a temperature control module configured to control the temperature of the measurement region to remain within a preset temperature range during the tissue composition measurement process.
根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置还包括掩膜板,掩膜板设置于初始感光面上, 其中,掩膜板的透光率小于或等于透光率阈值。掩膜板,用于在初始感光面上设置掩膜板后得到感光面。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device further includes a mask, which is disposed on the initial photosensitive surface, wherein the light transmittance of the mask is less than or equal to a light transmittance threshold. The mask plate is used to obtain the photosensitive surface after setting the mask plate on the initial photosensitive surface.
根据本公开的实施例,掩膜板的形状是根据出射光的抖动分布形状确定的。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the shape of the mask plate is determined according to the shape of the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
如图40所示,根据本公开的实施例,测量探头2070上设置有第一套筒2140。第一套筒的第一端面超出测量探头2070的目标表面,其中,第一端面表示与测量区域接近的端面,测量探头2070的目标表面表示与测量区域接近的表面。As shown in FIG. 40 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the measurement probe 2070 is provided with a first sleeve 2140 . The first end face of the first sleeve extends beyond the target surface of the measurement probe 2070, wherein the first end face represents the end face close to the measurement area, and the target surface of the measurement probe 2070 refers to the surface close to the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,为了屏蔽干扰光,可以在测量探头2070上设置第一套筒2140,使得第一套筒2140上与测量区域接近的端面超出测量探头2070的目标表面。干扰光可以包括表面反射光和/或衍射光。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to shield the interference light, the first sleeve 2140 may be provided on the measurement probe 2070 so that the end face of the first sleeve 2140 close to the measurement area exceeds the target surface of the measurement probe 2070 . Interfering light may include surface reflected light and/or diffracted light.
根据本公开的实施例,第一套筒2140的第二端面和/或内部的区域设置散射物,其中,第一端面和第二端面为相对的两个端面,内部的区域包括内部的部分区域或内部的全部区域。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second end face and/or the inner area of the first sleeve 2140 are provided with scattering objects, wherein the first end face and the second end face are opposite end faces, and the inner area includes a partial inner area or the entire area inside.
根据本公开的实施例,为了使得入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布均匀,可以采用在第一套筒2140的相应部分设置散射物的方式。散射物可以包括硫酸纸、硅胶或目标混合物,其中,目标混合物可以包括聚二甲基硅氧烷与二氧化钛颗粒的混合物。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to make the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area uniform, a manner of disposing scattering objects on the corresponding part of the first sleeve 2140 may be adopted. The scatterer can include sulfated paper, silica gel, or a target mixture, wherein the target mixture can include a mixture of polydimethylsiloxane and titanium dioxide particles.
如图41所示,根据本公开的实施例,该组织成分测量装置2000还包括第二套筒2150,第二套筒2150设置于第一套筒2140的目标区域的外部,其中,目标区域表示第一套筒2140超出测量探头2070的目标表面的部分区域或全部区域。As shown in FIG. 41 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the tissue composition measurement device 2000 further includes a second sleeve 2150 , and the second sleeve 2150 is disposed outside the target area of the first sleeve 2140 , wherein the target area represents The first sleeve 2140 extends beyond part or all of the target surface of the measurement probe 2070 .
根据本公开的实施例,为了使得入射光照射至测量区域的的光斑尽可能大,可以采用在第一套筒2140的目标区域的外部设置第二套筒2150的方式。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to make the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area as large as possible, a manner of disposing the second sleeve 2150 outside the target area of the first sleeve 2140 may be adopted.
根据本公开的实施例,第二套筒2150设置有散射物。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second sleeve 2150 is provided with a diffuser.
根据本公开的实施例,如果设置有第二套筒2150,则为了使得入射光照射至测量区域的光斑的强度分布均匀,可以采用在第二套筒2150的相应部分设置散射物的方式。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, if the second sleeve 2150 is provided, in order to make the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area uniform, a way of disposing scatterers in the corresponding part of the second sleeve 2150 may be adopted.
根据本公开的实施例,第一套筒2140的内径大于或等于内径阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the inner diameter of the first sleeve 2140 is greater than or equal to the inner diameter threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,第一套筒2140的第一端面的开孔大于或等于第一套筒2140的第二端面的开孔。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the opening of the first end surface of the first sleeve 2140 is greater than or equal to the opening of the second end surface of the first sleeve 2140 .
根据本公开的实施例,为了使得入射光照射至测量区域的的光斑尽可能大,可以采用使第一套筒2140的内径大于或等于内径阈值,和/或第一套筒2140的第一端面的开孔大于或等于第一套筒2140的第二端面的开孔的方式,即使得接近测量区域的第一套筒2140的端面的开孔大于或等于远离测量区域的第一套筒2140的端面的开孔。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, in order to make the incident light irradiated to the measurement area as large as possible, the inner diameter of the first sleeve 2140 may be greater than or equal to the inner diameter threshold, and/or the first end face of the first sleeve 2140 may be used. The opening of the first sleeve 2140 is greater than or equal to the opening of the second end surface of the first sleeve 2140, that is, the opening of the end surface of the first sleeve 2140 close to the measurement area is greater than or equal to the opening of the first sleeve 2140 away from the measurement area. End openings.
如图43~图44所示,根据本公开的实施例,感光面和测量区域之间填充有折射率匹配物。As shown in FIGS. 43 to 44 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, a refractive index matcher is filled between the photosensitive surface and the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,由于抖动会导致测量区域的皮肤表面不稳定,进而使得出射光的 出射角度发生变化,影响了测量结果的可靠性,因此,为了尽量抑制抖动带来的不利影响,可以在感光面和测量区域之间填充折射率匹配物,提高感光面接收出射光的稳定性和效率。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, the skin surface in the measurement area is unstable due to the jitter, which in turn causes the exit angle of the outgoing light to change, which affects the reliability of the measurement results. The refractive index matching material is filled between the photosensitive surface and the measurement area to improve the stability and efficiency of the photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light.
示意性的,以脉搏跳动导致的抖动为例进行说明。脉搏跳动可以通过血管状态反映。图42示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在未填充折射率匹配物的情况下感光面接收出射光的示意图。图42中血管状态1表示血管收缩状态,血管状态2表示血管舒张状态,皮肤状态1表示与血管状态1对应的皮肤状态,皮肤状态2表示与血管状态2对应的皮肤状态。从图42可以看出,抖动会导致测量区域的皮肤表面不稳定,进而使得出射光的出射角度发生变化。Illustratively, the jitter caused by pulse beating is taken as an example for description. Pulse beat can be reflected by the state of blood vessels. FIG. 42 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light without filling with a refractive index matcher according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In FIG. 42 , the blood vessel state 1 represents the vasoconstriction state, the blood vessel state 2 represents the vasodilation state, the skin state 1 represents the skin state corresponding to the blood vessel state 1 , and the skin state 2 represents the skin state corresponding to the blood vessel state 2 . It can be seen from Figure 42 that jitter will cause instability of the skin surface in the measurement area, which in turn will change the exit angle of the exiting light.
图43示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在填充折射率匹配物的情况下感光面接收出射光的示意图。FIG. 43 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light under the condition of filling with a refractive index matcher according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
图44示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的另一种在填充折射率匹配物的情况下感光面接收出射光的示意图。FIG. 44 schematically shows another schematic diagram of the photosensitive surface receiving the outgoing light under the condition of filling with an index matching material according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
从图43和图44可以看出,在感光面和测量区域之间填充折射率匹配物,可以提高感光面接收出射光的稳定性和效率。It can be seen from Figure 43 and Figure 44 that filling the refractive index matching material between the photosensitive surface and the measurement area can improve the stability and efficiency of the photosensitive surface receiving outgoing light.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面的各个部分与对应的入射光所在方向的夹角大于或等于0°且小于或等于360°。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the included angle between each part of the photosensitive surface and the direction of the corresponding incident light is greater than or equal to 0° and less than or equal to 360°.
根据本公开的实施例,感光面的每个部分与对应的入射光所在方向的夹角大于或等于0°且小于或等于360°,以实现漫射测量。根据本公开的实施例,可以根据波长特征和/或测量区域特征,确定合适的感光面的设置位置,其中,波长特征可以包括波长的穿透深度,测量区域特征可以包括测量区域的厚度。备选地,通常可以设置感光面的各个部分与对应的入射光所在方向的夹角呈预设角度。According to the embodiment of the present disclosure, the included angle between each part of the photosensitive surface and the direction of the corresponding incident light is greater than or equal to 0° and less than or equal to 360°, so as to realize the diffusion measurement. According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, a suitable location of the photosensitive surface can be determined according to the wavelength characteristic and/or the measurement area characteristic, wherein the wavelength characteristic may include the penetration depth of the wavelength, and the measurement area characteristic may include the thickness of the measurement area. Alternatively, it is generally possible to set the included angle between each part of the photosensitive surface and the direction of the corresponding incident light to form a preset angle.
示例性的,如果波长的穿透深度较深和/或测量区域的厚度较薄,则可以设置感光面的位置与对应的入射光的入射位置位于测量区域的异侧。如果波长的穿透深度较浅和/或测量区域的厚度较厚,则可以设置感光面的位置与对应的入射光的入射位置位于测量区域的同侧。Exemplarily, if the penetration depth of the wavelength is relatively deep and/or the thickness of the measurement area is relatively thin, the position of the photosensitive surface and the incident position of the corresponding incident light may be located on opposite sides of the measurement area. If the penetration depth of the wavelength is shallow and/or the thickness of the measurement area is thick, the position of the photosensitive surface can be set to be on the same side of the measurement area as the incident position of the corresponding incident light.
示例性的,图45示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种漫射测量的示意图。图45中感光面C与入射光之间的夹角为90°,感光面D的位置与入射光的位置位于测量区域的同侧,感光面E的位置与入射光的位置位于测量区域的异侧。Exemplarily, FIG. 45 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a diffusion measurement according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In Figure 45, the angle between the photosensitive surface C and the incident light is 90°, the position of the photosensitive surface D and the position of the incident light are located on the same side of the measurement area, and the position of the photosensitive surface E and the position of the incident light are located on the different side of the measurement area. side.
根据本公开的实施例的模块、单元中的任意多个、或其中任意多个的至少部分功能可以在一个模块中实现。根据本公开实施例的模块、单元中的任意一个或多个可以被拆分成多个模块来实现。根据本公开实施例的模块、单元中的任意一个或多个可以至少被部分地实现为硬件电路,例如现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)、可编程逻辑阵列(Programmable Logic Arrays,PLA)、片上系统、基板上的系统、封装上的系统、专用集 成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),或可以通过对电路进行集成或封装的任何其他的合理方式的硬件或固件来实现,或以软件、硬件以及固件三种实现方式中任意一种或以其中任意几种的适当组合来实现。或者,根据本公开实施例的模块、单元中的一个或多个可以至少被部分地实现为计算机程序模块,当该计算机程序模块被运行时,可以执行相应的功能。Any of the modules, units, or at least part of the functions of any of the modules according to the embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented in one module. Any one or more of the modules and units according to the embodiments of the present disclosure may be divided into multiple modules for implementation. Any one or more of the modules and units according to the embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented at least partially as hardware circuits, such as Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA), Programmable Logic Arrays (Programmable Logic Arrays, PLA), system-on-chip, system-on-substrate, system-on-package, Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or any other reasonable means of hardware or firmware that can integrate or package a circuit, Or it can be implemented in any one of the three implementation manners of software, hardware and firmware, or in an appropriate combination of any of them. Alternatively, one or more of the modules and units according to the embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented at least in part as computer program modules, which, when executed, may perform corresponding functions.
例如,采集模块和处理模块中的任意多个可以合并在一个模块/单元中实现,或者其中的任意一个模块/单元可以被拆分成多个模块/单元。或者,这些模块/单元中的一个或多个模块/单元的至少部分功能可以与其他模块/单元的至少部分功能相结合,并在一个模块/单元中实现。根据本公开的实施例,采集模块和处理模块中的至少一个可以至少被部分地实现为硬件电路,例如现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)、可编程逻辑阵列(PLA)、片上系统、基板上的系统、封装上的系统、专用集成电路(ASIC),或可以通过对电路进行集成或封装的任何其他的合理方式等硬件或固件来实现,或以软件、硬件以及固件三种实现方式中任意一种或以其中任意几种的适当组合来实现。或者,采集模块和处理模块中的至少一个可以至少被部分地实现为计算机程序模块,当该计算机程序模块被运行时,可以执行相应的功能。For example, any number of acquisition modules and processing modules may be combined into one module/unit for implementation, or any one of the modules/units may be split into multiple modules/units. Alternatively, at least part of the functionality of one or more of these modules/units may be combined with at least part of the functionality of other modules/units and implemented in one module/unit. According to embodiments of the present disclosure, at least one of the acquisition module and the processing module may be implemented at least in part as a hardware circuit, such as a field programmable gate array (FPGA), a programmable logic array (PLA), a system on a chip, a A system, a system on a package, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or any other reasonable means of integrating or packaging a circuit can be implemented in hardware or firmware, or in any one of software, hardware, and firmware implementations or any appropriate combination of any of them. Alternatively, at least one of the acquisition module and the processing module may be implemented, at least in part, as a computer program module that, when executed, may perform corresponding functions.
需要说明的是,本公开的实施例中组织成分测量装置与本公开的实施例中组织成分测量方法部分是相对应的,组织成分测量装置部分的描述具体参考组织成分测量方法部分,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that the tissue composition measurement device in the embodiment of the present disclosure corresponds to the tissue composition measurement method part in the embodiment of the present disclosure, and the description of the tissue composition measurement device part refers to the tissue composition measurement method part, which is not described here. Repeat.
图46示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种可穿戴设备的示意图。图46示出的可穿戴设备4600仅仅是一个示例,不应对本公开实施例的功能和使用范围带来任何限制。FIG. 46 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a wearable device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The wearable device 4600 shown in FIG. 46 is only an example, and should not impose any limitation on the functions and scope of use of the embodiments of the present disclosure.
如图46所示,可穿戴设备4600包括组织成分测量装置2000。As shown in FIG. 46 , the wearable device 4600 includes the tissue composition measurement device 2000 .
根据本公开实施例的技术方案,采用单个预设波长结合具有上述特性的感光面进行组织成分测量,直接获取到了真实的被测组织成分信号。采用单个预设波长进行组织成分测量,减少了光源模块的体积和结构复杂度,进而减少了装置和设备的体积和结构复杂度,便于便携测量,降低了对电源模块的容量要求,并降低了制作成本。此外,也减少了数据处理量。According to the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present disclosure, a single preset wavelength is used in combination with a photosensitive surface with the above characteristics to measure tissue components, and the real measured tissue component signals are directly obtained. Using a single preset wavelength for tissue composition measurement reduces the volume and structural complexity of the light source module, thereby reducing the volume and structural complexity of devices and equipment, facilitating portable measurement, reducing the capacity requirements for power modules, and reducing cost of production. In addition, the amount of data processing is also reduced.
如图47所示,根据本公开的实施例,可穿戴设备4600还包括卡扣部4610和本体4620。卡扣部4610和本体4620用于配合实现固定组织成分测量装置2000。As shown in FIG. 47 , according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the wearable device 4600 further includes a buckle portion 4610 and a body 4620 . The buckle portion 4610 and the main body 4620 are used to cooperate to realize the fixation of the tissue composition measuring device 2000 .
根据本公开的实施例,图47示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种可穿戴设备的装配过程的示意图。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, FIG. 47 schematically shows a schematic diagram of an assembling process of a wearable device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
根据本公开的实施例,可穿戴设备4600的质量小于或等于质量阈值,以实现可穿戴设备4600的移动规律与测量区域处的皮肤抖动规律保持一致。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the quality of the wearable device 4600 is less than or equal to a quality threshold, so that the movement law of the wearable device 4600 is consistent with the skin shaking law at the measurement area.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,可以使得可穿戴设备4600的质量较 轻,以实现当将可穿戴设备4600设置于与测量区域对应的位置时,可穿戴设备4600能够跟随测量区域处的皮肤抖动,即可穿戴设备4600的移动规律可以与测量区域处的皮肤抖动规律保持一致,由此,使得测量探头2070接收的出射光的平均光程在皮肤抖动过程中保持在预设光程范围内。上述可以实现测量探头2070接收到的出射光的平均光程在测量区域处的皮肤抖动过程中保持在预设光程范围内的原因在于,如果可穿戴设备4600能够跟随测量区域处的皮肤抖动,则可以实现测量探头2070在测量区域上的相对位置保持不变或基本不变,由此,测量探头2070能够接收到从固定的出射位置出射的出射光,这里所述的固定的出射位置表示与测量区域的相对位置保持不变或基本保持不变的出射位置。同时,在测量区域处的皮肤抖动过程中,入射光的入射位置在测量区域上的相对位置能够保持不变或基本不变,由此,在入射光的入射位置和出射光的出射位置确定的情况下,可以尽量保证出射光的平均光程保持不变。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement results, the weight of the wearable device 4600 can be made lighter, so that when the wearable device 4600 is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area, the wearable device 4600 can follow The skin shaking at the measurement area, that is, the movement law of the wearable device 4600 can be consistent with the skin shaking law at the measurement area, so that the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe 2070 is kept at a predetermined value during the skin shaking process. within the optical path range. The reason why the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe 2070 can be maintained within the preset optical path range during the skin shaking process at the measurement area is that if the wearable device 4600 can follow the skin shaking at the measurement area, Then, the relative position of the measurement probe 2070 on the measurement area can be kept unchanged or basically unchanged, so that the measurement probe 2070 can receive the outgoing light emitted from the fixed outgoing position. The relative position of the measurement area remains the same or remains substantially unchanged at the exit position. At the same time, during the skin shaking process at the measurement area, the relative position of the incident position of the incident light on the measurement area can remain unchanged or substantially unchanged. Under the circumstance, it can be ensured that the average optical path of the outgoing light remains unchanged as much as possible.
示例性的,图48示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在可穿戴设备与皮肤抖动规律保持一致的情况下使得测量探头接收的出射光的平均光程在皮肤抖动过程中保持在预设光程范围内的示意图。在皮肤抖动过程中,测量探头2070(图48未示出)能够稳定接收到入射光从测量区域处的入射位置A入射后从测量区域处的出射位置B所出射的出射光。皮肤的移动幅度用ζ 1表示,测量探头2070的移动幅度用ζ 2表示,ζ 12Exemplarily, FIG. 48 schematically illustrates a method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, under the condition that the wearable device is consistent with the skin shaking law, the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measuring probe is kept at the same value during the skin shaking process. Schematic representation of preset optical path ranges. During the skin shaking process, the measurement probe 2070 (not shown in FIG. 48 ) can stably receive the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position B in the measurement area after the incident light is incident from the incident position A in the measurement area. The movement range of the skin is represented by ζ 1 , and the movement range of the measuring probe 2070 is represented by ζ 2 , ζ 1 −ζ 2 .
根据本公开的实施例,可穿戴设备4600使得测量区域处的皮肤的移动幅度小于或等于移动幅度阈值。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the wearable device 4600 makes the movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area less than or equal to the movement amplitude threshold.
根据本公开的实施例,为了提高测量结果的可靠性,可以使得可穿戴设备4600的质量较大,当将可穿戴设备4600设置于与测量区域对应的位置时,能够压住测量区域处的皮肤抖动,即测量区域处的皮肤的移动幅度小于或等于移动幅度阈值,由此,使得测量探头2070接收的出射光的平均光程在皮肤抖动过程中保持在预设光程范围内。上述可以实现测量探头2070接收到的出射光的平均光程在测量区域处的皮肤抖动过程中保持在预设光程范围内的原因在于,如果可穿戴设备4600能够压住测量区域处的皮肤抖动,则可以尽量保证测量探头2070在测量区域上的相对位置保持不变或基本不变,由此,测量探头2070能够接收到从固定的出射位置出射的出射光。同时,在测量区域处的皮肤抖动过程中,入射光的入射位置在测量区域上的相对位置能够保持不变或基本不变,由此,在入射光的入射位置和出射光的出射位置确定的情况下,可以尽量保证出射光的平均光程保持不变。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, in order to improve the reliability of the measurement result, the quality of the wearable device 4600 can be made larger, and when the wearable device 4600 is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area, the skin at the measurement area can be pressed against the skin Shaking, that is, the movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area is less than or equal to the movement amplitude threshold, so that the average optical length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe 2070 is kept within the preset optical length range during the skin shaking process. The reason why the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe 2070 can be kept within the preset optical path range during the skin shaking process at the measurement area is that if the wearable device 4600 can suppress the skin shaking at the measurement area , the relative position of the measurement probe 2070 on the measurement area can be kept unchanged or substantially unchanged as much as possible, so that the measurement probe 2070 can receive the outgoing light emitted from the fixed outgoing position. At the same time, during the skin shaking process at the measurement area, the relative position of the incident position of the incident light on the measurement area can remain unchanged or substantially unchanged. Under the circumstance, it can be ensured that the average optical path of the outgoing light remains unchanged as much as possible.
示例性的,图49示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在可穿戴设备使得测量区域处的皮肤的移动幅度小于或等于移动幅度阈值的情况下测量探头接收的出射光的平均光程在皮肤 抖动过程中保持在预设光程范围内的示意图。图49中测量区域处的皮肤的移动幅度接近于零。Exemplarily, FIG. 49 schematically shows the average light of the outgoing light received by the measurement probe under the condition that the wearable device makes the movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area less than or equal to the movement amplitude threshold according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Schematic illustration of how the optical path stays within the preset optical path range during skin shaking. The movement amplitude of the skin at the measurement area in Figure 49 is close to zero.
根据本公开的实施例,组织成分测量装置的具体说明可以参见上文对应部分,在此不再具体赘述。此外,组织成分测量装置包括处理器,其可以根据存储在只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)中的程序或者从存储部分加载到随机访问存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)中的程序而执行各种适当的动作和处理。处理器例如可以包括通用微处理器(例如CPU)、指令集处理器和/或相关芯片组和/或专用微处理器(例如,专用集成电路(ASIC)),等等。处理还可以包括用于缓存用途的板载存储器。处理器可以包括用于执行根据本公开实施例的方法流程的不同动作的单一处理单元或者是多个处理单元。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, for the specific description of the tissue component measurement device, reference may be made to the corresponding part above, and details are not repeated here. In addition, the tissue composition measurement device includes a processor that can be executed according to a program stored in a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM) or a program loaded from a storage portion into a random access memory (RAM) Various appropriate actions and handling. A processor may include, for example, a general-purpose microprocessor (eg, a CPU), an instruction set processor and/or a related chipset, and/or a special-purpose microprocessor (eg, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC)), among others. Processing may also include on-board memory for caching purposes. The processor may comprise a single processing unit or multiple processing units for performing different actions of the method flow according to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
在RAM中,存储有组织成分测量装置操作所需的各种程序和数据。处理器、ROM以及RAM通过总线彼此相连。处理器通过执行ROM和/或RAM中的程序来执行根据本公开实施例的方法流程的各种操作。需要注意,所述程序也可以存储在除ROM和RAM以外的一个或多个存储器中。处理也可以通过执行存储在所述一个或多个存储器中的程序来执行根据本公开实施例的方法流程的各种操作。In the RAM, various programs and data necessary for the operation of the tissue composition measurement device are stored. The processor, ROM, and RAM are connected to each other through a bus. The processor performs various operations of the method flow according to the embodiments of the present disclosure by executing programs in the ROM and/or RAM. Note that the program may also be stored in one or more memories other than ROM and RAM. Processes may also perform various operations of method flows according to embodiments of the present disclosure by executing programs stored in the one or more memories.
根据本公开的实施例,可穿戴设备还可以包括输入/输出(I/O)接口,输入/输出(I/O)接口也连接至总线。可穿戴设备还可以包括连接至I/O接口的以下部件中的一项或多项:包括键盘、鼠标等的输入部分;包括诸如阴极射线管(CRT)、液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display,LCD)等以及扬声器等的输出部分;包括硬盘等的存储部分;以及包括诸如LAN卡、调制解调器等的网络接口卡的通信部分。通信部分经由诸如因特网的网络执行通信处理。驱动器也根据需要连接至I/O接口。可拆卸介质,诸如磁盘、光盘、磁光盘、半导体存储器等等,根据需要安装在驱动器上,以便于从其上读出的计算机程序根据需要被安装入存储部分。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the wearable device may further include an input/output (I/O) interface, which is also connected to the bus. The wearable device may also include one or more of the following components connected to the I/O interface: an input portion including a keyboard, mouse, etc.; including components such as a cathode ray tube (CRT), a liquid crystal display (LCD) etc., and an output portion of a speaker, etc.; a storage portion including a hard disk, etc.; and a communication portion including a network interface card such as a LAN card, a modem, and the like. The communication section performs communication processing via a network such as the Internet. Drives are also connected to the I/O interface as required. Removable media, such as magnetic disks, optical disks, magneto-optical disks, semiconductor memories, etc., are mounted on the drive as needed, so that the computer program read therefrom is installed into the storage section as needed.
本公开还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质可以是上述实施例中描述的设备/装置/系统中所包含的;也可以是单独存在,而未装配入该设备/装置/系统中。上述计算机可读存储介质承载有一个或者多个程序,当上述一个或者多个程序被执行时,实现根据本公开实施例的方法。The present disclosure also provides a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium may be included in the device/apparatus/system described in the above embodiments; it may also exist alone without being assembled into the device/system. device/system. The above-mentioned computer-readable storage medium carries one or more programs, and when the above-mentioned one or more programs are executed, implement the method according to the embodiment of the present disclosure.
根据本公开的实施例,计算机可读存储介质可以是非易失性的计算机可读存储介质。例如可以包括但不限于:便携式计算机磁盘、硬盘、随机访问存储器(RAM)、只读存储器(ROM)、可擦式可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory,EPROM)或闪存)、便携式紧凑磁盘只读存储器(Computer Disc Read-Only Memory,CD-ROM)、光存储器件、磁存储器件、或者上述的任意合适的组合。在本公开中,计算机可读存储介质可以是任何包含或存储程序的有形介质,该程序可以被指令执行系统、装置或者器件使用或者与其结合使用。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the computer-readable storage medium may be a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium. Examples may include, but are not limited to, portable computer disks, hard disks, random access memory (RAM), read only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read only memory (EPROM) or flash memory), portable compact Disk read-only memory (Computer Disc Read-Only Memory, CD-ROM), optical storage device, magnetic storage device, or any suitable combination of the above. In this disclosure, a computer-readable storage medium may be any tangible medium that contains or stores a program that can be used by or in conjunction with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device.
例如,根据本公开的实施例,计算机可读存储介质可以包括上文描述的ROM和/或RAM和/或ROM和RAM以外的一个或多个存储器。For example, according to embodiments of the present disclosure, a computer-readable storage medium may include one or more memories other than ROM and/or RAM and/or ROM and RAM described above.
本公开的实施例还包括一种计算机程序产品,其包括计算机程序,该计算机程序包含用于执行本公开实施例所提供的方法的程序代码。Embodiments of the present disclosure also include a computer program product, which includes a computer program, and the computer program includes program codes for executing the methods provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure.
在该计算机程序被处理器执行时,执行本公开实施例的系统/装置中限定的上述功能。根据本公开的实施例,上文描述的系统、装置、模块、单元等可以通过计算机程序模块来实现。When the computer program is executed by the processor, the above-described functions defined in the system/apparatus of the embodiments of the present disclosure are performed. According to embodiments of the present disclosure, the systems, apparatuses, modules, units, etc. described above may be implemented by computer program modules.
在一种实施例中,该计算机程序可以依托于光存储器件、磁存储器件等有形存储介质。在另一种实施例中,该计算机程序也可以在网络介质上以信号的形式进行传输、分发,并通过通信部分被下载和安装,和/或从可拆卸介质被安装。该计算机程序包含的程序代码可以用任何适当的网络介质传输,包括但不限于:无线、有线等等,或者上述的任意合适的组合。In one embodiment, the computer program may rely on a tangible storage medium such as an optical storage device, a magnetic storage device, or the like. In another embodiment, the computer program may also be transmitted, distributed in the form of a signal over a network medium, and downloaded and installed through the communication portion, and/or installed from a removable medium. The program code embodied by the computer program may be transmitted using any suitable network medium, including but not limited to: wireless, wired, etc., or any suitable combination of the foregoing.
根据本公开的实施例,可以以一种或多种程序设计语言的任意组合来编写用于执行本公开实施例提供的计算机程序的程序代码,具体地,可以利用高级过程和/或面向对象的编程语言、和/或汇编/机器语言来实施这些计算程序。程序设计语言包括但不限于诸如Java,C++,python,“C”语言或类似的程序设计语言。程序代码可以完全地在用户计算设备上执行、部分地在用户设备上执行、部分在远程计算设备上执行、或者完全在远程计算设备或服务器上执行。在涉及远程计算设备的情形中,远程计算设备可以通过任意种类的网络,包括局域网(Local Area Network,LAN)或广域网(Wide Area Networks,WAN),连接到用户计算设备,或者,可以连接到外部计算设备(例如利用因特网服务提供商来通过因特网连接)。According to the embodiments of the present disclosure, the program code for executing the computer program provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure may be written in any combination of one or more programming languages, and specifically, high-level procedures and/or object-oriented programming may be used. programming language, and/or assembly/machine language to implement these computational programs. Programming languages include, but are not limited to, languages such as Java, C++, python, "C" or similar programming languages. The program code may execute entirely on the user computing device, partly on the user device, partly on a remote computing device, or entirely on the remote computing device or server. In situations involving remote computing devices, the remote computing devices may be connected to the user computing device through any kind of network, including Local Area Networks (LANs) or Wide Area Networks (WANs), or may be connected to external A computing device (eg, connected via the Internet using an Internet service provider).
为了更好地理解本公开实施例所提供的技术方案,下面将通过具体示例进行说明。其中,被测组织成分为血糖,被测区域为左臂的前臂伸侧,预设波长为1550nm。即通过在体实验验证采用单个预设波长结合大面积感光面的组织成分测量装置进行组织成分测量,能够直接获取与血糖浓度同步变化的真实的血糖信号。In order to better understand the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure, specific examples will be used for description below. Among them, the measured tissue component is blood sugar, the measured area is the forearm extension side of the left arm, and the preset wavelength is 1550 nm. That is, it is verified by in vivo experiments that a tissue composition measurement device with a single preset wavelength combined with a large-area photosensitive surface is used for tissue composition measurement, and the real blood glucose signal that changes synchronously with the blood glucose concentration can be directly obtained.
(一)实验前的准备工作(1) Preparations before the experiment
1.测量探头的参数1. Measure the parameters of the probe
测量探头设置有M=4个环形感光面,每个环形感光面的环宽为0.2mm,4个环形感光面同几何中心。沿径向方向由内至外的4个环形感光面的内径分别为第一内径、第二内径、第三内径和第四内径,其中,第一内径为0.8mm,第二内径为3.2mm,第三内径为3.8mm,第四内径为4.4mm。第一内径、第二内径、第三内径和第四内径均表示直径。The measuring probe is provided with M=4 annular photosensitive surfaces, the annular width of each annular photosensitive surface is 0.2 mm, and the 4 annular photosensitive surfaces have the same geometric center. The inner diameters of the four annular photosensitive surfaces from the inside to the outside in the radial direction are the first inner diameter, the second inner diameter, the third inner diameter and the fourth inner diameter, wherein the first inner diameter is 0.8mm, and the second inner diameter is 3.2mm, The third inner diameter is 3.8 mm and the fourth inner diameter is 4.4 mm. The first inner diameter, the second inner diameter, the third inner diameter and the fourth inner diameter all represent diameters.
2、区域定位特征、第一姿势定位特征和第二姿势定位特征的设置2. Setting of the regional positioning feature, the first posture positioning feature and the second posture positioning feature
在该具体示例中,第一姿势定位特征和第二姿势定位特征相同,以下称为姿势定位特征。In this specific example, the first gesture location feature and the second gesture location feature are the same, hereinafter referred to as the gesture location feature.
其一,姿势定位特征的设置。即根据前臂伸侧和前臂伸侧与周边部位之间的骨骼与肌肉 关系,确定姿势定位特征的设置位置。针对前臂伸侧,由于手腕状态的改变会极大地影响前臂伸侧的皮肤状态,因此,为了提高测量姿势的定位精度,可以在手腕两边各自确定一个设置定位特征的位置,这两个位置可以分别是左臂的前臂伸侧靠近肘关节部分的第一预设位置和左手的手背靠近手腕部分的第二预设位置。The first is the setting of the pose positioning feature. That is, according to the relationship between the forearm extension side and the bones and muscles between the forearm extension side and the surrounding parts, the setting position of the posture positioning feature is determined. For the forearm extension side, since the change of the wrist state will greatly affect the skin condition of the forearm extension side, in order to improve the positioning accuracy of the measurement posture, a position for setting the positioning feature can be determined on both sides of the wrist. It is the first preset position of the forearm extension side of the left arm close to the elbow joint and the second preset position of the back of the left hand close to the wrist.
为了减少定位测量姿势所需要的姿势定位特征的数量,采用一个支撑平面用于手臂与手掌的支撑,并要求定位过程中手臂要紧紧与支撑平面相贴合从而限制手臂的转动,因此,为了实现测量姿势的精确定位,只需要在选定的第一预设位置和第二预设位置处各自设置一个姿势定位特征即可。这两个姿势定位特征可以选择被测对象上的固有特征,也可以人为设置,在该具体示例中为人为设置的两个姿势定位特征,两个姿势定位特征为十字标记点。In order to reduce the number of posture positioning features required for positioning and measuring posture, a support plane is used for the support of the arm and the palm, and it is required that the arm should be tightly attached to the support plane during the positioning process to limit the rotation of the arm. Therefore, in order to achieve To measure the precise positioning of the posture, it is only necessary to set a posture positioning feature at the selected first preset position and the second preset position respectively. The two posture positioning features can be selected from inherent features on the object to be measured, or can be set manually. In this specific example, they are two manually set posture positioning features, and the two posture positioning features are cross mark points.
其二,区域定位特征的设置。为了实现测量区域的精确定位,在测量探头上设置十字标记点作为区域定位特征。Second, the setting of regional positioning features. In order to achieve accurate positioning of the measurement area, a cross mark point is set on the measurement probe as the area positioning feature.
3.可控测量条件的再现性结构3. Reproducible structure for controllable measurement conditions
采用光学方法实现测量区域的定位和测量姿势的定位。其中,基于定位部实现测量区域的定位和测量姿势的定位。其中,定位部包括区域定位部和姿势定位部。姿势定位部用于实现第一姿势定位部和第二姿势定位部的作用,即第一姿势定位部和第二姿势定位部是同一姿势定位部。定位部与测量探头是分立的。区域定位部和姿势定位部均采用能够投射十字光斑的红光激光器。The positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture are realized by the optical method. Among them, the positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture are realized based on the positioning unit. Wherein, the positioning part includes a region positioning part and a posture positioning part. The posture positioning part is used to realize the functions of the first posture positioning part and the second posture positioning part, that is, the first posture positioning part and the second posture positioning part are the same posture positioning part. The positioning part and the measuring probe are separate. Both the area positioning part and the posture positioning part use a red laser capable of projecting a cross beam spot.
图50示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种基于光学方法同步实现测量区域的定位和测量姿势的定位的示意图。FIG. 50 schematically shows a schematic diagram of synchronizing the positioning of the measurement area and the positioning of the measurement posture based on an optical method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
3.血糖浓度的调整方式3. Adjustment of blood sugar concentration
方式一,口服葡萄糖溶液。通过口服葡萄糖耐量试验(Oral Glucose Tolerance Test,OGTT)进行血糖浓度调节。OGTT通常要求被测对象口服由250ml水溶解75g葡萄糖的葡萄糖溶液。针对健康志愿者采用的是该方式。The first method is oral glucose solution. Blood glucose concentration regulation was performed by oral glucose tolerance test (Oral Glucose Tolerance Test, OGTT). The OGTT usually requires the subject to take a glucose solution in which 75 g of glucose is dissolved in 250 ml of water orally. This approach was used for healthy volunteers.
方式二,普通进食。通过口服普通食物耐量试验(Meal Torlanrance Test,MTT)进行血糖浓度调节。MTT通常要求被测对象口服以碳水化合物为主,可以配有少量蛋白质的普通食物,并要求尽量少饮水或饮用含水高的饮品,饮用的总水量低于50ml。针对糖尿病患者志愿者采用的是该方式。The second way is to eat normally. Blood glucose concentration regulation was performed by oral normal food tolerance test (Meal Torlanrance Test, MTT). MTT usually requires the subjects to take ordinary food with carbohydrates as the mainstay, and a small amount of protein, and to drink as little water as possible or drink high-water drinks, and the total amount of water consumed is less than 50ml. This method is used for volunteers with diabetes.
4.血糖真值获取方式4. How to obtain the true value of blood sugar
采用静脉留置针在右手手背取静脉血后经三台便携式血糖仪(GT-1820,Arkray,Japan)测量,对三个血糖值取平均后作为血糖真值。The venous blood was collected from the back of the right hand with a venous indwelling needle and measured by three portable blood glucose meters (GT-1820, Arkray, Japan). The average blood glucose value was taken as the true blood glucose value.
(二)实验装置的性能测试(2) Performance test of the experimental device
采用测量标准反射板和被测对象的前臂伸侧的测量信噪比,将测量信噪比与目标信噪比进行比较,以确定实验装置的性能。如果测量信噪比低于目标信噪比,则可以说明实验装置是可行的。其中,标准反射板的反射率为40%,测量该反射板时四个环形感光面所采集到的光强值与组织成分测量时较为类似。The measured signal-to-noise ratio of the standard reflector and the forearm extension side of the test object was measured, and the measured signal-to-noise ratio was compared with the target signal-to-noise ratio to determine the performance of the experimental device. If the measured SNR is lower than the target SNR, the experimental setup is feasible. Among them, the reflectivity of the standard reflector is 40%, and the light intensity values collected by the four annular photosensitive surfaces when measuring the reflector are similar to those when measuring the tissue composition.
针对测量标准反射板,将内径为第三内径和第四内径的两个环形感光面采集到的输出光强进行对数差分运算,得到差分信号,每分钟测量480个数据,测量时长为3.5小时。以开始测量时刻的差分信号为基准计算反射板测量过程中的差分信号的变化量,结果如图51所示。图51示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种测量标准反射板得到的差分信号的变化量随测量时长变化的示意图。For the measurement standard reflector, the logarithmic difference operation is performed on the output light intensity collected by the two annular photosensitive surfaces whose inner diameters are the third inner diameter and the fourth inner diameter, and the differential signal is obtained. 480 data are measured per minute, and the measurement time is 3.5 hours. . The variation of the differential signal during the measurement of the reflector was calculated based on the differential signal at the start of the measurement, and the result is shown in Figure 51. FIG. 51 schematically shows a schematic diagram of a variation of a differential signal obtained by measuring a standard reflective plate according to an embodiment of the present disclosure as a function of measurement duration.
从图51可以看出,测量反射板时,差分信号约在0.0003a.u.范围内波动。相当于4.5mg/dL的血糖浓度变化。As can be seen from Figure 51, when measuring the reflector, the differential signal fluctuates in the range of about 0.0003a.u. This corresponds to a change in blood glucose concentration of 4.5 mg/dL.
针对被测对象的前臂伸侧,当测量时被测对象需要保持空腹状态,并通过光学方法实现测量区域和测量姿势的定位,且在测量过程中,测量姿势为目标测量姿势。将内径为第三内径和第四内径的两个环形感光面采集到的输出光强进行对数差分运算,得到差分信号,以进食结束时刻的差分信号为基准计算了在血糖浓度稳定的情况下所对应的差分信号的变化量过程中的差分信号的变化量,结果如图52所示。图52示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种在被测对象血糖浓度稳定状态下测量其前臂伸侧得到的差分信号的变化量随测量时长变化的示意图。For the forearm extension side of the measured object, the measured object needs to keep an empty stomach when measuring, and the positioning of the measurement area and the measurement posture is realized by an optical method, and during the measurement process, the measurement posture is the target measurement posture. The logarithmic difference operation of the output light intensity collected by the two annular photosensitive surfaces with the inner diameter of the third inner diameter and the fourth inner diameter is carried out to obtain a differential signal, which is calculated based on the differential signal at the end of eating when the blood sugar concentration is stable. The variation of the differential signal during the corresponding variation of the differential signal, the result is shown in Figure 52. Fig. 52 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the variation of the differential signal obtained by measuring the forearm extension side of the subject under a steady state of blood glucose concentration according to an embodiment of the present disclosure as a function of the measurement time.
从图52可以看出,在空腹测量过程中,差分信号在0.0007a.u.范围内波动,相当于10.5mg/dL的血糖浓度变化,满足血糖临床实验的精度要求。It can be seen from Figure 52 that during fasting measurement, the differential signal fluctuates within the range of 0.0007a.u., which is equivalent to a blood glucose concentration change of 10.5 mg/dL, which meets the accuracy requirements of blood glucose clinical experiments.
(三)实验过程(3) Experimental process
1.单次糖负载实验1. Single sugar loading experiment
(1)实验安排(1) Experimental arrangement
被测对象包括10名健康志愿者和7名糖尿病志愿者,其中,男性11人,女性6人,针对被测对象进行了27人次测试。The tested objects included 10 healthy volunteers and 7 diabetic volunteers, including 11 males and 6 females, and 27 tests were performed on the tested objects.
被测对象的年龄分布为包括20~30岁的5人,30~50岁的4人,50~72岁的8人,其中,50~72岁的8人中包括6名糖尿病患者。The age distribution of the subjects included 5 people aged 20 to 30, 4 people aged 30 to 50, and 8 people aged 50 to 72. Among them, 8 people aged 50 to 72 included 6 diabetic patients.
在实验之前需要保证被测对象已进行10小时以上的禁食。被测对象的左手臂置于工作台上,在非测量时,手臂可以小幅度移动。在装置预热完成后,进行连续的光学测量,光学测量的同时也以5分钟的间隔采集血糖真值,直至被测对象的血糖浓度恢复到一个较低的水平为止。在信号采集过程中采用光学方法进行测量姿势的定位。Before the experiment, it is necessary to ensure that the test subjects have fasted for more than 10 hours. The left arm of the object to be measured is placed on the workbench, and the arm can be moved slightly during non-measurement. After the device is warmed up, continuous optical measurement is performed, and the true value of blood glucose is also collected at 5-minute intervals while the optical measurement is performed until the blood glucose concentration of the measured object returns to a lower level. In the process of signal acquisition, the optical method is used to locate the measurement posture.
(2)数据采集(2) Data collection
实验分为预热阶段、进食阶段和糖负载实验阶段。预热阶段为实验的前0~1小时,在这个阶段,测量探头与皮肤会进行热交换,直至达到热平衡。在预热阶段需要采集一个空腹血糖值。The experiment was divided into a warm-up phase, a feeding phase, and a sugar-loading experimental phase. The warm-up phase is the first 0 to 1 hour of the experiment. During this phase, the measurement probe and the skin will exchange heat until thermal equilibrium is reached. A fasting blood glucose value needs to be collected during the warm-up phase.
进食阶段在预热阶段后,进食一般需要十分钟,此时,被测对象可以小幅活动。进食结束后直至测量结束的这段时间,通过光学方法使得被测对象的手臂姿势为目标测量姿势。After the warm-up phase, the eating phase generally takes ten minutes to eat. At this time, the tested subjects can move slightly. During the period from the end of eating until the end of the measurement, the arm posture of the subject is optically set as the target measurement posture.
糖负载实验阶段持续1~1.5小时,在这个阶段,需要每间隔5~10分钟测量血糖真值,并同时记录测量信号。The sugar loading experiment phase lasted 1 to 1.5 hours. In this phase, the true value of blood glucose was measured every 5 to 10 minutes, and the measurement signal was recorded at the same time.
(3)结果分析(3) Analysis of results
对数据进行分析,得到每当被测对象的血糖浓度变化1mmol/L时,平均差分信号的变化量的幅度约为0.0012a.u.。同时,差分信号的变化量与血糖浓度变化同步,两者的相关系数最高达到了0.96,平均为0.80,对应的可以直接分辨的血糖浓度的均方根误差最小为0.34mmol/L,平均为0.82mmol/L。By analyzing the data, it is found that the amplitude of the variation of the average differential signal is about 0.0012 a.u. every time the blood glucose concentration of the measured object changes by 1 mmol/L. At the same time, the change of the differential signal is synchronized with the change of the blood glucose concentration. The correlation coefficient between the two reaches a maximum of 0.96 and an average of 0.80. The corresponding root mean square error of the directly distinguishable blood glucose concentration is at least 0.34 mmol/L, and the average is 0.82. mmol/L.
图53示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种采用OGTT方式进行单次糖负载实验的结果示意图。图53为针对某位被测对象的结果示意图。图54示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种差分信号的变化量与血糖真值之间关系的示意图。FIG. 53 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the results of a single sugar loading experiment using the OGTT method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Figure 53 is a schematic diagram of the results for a certain measured object. FIG. 54 schematically shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the variation of the differential signal and the true value of blood glucose according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
2.双次糖负载实验2. Double sugar loading experiment
(1)实验安排(1) Experimental arrangement
被测对象为1名29岁的男性健康志愿者。与单次糖负载实验的不同之处在于,该实验需要进食两次,即在第一次糖负载实验完成后,仍然继续实验,在血糖已经下降到低水平后,再次进食,使得血糖回升,实验整体持续约6小时,其余设置与单次糖负载实验相同。The test object was a 29-year-old male healthy volunteer. The difference from the single sugar loading experiment is that this experiment requires two meals, that is, after the first sugar loading experiment is completed, the experiment is still continued. The overall experiment lasted about 6 hours, and the rest of the setup was the same as the single sugar loading experiment.
(2)结果分析(2) Analysis of results
对数据进行分析,证明获取到了血糖信号,并且差分信号的变化量与血糖浓度呈现较好的相关性,结果如图55所示,图55示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种采用MTT方式进行双次糖负载实验的结果示意图。采用第一次MTT获得的数据建立的血糖浓度预测模型,能够直接预测第二次MTT的血糖浓度,预测的均方根误差达到了0.68mmol/L。由此可见,在两次MTT保持同一测量条件的情况下,可以实现直接相互预测,结果如图56所示,图56示意性示出了根据本公开实施例的一种血糖预测值与血糖真值之间关系的示意图。图56中血糖预测值表示采用第一次MTT获得的数据建立的血糖浓度预测模型预测第二次MTT的血糖浓度的结果。Analysis of the data proves that the blood glucose signal is obtained, and the variation of the differential signal has a good correlation with the blood glucose concentration. Schematic diagram of the results of double sugar loading experiments in MTT mode. The blood glucose concentration prediction model established by the data obtained from the first MTT can directly predict the blood glucose concentration of the second MTT, and the root mean square error of the prediction reaches 0.68mmol/L. It can be seen that direct mutual prediction can be achieved under the condition that the two MTTs maintain the same measurement conditions, and the result is shown in FIG. 56 , which schematically shows a blood glucose prediction value and a blood glucose true value according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Schematic diagram of the relationship between values. The blood glucose prediction value in FIG. 56 shows the result of predicting the blood glucose concentration of the second MTT by using the blood glucose concentration prediction model established by the data obtained from the first MTT.
综上所述,根据27人次的单次糖负载实验中差分信号的变化量与血糖浓度的相关关系, 及与对照组的数据相比较,证实了采用单个预设波长结合具有大面积感光面的组织成分测量装置进行组织成分测量,直接获取到了真实的血糖信号。同时,也证实了活体组织成分测量的三个原则的重要性和有效性。To sum up, according to the correlation between the variation of the differential signal and the blood glucose concentration in the single sugar loading experiment of 27 people, and compared with the data of the control group, it is confirmed that a single preset wavelength combined with a large-area photosensitive surface is used. The tissue composition measuring device measures the tissue composition, and directly obtains the real blood glucose signal. At the same time, the importance and validity of the three principles of tissue composition measurement are also confirmed.
附图中的流程图和框图,图示了按照本公开各种实施例的系统、方法和计算机程序产品的可能实现的体系架构、功能和操作。在这点上,流程图或框图中的每个方框可以代表一个模块、程序段、或代码的一部分,上述模块、程序段、或代码的一部分包含一个或多个用于实现规定的逻辑功能的可执行指令。也应当注意,在有些作为替换的实现中,方框中所标注的功能也可以以不同于附图中所标注的顺序发生。例如,两个接连地表示的方框实际上可以基本并行地执行,它们有时也可以按相反的顺序执行,这依所涉及的功能而定。也要注意的是,框图或流程图中的每个方框、以及框图或流程图中的方框的组合,可以用执行规定的功能或操作的专用的基于硬件的系统来实现,或者可以用专用硬件与计算机指令的组合来实现。本领域技术人员可以理解,本公开的各个实施例和/或权利要求中记载的特征可以进行多种组合和/或结合,即使这样的组合或结合没有明确记载于本公开中。特别地,在不脱离本公开精神和教导的情况下,本公开的各个实施例和/或权利要求中记载的特征可以进行多种组合和/或结合。所有这些组合和/或结合均落入本公开的范围。The flowchart and block diagrams in the Figures illustrate the architecture, functionality, and operation of possible implementations of systems, methods and computer program products according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. In this regard, each block in the flowchart or block diagrams may represent a module, segment, or portion of code that contains one or more logical functions for implementing the specified functions executable instructions. It should also be noted that, in some alternative implementations, the functions noted in the blocks may occur out of the order noted in the figures. For example, two blocks shown in succession may, in fact, be executed substantially concurrently, or the blocks may sometimes be executed in the reverse order, depending upon the functionality involved. It is also noted that each block of the block diagrams or flowchart illustrations, and combinations of blocks in the block diagrams or flowchart illustrations, can be implemented in special purpose hardware-based systems that perform the specified functions or operations, or can be implemented using A combination of dedicated hardware and computer instructions is implemented. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that various combinations and/or combinations of features recited in various embodiments and/or claims of the present disclosure are possible, even if such combinations or combinations are not expressly recited in the present disclosure. In particular, various combinations and/or combinations of the features recited in the various embodiments of the present disclosure and/or in the claims may be made without departing from the spirit and teachings of the present disclosure. All such combinations and/or combinations fall within the scope of this disclosure.
以上对本公开的实施例进行了描述。但是,这些实施例仅仅是为了说明的目的,而并非为了限制本公开的范围。尽管在以上分别描述了各实施例,但是这并不意味着各个实施例中的措施不能有利地结合使用。本公开的范围由所附权利要求及其等同物限定。不脱离本公开的范围,本领域技术人员可以做出多种替代和修改,这些替代和修改都应落在本公开的范围之内。Embodiments of the present disclosure have been described above. However, these examples are for illustrative purposes only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present disclosure. Although the various embodiments are described above separately, this does not mean that the measures in the various embodiments cannot be used in combination to advantage. The scope of the present disclosure is defined by the appended claims and their equivalents. Without departing from the scope of the present disclosure, those skilled in the art can make various substitutions and modifications, and these substitutions and modifications should all fall within the scope of the present disclosure.

Claims (165)

  1. 一种组织成分测量方法,包括:A method for measuring tissue composition comprising:
    以单个预设波长的入射光照射测量区域,其中,每束所述入射光通过所述测量区域后从至少一个出射位置出射形成至少一束出射光,所述入射光的入射位置包括至少一个;irradiating the measurement area with incident light of a single preset wavelength, wherein each beam of the incident light passes through the measurement area and then emerges from at least one exit position to form at least one beam of exit light, and the incident position of the incident light includes at least one;
    获取由M个感光面采集的与每束所述出射光对应的光强值,得到T个输出光强,其中,每个所述输出光强是根据一个或多个所述感光面采集到的出射光的光强值处理得到的,每个所述感光面能够采集到与所述感光面对应的预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,1≤T≤M;以及Obtain the light intensity values corresponding to each beam of the outgoing light collected by the M photosensitive surfaces, and obtain T output light intensities, wherein each of the output light intensities is collected according to one or more of the photosensitive surfaces The light intensity value of the outgoing light is obtained by processing, and each photosensitive surface can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range corresponding to the photosensitive surface, 1≤T ≤M; and
    根据与所述预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。The concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,每个所述感光面接收到的出射光在目标组织层中的平均光程占总光程的比例大于或等于比例阈值,其中,所述总光程为所述出射光在所述测量区域内传输的总距离。The method according to claim 1, wherein the ratio of the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each of the photosensitive surfaces in the target tissue layer to the total optical length is greater than or equal to a proportional threshold, wherein the total optical length is the total distance that the outgoing light travels in the measurement area.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising:
    根据所述测量区域内的组织结构特征确定同类感光面的总面积,其中,所述同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面,所述同类感光面用于输出一个所述输出光强。The total area of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type is determined according to the tissue structure features in the measurement area, wherein the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are used to output one output light intensity.
  4. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,每个所述感光面的面积与所述感光面的周长的比值大于或等于比值阈值。The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein a ratio of the area of each of the photosensitive surfaces to the perimeter of the photosensitive surfaces is greater than or equal to a ratio threshold.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,所述比值阈值大于或等于0.04mm。5. The method of claim 4, wherein the ratio threshold is greater than or equal to 0.04 mm.
  6. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,所述感光面与所述测量区域的表面接触或非接触。The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the photosensitive surface is in contact or non-contact with the surface of the measurement area.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中,所述感光面距所述测量区域的表面的距离小于或等于第一距离阈值且所述感光面接收出射光的效率大于或等于效率阈值。6. The method of claim 6, wherein the distance of the photosensitive surface from the surface of the measurement region is less than or equal to a first distance threshold and the efficiency of the photosensitive surface in receiving outgoing light is greater than or equal to an efficiency threshold.
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,在所述以单个预设波长的入射光照射测量区域之前,还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein before said irradiating the measurement area with the incident light of a single preset wavelength, further comprising:
    确定定位特征;determine positioning features;
    根据所述定位特征,确定所述测量区域,其中,所述测量区域是满足可控测量条件的再现性的区域;以及determining the measurement area based on the location feature, wherein the measurement area is an area that satisfies reproducibility of controllable measurement conditions; and
    将测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,其中,所述测量探头包括所述M个感光面。A measurement probe is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area, wherein the measurement probe includes the M photosensitive surfaces.
  9. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中,所述定位特征包括第一姿势定位特征和区域定位特征;The method of claim 6, wherein the positioning features include a first posture positioning feature and an area positioning feature;
    所述根据所述定位特征,确定所述测量区域,包括:The determining the measurement area according to the positioning feature includes:
    根据所述第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,其中,所述目标测量姿势是满足所述可控测量条件的再现性的测量姿势;以及adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to a target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature, wherein the target measurement posture is a measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement condition; and
    在所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势的情况下,根据所述区域定位特征,确定所述测量区域。When the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture, the measurement area is determined according to the area positioning feature.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其中,所述将测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the disposing the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area comprises:
    通过固定部将所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,其中,所述固定部与所述测量探头是一体的、部分分立的或全部分立的。The measurement probe is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area by a fixing part, wherein the fixing part and the measurement probe are integrated, partially separated or completely separated.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述固定部包括固定座和第一配合件;The method of claim 10, wherein the fixing part comprises a fixing seat and a first fitting;
    所述通过固定部将所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,包括:The setting of the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the fixing part includes:
    通过所述第一配合件将所述固定座设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置;以及The fixing seat is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the first fitting; and
    将所述测量探头设置于所述固定座。The measuring probe is set on the fixing seat.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其中,所述测量区域处皮肤的皮肤状态在通过所述第一配合件将所述固定座设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置的过程中满足第一预设条件。11. The method of claim 11, wherein the skin condition of the skin at the measurement area satisfies a first pre-condition during the process of disposing the fixing seat at the position corresponding to the measurement area by the first fitting member Set conditions.
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其中,所述测量区域处皮肤的皮肤状态在所述测量探头设置于所述固定座的过程中满足第二预设条件。The method according to claim 11, wherein the skin state of the skin at the measurement area satisfies a second preset condition during the process of disposing the measurement probe on the fixing seat.
  14. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其中,所述测量探头在所述固定座中不产生移动。11. The method of claim 11, wherein the measurement probe does not move in the mount.
  15. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述固定部包括第二配合件;The method of claim 10, wherein the fixing portion comprises a second fitting;
    所述通过固定部将所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,包括:The setting of the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the fixing part includes:
    通过所述第二配合件将所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置。The measurement probe is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其中,所述测量区域处皮肤的皮肤状态在通过所述第二配合件将所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置的过程中满足第三预设条件。16. The method of claim 15, wherein the skin condition of the skin at the measurement area satisfies a third pre-determination during the process of setting the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area by the second fitting. Set conditions.
  17. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述区域定位特征,确定所述测量区域,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the determining the measurement area according to the area positioning feature comprises:
    获取第一投影特征;Obtain the first projection feature;
    在确定所述区域定位特征与所述第一投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整所述测量探头和/或所述固定部的位置,直至所述区域定位特征与所述第一投影特征匹配;以及In the case that it is determined that the regional positioning feature does not match the first projection feature, adjusting the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing portion until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature; as well as
    在确定所述区域定位特征与所述第一投影特征匹配的情况下,将与所述测量探头和/或所述固定部对应的区域确定为所述测量区域。In the case where it is determined that the region positioning feature matches the first projection feature, the region corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing portion is determined as the measurement region.
  18. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述区域定位特征,确定所述测量区域,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the determining the measurement area according to the area positioning feature comprises:
    获取第一目标图像;obtain the first target image;
    获取第一模板图像,其中,所述第一模板图像包括所述区域定位特征;acquiring a first template image, wherein the first template image includes the region positioning feature;
    在确定所述第一目标图像与所述第一模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整所述测量探头和/或所述固定部的位置,以获取新的第一目标图像,直至所述新的第一目标图像与所述第一模板图像匹配;以及In the case that it is determined that the first target image does not match the first template image, adjust the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing part to acquire a new first target image until the new a first target image is matched to the first template image; and
    在确定所述第一目标图像与所述第一模板图像匹配的情况下,将与所述测量探头和/或所述固定部对应的区域确定为所述测量区域。When it is determined that the first target image matches the first template image, an area corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing portion is determined as the measurement area.
  19. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述区域定位特征,确定所述测量区域,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the determining the measurement area according to the area positioning feature comprises:
    获取第二目标图像,其中,所述第二目标图像包括所述区域定位特征;acquiring a second target image, wherein the second target image includes the region positioning feature;
    在确定所述第二目标图像中所述区域定位特征的位置不为第一预设位置的情况下,调整所述测量探头和/或所述固定部的位置,以获取新的第二目标图像,直至所述新的第二目标图像中所述区域定位特征的位置为所述第一预设位置;以及In the case where it is determined that the position of the region positioning feature in the second target image is not the first preset position, adjust the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing part to obtain a new second target image , until the position of the region positioning feature in the new second target image is the first preset position; and
    在确定所述新的第二目标图像中所述区域定位特征的位置为所述第一预设位置的情况下,将与所述测量探头和/或所述固定部对应的区域确定为所述测量区域。When it is determined that the position of the region positioning feature in the new second target image is the first preset position, the region corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing part is determined as the first preset position Measurement area.
  20. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to the target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature comprises:
    获取第二投影特征;Get the second projection feature;
    在确定所述第一姿势定位特征与所述第二投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,直至所述第一姿势定位特征与所述第二投影特征匹配;以及if it is determined that the first pose location feature does not match the second projected feature, adjusting the current measurement pose until the first pose location feature matches the second projected feature; and
    在确定所述第一姿势定位特征与所述第二投影特征匹配的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。In a case where it is determined that the first posture positioning feature matches the second projection feature, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  21. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to the target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature comprises:
    获取第三目标图像;Get the third target image;
    获取第二模板图像,其中,所述第二模板图像包括所述第一姿势定位特征;acquiring a second template image, wherein the second template image includes the first posture positioning feature;
    在确定所述第三目标图像与所述第二模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,以获取新的第三目标图像,直至所述新的第三目标图像与所述第二模板图像匹配;以及In the case that it is determined that the third target image does not match the second template image, the current measurement posture is adjusted to obtain a new third target image, until the new third target image matches the first two-template image matching; and
    在确定所述新的第三目标图像与所述第二模板图像匹配的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。When it is determined that the new third target image matches the second template image, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  22. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the adjusting the current measurement posture of the measured object to the target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature comprises:
    获取第四目标图像,其中,所述第四目标图像包括所述第一姿势定位特征;acquiring a fourth target image, wherein the fourth target image includes the first posture positioning feature;
    在确定所述第四目标图像中所述第一姿势定位特征的位置不在第二预设位置的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,以获取新的第四目标图像,直至所述新的第四目标图像中所述第一姿势定位特征的位置在所述第二预设位置;以及In the case where it is determined that the position of the first posture positioning feature in the fourth target image is not at the second preset position, adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new fourth target image, until the new fourth target image is The position of the first gesture positioning feature in the four-target image is at the second preset position; and
    在确定所述新的第四目标图像中所述第一姿势定位特征的位置在所述第二预设位置的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。When it is determined that the position of the first posture positioning feature in the new fourth target image is at the second preset position, the current measurement posture is determined to be the target measurement posture.
  23. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 10, further comprising:
    如果所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,则在确定所述当前测量姿势不为所述目标测量姿势的情况下,确定第二姿势定位特征;以及If the measurement probe is disposed at a position corresponding to the measurement area, determining a second posture positioning feature when it is determined that the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture; and
    根据所述第二姿势定位特征,调整所述当前测量姿势至所述目标测量姿势。According to the second posture positioning feature, the current measurement posture is adjusted to the target measurement posture.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述第二姿势定位特征,调整所述当前测量姿势至所述目标测量姿势,包括:The method according to claim 23, wherein the adjusting the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature comprises:
    获取第三投影特征;Get the third projection feature;
    在确定所述第二姿势定位特征与所述第三投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,直至所述第二姿势定位特征与所述第三投影特征匹配;以及if it is determined that the second pose location feature does not match the third projected feature, adjusting the current measurement pose until the second pose location feature matches the third projected feature; and
    在确定所述第二姿势定位特征与所述第三投影特征匹配的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。In a case where it is determined that the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  25. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述第二姿势定位特征,调整所述当前测量姿势至所述目标测量姿势,包括:The method according to claim 23, wherein the adjusting the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature comprises:
    获取第五目标图像;Get the fifth target image;
    获取第三模板图像,其中,所述第三模板图像包括所述第二姿势定位特征;acquiring a third template image, wherein the third template image includes the second posture positioning feature;
    在确定所述第五目标图像与所述第三模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,以获取新的第五目标图像,直至所述新的第五目标图像与所述第三模板图像匹配;以及In the case where it is determined that the fifth target image does not match the third template image, the current measurement posture is adjusted to obtain a new fifth target image until the new fifth target image matches the third template image. three-template image matching; and
    在确定所述新的第五目标图像与所述第三模板图像匹配的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。When it is determined that the new fifth target image matches the third template image, the current measurement posture is determined to be the target measurement posture.
  26. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述第二姿势定位特征,调整所述当前测量姿势至所述目标测量姿势,包括:The method according to claim 23, wherein the adjusting the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature comprises:
    获取第六目标图像,其中,所述第六目标图像包括所述第二姿势定位特征;acquiring a sixth target image, wherein the sixth target image includes the second posture positioning feature;
    在确定所述第六目标图像中所述第二姿势定位特征的位置不在第三预设位置的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,以获取新的第六目标图像,直至所述新的第六目标图像中所述第二姿势定位特征的位置在所述第三预设位置;以及In the case where it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is not at the third preset position, adjust the current measurement posture to acquire a new sixth target image until the new sixth target image is The position of the second posture positioning feature in the six target images is at the third preset position; and
    在确定所述新的第六目标图像中所述第二姿势定位特征的位置在所述第三预设位置的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。When it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is at the third preset position, the current measurement posture is determined to be the target measurement posture.
  27. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 23, further comprising:
    生成提示信息,其中,所述提示信息用于提示测量姿势定位和/或测量区域定位完成,所述提示信息的形式包括图像、语音或震动中的至少一种。Prompt information is generated, wherein the prompt information is used to prompt the completion of the measurement posture positioning and/or the measurement area positioning, and the prompt information is in the form of at least one of image, voice or vibration.
  28. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 11, further comprising:
    在确定所述固定座设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置且所述测量探头未设置于所述固定部的情况下,将所述测量探头设置于所述固定座;In the case where it is determined that the fixing seat is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement area and the measuring probe is not arranged on the fixing portion, the measuring probe is arranged on the fixing seat;
    在确定所述固定座未设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置的情况下,通过所述第一配合件将所述固定座设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,并将所述测量探头设置于所述固定座。When it is determined that the fixing seat is not arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the fixing seat is arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the first fitting, and the measurement probe is arranged on the fixed seat.
  29. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 15, further comprising:
    在确定所述测量探头未设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置的情况下,通过所述第二配合件将所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置。When it is determined that the measurement probe is not arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area, the measurement probe is arranged at the position corresponding to the measurement area through the second fitting.
  30. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述根据与所述预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength comprises:
    从与所述预设波长对应的至少两个输出光强中确定第一输出光强和第二输出光强;以及determining a first output light intensity and a second output light intensity from at least two output light intensities corresponding to the preset wavelengths; and
    根据与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度。The concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法,其中,所述根据与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度,包括:The method according to claim 30, wherein the determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength comprises:
    将与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理,得到差分信号;以及performing differential processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal; and
    根据与所述预设波长对应的差分信号,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度。The concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述将与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理,得到差分信号,包括:The method according to claim 31, wherein performing differential processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal, comprising:
    采用差分电路处理与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到所述差分信号。A differential circuit is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain the differential signal.
  33. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述将与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行差分处理,得到差分信号,包括:The method according to claim 31, wherein performing differential processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain a differential signal, comprising:
    采用差分算法处理与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到所述差分信号。A differential algorithm is used to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain the differential signal.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其中,所述采用差分算法处理与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到所述差分信号,包括:The method according to claim 33, wherein the using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain the differential signal comprises:
    将与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行直接差分运算,得到所述差分信号。The differential signal is obtained by performing a direct differential operation on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  35. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其中,所述采用差分算法处理与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,得到所述差分信号,包括:The method according to claim 33, wherein the using a differential algorithm to process the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain the differential signal comprises:
    将与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强进行取对数处理,得到第一对数光强和第二对数光强;以及Perform logarithmic processing on the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength to obtain the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity; and
    将与所述预设波长对应的第一对数光强和第二对数光强进行直接差分运算,得到所述差分信号。The differential signal is obtained by performing a direct differential operation on the first logarithmic light intensity and the second logarithmic light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  36. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述根据与所述预设波长对应的差分信号,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度,包括:The method according to claim 31, wherein the determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength comprises:
    将与所述预设波长对应的差分信号输入第一组织成分浓度预测模型,输出所述被测组织成分的浓度。The differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength is input into the first tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 36, further comprising:
    获取第一训练样本集,其中,所述第一训练样本集包括多个第一训练样本,其中,每个所述第一训练样本包括所述被测组织成分的第一真实浓度和与所述第一真实浓度对应的差分信号;以及Obtain a first training sample set, wherein the first training sample set includes a plurality of first training samples, wherein each of the first training samples includes the first true concentration of the measured tissue component and the a differential signal corresponding to the first true concentration; and
    根据所述第一训练样本集,建立所述第一组织成分浓度预测模型。According to the first training sample set, the first tissue component concentration prediction model is established.
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的方法,其中,所述根据所述第一训练样本集,建立所述第一组织成分浓度预测模型,包括:The method according to claim 37, wherein the establishing the first tissue component concentration prediction model according to the first training sample set comprises:
    对所述第一训练样本集进行预处理,得到处理后的第一训练样本集;以及Preprocessing the first training sample set to obtain a processed first training sample set; and
    根据所述处理后的第一训练样本集,建立所述第一组织成分浓度预测模型。The first tissue component concentration prediction model is established according to the processed first training sample set.
  39. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 36, further comprising:
    在满足第四预设条件的情况下,对所述第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,以利用修正后的第一组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fourth preset condition is satisfied, the first tissue component concentration prediction model is modified to process the new differential signal by using the revised first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration prediction model. concentration.
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的方法,其中,所述对所述第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,包括:The method of claim 39, wherein the modifying the first tissue component concentration prediction model comprises:
    获取所述被测组织成分的第一目标浓度;obtaining the first target concentration of the measured tissue component;
    获取与所述第一目标浓度对应的差分信号;以及obtaining a differential signal corresponding to the first target concentration; and
    根据与所述第一目标浓度对应的差分信号和所述第一目标浓度,对所述第一组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正。The first tissue component concentration prediction model is corrected based on the difference signal corresponding to the first target concentration and the first target concentration.
  41. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 36, further comprising:
    在满足第五预设条件的情况下,利用新的第一组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fifth preset condition is satisfied, the new differential signal is processed by using the new first tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  42. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述根据与所述预设波长对应的差分信号,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度,包括:The method according to claim 31, wherein the determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the differential signal corresponding to the preset wavelength comprises:
    获取多个干扰参数中每个所述干扰参数的当前干扰参数值;以及obtaining a current interference parameter value for each of the plurality of interference parameters; and
    将多个所述当前干扰参数值和与所述预设波长对应的差分信号输入第二组织成分浓度预测模型,输出所述被测组织成分的浓度。A plurality of the current interference parameter values and the differential signals corresponding to the preset wavelengths are input into the second tissue component concentration prediction model, and the concentration of the measured tissue component is output.
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 42, further comprising:
    获取第二训练样本集,其中,所述第二训练样本集包括多个第二训练样本,其中,每个所述第二训练样本包括所述被测组织成分的第二真实浓度和与所述第二真实浓度对应的差分信号;Obtain a second training sample set, wherein the second training sample set includes a plurality of second training samples, wherein each of the second training samples includes the second true concentration of the tested tissue component and the the differential signal corresponding to the second real concentration;
    获取第三训练样本集,其中,所述第三训练样本集包括多个第三训练样本,其中,每个所述第三训练样本包括多个干扰参数中每个所述干扰参数的训练干扰参数值和与每个所述训练干扰参数值对应的差分信号;Obtain a third training sample set, wherein the third training sample set includes a plurality of third training samples, wherein each of the third training samples includes a training interference parameter of each of the plurality of interference parameters value and a differential signal corresponding to each of said training disturbance parameter values;
    根据所述第二训练样本集,建立待校正组织成分浓度预测模型;According to the second training sample set, establish a tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected;
    根据所述第三训练样本集,建立校正参数模型;以及establishing a correction parameter model according to the third training sample set; and
    根据所述待校正组织成分浓度预测模型和所述校正参数模型,得到所述第二组织成分浓度预测模型。According to the tissue component concentration prediction model to be corrected and the correction parameter model, the second tissue component concentration prediction model is obtained.
  44. 根据权利要求42所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 42, further comprising:
    在满足第四预设条件的情况下,对所述第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,以利用修正后的第二组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号和新的多个当前干扰参数值,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fourth preset condition is satisfied, the second tissue component concentration prediction model is revised, so as to use the revised second tissue component concentration prediction model to process the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values , to obtain the new concentration of the measured tissue component.
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的方法,其中,所述对所述第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正,包括:The method of claim 44, wherein the modifying the second tissue component concentration prediction model comprises:
    获取所述被测组织成分的第二目标浓度;obtaining the second target concentration of the measured tissue component;
    获取与所述第二目标浓度对应的差分信号;acquiring a differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration;
    获取多个干扰参数中每个所述干扰参数的当前干扰参数值;以及obtaining a current interference parameter value for each of the plurality of interference parameters; and
    根据所述第二目标浓度、多个所述干扰参数值和与所述第二目标浓度对应的差分信号,对所述第二组织成分浓度预测模型进行修正。The second tissue component concentration prediction model is revised based on the second target concentration, a plurality of the interference parameter values, and a differential signal corresponding to the second target concentration.
  46. 根据权利要求42所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 42, further comprising:
    在满足第五预设条件的情况下,利用新的第二组织成分浓度预测模型处理新的差分信号和新的多个当前干扰参数值,得到新的被测组织成分的浓度。Under the condition that the fifth preset condition is satisfied, the new differential signal and the new multiple current interference parameter values are processed by using the new second tissue component concentration prediction model to obtain a new measured tissue component concentration.
  47. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述第一输出光强和所述第二输出光强是由相同或不同的同类感光面在不同时刻采集得到的,其中,所述第一输出光强为收缩期光强,所述第二输出光强为舒张期光强,所述同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面,所述同类感光面用于输出一个所述输出光强。The method according to claim 31, wherein the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity are collected by the same or different photosensitive surfaces of the same type at different times, wherein the first output light intensity The intensity is the light intensity in systole, the second output light intensity is light intensity in diastole, and the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one or more photosensitive surfaces, and the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are used to output one output light intensity.
  48. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强是由与所述预设波长对应的第一同类感光面采集得到的,与所述预设波长对应的第二输出光强是由与所述预设波长对应的第二同类感光面采集得到的,其中,所述第一同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面,所述第二同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面。The method according to claim 31 , wherein the first output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is collected by a first photosensitive surface of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelength, which corresponds to the preset wavelength. The second output light intensity is obtained from the second photosensitive surface of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the first photosensitive surface of the same type includes one or more of the photosensitive surfaces, and the second photosensitive surface of the same type The face includes one or more of the photosensitive faces.
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的方法,其中,所述第一同类感光面和所述第二同类感光面是相同的同类感光面,所述第一同类感光面和所述第二同类感光面接收到的出射光是所述入射光从不同入射位置入射经传输得到的。48. The method of claim 48, wherein the first homogeneous photosensitive surface and the second homogeneous photosensitive surface are the same homogeneous photosensitive surface, and the first homogeneous photosensitive surface and the second homogeneous photosensitive surface receive The outgoing light is obtained by transmitting the incident light from different incident positions.
  50. 根据权利要求48所述的方法,其中,所述第一同类感光面和所述第二同类感光面是不同的同类感光面。49. The method of claim 48, wherein the first homogeneous photosensitive surface and the second homogeneous photosensitive surface are different homogeneous photosensitive surfaces.
  51. 根据权利要求48所述的方法,其中,所述第一同类感光面中每个所述感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第一平均光程范围,其中,所述第一平均光程范围是根据第一光程平均值确定的,所述第一光程平均值是根据所述第一同类感光面的各个所述感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值;The method according to claim 48, wherein the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each of the photosensitive surfaces in the first same type of photosensitive surface belongs to a first average optical length range, wherein the The first average optical path range is determined according to the first optical path average value, and the first optical path average value is calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each of the photosensitive positions of the first similar photosensitive surfaces the average obtained;
    所述第二同类感光面中每个所述感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第二平均光程范围,其中,所述第二平均光程范围是根据第二光程平均值确定的,其中,所述第二光程平均值是根据所述第二同类感光面的各个所述感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值。The average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each of the photosensitive surfaces of the second same type belongs to the second average optical path range, wherein the second average optical path range is based on the second light path. The second optical path average value is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each of the photosensitive positions of the second photosensitive surface of the same type.
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述第一光程平均值与所述第二光程平均值的差值的绝对值属于第一光程差范围。The method of claim 51, wherein the absolute value of the difference between the first optical path average value and the second optical path average value belongs to a first optical path difference range.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的方法,其中,所述第一平均光程范围小于或等于所述第一光程差范围,所述第二平均光程范围小于或等于所述第一光程差范围。The method of claim 52, wherein the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range and the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range .
  54. 根据权利要求52所述的方法,其中,所述第一光程差范围是根据与所述预设波长对应的最佳差分光程确定的。The method of claim 52, wherein the first optical path difference range is determined according to an optimal differential optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  55. 根据权利要求48所述的方法,其中,与所述预设波长对应的第一同类感光面中每个所述感光面距所述入射光的中心的源探距离在与所述预设波长对应的预设源探距离范围内,其中,所述预设源探距离范围是根据与所述预设波长对应的浮动基准位置距所述入射光的中心的源探距离确定的。The method according to claim 48, wherein the source-detection distance of each of the photosensitive surfaces of the first same type of photosensitive surfaces corresponding to the preset wavelengths from the center of the incident light is in the range corresponding to the preset wavelength. The preset source detection distance range is determined according to the source detection distance between the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength and the center of the incident light.
  56. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述根据与所述预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength comprises:
    从与所述预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强中确定第三输出光强;以及determining a third output light intensity from at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength; and
    根据与所述预设波长对应的第三输出光强,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度。The concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的方法,其中,与所述预设波长对应的第三输出光强是由与所述预设波长对应的同类感光面采集得到的,所述同类感光面中每个所述感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程和与所述预设波长对应的最佳光程的差值属于第二光程差范围。The method according to claim 56, wherein the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is collected from the same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the preset wavelength, and each of the same type of photosensitive surface The difference between the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions on the photosensitive surface and the optimal optical length corresponding to the preset wavelength belongs to the second optical path difference range.
  58. 根据权利要求56所述的方法,其中,所述根据与所述预设波长对应的第三输出光强,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度,包括:The method according to claim 56, wherein the determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength comprises:
    将与所述预设波长对应的第三输出光强输入第三组织成分浓度预测模型,输出所述被测组织成分的浓度。The third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is input into a third tissue component concentration prediction model, and the measured tissue component concentration is output.
  59. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,每个所述感光面包括环形感光面或非环形感光面,不同所述感光面的形状相同或不同。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein each of the photosensitive surfaces comprises an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, and the shapes of different photosensitive surfaces are the same or different.
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的方法,其中,所述非环形感光面包括扇环感光面、圆形感光面、扇形感光面、椭圆形感光面或多边形感光面。The method of claim 59, wherein the non-annular photosensitive surface comprises a fan ring photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, an elliptical photosensitive surface, or a polygonal photosensitive surface.
  61. 根据权利要求60所述的方法,其中,所述多边形感光面包括正方形感光面、长方形感光面或三角形感光面。The method of claim 60, wherein the polygonal photosensitive surface comprises a square photosensitive surface, a rectangular photosensitive surface, or a triangular photosensitive surface.
  62. 根据权利要求59所述的方法,其中,所述同类感光面包括所述环形感光面或所述非环形感光面,其中,所述同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面,所述同类感光面用于输出一个所述输出光强。59. The method of claim 59, wherein the homogeneous photosensitive surface comprises the annular photosensitive surface or the non-annular photosensitive surface, wherein the homogeneous photosensitive surface comprises one or more of the photosensitive surfaces, the homogeneous photosensitive surface The photosensitive surface is used to output one of the output light intensity.
  63. 根据权利要求62所述的方法,其中,所述同类感光面为所述环形感光面,包括:The method of claim 62, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface is the annular photosensitive surface, comprising:
    在所述同类感光面包括一个所述感光面的情况下,所述同类感光面为独立环形感光面;In the case that the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one photosensitive surface, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are independent annular photosensitive surfaces;
    在所述同类感光面包括多个所述感光面的情况下,所述同类感光面是根据所述多个感光面组合形成的环形感光面;When the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include a plurality of the photosensitive surfaces, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are annular photosensitive surfaces formed according to the combination of the plurality of photosensitive surfaces;
    所述同类感光面为所述非环形感光面,包括:The same type of photosensitive surface is the non-annular photosensitive surface, including:
    在所述同类感光面包括一个所述感光面的情况下,所述同类感光面为独立非环形感光面;In the case that the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one photosensitive surface, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are independent non-ring photosensitive surfaces;
    在所述同类感光面包括多个所述感光面的情况下,所述同类感光面是根据所述多个感光面组合形成的非环形感光面。When the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include a plurality of the photosensitive surfaces, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are non-annular photosensitive surfaces formed by combining the plurality of photosensitive surfaces.
  64. 根据权利要求63所述的方法,其中,在确定所述同类感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值的情况下,所述同类感光面包括环形感光面、扇环感光面、扇形感光面、圆形感光面或正方形感光面。The method according to claim 63, wherein, when it is determined that the distance between the photosensitive surfaces of the same type from the target site is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include a ring photosensitive surface, a fan ring photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, and a fan-shaped photosensitive surface. Photosensitive surface, round photosensitive surface or square photosensitive surface.
  65. 根据权利要求63所述的方法,其中,在确定所述同类感光面距所述目标部位的距离小于或等于第三距离阈值的情况下,所述同类感光面的形状是根据所述出射光的抖动分布确定的。The method according to claim 63, wherein in the case where it is determined that the distance between the same type of photosensitive surface and the target site is less than or equal to a third distance threshold, the shape of the same type of photosensitive surface is based on the output light. Jitter distribution is determined.
  66. 根据权利要求65所述的方法,其中,所述出射光的抖动分布包括分解为沿第一方向上的抖动分布和沿第二方向上的抖动分布,所述第一方向和所述第二方向相互垂直,所述同类感光面沿所述第一方向上的长度与所述同类感光面沿所述第二方向上的长度的比值是根据所述出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与所述出射光沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的,所述出射光沿所述第一方向上的抖动幅度最大。66. The method of claim 65, wherein the jitter distribution of the outgoing light comprises decomposition into a jitter distribution in a first direction and a jitter distribution in a second direction, the first direction and the second direction Perpendicular to each other, the ratio of the length of the same photosensitive surface along the first direction to the length of the same photosensitive surface along the second direction is based on the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the first direction and the Determined by the ratio of the shaking amplitude of the outgoing light along the second direction, the shaking amplitude of the outgoing light along the first direction is the largest.
  67. 根据权利要求66所述的方法,其中,所述同类感光面包括长方形感光面或椭圆形感光面,所述长方形感光面的长度与宽度的比值是根据所述出射光沿所述第一方向上的抖动幅度与所述出射光沿所述第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的,所述椭圆形感光面的长轴与短轴的比值是根据所述出射光沿所述第一方向上的抖动幅度与所述出射光沿所述第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的。The method of claim 66 , wherein the same type of photosensitive surface comprises a rectangular photosensitive surface or an elliptical photosensitive surface, and the ratio of the length to the width of the rectangular photosensitive surface is determined according to the emitted light along the first direction. Determined by the ratio of the jitter amplitude to the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light along the second direction, and the ratio of the long axis to the short axis of the elliptical photosensitive surface is based on the outgoing light along the first direction is determined by the ratio of the jitter amplitude to the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light along the second direction.
  68. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,每个所述输出光强是根据一个或多个所述感光面采集到的出射光的光强值处理得到的,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein each of the output light intensity is obtained by processing according to the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by one or more of the photosensitive surfaces, comprising:
    将所述一个或多个感光面结合使用,以输出一个所述输出光强;或using said one or more photosensitive surfaces in combination to output one said output light intensity; or
    在所述一个或多个感光面中每个感光面单独使用的情况下,将各个所述感光面采集到的出射光的光强值进行计算得到一个所述输出光强。In the case where each photosensitive surface of the one or more photosensitive surfaces is used independently, one output light intensity is obtained by calculating the light intensity value of the outgoing light collected by each of the photosensitive surfaces.
  69. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,所述根据与所述预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the determining the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength comprises:
    确定与所述预设波长对应的至少一个叠加光强,其中,所述叠加光强是根据与所述预设波长对应的多个输出光强相加得到的;以及determining at least one superimposed light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the superimposed light intensity is obtained by adding a plurality of output light intensities corresponding to the preset wavelength; and
    根据与所述预设波长对应的至少一个叠加光强,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度。The concentration of the measured tissue component is determined according to at least one superimposed light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  70. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,所述预设波长为对所述被测组织成分敏感的波长。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the preset wavelength is a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue composition.
  71. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,所述测量区域的温度在组织成分测量过程中保持在预设温度范围内。The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the temperature of the measurement region is maintained within a preset temperature range during tissue composition measurement.
  72. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,所述感光面为在初始感光面上设置掩膜板后得到的,所述掩膜板的透光率小于或等于透光率阈值。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the photosensitive surface is obtained after setting a mask on the initial photosensitive surface, and the light transmittance of the mask is less than or equal to a light transmittance threshold.
  73. 根据权利要求72所述的方法,其中,所述掩膜板的形状是根据出射光的抖动分布形状确定的。The method of claim 72, wherein the shape of the mask is determined according to the shape of the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
  74. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,所述入射光照射至所述测量区域的光斑的强度分布均匀。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the intensity distribution of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement area is uniform.
  75. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其中,所述入射光照射至所述测量区域的光斑的面积大于或等于光斑面积阈值。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the area of the light spot irradiated by the incident light to the measurement region is greater than or equal to a light spot area threshold.
  76. 一种组织成分测量装置,包括:A tissue composition measurement device, comprising:
    光源模块,用于以单个预设波长的入射光照射测量区域,其中,每束所述入射光通过所述测量区域后从至少一个出射位置出射形成至少一束出射光,所述入射光的入射位置包括至少一个;A light source module for irradiating the measurement area with incident light of a single preset wavelength, wherein each beam of the incident light passes through the measurement area and exits from at least one exit position to form at least one beam of outgoing light. The location includes at least one;
    采集模块,所述采集模块包括M个感光面,每个所述感光面能够采集到与所述感光面对应的预设防抖动范围内的出射位置所出射的出射光的光强值,所述采集模块用于获取由所述M个感光面采集的与每束所述出射光对应的光强值,得到T个输出光强,其中,每个所述输出光强是根据一个或多个所述感光面采集到的出射光的光强值处理得到的,1≤T≤M;以及a collection module, the collection module includes M photosensitive surfaces, and each of the photosensitive surfaces can collect the light intensity value of the outgoing light emitted from the outgoing position within the preset anti-shake range corresponding to the photosensitive surface, The acquisition module is configured to acquire the light intensity values corresponding to each beam of the outgoing light collected by the M photosensitive surfaces, and obtain T output light intensities, wherein each of the output light intensities is based on one or more of the output light intensities. obtained by processing the light intensity values of the outgoing lights collected by the photosensitive surfaces, 1≤T≤M; and
    处理模块,用于根据与所述预设波长对应的至少一个输出光强,确定被测组织成分的浓度。The processing module is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to at least one output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的装置,其中,每个所述感光面接收到的出射光在目标组织层中的平均光程占总光程的比例大于或等于比例阈值,其中,所述总光程为所述出射光在所述测量区域内传输的总距离。The device according to claim 76, wherein the ratio of the average optical length of the outgoing light received by each of the photosensitive surfaces in the target tissue layer to the total optical length is greater than or equal to a proportional threshold, wherein the total optical length is the total distance that the outgoing light travels in the measurement area.
  78. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,同类感光面的总面积是根据所述测量区域内的组织结构特征确定的,其中,所述同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面,所述同类感光面用于输出一个所述输出光强。The device according to claim 76 or 77, wherein the total area of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type is determined according to the characteristics of the tissue structure in the measurement area, wherein the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one or more photosensitive surfaces, The photosensitive surfaces of the same type are used to output one of the output light intensity.
  79. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,每个所述感光面的面积与所述感光面的周长的比值大于或等于比值阈值。76 or 77, wherein the ratio of the area of each of the photosensitive surfaces to the perimeter of the photosensitive surfaces is greater than or equal to a ratio threshold.
  80. 根据权利要求79所述的装置,其中,所述比值阈值大于或等于0.04mm。79. The apparatus of claim 79, wherein the ratio threshold is greater than or equal to 0.04 mm.
  81. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,所述感光面与所述测量区域的表面接触或非接触。The device of claim 76 or 77, wherein the photosensitive surface is in contact or non-contact with the surface of the measurement area.
  82. 根据权利要求81所述的装置,其中,所述感光面距所述测量区域的表面的距离小于或等于第一距离阈值且所述感光面接收出射光的效率大于或等于效率阈值。81. The device of claim 81, wherein a distance of the photosensitive surface from the surface of the measurement region is less than or equal to a first distance threshold and the photosensitive surface receives outgoing light with an efficiency greater than or equal to an efficiency threshold.
  83. 根据权利要求76所述的装置,还包括:The apparatus of claim 76, further comprising:
    第一确定模块,用于确定定位特征;a first determination module, used for determining the positioning feature;
    第二确定模块,用于根据所述定位特征,确定所述测量区域,其中,所述测量区域是满足可控测量条件的再现性的区域;以及a second determination module, configured to determine the measurement area according to the positioning feature, wherein the measurement area is an area that satisfies the reproducibility of controllable measurement conditions; and
    设置模块,用于将测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,其中,所述测量探头包括所述M个感光面。The setting module is used for setting the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area, wherein the measurement probe includes the M photosensitive surfaces.
  84. 根据权利要求83所述的装置,其中,所述定位特征包括第一姿势定位特征和区域定位特征;83. The apparatus of claim 83, wherein the locating features include a first gesture locating feature and a region locating feature;
    所述第二确定模块,包括:The second determining module includes:
    第一调整单元,用于根据所述第一姿势定位特征,调整被测对象的当前测量姿势至目标测量姿势,其中,所述目标测量姿势是满足所述可控测量条件的再现性的测量姿势;以及a first adjustment unit, configured to adjust the current measurement posture of the measured object to a target measurement posture according to the first posture positioning feature, wherein the target measurement posture is a measurement posture that satisfies the reproducibility of the controllable measurement conditions ;as well as
    第一确定单元,用于在所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势的情况下,根据所述区域定位特征,确定所述测量区域。A first determining unit, configured to determine the measurement area according to the area positioning feature when the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  85. 根据权利要求84所述的装置,还包括固定部,所述固定部用于将所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,其中,所述固定部与所述测量探头是一体的、部分分立的或全部分立的。The device of claim 84, further comprising a fixing portion for disposing the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area, wherein the fixing portion is integral with the measurement probe , partially discrete or fully discrete.
  86. 根据权利要求85所述的装置,其中,所述固定部包括固定座和第一配合件;The device of claim 85, wherein the fixing portion comprises a fixing seat and a first fitting;
    所述第一配合件,用于将所述固定座设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置;以及the first fitting part, used for disposing the fixing seat at a position corresponding to the measurement area; and
    所述固定座,用于固定所述测量探头。The fixing seat is used for fixing the measuring probe.
  87. 根据权利要求86所述的装置,其中,所述第一配合件的硬度包括第一硬度和第二硬度,其中,所述第一硬度小于所述第二硬度,所述第一硬度是所述第一配合件固定所述固定座的过程中所对应的硬度,所述第二硬度是所述第一配合件固定所述固定座后所对应的硬度。86. The device of claim 86, wherein the hardness of the first fitting includes a first hardness and a second hardness, wherein the first hardness is less than the second hardness, the first hardness being the The hardness corresponding to the first fitting piece in the process of fixing the fixing base, and the second hardness is the hardness corresponding to the fixing base by the first fitting piece.
  88. 根据权利要求87所述的装置,其中,所述第一配合件包括第一魔术贴或第一松紧带。87. The device of claim 87, wherein the first fitting comprises a first Velcro or a first elastic band.
  89. 根据权利要求87所述的装置,其中,所述第一配合件的硬度大于或等于第一硬度阈值小于或等于第二硬度阈值。88. The device of claim 87, wherein the hardness of the first fitting is greater than or equal to a first hardness threshold and less than or equal to a second hardness threshold.
  90. 根据权利要求86所述的装置,还包括第一磁性部,所述第一配合件的全部或部分为金属铰链,并且所述第一磁性部配合所述第一配合件以固定所述固定座。The device according to claim 86, further comprising a first magnetic part, all or part of the first fitting part is a metal hinge, and the first magnetic part cooperates with the first fitting part to fix the fixing seat .
  91. 根据权利要求86所述的装置,其中,所述第一配合件的表面设置有孔。The device of claim 86, wherein the surface of the first fitting is provided with holes.
  92. 根据权利要求86所述的装置,其中,通过如下至少一种方式将所述测量探头固定于所述固定座:The device of claim 86, wherein the measurement probe is secured to the mount by at least one of the following:
    所述测量探头通过胶带固定于所述固定座;The measuring probe is fixed on the fixing seat by adhesive tape;
    所述测量探头通过紧固件固定于所述固定座;the measuring probe is fixed on the fixing seat by a fastener;
    所述测量探头通过磁力固定于所述固定座;the measuring probe is fixed on the fixing seat by magnetic force;
    所述测量探头与所述固定座之间的摩擦系数大于或等于摩擦系数阈值。The friction coefficient between the measuring probe and the fixed seat is greater than or equal to a friction coefficient threshold.
  93. 根据权利要求85所述的装置,其中,所述固定部包括第二配合件;The device of claim 85, wherein the fixing portion comprises a second fitting;
    所述第二配合件,用于将所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置。The second matching part is used to set the measurement probe at a position corresponding to the measurement area.
  94. 根据权利要求93所述的装置,其中,所述第二配合件的硬度包括第三硬度和第四硬度,其中,所述第三硬度小于所述第四硬度,所述第三硬度是所述第二配合件固定所述测量探头的过程中所对应的硬度,所述第四硬度是所述第二配合件固定所述测量探头后所对应的硬度。93. The device of claim 93, wherein the hardness of the second fitting includes a third hardness and a fourth hardness, wherein the third hardness is less than the fourth hardness, the third hardness being the The hardness corresponding to the second fitting piece in the process of fixing the measuring probe, and the fourth hardness is the hardness corresponding to the second fitting piece fixing the measuring probe.
  95. 根据权利要求94所述的装置,其中,所述第二配合件包括第二魔术贴或第二松紧带。94. The device of claim 94, wherein the second fitting comprises a second Velcro or a second elastic band.
  96. 根据权利要求94所述的装置,其中,所述第二配合件的硬度大于或等于第三硬度阈值小于或等于第四硬度阈值。94. The device of claim 94, wherein the hardness of the second fitting is greater than or equal to a third hardness threshold and less than or equal to a fourth hardness threshold.
  97. 根据权利要求93所述的装置,还包括第二磁性部,所述第二配合件的全部或部分为金属铰链,并且所述第二磁性部配合所述第二配合件以固定所述测量探头。The device according to claim 93, further comprising a second magnetic part, all or part of the second fitting part is a metal hinge, and the second magnetic part cooperates with the second fitting part to fix the measuring probe .
  98. 根据权利要求93所述的装置,其中,所述第二配合件的表面设置有孔。The device of claim 93, wherein the surface of the second fitting is provided with holes.
  99. 根据权利要求85所述的装置,其中,所述第一确定单元,用于:The apparatus according to claim 85, wherein the first determining unit is configured to:
    获取第一投影特征;Obtain the first projection feature;
    在确定所述区域定位特征与所述第一投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整所述测量探头和/或所述固定部的位置,直至所述区域定位特征与所述第一投影特征匹配;以及In the case that it is determined that the regional positioning feature does not match the first projection feature, adjusting the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing portion until the regional positioning feature matches the first projection feature; as well as
    在确定所述区域定位特征与所述第一投影特征匹配的情况下,将与所述测量探头和/或所述固定部对应的区域确定为所述测量区域。In the case where it is determined that the region positioning feature matches the first projection feature, the region corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing portion is determined as the measurement region.
  100. 根据权利要求99所述的装置,还包括区域定位部,所述区域定位部设置于所述被测对象、所述测量探头、所述固定部或其他对象,所述区域定位部用于投射所述第一投影特征。The device according to claim 99, further comprising an area positioning part, the area positioning part is arranged on the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixing part or other objects, and the area positioning part is used for projecting the Describe the first projection feature.
  101. 根据权利要求100所述的装置,其中,在确定所述区域定位部设置于所述测量探头的情况下,所述区域定位特征未设置于所述测量探头;The apparatus according to claim 100, wherein, in the case where it is determined that the area locating portion is provided on the measurement probe, the area locating feature is not provided on the measurement probe;
    在确定所述区域定位部设置于所述固定部的情况下,所述区域定位特征未设置于所述固定部。When it is determined that the area positioning portion is provided on the fixing portion, the area positioning feature is not provided on the fixing portion.
  102. 根据权利要求100所述的装置,其中,所述区域定位部包括第一激光器。100. The apparatus of claim 100, wherein the area locator comprises a first laser.
  103. 根据权利要求85所述的装置,其中,所述第一确定单元,用于:The apparatus according to claim 85, wherein the first determining unit is configured to:
    获取第一目标图像;obtain the first target image;
    获取第一模板图像,其中,所述第一模板图像包括所述区域定位特征;acquiring a first template image, wherein the first template image includes the region positioning feature;
    在确定所述第一目标图像与所述第一模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整所述测量探头和/或所述固定部的位置,以获取新的第一目标图像,直至所述新的第一目标图像与所述第一模板图像匹配;以及In the case that it is determined that the first target image does not match the first template image, adjust the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing part to acquire a new first target image until the new a first target image is matched to the first template image; and
    在确定所述第一目标图像与所述第一模板图像匹配的情况下,将与所述测量探头和/或所述固定部对应的区域确定为所述测量区域。When it is determined that the first target image matches the first template image, an area corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing portion is determined as the measurement area.
  104. 根据权利要求103所述的装置,还包括第一图像采集部,所述第一图像采集部设置于所述被测对象、所述测量探头、所述固定部或其他对象,所述第一图像采集部用于采集所述第一目标图像。The device according to claim 103, further comprising a first image acquisition part, the first image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed part or other objects, the first image The acquisition part is used for acquiring the first target image.
  105. 根据权利要求85所述的装置,其中,所述第一确定单元,用于:The apparatus according to claim 85, wherein the first determining unit is configured to:
    获取第二目标图像,其中,所述第二目标图像包括所述区域定位特征;acquiring a second target image, wherein the second target image includes the region positioning feature;
    在确定所述第二目标图像中所述区域定位特征的位置不为第一预设位置的情况下,调整所述测量探头和/或所述固定部的位置,以获取新的第二目标图像,直至所述新的第二目标图像中所述区域定位特征的位置为所述第一预设位置;以及In the case where it is determined that the position of the region positioning feature in the second target image is not the first preset position, adjust the position of the measuring probe and/or the fixing part to obtain a new second target image , until the position of the region positioning feature in the new second target image is the first preset position; and
    在确定所述新的第二目标图像中所述区域定位特征的位置为所述第一预设位置的情况下,将与所述测量探头和/或所述固定部对应的区域确定为所述测量区域。When it is determined that the position of the region positioning feature in the new second target image is the first preset position, the region corresponding to the measurement probe and/or the fixing part is determined as the first preset position Measurement area.
  106. 根据权利要求105所述的装置,还包括第二图像采集部,所述第二图像采集部设置于所述被测对象、所述测量探头、所述固定部或其他对象,所述第二图像采集部用于采集所述第二目标图像。The device according to claim 105, further comprising a second image acquisition part, the second image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed part or other objects, the second image The acquisition part is used for acquiring the second target image.
  107. 根据权利要求106所述的装置,其中,在确定所述第二图像采集部设置于所述测量探头的情况下,所述区域定位特征未设置于所述测量探头;The apparatus according to claim 106, wherein, in the case where it is determined that the second image acquisition part is provided on the measurement probe, the area positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe;
    在确定所述第二图像采集部设置于所述固定部的情况下,所述区域定位特征未设置于所述固定部。In a case where it is determined that the second image capturing part is arranged on the fixing part, the region positioning feature is not arranged on the fixing part.
  108. 根据权利要求85所述的装置,其中,所述第一调整单元,用于:The apparatus of claim 85, wherein the first adjustment unit is configured to:
    获取第二投影特征;Get the second projection feature;
    在确定所述第一姿势定位特征与所述第二投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,直至所述第一姿势定位特征与所述第二投影特征匹配;以及if it is determined that the first pose location feature does not match the second projected feature, adjusting the current measurement pose until the first pose location feature matches the second projected feature; and
    在确定所述第一姿势定位特征与所述第二投影特征匹配的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。In a case where it is determined that the first posture positioning feature matches the second projection feature, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  109. 根据权利要求109所述的装置,还包括第一姿势定位部,所述第一姿势定位部设置于所述被测对象、所述测量探头、所述固定部或其他对象,所述第一姿势定位部用于投射所述第二投影特征。The device according to claim 109, further comprising a first posture positioning part, the first posture positioning part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixing part or other objects, the first posture The positioning part is used for projecting the second projection feature.
  110. 根据权利要求109所述的装置,其中,在确定所述第一姿势定位部设置于所述测量探头的情况下,所述第一姿势定位特征未设置于所述测量探头;The apparatus according to claim 109, wherein, in the case where it is determined that the first posture locating portion is provided on the measurement probe, the first posture locating feature is not provided on the measurement probe;
    在确定所述第一姿势定位部设置于所述固定部的情况下,所述第一姿势定位特征未设置于所述固定部。When it is determined that the first posture positioning portion is provided on the fixing portion, the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the fixing portion.
  111. 根据权利要求109所述的装置,其中,所述第一姿势定位部包括第二激光器。109. The apparatus of claim 109, wherein the first posture locator comprises a second laser.
  112. 根据权利要求85所述的装置,其中,所述第一调整单元,用于:The apparatus of claim 85, wherein the first adjustment unit is configured to:
    获取第三目标图像;Get the third target image;
    获取第二模板图像,其中,所述第二模板图像包括所述第一姿势定位特征;acquiring a second template image, wherein the second template image includes the first posture positioning feature;
    在确定所述第三目标图像与所述第二模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,以获取新的第三目标图像,直至所述新的第三目标图像与所述第二模板图像匹配;以及In the case that it is determined that the third target image does not match the second template image, the current measurement posture is adjusted to obtain a new third target image, until the new third target image matches the first two-template image matching; and
    在确定所述新的第三目标图像与所述第二模板图像匹配的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。When it is determined that the new third target image matches the second template image, it is determined that the current measurement posture is the target measurement posture.
  113. 根据权利要求112所述的装置,还包括第三图像采集部,所述第三图像采集部设置于所述被测对象、所述测量探头、所述固定部或其他对象,所述第三图像采集部用于采集所述第三目标图像。The device according to claim 112, further comprising a third image acquisition part, the third image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed part or other objects, the third image acquisition part The acquisition part is used for acquiring the third target image.
  114. 根据权利要求85所述的装置,其中,所述第一调整单元,用于:The apparatus of claim 85, wherein the first adjustment unit is configured to:
    获取第四目标图像,其中,所述第四目标图像包括所述第一姿势定位特征;acquiring a fourth target image, wherein the fourth target image includes the first posture positioning feature;
    在确定所述第四目标图像中所述第一姿势定位特征的位置不在第二预设位置的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,以获取新的第四目标图像,直至所述新的第四目标图像中所述第一姿势定位特征的位置在所述第二预设位置;以及In the case where it is determined that the position of the first posture positioning feature in the fourth target image is not at the second preset position, adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new fourth target image, until the new fourth target image is The position of the first gesture positioning feature in the four-target image is at the second preset position; and
    在确定所述新的第四目标图像中所述第一姿势定位特征的位置在所述第二预设位置的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。When it is determined that the position of the first posture positioning feature in the new fourth target image is at the second preset position, the current measurement posture is determined to be the target measurement posture.
  115. 根据权利要求114所述的装置,还包括第四图像采集部,所述第四图像采集部设置于所述被测对象、所述测量探头、所述固定部或其他对象,所述第四图像采集部用于采集所述第四目标图像。The device according to claim 114, further comprising a fourth image acquisition part, the fourth image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed part or other objects, the fourth image The acquisition part is used for acquiring the fourth target image.
  116. 根据权利要求115所述的装置,其中,在确定所述第四图像采集部设置于所述测量探头的情况下,所述第一姿势定位特征未设置于所述测量探头;The apparatus according to claim 115, wherein, in the case where it is determined that the fourth image acquisition part is provided on the measurement probe, the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe;
    在确定所述第四图像采集部设置于所述固定部的情况下,所述第一姿势定位特征未设置于所述固定部。In a case where it is determined that the fourth image capturing part is provided on the fixing part, the first posture positioning feature is not provided on the fixing part.
  117. 根据权利要求85所述的装置,还包括:The apparatus of claim 85, further comprising:
    第三确定模块,用于如果所述测量探头设置于与所述测量区域对应的位置,则在所述当前测量姿势不为所述目标测量姿势的情况下,确定第二姿势定位特征;以及a third determining module, configured to determine a second posture positioning feature when the current measurement posture is not the target measurement posture if the measurement probe is set at a position corresponding to the measurement area; and
    调整模块,用于根据所述第二姿势定位特征,调整所述当前测量姿势至所述目标测量姿势。An adjustment module, configured to adjust the current measurement posture to the target measurement posture according to the second posture positioning feature.
  118. 根据权利要求117所述的装置,其中,所述调整模块,包括:The apparatus of claim 117, wherein the adjustment module comprises:
    第一获取单元,用于获取第三投影特征;a first acquiring unit, used for acquiring a third projection feature;
    第二调整单元,用于在确定所述第二姿势定位特征与所述第三投影特征不匹配的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,直至所述第二姿势定位特征与所述第三投影特征匹配;以及a second adjustment unit, configured to adjust the current measurement posture when it is determined that the second posture locating feature does not match the third projection feature until the second posture locating feature matches the third projection feature matching; and
    第二确定单元,用于在确定所述第二姿势定位特征与所述第三投影特征匹配的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。A second determining unit, configured to determine the current measurement posture as the target measurement posture when it is determined that the second posture positioning feature matches the third projection feature.
  119. 根据权利要求118所述的装置,还包括第二姿势定位部,所述第二姿势定位部设置于所述被测对象、所述测量探头、所述固定部或其他对象,所述第二姿势定位部用于投射所述第三投影特征。The device according to claim 118, further comprising a second posture positioning part, the second posture positioning part is provided on the measured object, the measuring probe, the fixing part or other objects, the second posture The positioning part is used for projecting the third projection feature.
  120. 根据权利要求119所述的装置,其中,在确定所述第二姿势定位部设置于所述测量探头的情况下,所述第二姿势定位特征未设置于所述测量探头和所述固定部;The apparatus of claim 119, wherein, in a case where it is determined that the second posture positioning portion is provided on the measurement probe, the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe and the fixing portion;
    在确定所述第二姿势定位部设置于所述固定部的情况下,所述第二姿势定位特征未设置于所述测量探头和所述固定部。When it is determined that the second posture positioning portion is provided on the fixing portion, the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measuring probe and the fixing portion.
  121. 根据权利要求120所述的装置,其中,所述第二姿势定位部包括第三激光器。120. The apparatus of claim 120, wherein the second posture locator comprises a third laser.
  122. 根据权利要求117所述的装置,其中,所述调整模块,包括:The apparatus of claim 117, wherein the adjustment module comprises:
    第二获取单元,用于获取第五目标图像;a second acquisition unit, used for acquiring the fifth target image;
    第三获取单元,用于获取第三模板图像,其中,所述第三模板图像包括所述第二姿势定位特征;a third acquiring unit, configured to acquire a third template image, wherein the third template image includes the second posture positioning feature;
    第三调整单元,用于在确定所述第五目标图像与所述第三模板图像不匹配的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,以获取新的第五目标图像,直至所述新的第五目标图像与所述第三模板图像匹配;以及a third adjustment unit, configured to adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new fifth target image when it is determined that the fifth target image does not match the third template image, until the new Five target images are matched with the third template image; and
    第三确定单元,用于在确定所述新的第五目标图像与所述第三模板图像匹配的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。A third determining unit, configured to determine the current measurement posture as the target measurement posture when it is determined that the new fifth target image matches the third template image.
  123. 根据权利要求122所述的装置,还包括第五图像采集部,所述第五图像采集部设置于所述被测对象、所述测量探头、所述固定部或其他对象,所述第五图像采集部用于采集所述第五目标图像。The device according to claim 122, further comprising a fifth image acquisition part, the fifth image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed part or other objects, the fifth image The acquisition part is used for acquiring the fifth target image.
  124. 根据权利要求117所述的装置,其中,The apparatus of claim 117, wherein,
    所述调整模块,包括:The adjustment module includes:
    第四获取单元,用于获取第六目标图像,其中,所述第六目标图像包括所述第二姿势定位特征;a fourth acquisition unit, configured to acquire a sixth target image, wherein the sixth target image includes the second posture positioning feature;
    第四调整单元,用于在确定所述第六目标图像中所述第二姿势定位特征的位置不在第三预设位置的情况下,调整所述当前测量姿势,以获取新的第六目标图像,直至所述新的第六目标图像中所述第二姿势定位特征的位置在所述第三预设位置;以及a fourth adjustment unit, configured to adjust the current measurement posture to obtain a new sixth target image when it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the sixth target image is not at the third preset position , until the position of the second gesture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is at the third preset position; and
    第四确定单元,用于在确定所述新的第六目标图像中所述第二姿势定位特征的位置在所述第三预设位置的情况下,确定所述当前测量姿势为所述目标测量姿势。a fourth determining unit, configured to determine that the current measurement posture is the target measurement when it is determined that the position of the second posture positioning feature in the new sixth target image is at the third preset position posture.
  125. 根据权利要求124所述的装置,还包括第六图像采集部,所述第六图像采集部设置于所述被测对象、所述测量探头、所述固定部或其他对象,所述第六图像采集部用于采集所述第六目标图像。The device according to claim 124, further comprising a sixth image acquisition part, the sixth image acquisition part is arranged on the measured object, the measurement probe, the fixed part or other objects, the sixth image The acquisition part is used for acquiring the sixth target image.
  126. 根据权利要求125所述的装置,其中,在确定所述第六图像采集部设置于所述测量探头的情况下,所述第二姿势定位特征未设置于所述测量探头和所述固定部;The apparatus according to claim 125, wherein, in the case where it is determined that the sixth image acquisition part is provided on the measurement probe, the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measurement probe and the fixing part;
    在确定所述第六图像采集部设置于所述固定部的情况下,所述第二姿势定位特征未设置于所述测量探头和所述固定部。In a case where it is determined that the sixth image capturing part is provided on the fixing part, the second posture positioning feature is not provided on the measuring probe and the fixing part.
  127. 根据权利要求117所述的装置,还包括:The apparatus of claim 117, further comprising:
    提示模块,用于生成提示信息,其中,所述提示信息用于提示测量姿势定位和/或测量区域定位完成,所述提示信息的形式包括图像、语音或震动中的至少一种。The prompting module is configured to generate prompting information, wherein the prompting information is used to prompt the completion of the measurement posture positioning and/or the measurement area positioning, and the prompting information includes at least one of image, voice or vibration.
  128. 根据权利要求76所述的装置,其中,所述M个感光面中存在与所述预设波长对应的一个或多个同类感光面,其中,所述同类感光面用于在不同时刻采集与所述预设波长对应 的第一输出光强和/或第二输出光强,其中,所述第一输出光强为收缩期光强,所述第二输出光强为舒张期光强,所述同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面;The device according to claim 76, wherein there are one or more photosensitive surfaces of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelengths in the M photosensitive surfaces, wherein the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are used to collect and The first output light intensity and/or the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the first output light intensity is the systolic light intensity, the second output light intensity is the diastolic light intensity, and the Similar photosensitive surfaces include one or more of said photosensitive surfaces;
    所述处理模块,用于根据与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度。The processing module is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  129. 根据权利要求76所述的装置,其中,所述M个感光面中存在与所述预设波长对应的第一同类感光面和第二同类感光面,其中,所述第一同类感光面用于采集与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强,所述第二同类感光面用于采集与所述预设波长对应的第二输出光强,所述第一同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面,所述第二同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面;The device according to claim 76, wherein the M photosensitive surfaces have a first photosensitive surface of the same type and a second photosensitive surface of the same type corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the first photosensitive surface of the same type is used for The first output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength is collected, the second similar photosensitive surface is used to collect the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength, and the first similar photosensitive surface includes one or more each of the photosensitive surfaces, the second photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one or more of the photosensitive surfaces;
    所述处理模块,用于根据与所述预设波长对应的第一输出光强和第二输出光强,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度。The processing module is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the first output light intensity and the second output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  130. 根据权利要求129所述的装置,其中,所述第一同类感光面和所述第二同类感光面是相同的同类感光面,所述第一同类感光面和所述第二同类感光面接收到的出射光是所述入射光从不同入射位置入射经传输得到的。129. The device of claim 129, wherein the first homogeneous photosensitive surface and the second homogeneous photosensitive surface are the same homogeneous photosensitive surface, and the first homogeneous photosensitive surface and the second homogeneous photosensitive surface receive The outgoing light is obtained by transmitting the incident light from different incident positions.
  131. 根据权利要求129所述的装置,其中,所述第一同类感光面和所述第二同类感光面是不同的同类感光面。129. The device of claim 129, wherein the first homogeneous photosensitive surface and the second homogeneous photosensitive surface are different homogeneous photosensitive surfaces.
  132. 根据权利要求129所述的装置,其中,所述第一同类感光面中每个所述感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第一平均光程范围,其中,所述第一平均光程范围是根据第一光程平均值确定的,所述第一光程平均值是根据所述第一同类感光面的各个所述感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值;The device according to claim 129, wherein the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each of the photosensitive surfaces of the first same type of photosensitive surfaces belongs to a first average optical length range, wherein the The first average optical path range is determined according to the first optical path average value, and the first optical path average value is calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each of the photosensitive positions of the first similar photosensitive surfaces the average obtained;
    所述第二同类感光面中每个所述感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程属于第二平均光程范围,其中,所述第二平均光程范围是根据第二光程平均值确定的,其中,所述第二光程平均值是根据所述第二同类感光面的各个所述感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程计算得到的平均值。The average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each of the photosensitive surfaces of the second same type belongs to the second average optical path range, wherein the second average optical path range is based on the second light path. The second optical path average value is an average value calculated according to the average optical path length of the outgoing light received by each of the photosensitive positions of the second photosensitive surface of the same type.
  133. 根据权利要求132所述的装置,其中,所述第一光程平均值与所述第二光程平均值的差值的绝对值属于第一光程差范围。132. The apparatus of claim 132, wherein the absolute value of the difference between the first optical path average value and the second optical path average value belongs to a first optical path difference range.
  134. 根据权利要求133所述的装置,其中,所述第一平均光程范围小于或等于所述第一光程差范围,所述第二平均光程范围小于或等于所述第一光程差范围。133. The device of claim 133, wherein the first average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range and the second average optical path range is less than or equal to the first optical path difference range .
  135. 根据权利要求133所述的装置,其中,所述第一光程差范围是根据与所述预设波长对应的最佳差分光程确定的。The apparatus of claim 133, wherein the first optical path difference range is determined according to an optimal differential optical path corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  136. 根据权利要求129所述的装置,其中,与所述预设波长对应的第一同类感光面中每个所述感光面距所述入射光的中心的源探距离在与所述预设波长对应的预设源探距离范围内,其中,所述预设源探距离范围是根据与所述预设波长对应的浮动基准位置距所述入射光的中心的源探距离确定的。The device according to claim 129, wherein a source-detection distance of each of the photosensitive surfaces of the first same type of photosensitive surfaces corresponding to the preset wavelength from the center of the incident light is at a distance corresponding to the preset wavelength. The preset source detection distance range is determined according to the source detection distance between the floating reference position corresponding to the preset wavelength and the center of the incident light.
  137. 根据权利要求76所述的装置,其中,所述M个感光面存在与所述预设波长对应的同类感光面,其中,所述同类感光面用于采集与所述预设波长对应的第三输出光强,所述同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面;The device according to claim 76, wherein the M photosensitive surfaces have a same type of photosensitive surface corresponding to the preset wavelength, wherein the same type of photosensitive surface is used to collect a third photosensitive surface corresponding to the preset wavelength output light intensity, the same photosensitive surface includes one or more photosensitive surfaces;
    所述处理模块,用于根据与所述预设波长对应的第三输出光强,确定所述被测组织成分的浓度。The processing module is configured to determine the concentration of the measured tissue component according to the third output light intensity corresponding to the preset wavelength.
  138. 根据权利要求137所述的装置,其中,所述同类感光面中每个所述感光面的不同感光位置接收到的出射光的平均光程和与所述预设波长对应的最佳光程的差值属于第二光程差范围。The device according to claim 137, wherein the difference between the average optical length of the outgoing light received by different photosensitive positions of each of the photosensitive surfaces of the same type of photosensitive surfaces and the optimal optical length corresponding to the preset wavelength The difference value belongs to the second optical path difference range.
  139. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,每个所述感光面包括环形感光面或非环形感光面,不同所述感光面的形状相同或不同。The device of claim 76 or 77, wherein each of the photosensitive surfaces comprises an annular photosensitive surface or a non-annular photosensitive surface, and the shapes of the different photosensitive surfaces are the same or different.
  140. 根据权利要求139所述的装置,其中,所述非环形感光面包括扇环感光面、圆形感光面、扇形感光面、椭圆形感光面或多边形感光面。139. The device of claim 139, wherein the non-annular photosensitive surface comprises a fan ring photosensitive surface, a circular photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, an elliptical photosensitive surface, or a polygonal photosensitive surface.
  141. 根据权利要求140所述的装置,其中,所述多边形感光面包括正方形感光面、长方形感光面或三角形感光面。The device of claim 140, wherein the polygonal photosensitive surface comprises a square photosensitive surface, a rectangular photosensitive surface, or a triangular photosensitive surface.
  142. 根据权利要求139所述的装置,其中,所述同类感光面包括所述环形感光面或所述非环形感光面,其中,所述同类感光面包括一个或多个所述感光面,所述同类感光面用于输出一个所述输出光强。139. The device of claim 139, wherein the homogeneous photosensitive surface comprises the annular photosensitive surface or the non-annular photosensitive surface, wherein the homogeneous photosensitive surface comprises one or more of the photosensitive surfaces, the homogeneous photosensitive surface The photosensitive surface is used to output one of the output light intensity.
  143. 根据权利要求142所述的装置,其中,所述同类感光面为所述环形感光面,包括:The device of claim 142, wherein the photosensitive surface of the same type is the annular photosensitive surface, comprising:
    在所述同类感光面包括一个所述感光面的情况下,所述同类感光面为独立环形感光面;In the case that the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one photosensitive surface, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are independent annular photosensitive surfaces;
    在所述同类感光面包括多个所述感光面的情况下,所述同类感光面是根据所述多个感光面组合形成的环形感光面;When the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include a plurality of the photosensitive surfaces, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are annular photosensitive surfaces formed according to the combination of the plurality of photosensitive surfaces;
    所述同类感光面为所述非环形感光面,包括:The same type of photosensitive surface is the non-annular photosensitive surface, including:
    在所述同类感光面包括一个所述感光面的情况下,所述同类感光面为独立非环形感光面;In the case that the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include one photosensitive surface, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are independent non-annular photosensitive surfaces;
    在所述同类感光面包括多个所述感光面的情况下,所述同类感光面是根据所述多个感光面组合形成的非环形感光面。In the case where the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include a plurality of the photosensitive surfaces, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type are non-annular photosensitive surfaces formed by combining the plurality of photosensitive surfaces.
  144. 根据权利要求143所述的装置,其中,在确定所述同类感光面距目标部位的距离大于或等于第二距离阈值的情况下,所述同类感光面包括环形感光面、扇环感光面、扇形感光面、圆形感光面或正方形感光面。The device according to claim 143, wherein, when it is determined that the distance between the photosensitive surfaces of the same type from the target site is greater than or equal to the second distance threshold, the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include a ring photosensitive surface, a fan ring photosensitive surface, a fan-shaped photosensitive surface, and a fan-shaped photosensitive surface. Photosensitive surface, round photosensitive surface or square photosensitive surface.
  145. 根据权利要求143所述的装置,其中,在确定所述同类感光面距所述目标部位的距离小于或等于第三距离阈值的情况下,所述同类感光面的形状是根据所述出射光的抖动分布确定的。The device according to claim 143, wherein in the case that the distance between the same type of photosensitive surface and the target site is determined to be less than or equal to a third distance threshold, the shape of the same type of photosensitive surface is based on the emitted light Jitter distribution is determined.
  146. 根据权利要求145所述的装置,其中,所述出射光的抖动分布包括分解为沿第一方向上的抖动分布和沿第二方向上的抖动分布,所述第一方向和所述第二方向相互垂直,所述同类感光面沿所述第一方向上的长度与所述同类感光面沿所述第二方向上的长度的比值是根据所述出射光沿第一方向上的抖动幅度与所述出射光沿第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的,所述出射光沿所述第一方向上的抖动幅度最大。145. The apparatus of claim 145, wherein the jitter distribution of the outgoing light comprises a decomposition into a jitter distribution in a first direction and a jitter distribution in a second direction, the first direction and the second direction Perpendicular to each other, the ratio of the length of the same type of photosensitive surface along the first direction to the length of the same type of photosensitive surface along the second direction is based on the jitter amplitude of the emitted light along the first direction and the Determined by the ratio of the shaking amplitudes of the outgoing light along the second direction, the shaking amplitude of the outgoing light along the first direction is the largest.
  147. 根据权利要求146所述的装置,其中,所述同类感光面包括长方形感光面或椭圆形感光面,所述长方形感光面的长度与宽度的比值是根据所述出射光沿所述第一方向上的抖动幅度与所述出射光沿所述第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的,所述椭圆形感光面的长轴与短轴的比值是根据所述出射光沿所述第一方向上的抖动幅度与所述出射光沿所述第二方向上的抖动幅度的比值确定的。146. The device of claim 146, wherein the photosensitive surfaces of the same type include a rectangular photosensitive surface or an elliptical photosensitive surface, and the ratio of the length to the width of the rectangular photosensitive surface is determined according to the emitted light along the first direction Determined by the ratio of the jitter amplitude to the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light along the second direction, and the ratio of the long axis to the short axis of the elliptical photosensitive surface is based on the outgoing light along the first direction is determined by the ratio of the jitter amplitude to the jitter amplitude of the outgoing light along the second direction.
  148. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,所述M个感光面中不同感光面的阳极彼此未电连接、部分感光面的阳极电连接或全部感光面的阳极电连接。The device according to claim 76 or 77, wherein the anodes of different photosensitive surfaces in the M photosensitive surfaces are not electrically connected to each other, the anodes of some of the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected, or the anodes of all the photosensitive surfaces are electrically connected.
  149. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,同一感光面的不同部分在同一平面或不同平面。An apparatus according to claim 76 or 77, wherein different parts of the same photosensitive surface are in the same plane or in different planes.
  150. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,感光面集在同一平面或不同平面,其中,所述感光面集包括多个感光面。76 or 77, wherein the set of photosensitive surfaces are in the same plane or in different planes, wherein the set of photosensitive surfaces includes a plurality of photosensitive surfaces.
  151. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,所述预设波长为对所述被测组织成分敏感的波长。77. The apparatus of claim 76 or 77, wherein the preset wavelength is a wavelength sensitive to the measured tissue component.
  152. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,还包括温度控制模块;The apparatus of claim 76 or 77, further comprising a temperature control module;
    所述温度控制模块用于控制所述测量区域的温度在组织成分测量过程中保持在预设温度范围内。The temperature control module is used to control the temperature of the measurement region to remain within a preset temperature range during tissue composition measurement.
  153. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,还包括掩膜板,所述掩膜板设置于初始感光面上,其中,所述掩膜板的透光率小于或等于透光率阈值;The device according to claim 76 or 77, further comprising a mask plate, the mask plate is arranged on the initial photosensitive surface, wherein the light transmittance of the mask plate is less than or equal to a light transmittance threshold;
    所述掩膜板,用于在所述初始感光面上设置所述掩膜板后得到所述感光面。The mask plate is used to obtain the photosensitive surface after disposing the mask plate on the initial photosensitive surface.
  154. 根据权利要求153所述的装置,其中,所述掩膜板的形状是根据出射光的抖动分布形状确定的。The apparatus of claim 153, wherein the shape of the mask is determined according to the shape of the jitter distribution of the outgoing light.
  155. 根据权利要求83所述的装置,其中,所述测量探头上设置有第一套筒;The device of claim 83, wherein a first sleeve is provided on the measurement probe;
    所述第一套筒的第一端面超出所述测量探头的目标表面,其中,所述第一端面表示与所述测量区域接近的端面,所述测量探头的目标表面表示与所述测量区域接近的表面。The first end face of the first sleeve extends beyond the target surface of the measurement probe, wherein the first end face represents the end face close to the measurement area, and the target surface of the measurement probe represents the proximity to the measurement area s surface.
  156. 根据权利要求155所述的装置,其中,所述第一套筒的第二端面和/或内部的区域设置散射物,其中,所述第一端面和所述第二端面为相对的两个端面,所述内部的区域包括所述内部的部分区域或所述内部的全部区域。The device according to claim 155, wherein the second end surface and/or the inner area of the first sleeve are provided with scattering objects, wherein the first end surface and the second end surface are opposite end surfaces , the inner area includes part of the inner area or the entire inner area.
  157. 根据权利要求155或156所述的装置,还包括第二套筒,所述第二套筒设置于所述第一套筒的目标区域的外部,其中,所述目标区域表示所述第一套筒超出所述测量探头的目标表面的部分区域或全部区域。The device of claim 155 or 156, further comprising a second sleeve disposed outside a target area of the first sleeve, wherein the target area represents the first set The barrel extends over part or all of the target surface of the measurement probe.
  158. 根据权利要求157所述的装置,其中,所述第二套筒设置有所述散射物。157. The device of claim 157, wherein the second sleeve is provided with the diffuser.
  159. 根据权利要求155所述的装置,其中,所述第一套筒的内径大于或等于内径阈值。156. The device of claim 155, wherein the inner diameter of the first sleeve is greater than or equal to an inner diameter threshold.
  160. 根据权利要求155所述的装置,其中,所述第一套筒的第一端面的开孔大于或等于所述第一套筒的第二端面的开孔。156. The device of claim 155, wherein the opening in the first end face of the first sleeve is greater than or equal to the opening in the second end face of the first sleeve.
  161. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,所述感光面和所述测量区域之间填充有折射率匹配物。The device of claim 76 or 77, wherein a refractive index matcher is filled between the photosensitive surface and the measurement area.
  162. 根据权利要求76或77所述的装置,其中,还包括保护部;The device of claim 76 or 77, further comprising a protective portion;
    所述保护部,设置于所述感光面的目标表面,用于保护所述感光面,其中,所述感光面的目标表面表示与所述测量区域接近的表面。The protection part is disposed on the target surface of the photosensitive surface, and is used to protect the photosensitive surface, wherein the target surface of the photosensitive surface represents a surface close to the measurement area.
  163. 一种可穿戴设备,包括权利要求76~162中任一项所述的组织成分测量装置。A wearable device, comprising the tissue composition measurement device of any one of claims 76-162.
  164. 根据权利要求163所述的可穿戴设备,其中,所述可穿戴设备的质量小于或等于质量阈值,以实现所述可穿戴设备的移动规律与测量区域处的皮肤抖动规律保持一致。The wearable device according to claim 163, wherein the quality of the wearable device is less than or equal to a quality threshold, so that the movement law of the wearable device is consistent with the skin shaking law at the measurement area.
  165. 根据权利要求163所述的可穿戴设备,其中,所述可穿戴设备使得所述测量区域处的皮肤的移动幅度小于或等于移动幅度阈值。163. The wearable device of claim 163, wherein the wearable device causes the skin at the measurement area to have a movement magnitude less than or equal to a movement magnitude threshold.
PCT/CN2021/143795 2021-02-11 2021-12-31 Tissue element measurement method and apparatus, and wearable device WO2022170887A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/264,990 US20240225450A9 (en) 2021-02-11 2021-12-31 Method of measuring tissue element, device of measuring tissue element, and wearable apparatus
JP2023548655A JP2024513638A (en) 2021-02-11 2021-12-31 Tissue component measurement method, device and wearable device
KR1020237030778A KR20230147119A (en) 2021-02-11 2021-12-31 Tissue composition measurement methods, devices, and wearable devices
EP21925532.0A EP4292532A1 (en) 2021-02-11 2021-12-31 Tissue element measurement method and apparatus, and wearable device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110185768.0A CN114468993B (en) 2021-02-11 2021-02-11 Tissue component measuring method and device and wearable equipment
CN202110185768.0 2021-02-11

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022170887A1 true WO2022170887A1 (en) 2022-08-18

Family

ID=81491642

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/143795 WO2022170887A1 (en) 2021-02-11 2021-12-31 Tissue element measurement method and apparatus, and wearable device

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (1) US20240225450A9 (en)
EP (1) EP4292532A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2024513638A (en)
KR (1) KR20230147119A (en)
CN (1) CN114468993B (en)
WO (1) WO2022170887A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2357844A (en) * 1997-03-07 2001-07-04 Optel Instr Ltd Normalising a photoacoustic signal in a biological measurement system
US20090312615A1 (en) * 2005-11-10 2009-12-17 Andreas Caduff Device for Determining the Glucose Level in Body Tissue
US20160242682A1 (en) * 2012-07-16 2016-08-25 Sandeep Gulati Noninvasive analyzer apparatus and method of use thereof for separating distributed probing photons emerging from a sample
US20160249836A1 (en) * 2012-07-16 2016-09-01 Sandeep Gulati Sample optical pathlength control using a noninvasive analyzer apparatus and method of use thereof
WO2020119825A1 (en) * 2018-12-14 2020-06-18 天津先阳科技发展有限公司 Noninvasive detection method, apparatus and system for tissue constituent, and wearable device

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7333186B2 (en) * 2004-03-17 2008-02-19 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Method and device for measuring biological information
EP3170446A1 (en) * 2015-11-20 2017-05-24 NIRLUS Engineering AG Method and device for the non-invasive optical in-vivo determination of glucose concentration in flowing blood
US12089928B2 (en) * 2017-05-18 2024-09-17 Wear2B Ltd. Device, system and method for non-invasive monitoring of physiological measurements
CN108814620A (en) * 2018-05-30 2018-11-16 清华大学 Flexible physiological information monitoring device
US11158757B2 (en) * 2018-11-27 2021-10-26 Epistar Corporation Optical sensing device and optical sensing system thereof comprising a light receiving device capable of receiving a first received wavelength having a largest external quantum efficiency

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2357844A (en) * 1997-03-07 2001-07-04 Optel Instr Ltd Normalising a photoacoustic signal in a biological measurement system
US20090312615A1 (en) * 2005-11-10 2009-12-17 Andreas Caduff Device for Determining the Glucose Level in Body Tissue
US20160242682A1 (en) * 2012-07-16 2016-08-25 Sandeep Gulati Noninvasive analyzer apparatus and method of use thereof for separating distributed probing photons emerging from a sample
US20160249836A1 (en) * 2012-07-16 2016-09-01 Sandeep Gulati Sample optical pathlength control using a noninvasive analyzer apparatus and method of use thereof
WO2020119825A1 (en) * 2018-12-14 2020-06-18 天津先阳科技发展有限公司 Noninvasive detection method, apparatus and system for tissue constituent, and wearable device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20230147119A (en) 2023-10-20
CN114468993B (en) 2023-03-10
US20240130620A1 (en) 2024-04-25
CN114468993A (en) 2022-05-13
US20240225450A9 (en) 2024-07-11
JP2024513638A (en) 2024-03-27
EP4292532A1 (en) 2023-12-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022170887A1 (en) Tissue element measurement method and apparatus, and wearable device
WO2022170884A1 (en) Tissue composition measurement method and apparatus, and wearable device
WO2022170886A1 (en) Method and apparatus for measuring tissue composition, and wearable device
WO2022170882A1 (en) Method and apparatus for suppressing influence of shaking, and wearable device
RU2826213C1 (en) Method of measuring glucose in blood, device for measuring glucose in blood and portable device for measuring glucose in blood
WO2022170881A1 (en) Tissue component measurement method and apparatus, and wearable device
WO2022170880A1 (en) Method and apparatus for testing living tissue component, and wearable device
RU2826894C2 (en) Method and device for measuring tissue composition and wearable device
CN114916908A (en) Tissue component measuring method and device based on Raman spectrum and wearable equipment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21925532

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 18264990

Country of ref document: US

Ref document number: 2023548655

Country of ref document: JP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20237030778

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020237030778

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2021925532

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021925532

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230911